Lucent Technologies Server 555 233 115 User Manual

DEFINITY®  
Enterprise Communications Server  
Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r  
555-233-115  
Comcode 108678335  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Contents  
iii  
Contents  
Contents  
About This Book  
xv  
Offer Categories  
xv  
Security Issues  
xvi  
xvi  
xvi  
xvii  
xviii  
xix  
xix  
xx  
Antistatic Protection  
Remove/Install Circuit Packs  
Upgrade Paths  
Conventions Used in This Book  
Related Books  
How to Order Books  
How to Comment on This Book  
Where to Call for Technical Support  
Trademarks  
xx  
xxi  
xxii  
xxiii  
xxiii  
xxv  
Standards Compliance  
LASER Product  
Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards  
Federal Communications Commission Statement  
1
2
Adding Memory  
1-1  
1-2  
1-4  
1-6  
Read This First  
Task Tables  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
without Adding Memory  
2-1  
2-2  
2-5  
2-7  
Read This First  
Task Tables  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
3
and Adding Memory  
3-1  
Read This First  
3-2  
Task Tables  
3-6  
Preliminary Procedures  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures  
3-8  
3-10  
3-56  
4
Processor to R8r  
4-1  
Read This First  
4-2  
Task Tables  
4-4  
Preliminary Procedures  
Remove the Present System  
Install the Release 8r Cabinets  
Upgrade Completion  
4-6  
4-7  
4-11  
4-16  
4-19  
DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures  
5
to R8r EPN  
5-1  
Single-Mode Fiber Attenuators  
Read This First  
5-1  
5-2  
Task Tables  
5-10  
5-15  
Standard Reliability  
6
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Single-Mode Fiber Attenuators  
Add Circuit Packs  
6-1  
6-1  
6-2  
List of Circuit Packs  
6-3  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6-8  
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System  
Add External Modem to EPN  
6-22  
6-34  
6-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
April 2000  
Contents  
Add DCS Interface  
6-42  
6-45  
6-79  
6-80  
6-94  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
Add TTC Japanese 2Mbit Trunks  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability) 6-108  
Installing an Integrated Channel  
A
B
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
New for Release 8  
B-1  
B-2  
C
Using the ASG Mobile  
C-2  
GL Glossary and Abbreviations  
IN Index  
GL-1  
IN-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Contents  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
What’s New in Release 8.2r  
vii  
What’s New in Release 8.2r  
This is a short list of what changed from Release 7r. For more detailed  
information, refer to DEFINITY ECS Release 8 What’s New in Release 8. The  
categories addressed are as follows:  
Features  
Hardware  
Tools  
Procedures  
Upgrade tips  
Cautions and warnings  
Product names  
Features  
This list provides categorized features available with Release 8.2. For full  
descriptions, see DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8, Issue  
1.0 Change Description.  
Phone features  
Networking — ISDN Public  
ATM circuit emulation service (CES)  
Feature plus — non-DID calling via UDP  
Restricted Presentation  
64 bridged call appearances  
Abort transfer  
Automatic exclusion  
Circular station hunting  
Multiple pubnet calling/connect  
numbers/system  
Coverage of calls redirected off-net  
Pass advice of charge to BRI (basic rate  
interface) endpoints  
Group call pick-up  
BellCore calling name ID  
Long hold recall - warning  
Networking — QSIG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
What’s New in Release 8.2r  
viii  
Reset shift call  
Call-independent signaling connection (CISC)  
enhancements  
Station self display  
Call Center  
VALU distinctive alerting  
VALU call coverage  
Advocate related enhancements  
Transfer to Audix  
ASAI/computer telephony integration (CTI)  
enhancements  
Coverage interaction support  
Increased Call Center capacities (G3r)  
Site stats for ATM connected remote EPNs  
CMS measurement of ATM trunks  
CALLMASTER V (CC 6416D+) native support  
PASTE update  
CAS Attendant display of COR  
CAS Attendant return call  
CAS Display enhancements  
CAS Priority queue  
CAS RLT emulation via PRI  
Green to Standard  
CentreVu computer Telephony on MAPD  
DEFINITY Wireless Business Systems  
(DWBS)  
13-digit authorization codes (red to std)  
X-station mobility  
Networking — Other  
IP Solutions  
Hospitality  
Auto digit rotation for direct inward dial  
Interworking with bandwidth constricted ATM  
networks  
Crisis alert to pager  
ATM - Hybrid reliability  
System availability/serviceability  
Optical drive  
Suite check-in via the hunt-to feature  
International  
Administrable loss plan  
Restart notification  
Brazil and Hungary — E&M signaling  
China — special dial tone  
Reliability options  
C-LAN serviceability tools  
Terminal support  
China — time supervision & forced release  
Japan — Support for Japan National Private  
Networking  
IDS (6200) family of analog terminals native  
support  
Japan — Transfer Call Back  
Brazil and Hungary — E&M signaling  
Security  
6400 tip/ring module  
Fast analog modem support  
Platform  
DADMIN login  
24-port analog line (TN793/TN2793B) with  
Caller ID  
Analog trunk & line board (TN797) without  
busy tone detection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
What’s New in Release 8.2r  
ix  
Hardware  
Minimum required hardware  
You need the following minimum required hardware to upgrade to Release 8.2r  
software.  
Code  
Equipment  
Comcode  
Notes  
Basic processor carrier  
J58890AP-  
Contains the following circuit packs:  
TN573B SNI  
TN780 tone clock  
TN1648B SYSAM  
TN1650B memory  
TN1655 packet interface  
TN1657 disk drive  
TN2211 optical drive  
UN330B duplicate interface (opt.)  
UN331B processor  
UN332C MSSNet  
Duplex processor carrier  
J58890AP-  
Contains the following circuit packs:  
TN573B SNI  
TN780 tone clock  
TN1648B SYSAM  
TN1650B memory  
TN1655 packet interface  
TN1657 disk drive  
TN2211 optical drive  
UN330B duplicate interface  
UN331B processor  
UN332C MSSNet  
Power unit  
WP-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
What’s New in Release 8.2r  
x
R8.2r hardware  
The following upgrade equipment is new to Release 8.2r.  
Code  
Equipment  
Comcode  
Notes  
Optical drive  
TN2211  
107849754  
If duplicated system,  
you need 2  
MSSNet  
UN332C  
108566381  
If duplicated system,  
you need 2  
Formatted removable media  
with R8.2 software  
J58890TO-1  
If duplicated system,  
you need 2  
Additional hardware available  
The following equipment is port slot hardware introduced with Release 8.2r.  
Code  
Equipment  
Comcode  
Notes  
DS1 interface  
TN2313  
Cost reduction, no new features  
108382607  
Analog line  
TN793  
24-port analog line with CID  
103557468  
Analog trunk/line combo  
Control-LAN (C-LAN)  
IP interface assembly  
TN797  
103557500  
Combines an analog trunk and line into one  
circuit pack.  
TN799B  
108525528  
Updates TN799; enables trace route  
command  
TN802B  
108517996  
Updates TN802; expansion of IP trunk;  
introduces two modes: Media Processor  
Mode and IP Trunk Mode  
Discontinued hardware  
The following equipment was discontinued with Release 8.2si.  
Equipment  
Notes  
TN1656 tape drive  
UN332/B MSSNet  
Replaced with the TN2211 optical drive  
The TN2211 optical drive requires the UN332C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
What’s New in Release 8.2r  
xi  
Tools  
No new tools became available with Release 8.2r.  
Commands, screens, and fields  
No new commands and screens became available or were affected by Release  
8.2r.  
Procedures  
The following procedures and steps changed or were added because of  
problems identified in the laboratory or during early introduction.  
Many of the upgrade procedures were reordered and the steps within the  
procedure better defined. Check the task tables at the beginning of each  
upgrade chapter for the current order.  
Also, to reduce redundancy in the book, there is no longer a separate upgrade  
process for high or critical reliability. The procedures and steps that apply to high  
or critical reliability are noted where they occur in the upgrade process.  
Procedure  
Notes  
Check SPE  
1. Type status spe and press Becomes first step of  
Enter to check the health of  
the SPE.  
upgrade procedure  
Install the Circuit  
Packs  
1. Insert the TN1650B  
memory circuit pack in  
memory slot 3.  
Adding memory to the  
standby SPE causes an error  
because the memory number  
between the standby and  
active carriers does not  
match.  
This requires an additional  
power down of the carrier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
What’s New in Release 8.2r  
xii  
Procedure  
Steps  
Notes  
Verify Interchange  
(H/C only)  
After the circuit packs have  
been replaced in the first  
carrier:  
Because of the memory  
mismatch between the  
standby and active SPEs,  
typing the status spe  
command yields two different  
scenarios.  
1. Type status spe and press  
Enter:  
The Standby  
Refreshedfield shows  
no  
The Standby  
Shadowingfield shows  
off  
The Standby  
Handshakefield shows  
up  
After the circuit packs have  
been replaced in the second  
carrier:  
1. Type status spe and press  
Enter to make sure the  
active side is ready for  
interchange. When it is  
ready,  
The Standby  
Refreshedfield shows  
yes  
The Standby  
Shadowingfield shows  
on  
The Standby  
Handshakefield shows  
up  
Both SPEs show  
functional  
Upgrade other carrier  
(H/C only)  
To upgrade the other carrier,  
lock the SPE switches on the  
DUPINT to the other carrier.  
The new active carrier resets  
(cold 2 restart). Wait until the  
login prompt appears then  
log in.  
Upgrade Software  
This command copies the  
software from the removable  
media to the system disk and  
takes about 15 minutes to  
complete.  
All calls are dropped—this is  
a service interruption  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
What’s New in Release 8.2r  
xiii  
Upgrade tips  
The following upgrade tips were generated from problems identified in the  
laboratory or during early introduction.  
Adding a third memory circuit pack and an optical drive requires a second  
non-call-preserving service interruption. See Chapter 1, ‘‘Upgrading  
G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory’’.  
looks different than the ones currently installed. The enhanced carriers  
come with 16 grounding straps that connect to the carrier connector  
panel. See ‘‘Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)’’ on page 6-80, ‘‘Add  
a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)’’ on page 6-94, and ‘‘Add a  
Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)’’ on page 6-108.  
NOTE:  
An enhanced carrier is used only in an R8r PPN cabinet that uses  
either AC power (U.S.) or Global power.  
Cautions and warnings  
The following new cautions and warnings were generated from problems  
affecting possible data loss that were identified in the laboratory or during early  
Procedure  
Caution or Warning  
Unlock the Active SPE  
(H/C only)  
!
CAUTION:  
Allow 10 minutes after unlocking to make sure the standby  
SPE has fully returned to service.  
Upgrade Software  
!
CAUTION:  
All calls are dropped—this is a service interruption  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
What’s New in Release 8.2r  
xiv  
Product names  
The following products have been renamed.  
Product name  
Old name  
Note  
Removable media  
tape  
Optical drive does not use tapes.  
We chose a name that is generic to  
whatever media is used in the  
future.  
IP interface  
assembly (TN802B)  
IP trunk (TN802)  
TN802B adds MedPro mode; not  
just IP trunk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
Offer Categories  
xv  
About This Book  
This book is intended for use by trained installation technicians and provides  
procedures for upgrading existing systems to a DEFINITY® Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8.2. This book is intended to cover software and  
hardware upgrades and additions to existing systems only.  
Other hardware installation procedures are in DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets.  
To add adjuncts and peripheral devices, refer to DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 7 Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals.  
Offer Categories  
Features are limited depending on the category purchased by the customer.  
Offer Category A allows access to all DEFINITY features. Offer Category B allows  
access to a subset of DEFINITY features. Contact your Lucent Technologies  
representative for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
Security Issues  
xvi  
Security Issues  
To ensure the greatest security possible for customers, Lucent Technologies  
offers services that can reduce toll-fraud liabilities. Contact your Lucent  
Technologies representative for more security information.  
Login security is an attribute of the DEFINITY ECS software. Existing passwords  
expire 24 hours after installation.  
Access Security Gateway Feature  
Login security for the System-Parameters Customer-Options forms use the  
access security gateway interface for the “init” login. This feature is active for  
dial-up access only. It is not active when accessing the DEFINITY via the SAT.  
Access security gateway is automatically imposed during the upgrade.  
Antistatic Protection  
!
CAUTION:  
When handling circuit packs or any components of a DEFINITY System,  
always wear a wrist ground strap. Connect the strap to an approved ground  
such as the ground jack on the DEFINITY System.  
Remove/Install Circuit Packs  
!
CAUTION:  
The control circuit packs with white labels cannot be removed or installed  
when the power is on. The port circuit packs with gray labels (older version  
circuit packs had purple labels) can be removed or installed when the  
power is on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
Upgrade Paths  
xvii  
Upgrade Paths  
The upgrade paths described in this book assume the system being upgraded is  
at the level of at least a G3V4. To upgrade prior systems to this starting point,  
refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3r Upgrades and Additions.  
Table 1 correlates each upgrade to an associated chapter number.  
Description  
Chapter  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
3
4
5
If upgrading from a pre-Release 5vs to a DEFINITY ECS Release 8si, refer to  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Upgrades and Additions  
for R8si.  
The following table indicates the processes and their corresponding time  
allotment. Not all processes are required for every upgrade; the table shows  
maximum times and includes high and critical reliability processes.  
Process  
Busyout multimedia interface circuit packs  
Disable/enable TTI  
Minutes  
2
2
Disable/enable scheduled maintenance  
Disable/enable alarm origination to INADS  
Save announcements (TN750/B Only)  
Save translations  
2
2
40  
10  
25-50  
5
Backup disk  
Verify software release  
Replace disk drives and circuit packs  
10  
30  
Set tone, lock, power down, power up, and unlock  
active and standby SPE  
Restore disk full (both)  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
Conventions Used in This Book  
xviii  
Process  
Restore disk install (both)  
Upgrade software  
Minutes  
12  
15  
2
Configure removable media  
Set vector f  
2
Reset standby 4  
5
Status spe  
10  
20  
5
Shutdown/restart AUDIX and LAN Gateway  
Miscellaneous  
Conventions Used in This Book  
Information you type is shown as: save announcements. To submit the  
command you typed, press the Enter key in the numbers section of the  
keyboard, not the Enter/Return key in the letters section.  
Information displayed on the screen is shown as: login:  
Keyboard keys are shown as: Enter  
Circuit pack codes (for example, TN792 or TN754B) are shown with the  
minimum acceptable alphabetic suffix (like the “B” in the code “TN754B”).  
Generally, an alphabetic suffix higher than the 1 shown is also acceptable.  
However, not every vintage of either the minimum suffix or a higher suffix  
code is necessarily acceptable.  
NOTE:  
Refer to Technical Monthly: Reference Guide for Circuit-Pack  
Vintages and Change Notices, for current information about the  
usable vintages of specific circuit pack codes (including the suffix)  
in a Release 8 system.  
The following conventions describe the systems referred to in this book.  
The word system, is a general term encompassing Release 8 and  
includes references to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server.  
DEFINITY Systems in this book are called: G3V2, G3v3, G3V4, Release 5,  
Release 5si + memory, Release 5r, Release 6, Release 6si, Release 6r,  
Release 8r, Release 8, and Release 8si.  
Information in this book is applicable for Release 5 through Release 8,  
unless otherwise specified.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server is abbreviated DEFINITY  
ECS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
Related Books  
xix  
Related Books  
The following books are useful for system-related information:  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 System  
Description Pocket Reference  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for  
R8r  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for  
R8si  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and  
Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and  
Test for Multicarrier Cabinets  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s  
Guide  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Upgrades and  
Additions for R8si  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation for  
Adjuncts and Peripherals  
AT&T Network and Data Connectivity Reference  
BCS Products Security Handbook  
DEFINITY Wireless Business System Users Guide  
DEFINITY Wireless Business System Installation and Test Guide  
DEFINITY Wireless Business Systems System Interface  
Switch Administration for DEFINITY AUDIX  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administration for  
Network Connectivity  
How to Order Books  
In addition to this book, other description, installation and test, maintenance, and  
administration books are available. A complete list of DEFINITY books can be  
found in the Business Communications System Publications Catalog.  
This book and any other DEFINITY books can be ordered directly from the  
Lucent Technologies Business Communications System Publications Fulfillment  
Center at 1-317-322-6791 or toll free at 1-800-457-1235.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
How to Comment on This Book  
xx  
How to Comment on This Book  
Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback. Please fill out the reader  
comment card found at the front of this manual and return it. Your comments are  
of great value and help improve our documentation.  
If the reader comment card is missing, FAX your comments to 1-303-538-1741 or  
to your Lucent Technologies representative, and mention this book’s name and  
number (in footer), DEFINITY Enterprise Communication Server Release 8  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r.  
Where to Call for Technical Support  
Refer to the table below for the telephone numbers for technical support.  
Telephone Number  
DEFINITY Helpline (feature administration and system  
applications)  
1-800-225-7585  
Lucent Technologies Toll Fraud Intervention  
Lucent Technologies National Customer Care Center  
Lucent Technologies Corporate Security  
Streamlined Implementation (for missing equipment)  
USA/Canada Technical Service Center  
ITAC  
1-800-643-2353  
1-800-242-2121  
1-800-822-9009  
1-800-772-5409  
1-800-248-1234  
1-303-804-3777  
Lucent Technologies Centers of Excellence  
Asia/Pacific Regional Support Center  
Western Europe/Middle East/South Africa  
Central/Eastern Europe  
65-872-8686  
44-1252-77-4800  
361-345-4334  
1-303-804-3778  
61-2-9352-9090  
1-800-248-1111  
Central/Latin America Caribbean  
Australia  
North America (INADS Database Administration)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
Trademarks  
xxi  
Trademarks  
This document contains references to the following Lucent Technologies  
trademarked products:  
ACCUNET®  
AUDIX®  
Callmaster®  
CallVisor®  
CONVERSANT®  
DEFINITY®  
FORUM™  
MEGACOM®  
SYSTIMAX®  
TRANSTALK™  
The following products are trademarked by their appropriate vendor:  
Audichron® is a registered trademark of Audichron Company  
LINXis a trademark of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.  
Music Mate® is a registered trademark of Harris Corporation  
PagePac® is a registered trademark of Harris Corporation, Dracon  
Division  
Shockwatch® is a registered trademark of Media Recovery, Incorporated  
Styrofoam® is a registered trademark of Styrofoam Corporation  
Tiltwatch® is a registered trademark of Media Recovery, Incorporated  
Zone Mate® is a registered trademark of Harris Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
Standards Compliance  
xxii  
Standards Compliance  
The equipment presented in this book complies with the following standards (as  
appropriate):  
ITU-T (Formerly CCITT)  
ECMA  
ETSI  
IPNS  
DPNSS  
National ISDN-1  
National ISDN-2  
ISO-9000  
ANSI  
FCC Part 15 and Part 68  
EN55022  
EN50081  
EN50082  
CISPR22  
Australia AS3548 (AS/NZ3548)  
Australia AS3260  
IEC 825  
IEC 950  
UL 1459  
UL 1950  
CSA C222 Number 225  
TS001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
LASER Product  
xxiii  
LASER Product  
The DEFINITY ECS may contain a Class 1 LASER device if single-mode fiber  
optic cable is connected to a remote Expansion Port Network (EPN). The LASER  
device operates within the following parameters:  
Maximum Power Output: -5 dBm  
Wavelength: 1310 nm  
Mode Field Diameter: 8.8 mm  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
IEC 825 1993  
!
CAUTION:  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than  
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information.  
Electromagnetic Compatibility  
Standards  
This product complies with and conforms to the following EMC standards (as  
appropriate):  
Limits and Methods of Measurements of Radio Interference  
Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment, EN55022  
(CISPR22), 1993  
EN50082-1, European Generic Immunity Standard  
FCC Part 15  
Australia AS3548  
NOTE:  
The system conforms to Class A (industrial) equipment. Voice  
terminals meet Class B requirements.  
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 1000-4-2  
Radiated radio frequency field IEC 1000-4-3  
Electrical Fast Transient IEC 1000-4-4  
Lightning effects IEC 1000-4-5  
Conducted radio frequency IEC 1000-4-6  
Mains frequency magnetic field IEC 1000-4-8  
Low frequency mains disturbance IEC 1000-4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards  
xxiv  
European Union Standards  
Lucent Technologies Business Communications Systems declares that the  
DEFINITY equipment specified in this book bearing the “CE” mark conforms to  
the European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives.  
The “CE” (Conformité Europeénne) mark indicates conformance to the European  
Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (89/336/EEC) Low Voltage  
Directive (73/23/EEC) and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment (TTE)  
Directive (91/263/EEC) and with i-CTR3 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and i-CTR4  
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) as applicable.  
The “CE” mark is applied to the following Release 8 products:  
Global AC powered Multicarrier Cabinet (MCC)  
DC powered Multicarrier Cabinet (MCC) with 25 Hz ring generator  
AC powered Single-Carrier Cabinet (SCC) with 25 Hz ring generator  
AC powered Compact Single-Carrier Cabinet (CSCC) with 25 Hz ring  
generator  
Enhanced DC Power System  
Compact Modular Cabinet (CMC) with 25 Hz ring generator  
Compact Modular Cabinet (CMC) with 50 Hz ring generator for France  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
Federal Communications Commission Statement  
xxv  
Federal Communications Commission  
Statement  
Part 68: Statement  
Part 68: Answer-Supervision Signaling. Allowing this equipment to be operated in  
a manner that does not provide proper answer-supervision signaling is in  
violation of Part 68 rules. This equipment returns answer-supervision signals to  
the public switched network when:  
Answered by the called station  
Answered by the attendant  
Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE  
user  
This equipment returns answer-supervision signals on all DID calls forwarded  
back to the public switched telephone network. Permissible exceptions are:  
A call is unanswered  
A busy tone is received  
A reorder tone is received  
Lucent Technologies attests that this registered equipment is capable of  
providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the  
use of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block  
access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of  
1990.  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the rear of this  
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration  
number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested,  
this information must be provided to the telephone company.  
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected  
to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in devices  
not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of  
RENs should not exceed 5.0. To be certain of the number of devices that may be  
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone  
company.  
NOTE:  
REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
About This Book  
Federal Communications Commission Statement  
xxvi  
Means of Connection  
Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the following  
table.  
SOC/REN/  
Manufacturer’s Port Identifier  
FIC Code  
A.S. Code  
Network Jacks  
Off/On Premises Station  
OL13C  
9.0F  
RJ2GX, RJ21X,  
RJ11C  
DID Trunk  
02RV2-T  
02GS2  
0.0B  
0.3A  
0.3A  
9.0F  
6.0P  
6.0P  
6.0P  
RJ2GX, RJ21X  
RJ21X  
CO Trunk  
CO Trunk  
02LS2  
RJ21X  
Tie Trunk  
TL31M  
RJ2GX  
1.544 Digital Interface  
1.544 Digital Interface  
120A2 Channel Service Unit  
04DU9-B,C  
04DU9-BN,KN  
04DU9-DN  
RJ48C, RJ48M  
RJ48C, RJ48M  
RJ48C  
If the terminal equipment (DEFINITY® System) causes harm to the telephone  
network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary  
discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical,  
the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you  
will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is  
necessary.  
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,  
operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this  
happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to  
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information,  
please contact the Technical Service Center at 1-800-248-1234. If the equipment  
is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request  
that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.  
It is recommended that repairs be performed by Lucent Technologies certified  
technicians.  
The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the  
telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs.  
Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or  
corporation commission for information.  
This equipment, if it uses a telephone receiver, is hearing aid compatible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
1
1-1  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and  
Adding Memory  
1
This chapter provides the information necessary to upgrade the software from a  
DEFINITY G3rV2, V3, or V4 system to a Release 8r system. The chapter also  
provides information on replacing the following hardware:  
The TN1657 disk drive if drive is not Vintage 4 or later.  
The TN 1656 tape drive with the TN2211 optical drive  
The UN332/B MSSNET circuit pack with the UN332C circuit pack  
(required for the optical drive)  
A TN1650B memory circuit pack if the system does not contain 3 of these  
circuit packs  
NOTE:  
Adding memory to the standby SPE causes an error because the memory  
number between the standby and active carriers does not match.  
If the system already contains 3 TN1650B Memory circuit packs and a V4 or later  
TN1657 disk drive, skip to Chapter 2, ‘‘Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without  
Adding Memory’’.  
The procedures step you through a software and hardware upgrade that can be  
done on either a standard reliability system or a high or critical reliability system.  
For more help refer to the following books:  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s  
Guide  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for  
R8r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Read This First  
1
1-2  
Read This First  
Service Interruption  
The upgrade process requires 2 non–call-preserving service interruptions in a  
standard reliability system and must be closely coordinated with the customer  
and the local account team.  
Call Management System (CMS)  
The CMS link is dropped and restarted during the upgrade. This causes CMS  
data to be lost. This data loss can be minimized if the upgrade is performed just  
after the last CMS measurement interval.  
All measurement data is lost during the upgrade (including BCMS). If needed,  
the reports may be printed before the upgrade begins.  
CMS could abort the processing of a call if a measured trunk that was part of the  
conference dropped off the call before the end of the call. Customers  
experiencing this symptom and who are running R3V4 CMS should update to  
r3v4ao.e or higher.  
Software Compatibility and Translation Errors  
Before starting the upgrade, always check the Software Release Letter that  
accompanies the system removable media. Translation corruption will occur if  
incompatible software is loaded.  
After loading the new software, check for translation errors. To do this, log off and  
then log back in. Check for a “Translation Corruption Detected” message before  
proceeding with the upgrade.  
If the message indicates errors, refer to ‘‘No Translations After Upgrade’’ in  
Appendix B, ‘‘Troubleshooting an Upgrade’’. Do not continue with the upgrade  
until the errors are corrected.  
Usable Circuit Packs  
Every circuit pack used in the Release 8 system must conform to the minimum  
usable vintage requirements for that system. At a presale site inspection, the  
remediation process checks the vintages of existing circuit packs to be reused in  
the Release 8 system. Replace all unusable vintage circuit packs with current  
vintages.  
Refer to Technical Quarterly, Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages, Change  
Notices, and to the Software Release Letter for information about usable circuit  
pack vintages. For information about usable vintages of non-U.S. circuit packs,  
refer to the ITAC Tech Alert from your regional distributor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Read This First  
1
1-3  
Software Upgrade  
Release 8 software and translations are saved to removable media. Although the  
translations automatically update to Release 8, several features require special  
attention because of screen changes or potential naming conflicts in the  
process.  
Between customer confirmation and the actual update or upgrade, check the  
screens to ensure the translations meet the customer’s needs. After rebooting the  
system, enter the translations either locally or remotely. If done remotely, Contact  
Field Support Administration Center (FSAC) for the remote entry. For information  
to make the required changes, refer to:  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s  
Guide  
Required Hardware  
The equipment in Table 1-1 must be on site before the upgrade begins. To place  
a claim for missing equipment, as part of the Streamlined Implementation  
process, call 1-800-772-5409 or the number provided by your Lucent  
Technologies representative.  
Table 1-1. Required Hardware  
Quantity  
High/Critical  
Equipment  
106495120  
105533780  
Description  
Standard  
2
2
TN1650B Memory circuit pack  
1
1
V4 or later TN1657 Disk Drive circuit  
pack (if needed)  
1
2
2
2
4
108566381  
107849754  
106590953  
J58890TO-1 L1  
UN332C MSSNET circuit pack  
TN2211 optical drive  
1
Z100A1 Apparatus Blank Faceplate  
1
Formatted removable media  
w/Release 8 software  
21  
848445086  
848445094  
Carrier A strip label  
Carrier B strip label  
1
NA  
NA  
1
1. For a maintenance update, acquired from the Technical Service Center. For an upgrade, shipped  
from the factory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Task Tables  
1
1-4  
Task Tables  
Table 1-2 lists the high-level tasks to perform the upgrades. Refer to the  
appropriate page for instructions for each step.  
The upgrade procedure is similar for both the standard and high or critical  
reliability system with a few exceptions. These exceptions are noted as you go  
through the steps.  
Table 1-2. Tasks to upgrade the software and hardware  
Task Description  
Page  
1-6  
Check SPE  
Save Translations  
Back Up Disk  
1-6  
1-6  
Disable Scheduled Maintenance and Alarm Origination to INADS  
Reconfigure the Tape (G3rV2, V3 R31.0 and Earlier)  
Check Link Status  
1-7  
1-6  
1-8  
Disable TTI  
1-8  
Check Disk Drive  
1-8  
Restore Disk  
1-9  
1-9  
Check TTI Status  
1-10  
1-10  
1-10  
1-11  
1-11  
1-11  
1-12  
1-14  
1-14  
Lock the active SPE (H/C only)  
Remove the Circuit Packs  
Install the Circuit Packs  
Power Up the Processor Carrier  
Unlock the Active SPE (H/C only)  
Continued on next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Task Tables  
1
1-5  
Table 1-2. Tasks to upgrade the software and hardware — Continued  
Task Description  
Page  
1-15  
1-15  
1-15  
1-16  
1-16  
1-16  
1-16  
1-17  
1-17  
1-17  
1-18  
1-19  
1-20  
1-20  
1-21  
1-21  
1-21  
1-21  
1-21  
1-22  
1-22  
1-22  
1-23  
1-23  
Verify Interchange (H/C only)  
Upgrade other carrier (H/C only)  
Affix position label(s)  
Verify software version  
Save Translations  
Restore Disk  
Upgrade Software  
Reset SPE status (H/C only)  
List Configuration Control  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
Set Date and Time  
Set Core Dump Vector  
Enable TTI  
Release MMI (H/C only)  
Resolve Alarms  
Check Link Status  
Check SPE status (H/C only)  
Save Translations  
Save Announcements (if necessary)  
Back Up Disk  
Return Replaced Equipment  
Continued on next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-6  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
Check SPE  
1. Type status spe and press Enter to check the health of the SPE.  
For high or critical reliability systems:  
The Standby Refreshedfield shows yes  
The Standby Shadowingfield shows on  
The Standby Handshakefield shows up  
Save Translations  
1. Type save translation and press Enter to write all translation information  
from memory to the disk, which takes about 2 minutes.  
Save Announcements (if necessary)  
NOTE:  
The TN750C Announcement circuit pack stores announcements in  
nonvolatile memory; saving the announcements is optional.  
1. If the PPN contains a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack, type display  
announcements and press Enter.  
2. If administered recorded announcements are listed, type save  
announcements cabinet carrier slot and press Enter. For example,  
01D03. This takes about 30 minutes.  
NOTE:  
For some software loads, type save announcements from cabinet  
carrier slot. Type help and press Enter for complete command  
usage.  
Back Up Disk  
1. Type backup disk and press Enter to write all information from the disk to  
the backup tape. This takes 30 to 40 minutes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-7  
Disable Scheduled Maintenance and Alarm  
Origination to INADS  
1. To prevent scheduled daily maintenance from interfering with the update  
or upgrade, type change system-parameters maintenance and press  
Enter.  
2. If scheduled maintenance has begun, set the Stop Timefield to 1 minute  
after the current time.  
or  
If scheduled maintenance has not begun, set the Start Timefield to a  
time after the upgrade is completed. For example, if you start the upgrade  
at 8:00 p.m. and the upgrade takes 90 minutes, set the Start Timefield  
to 21:30.  
!
CAUTION:  
If you do not disable Alarm Origination, the system may generate  
alarms, resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets.  
3. Type neither in the Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers field and  
press Enter.  
NOTE:  
For some software loads, set the Alarm Origination  
Activatedfield to n and set the Cleared Alarm Notification  
and Restart Notificationfields to disable or n before  
pressing Enter.  
Reconfigure the Tape (G3rV2, V3 R31.0 and  
Earlier)  
NOTE:  
Do not issue the list configuration software command before  
reconfiguring the removable media.  
For some software loads, use 3-mem instead of large  
If standard reliability:  
1. Type configure tape large and press Enter to reconfigure the backup  
removable media for the 2 TN1650B Memory circuit packs. This command  
takes about 1 minute to complete.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-8  
If high or critical reliability:  
1. Type configure tape spe-a large and press Enter to reconfigure the  
removable media in control carrier “A” for 2 TN1650B Memory circuit  
packs. This command takes about 1 minute to complete.  
2. Type configure tape spe-b large and press Enter to reconfigure the  
removable media in control carrier “B” for 2 TN1650B Memory circuit  
packs. This command takes about 1 minute to complete.  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Write down  
all enabled links.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for all links.  
3. Write down which links are in service.  
Disable TTI  
NOTE:  
Do this step only if the Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) is enabled.  
!
CAUTION:  
If you do not disable the TTI, the translations can be corrupted.  
Make sure the ISDN is in service. If not, try to busy out and release the ISDN  
D-channel/link to bring the ISDN trunks back into service.  
1. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter.  
2. On the second screen, set the TTI Enabled?field to n to de-activate the  
TTI feature.  
Check Disk Drive  
1. Type list configuration control and press Enter to check the vintage of the  
disk drive. If the drive is V4 or later, go to Check TTI Status.  
or  
If the drive is not V4 or later, go to Install Disk Drive (if not TN1657 V4 or  
earlier).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-9  
Install Disk Drive (if not TN1657 V4 or earlier)  
!
!
CAUTION:  
When replacing any hardware, be sure to ground yourself against  
electrostatic discharge (ESD) by wearing a grounded wrist strap.  
CAUTION:  
If a high or critical reliability system, replace and restore the disk drives one  
at a time starting with the standby SPE. Never replace the active and  
standby disk drives at the same time.  
1. Type busyout host-adapter [a | b] and press Enter to prevent other  
applications from accessing the disk or removable media.  
2. Remove the existing TN1657 Disk Drive circuit pack and place it in  
antistatic material.  
3. Insert a new TN1657 circuit pack into the DISK DRIVE slot.  
4. To properly seat the circuit pack, push firmly on the front of the faceplate  
until the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier. Then close the latch  
until it is fully engaged.  
5. Type release host-adapter [a | b] and press Enter to release the disk from  
the maintenance-busyout condition and put it back into service.  
6. Type reset host-adapter [a | b] and press Enter to allow the disk to spin  
up.  
7. Type status spe and press Enter to verify that the disk is now in service.  
NOTE:  
If the disk fails to return to service, repeat Steps 1, 3, 4, and 5.  
For high or critical reliability, repeat steps 1 through 7 on the active carrier.  
Restore Disk  
NOTE:  
Until this command finishes, the system provides no user feedback on the  
management terminal screen. Do not press Enter while the command  
executes. Doing so causes the terminal screen to clear as the command  
finishes; erasing any success or failure messages the system may provide.  
If standard reliability:  
1. Type restore disk full and press Enter to copy the information on the  
removable media to disk, which takes about 30 minutes.  
If high or critical reliability:  
1. Type restore disk full both and press Enter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-10  
Check TTI Status  
1. Type status TTI and press Enter. Wait until the Percent Completefield  
shows 100%.  
Busyout MMI Circuit Packs (H/C only)  
!
CAUTION:  
Multimedia-to-voice station calls are not preserved on an upgrade. Failure to busy-out  
the TN787 Multimedia Interface (MMI) circuit packs results in unusable TN787 and  
TN788 Multimedia Voice Conditioner ports.  
1. Type display system-parameters customer-options and press Enter. On  
screen 2 under the Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) options, check the  
Basicand Enhancedfields.  
2. If either the Basicor Enhancedfield is y, type list configuration all and  
press Enter to locate all MMI (TN787) circuit packs.  
3. If there are MMI circuit packs, type busyout board cabinet carrier slot  
and press Enter to remove the circuit packs from service.  
Lock the active SPE (H/C only)  
1. Type status spe and press Enter to determine which control carrier is  
active or observe the control carrier LEDs.  
NOTE:  
For high or critical reliability systems, we recommend that you  
replace the circuit packs in the standby carrier first.  
!
CAUTION:  
When replacing any hardware, be sure to ground yourself against  
electrostatic discharge (ESD) by wearing a grounded wrist strap.  
2. Move the SPE-SELECT switches on both Duplication Interface (DUPINT)  
circuit packs, one at a time, to the active carrier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-11  
Check the active tone-clock (H/C only)  
1. Type status port-network 1 and verify that the Tone-Clock is in the same  
carrier as the active SPE and that the Service Statefield shows in.  
NOTE:  
This takes 1 minute to complete. If the service state is incorrect,  
repeat the command until this condition is met.  
If the active Tone-Clock has not migrated to the active carrier after  
1 minute, then a Tone-Clock problem exists. Refer to the TDM-CLK  
Maintenance Objects section of the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications  
Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r book to resolve any problems.  
Power Down the Processor Carrier  
!
CAUTION:  
Do not power down the whole cabinet; it is not necessary.  
For standard reliability, power down the processor carrier. This causes a service  
interruption.  
For high or critical reliability, power down the standby carrier.  
1. To power down the processor carrier, remove the power plug from the left  
side of the carrier then remove the power plug from the right side of the  
carrier.  
Remove the Circuit Packs  
NOTE:  
More detailed information on removing and adding circuit packs is in  
Chapter 6, ‘‘Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware’’.  
1. Remove the blank faceplate next to the MSSNET slot in the carrier.  
2. Remove the UN332B circuit pack from the carrier and place it in antistatic  
packing material.  
3. Remove the tape from the tape drive.  
4. Remove the TN1656 tape drive and place it in antistatic packing material.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-12  
Install the Circuit Packs  
NOTE:  
To properly seat a circuit pack, push firmly on the front of the faceplate until  
the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier. Then close the latch until it is  
fully engaged.  
1. Insert the TN1650B memory circuit pack in memory slot 3.  
NOTE:  
If a high or critical reliability system, install the TN1650B at the same  
time as the optical drive. Note that adding memory to the standby  
SPE causes an error because the memory number between the  
standby and active carriers does not match.  
2. Insert the UN332C circuit pack into the MSSNET slot.  
3. Replace the blank faceplate next to the MSSNET circuit pack.  
4. Insert the TN2211 optical drive (Figure 1-1) into the right most TAPE DRIVE  
slot. It only takes up 2 slots.  
5. Place a blank faceplate over the left most TAPE DRIVE slot.  
Red  
Green  
Yellow  
fpdf2211 KLC 010600  
Figure 1-1. TN2211 Optical Drive  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-13  
6. Place the formatted removable media, label facing left, into the optical  
drive.  
NOTE:  
Make sure the formatted removable media is not write-protected  
before placing it into the optical drive (see Figure 1-2).  
1
2
h1dfdsk KLC 112499  
Figure Notes  
1. Not Write-protected  
2. Write-protected  
Figure 1-2. Make sure the disk is not write-protected.  
!
CAUTION:  
The removable media has a sliding, metal cover to protect the  
surface of the disk. DO NOT TOUCH THE DISK (Figure 1-3).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-14  
R
O
T
EC  
640  
/S  
2048  
BYTES  
h1dfdsk1 KLC 091799  
Figure 1-3. Do not touch the disk inside the cartridge.  
Power Up the Processor Carrier  
1. To restore power to the processor carrier, insert the power plug on the  
right side of the carrier then insert the power plug on the left side of the  
carrier.  
If high or critical reliability:  
2. Monitor the SPE as it reboots by observing the LEDs and the terminal. It is  
powered up when the YELLOW LED on the Processor circuit pack blinks  
in a steady state, which takes about 10 minutes.  
Unlock the Active SPE (H/C only)  
1. Move the SPE SELECT switches to the AUTO position one at a time.  
2. Wait 10 minutes.  
!
CAUTION:  
Allow 10 minutes after unlocking to make sure the standby SPE has  
fully returned to service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-15  
Verify Interchange (H/C only)  
This step is performed twice, once for each carrier but not at the same time.  
NOTE:  
Because of the memory mismatch between the standby and active SPEs,  
typing the status spe command yields two different scenarios.  
After the circuit packs have been replaced in the first carrier:  
1. Type status spe and press Enter:  
The Standby Shadowingfield shows off  
The Standby Handshakefield shows up  
2. Go to Upgrade other carrier (H/C only)  
After the circuit packs have been replaced in the second carrier:  
1. Type status spe and press Enter to make sure the active side is ready for  
interchange. When it is ready,  
The Standby Shadowingfield shows on  
The Standby Handshakefield shows up  
2. Go to Affix position label(s)  
Upgrade other carrier (H/C only)  
To upgrade the other carrier, lock the SPE switches on the DUPINT to the other  
carrier.  
NOTE:  
The new active carrier resets (cold 2 restart). Wait until the login prompt  
appears then log in.  
Repeat the steps from Check the active tone-clock (H/C only) through Verify  
Interchange (H/C only).  
Affix position label(s)  
1. Place the new strip label(s) over the old carrier label(s).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-16  
Verify software version  
NOTE:  
The Tape Residentfield shows the software load number. Write it down  
for use later.  
If standard reliability:  
1. Type list configuration software-version and press Enter to verify that the  
removable media contains the Release 8 software. This takes about 2  
minutes.  
If high or critical reliability:  
1. Type list configuration software-version long and press Enter to verify  
that the removable media contains the Release 8 software.  
Save Translations  
1. Type save translations tape and press Enter to save translations to the  
new removable media, which takes about 2 minutes.  
Save Announcements (if necessary)  
1. Type save announce tape and press Enter to save announcements to the  
new removable media.  
Restore Disk  
If standard reliability:  
1. Type restore disk full and press Enter to write the new software to disk.  
Release 8 system software is now resident on the disk.  
If high or critical reliability:  
2. Type restore disk full both and press Enter to write the new software to  
disk.  
NOTE:  
This command may take up to 25 minutes to complete. Until this  
command finishes, the system provides no user feedback on the  
system access screen. Do not press Enter while the command  
executes. Doing so clears the terminal screen as the command  
finishes, erasing any success or failure messages the system may  
provide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-17  
Upgrade Software  
This command copies the software from the removable media to the system disk  
and takes about 15 minutes to complete.  
For standard reliability:  
!
CAUTION:  
All calls are dropped—this is a service interruption.  
1. Type upgrade software G3V8r.xx.x.xxx.x (entire alphanumeric string of  
new software version) and press Enter. At the prompt, press Enter to save  
translations.  
For high or critical reliability:  
1. Type upgrade software G3V8r.xx.x.xxx.x no-calls (entire alphanumeric  
string of new software version) and press Enter. At the prompt, press Enter  
to save translations and attempt to preserve calls across the interchange.  
For all reliabilities:  
2. After the system resets, log in as craft.  
3. Check for the Translation Corruption Detectedmessage before  
proceeding with the upgrade. If corruption is detected, refer to No  
Translations After Upgrade in Appendix B, ‘‘Troubleshooting an Upgrade’’  
to correct the problem.  
!
CAUTION:  
Do not continue with the upgrade until the translations errors are  
corrected.  
Reset SPE status (H/C only)  
1. Type status SPE and press Enter. Wait until the Standby Handshake  
field displays up, which takes about 3 minutes.  
2. Type reset spe-standby 4 and press Enter.  
NOTE:  
You can continue the process while the SPE is resetting.  
List Configuration Control  
1. Type list configuration control and press Enter to verify the system  
recognizes the third TN1650B Memory circuit pack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-18  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
You can set up to 15 customized daylight savings time rules. If you have cabinets  
in several different time zones, you can set up rules for each on a location basis.  
A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition  
to and from daylight savings time. It also specifies the increment at which to  
transition.  
NOTE:  
The default daylight savings rule is 0, no daylight savings.  
1. Type change daylight-savings-rules and press Enter.  
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES  
Rule  
0:  
Change Day  
Month___Date  
Time____Increment  
No Daylight Savings  
1:  
Start: first Sunday___ on or after April___ 1 at _2:00  
Stop: first Sunday___ on or after October_ 25 at _2:00  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first ______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _____ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first ______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _____ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first ______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _____ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first ______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _____ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first ______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
01:00  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
2. Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day,  
Month, Date, Time, and Incrementfields for each rule. (for example,  
1:00 equals one hour)  
NOTE:  
You can change any rule except rule 0 (zero). You cannot delete a  
daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and  
Time screens.  
3. When done, press Enter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-19  
Set Date and Time  
1. Type set time and press Enter to bring up the Date and Time screen.  
.
DATE AND TIME  
DATE  
TIME  
Day of the Week: Tuesday  
Day of the Month: 8  
Month: February  
Year: 2000  
Hour: 20  
Minute: 30  
Second: XX  
Type: standard  
2. Type the day in English (Sunday through Saturday) in the Day of the  
Week:field. See Table 1-3 for English day names When done, press Tab to  
move to next field.  
Table 1-3. English Day of the Week Names  
Day Number  
Day Name  
Sunday  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
3. Type the current month in English (January through December) in the  
Month:field. See Table 1-4 for English month names. When done, press  
Ta b to move to next field.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-20  
Table 1-4. English Month Names  
Number  
Name  
January  
February  
March  
April  
Number  
Name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
July  
8
August  
9
September  
October  
November  
December  
10  
11  
12  
May  
June  
4. Type the day of month (1 through 31) in the Day of the Month:field  
and press Tab to move to the next field.  
5. Type the current year in the Year:field and press TAB to move to the next  
field.  
6. Type the current hour for a 24-hour clock in the Hour:field and press Tab  
to move to the next field.  
7. Type the current minute (0 through 59) in the Minute:field (seconds  
cannot be set). When done, press Tab to move to next field  
8. Type standard or daylight savings in the Typefield, according to the  
current time in the local time zone. For example, if currently on standard  
time, type standard.  
9. Type the rule number in the Daylight Savings Rulefield.  
10. When all the information is correct, press Enter.  
11. Type display time and press Enter to verify date and time data.  
Set Core Dump Vector  
1. Type set vector f spe-maint and press Enter to set the core dump vector to  
perform a core dump on any system restart.  
Enable TTI  
NOTE:  
Do this step only if the TTI is disabled and you want it enabled.  
1. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter to change the  
TTI field back to its value before the upgrade.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-21  
Release MMI (H/C only)  
1. Type release board cabinet carrier slot and press Enter to release the  
circuit packs, which were busied out earlier.  
Resolve Alarms  
1. Type display alarms and press Enter to examine the alarm log. Resolve  
any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications  
Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Compare it  
with the earlier status.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for each link.  
Enable Scheduled Maintenance  
1. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
2. Type the appropriate time in the Startfield to enable scheduled daily  
maintenance. Make sure the Save Translationfield is set to daily.  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination  
to INADS  
1. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and  
ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps  
in the shaded box. See ‘‘Where to Call for Technical Support’’ on page -xx  
for telephone numbers.  
NOTE:  
As part of the system registration process, the INADS Database  
Administrator enables Alarm Origination and customer options.  
2. When administration is completed, log in as craft at the Login:prompt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-22  
"init" login administration:  
1. Log in as init.  
2. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter  
to verify that the customer options are properly set.  
3. Go to screen 6, QSIG Optional Features, and set the Basic Call  
Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services  
Protocol b or d on an ISDN-PRI trunk group before the upgrade.  
4. Type change system-parameters offer-options and press Enter.  
5. If the Activate Offerfield is n, set it to y and press Ta b . A warning  
message lets you know whether you need to save translations and  
reboot to make the change permanent.  
6. Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes.  
7. Contact the requester when done.  
Check SPE status (H/C only)  
1. Type status SPE and press Enter. Wait until  
The Standby Refreshedfield shows yes  
The Standby Shadowingfield shows on  
The Standby Handshakefield shows up  
Save Translations  
1. Type save translation and press Enter to copy upgraded translations to  
the system disk, which takes about 2 minutes.  
Save Announcements (if necessary)  
1. Type save announcements and press Enter to copy announcements to  
the system disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-23  
Back Up Disk  
1. Type backup disk and press Enter to back up all changed files to the  
removable media. This takes about 15 minutes.  
2. Type test stored-data and press Enter to verify the consistency of the MSS  
files on the disk and removable media.  
If standard reliability:  
3. Type list configuration software-version and press Enter to verify all the  
files one last time.  
If high or critical reliability:  
3. Type list configuration software-version long and press Enter to verify all  
the files one last time.  
Return Replaced Equipment  
1. Return replaced equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the  
requirements outlined in the following books:  
BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations  
Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to R8r and Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
1
1-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
2
2-1  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r  
without Adding Memory  
2
This chapter provides the information necessary to upgrade the software from a  
DEFINITY ECS Release 5r, Release 6r, or Release 7r to a Release 8r system  
without adding memory. The chapter also provides information on replacing the  
tape drive with the optical drive and replacing the UN332B MSSNET circuit pack  
with the UN332C circuit pack, which is required for the optical drive.  
The procedures step through a software and hardware upgrade that can be done  
on either a standard reliability or a high or critical reliability system.  
There are many configurations of DEFINITY ECS Release 5r/6r/7r in the field, and  
each system can have a unique configuration. This book addresses the most  
common configurations. Also refer to the following books:  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s  
Guide  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for  
R8r  
NOTE:  
If the cabinet is older than Release 5, refer to DEFINITY Communications  
System Generic 3r (G3r) Upgrades and Additions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Read This First  
2
2-2  
Read This First  
Service Interruption  
The upgrade process requires 2 non–call-preserving service interruptions in a  
standard reliability system and must be closely coordinated with the customer  
and the local account team.  
Call Management System (CMS)  
The CMS link is dropped and restarted during the upgrade. This causes CMS  
data to be lost. This data loss can be minimized if the upgrade is performed just  
after the last CMS measurement interval.  
All measurement data is lost during the upgrade (including BCMS). If needed,  
the reports may be printed before the upgrade begins.  
CMS could abort the processing of a call if a measured trunk that was part of the  
conference dropped off the call before the end of the call. Customers  
experiencing this symptom and who are running R3V4 CMS should update to  
r3v4a or higher.  
Software Compatibility and Translation Errors  
Before starting the upgrade, always check the Software Release Letter that  
accompanies the system removable media. Translation corruption will occur if  
incompatible software is loaded.  
After loading the new software, check for translation errors. To do this, log in and  
check for a “Translation Corruption Detected” message before continuing with  
the upgrade process.  
If errors are detected, refer to ‘‘No Translations After Upgrade’’ in Appendix B,  
‘‘Troubleshooting an Upgrade’’. Do not continue with the upgrade until the errors  
are corrected.  
Usable Circuit Packs  
Every circuit pack used in the Release 8 system must conform to the minimum  
usable vintage requirements for that system. At a presale site inspection, the  
remediation process checks the vintages of existing circuit packs to be reused in  
the Release 8 system. Replace all unusable vintage circuit packs with current  
vintages.  
Refer to Technical Quarterly, Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages, Change  
Notices, and to the Software Release Letter for information about usable circuit  
pack vintages. For information about usable vintages of non-U.S. circuit packs,  
refer to the ITAC Tech Alert from your regional distributor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Read This First  
2
2-3  
Software Upgrade  
Release 8 software and translations are saved to removable media. Although the  
translations automatically update to Release 8, several features require special  
attention because of screen changes or potential naming conflicts in the  
process.  
Between customer confirmation and the actual update or upgrade, check the  
screens to ensure the translations meet the customer’s needs. After rebooting the  
system, enter these translations either locally or remotely. If done remotely,  
Contact Field Support Administration Center (FSAC) for the remote entry. For  
information to make the required changes, refer to:  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s  
Guide  
Required Tools  
This upgrade may require the following tools and other items:  
Wrist ground strap  
Static-proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit  
packs  
One copy of each of the following books:  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Maintenance for R8r  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Administrator’s Guide  
Antistatic Protection  
!
CAUTION:  
When handling circuit packs or any components of a DEFINITY ECS  
system, always wear an antistatic wrist ground strap. Connect the strap to  
an approved ground such as ground jack on the DEFINITY ECS system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Read This First  
2
2-4  
Required Hardware  
The equipment in Table 2-1 must be on-site before the upgrade begins. To place  
a claim for missing equipment, as part of the Streamlined Implementation  
process, call 1-800-772-5409 or the number provided by your Lucent  
Technologies representative.  
Table 2-1. Required Hardware  
Quantity  
High/Critical  
Equipment  
108566381  
107849754  
106590953  
Description  
Standard  
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
4
UN332C MSSNET circuit pack  
TN2211 optical drive  
Z100A1 apparatus blank  
J58890TO-1 L1  
or  
Formatted removable media with  
Release 8 software  
J5889OTF-1 L1  
848445086  
848445094  
Carrier A strip label  
Carrier B strip label  
1
NA  
NA  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Task Tables  
2
2-5  
Task Tables  
Table 2-2 lists the high-level tasks to perform the upgrades. Refer to the  
appropriate page for instructions for each step.  
The upgrade procedure is similar for both the standard and high or critical  
reliability system with a few exceptions. These exceptions are noted as you go  
through the steps.  
Table 2-2. Upgrade tasks  
Task Description  
Page  
2-7  
Check SPE  
Save Translations  
Save Announcements (if necessary)  
Back Up Disk  
2-7  
2-7  
Disable Scheduled Maintenance and Alarm Origination to INADS  
Check Link Status  
2-8  
2-8  
Disable TTI  
2-9  
Check TTI Status  
2-9  
Lock the active SPE (H/C only)  
Check the Active Tone-Clock (H/C only)  
Remove the Circuit Packs  
Install the Circuit Packs  
2-9  
2-10  
2-10  
2-10  
2-11  
2-11  
2-13  
2-13  
2-14  
2-14  
2-14  
2-14  
Unlock the Active SPE (H/C only)  
Verify Interchange (H/C only)  
Upgrade Other Carrier (H/C only)  
Affix position label(s)  
Verify software version  
Continued on next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Task Tables  
2
2-6  
Table 2-2. Upgrade tasks — Continued  
Task Description  
Page  
2-15  
2-15  
2-15  
2-15  
2-16  
2-16  
2-17  
2-19  
2-19  
2-19  
2-19  
2-19  
2-19  
2-20  
2-20  
2-20  
2-21  
2-21  
2-21  
Save Translations  
Restore Disk  
Upgrade Software  
Reset SPE status (H/C only)  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
Set Date and Time  
Set Core Dump Vector  
Enable TTI  
Release MMI (H/C only)  
Resolve Alarms  
Check Link Status  
Check SPE status (H/C only)  
Save Translations  
Save Announcements (if necessary)  
Back Up Disk  
Return Replaced Equipment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-7  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
Check SPE  
1. Type status spe and press Enter to check the health of the SPE.  
For high or critical reliability systems:  
The Standby Refreshedfield shows yes  
The Standby Shadowingfield shows on  
The Standby Handshakefield shows up  
Save Translations  
1. Type save translation and press Enter to write all translation information  
from memory to the disk, which takes about 2 minutes.  
Save Announcements (if necessary)  
NOTE:  
The TN750C Announcement circuit pack stores announcements in nonvolatile  
memory; saving the announcements is optional.  
1. If the PPN contains a TN750B Announcement circuit pack, type display  
announcements and press Enter.  
2. If administered recorded announcements are listed, type save  
announcements cabinet carrier slot and press Enter. For example,  
01D03. This takes about 30 minutes.  
NOTE:  
For some software loads, type save announcements from cabinet  
carrier slot. Type help and press Enter for complete command  
usage.  
Back Up Disk  
1. Type backup disk and press Enter to write all information from the disk to  
the backup tape. This takes 30 to 40 minutes.  
2. Remove the tape(s) from the tape drive(s).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-8  
Disable Scheduled Maintenance and Alarm  
Origination to INADS  
NOTE:  
Make sure scheduled daily maintenance does not interfere with the  
upgrade.  
1. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
2. If scheduled maintenance has begun, set the Stop Timefield to 1 minute  
after the current time.  
or  
If scheduled maintenance has not begun, set the Start Timefield to a  
time after the upgrade is completed. For example, if you start the upgrade  
at 8:00 p.m. and the upgrade takes 90 minutes, set the Start Timefield  
to 21:30.  
!
CAUTION:  
If you do not disable Alarm Origination, the system may generate  
alarms, resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets.  
3. Type n in the Alarm Origination field and press Enter if the field is not  
set to neither.  
NOTE:  
For some software loads, set the Cleared Alarm Notification  
and Restart Notificationfields to n before pressing Enter.  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Write down  
all enabled links.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for all links.  
3. Write down which links are in service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-9  
Disable TTI  
NOTE:  
Do this step only if the Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) is enabled.  
!
CAUTION:  
If you do not disable the TTI, the translations can be corrupted.  
1. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter.  
2. On the second screen, set the TTI Enabled?field to n to de-activate the  
TTI feature.  
Check TTI Status  
1. Type status tti and press Enter. Wait until the Percent Completefield  
shows 100%.  
Busyout MMI Circuit Packs (H/C only)  
!
CAUTION:  
Multimedia-to-voice station calls are not preserved on an upgrade. Failure  
to busy-out the TN787 Multimedia Interface (MMI) circuit packs results in  
unusable TN787 and TN788 Multimedia Voice Conditioner ports.  
1. Type display system-parameters customer-options and press Enter. On  
screen 2 under the Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) options, check the  
Basicand Enhancedfields.  
2. If either the Basicor Enhancedfield is y, type list configuration all and  
press Enter to locate all MMI (TN787) circuit packs.  
3. If there are MMI circuit packs, type busyout board cabinet carrier slot  
and press Enter to remove the circuit packs from service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-10  
Lock the active SPE (H/C only)  
1. Type status spe and press Enter to determine which control carrier is active  
or observe the control carrier LEDs.  
NOTE:  
For high or critical reliability systems, we recommend that you  
replace the circuit packs in the standby carrier first.  
!
CAUTION:  
When replacing any hardware, be sure to ground yourself against  
electrostatic discharge (ESD) by wearing a grounded wrist strap.  
2. Move the SPE-SELECT switches on both Duplication Interface (DUPINT)  
circuit packs, one at a time, to the active carrier.  
Check the Active Tone-Clock (H/C only)  
1. Type status port-network 1 and verify that the Tone-Clock is in the same  
carrier as the active SPE and that the Service Statefield shows in.  
NOTE:  
This takes 1 minute to complete. If the service state is incorrect,  
repeat the command until this condition is met.  
If the active Tone-Clock has not migrated to the active carrier after  
1 minute, then a Tone-Clock problem exists. Refer to the TDM-CLK  
Maintenance Objects section of the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications  
Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r book to resolve any problems.  
Power Down the Processor Carrier  
!
CAUTION:  
Do not power down the whole cabinet; it is not necessary.  
For standard reliability, power down the processor carrier. This causes a service  
interruption.  
For high or critical reliability, power down the standby carrier.  
1. To power down the processor carrier, remove the power plug from the left  
side of the carrier, then remove the power plug from the right side of the  
carrier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-11  
Remove the Circuit Packs  
NOTE:  
More detailed information on removing and adding circuit packs is in  
Chapter 6, ‘‘Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware’’.  
1. Remove the blank faceplate next to the MSSNET slot in the carrier.  
2. Remove the UN332B circuit pack from the carrier and place it in antistatic  
packing material.  
3. Remove the TN1656 tape drive and place it in antistatic packing material.  
Install the Circuit Packs  
NOTE:  
To properly seat a circuit pack, push firmly on the front of the faceplate until  
the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier. Then close the latch until it is  
fully engaged.  
1. Insert the UN332C circuit pack into the MSSNET slot.  
2. Replace the blank faceplate next to the MSSNET circuit pack.  
3. Insert the TN2211 optical drive (Figure 2-1) into the right most TAPE DRIVE  
slot. It only takes up 2 slots.  
4. Place a blank faceplate over the left most TAPE DRIVE slot.  
Red  
Green  
Yellow  
fpdf2211 KLC 010600  
Figure 2-1. TDNow2n2lo1a1d OfropmtWicwawl .DSormivaneuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-12  
5. Place the formatted removable media, label facing left, into the optical  
drive.  
NOTE:  
Make sure the formatted removable media is not write-protected  
before placing it into the optical drive (see Figure 2-2).  
1
2
h1dfdsk KLC 112499  
Figure Notes  
1. Not write-protected  
2. Write-protected  
Figure 2-2. Make sure the disk is not write-protected.  
!
CAUTION:  
The removable media has a sliding, metal cover to protect the  
surface of the disk. DO NOT TOUCH THE DISK (see Figure 2-3).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-13  
.
R
O
8
E
04  
T
C
640  
/S  
2
S
E
T
Y
B
h1dfdsk1 KLC 091799  
Figure 2-3. Do not touch the disk inside the cartridge.  
Power Up the Processor Carrier  
1. To restore power to the processor carrier, insert the power plug on the  
right side of the carrier then insert the power plug on the left side of the  
carrier.  
If high or critical reliability:  
2. Monitor the SPE as it reboots by observing the LEDs and the terminal. It is  
powered up when the YELLOW LED on the Processor circuit pack blinks  
in a steady state, which takes about 10 minutes.  
Unlock the Active SPE (H/C only)  
1. Move the SPE SELECT switches to the AUTO position one at a time.  
2. Wait 10 minutes.  
!
CAUTION:  
Allow 10 minutes after unlocking to make sure the standby SPE has  
fully returned to service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-14  
Verify Interchange (H/C only)  
1. Type status spe and press Enter to make sure the standby side is ready for  
interchange:  
The Standby Refreshedfield shows yes  
The Standby Shadowingfield shows on  
The Standby Handshakefield shows up  
If the standby SPE does not fully return to service, refer to the STBY-SPE  
Maintenance Object section in the Maintenance book.  
Upgrade Other Carrier (H/C only)  
To upgrade the other carrier, lock the SPE switches on the DUPINT to the other  
carrier.  
NOTE:  
The new active carrier resets (reset 1). Wait until the login prompt appears,  
then log in.  
Repeat the steps from Check the Active Tone-Clock (H/C only) through Verify  
Interchange (H/C only).  
Affix position label(s)  
1. Place the new strip label(s) over the old carrier label(s).  
Verify software version  
NOTE:  
The Tape Residentfield shows the software load number. Write it down  
for use later.  
If standard reliability:  
1. Type list configuration software-version and press Enter to verify that the  
removable media contains the Release 8 software.  
If high or critical reliability:  
1. Type list configuration software-version long and press Enter to verify  
that the removable media contains the Release 8 software.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-15  
Save Translations  
1. Type save translations tape and press Enter to save translations to the  
new removable media, which takes about 2 minutes.  
Save Announcements (if necessary)  
1. Type save announce tape and press Enter to save announcements to the  
new removable media.  
Restore Disk  
If standard reliability:  
1. Type restore disk full and press Enter to write the new software to disk.  
Release 8 system software is now resident on the disk.  
If high or critical reliability:  
2. Type restore disk full both and press Enter to write the new software to  
disk.  
NOTE:  
This command may take up to 25 minutes to complete. Until this  
command finishes, the system provides no user feedback on the  
system access screen. Do not press Enter while the command  
executes. Doing so clears the terminal screen as the command  
finishes, erasing any success or failure messages the system may  
provide.  
Upgrade Software  
This command copies the software from the removable media to the system disk  
and takes about 15 minutes to complete.  
For standard reliability:  
!
CAUTION:  
All calls are dropped—this is a service interruption.  
1. Type upgrade software G3V8r.xx.x.xxx.x (entire alphanumeric string of  
new software version) and press Enter. At the prompt, press Enter to save  
translations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-16  
For high or critical reliability:  
1. Type upgrade software G3V8r.xx.x.xxx.x no-calls (entire alphanumeric  
string of new software version) and press Enter. At the prompt, press Enter  
to save translations and attempt to preserve calls across the interchange.  
For all reliabilities:  
2. After the system resets, log in as craft.  
3. Check for the Translation Corruption Detectedmessage before  
proceeding with the upgrade. If corruption is detected, refer to No  
Translations After Upgrade in Appendix B, ‘‘Troubleshooting an Upgrade’’  
to correct the problem.  
!
CAUTION:  
Do not continue with the upgrade until the translations errors are  
corrected.  
Reset SPE status (H/C only)  
1. Type status SPE and press Enter. Wait until the Standby Handshake  
field displays up, which takes about 3 minutes.  
2. Type reset spe-standby 4 and press Enter.  
NOTE:  
You can continue the process while the SPE is resetting.  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
You can set up to 15 customized daylight savings time rules. If you have cabinets  
in several different time zones, you can set up rules for each on a location basis.  
A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition  
to and from daylight savings time. It also specifies the increment at which to  
transition.  
NOTE:  
The default daylight savings rule is 0, no daylight savings.  
1. Type change daylight-savings-rules and press Enter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-17  
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES  
Month___Date  
Rule  
0:  
Change Day  
Time____Increment  
No Daylight Savings  
1:  
Start: first Sunday___ on or after April___ 1 at _2:00  
Stop: first Sunday___ on or after October_ 25 at _2:00  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first ______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _____ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first ______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _____ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first ______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _____ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first ______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _____ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first ______ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
01:00  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
2. Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day,  
Month, Date, Time, and Incrementfields for each rule. (for example,  
1:00 equals one hour)  
NOTE:  
You can change any rule except rule 0 (zero). You cannot delete a  
daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and  
Time screens.  
3. When done, press Enter.  
Set Date and Time  
1. Type set time and press Enter to bring up the Date and Time screen.  
.
DATE AND TIME  
DATE  
TIME  
Day of the Week: Tuesday  
Day of the Month: 8  
Month: February  
Year: 2000  
Hour: 20  
Minute: 30  
Second: XX  
Type: standard  
Daylight Savings Rule: 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-18  
2. Type the day in English (Sunday through Saturday) in the Day of the  
Week:field. See Table 2-3 for English day names When done, press Tab to  
move to next field.  
Table 2-3. English Day of the Week Names  
Day Number  
Day Name  
Sunday  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
3. Type the current month in English (January through December) in the  
Month:field. See Table 2-4 for English month names. When done, press  
Ta b to move to next field.  
Table 2-4. English Month Names  
Number  
Name  
January  
February  
March  
April  
Number  
Name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
July  
8
August  
9
September  
October  
November  
December  
10  
11  
12  
May  
June  
4. Type the day of month (1 through 31) in the Day of the Month:field  
and press Tab to move to the next field.  
5. Type the current year in the Year:field and press TAB to move to the next  
field.  
6. Type the current hour for a 24-hour clock in the Hour:field and press Tab  
to move to the next field.  
7. Type the current minute (0 through 59) in the Minute:field (seconds  
cannot be set). When done, press Tab to move to next field  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-19  
8. Type standard or daylight savings in the Typefield, according to the  
current time in the local time zone. For example, if currently on standard  
time, type standard.  
9. Type the rule number in the Daylight Savings Rulefield.  
10. When all the information is correct, press Enter.  
11. Type display time and press Enter to verify date and time data.  
Set Core Dump Vector  
1. Type set vector f spe-maint and press Enter to set the core dump vector to  
perform a core dump on any system restart.  
Enable TTI  
NOTE:  
Do this step only if the TTI is disabled and you want it enabled.  
1. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter to change the  
TTI field back to its value before the upgrade.  
Release MMI (H/C only)  
1. Type release board cabinet carrier slot and press Enter to release the  
circuit packs, which were busied out earlier.  
Resolve Alarms  
1. Type display alarms and press Enter to examine the alarm log. Resolve  
any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications  
Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Compare it  
with the earlier status.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for each link.  
Enable Scheduled Maintenance  
1. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
2. Type the appropriate time in the Startfield to enable scheduled daily  
maintenance. Make sure the Save Translationfield is set to daily.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-20  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination  
to INADS  
1. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and  
ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps  
in the shaded box. See ‘‘Where to Call for Technical Support’’ on page -xx  
for telephone numbers.  
NOTE:  
As part of the system registration process, the INADS Database  
Administrator enables Alarm Origination.  
2. When administration is completed, log in as craft.  
"init" login administration:  
1. Log in as init.  
2. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter  
to verify that the customer options are properly set.  
3. Go to screen 6, QSIG Optional Features, and set the Basic Call  
Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services  
Protocol b or d on an ISDN-PRI trunk group before the upgrade.  
4. Type change system-parameters offer-options and press Enter.  
5. If the Activate Offerfield is n, set it to y and press Ta b . A warning  
message lets you know whether you need to save translations and  
reboot to make the change permanent.  
6. Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes.  
7. Contact the requester when done.  
Check SPE status (H/C only)  
1. Type status SPE and press Enter. Wait until  
The Standby Refreshedfield shows yes  
The Standby Shadowingfield shows on  
The Standby Handshakefield shows up  
Save Translations  
1. Type save translation and press Enter to copy upgraded translations to  
the system disk, which takes about 2 minutes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-21  
Save Announcements (if necessary)  
1. Type save announcements and press Enter to copy announcements to  
the system disk.  
Back Up Disk  
1. Type backup disk and press Enter to back up all changed files to the  
removable media. This takes about 15 minutes.  
2. Type test stored-data and press Enter to verify the consistency of the MSS  
files on the disk and removable media.  
If standard reliability:  
3. Type list configuration software-version and press Enter to verify all the  
files one last time.  
If high or critical reliability:  
3. Type list configuration software-version long and press Enter to verify all  
the files one last time.  
Return Replaced Equipment  
1. Return replaced equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the  
requirements outlined in the following books:  
BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations  
Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5r/R6r/R7r to R8r without Adding Memory  
Upgrade the software and hardware  
2
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
3
3-1  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN  
and Adding Memory  
3
This chapter provides the information necessary to upgrade a Single-Carrier  
Cabinet (SCC) Release 5si/Release 5si + memory/Release 6si system with a  
TN790 RISC processor to a Release 8 EPN.  
The existing SCC PPN is always upgraded to an EPN. The new multicarrier  
cabinet always serves as the PPN. Upgrading to an EPN for a Release 8r  
requires changing, and often restructuring, the expansion interface circuit packs.  
Hardware changes (including carrier replacement in the SCC cabinet) is  
required.  
This upgrade assumes that the Release 8r cabinet has already been installed. If  
not, refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation  
and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets to install the Release 8r system. Return to this  
chapter when finished.  
In this chapter, all occurrences of Release 5si and Release 5si + memory are  
called Release 5si unless a specific configuration is required to differentiate  
between product offerings.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide  
lists Release 8 features and functions and provides the commands, procedures,  
and forms to initialize and administer the Release 8r.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Read This First  
3
3-2  
Read This First  
Service Interruption  
The upgrade process requires a service interruption of about 2 hours and must  
be closely coordinated with the customer and the local account team.  
Call Management System (CMS)  
The CMS link is dropped and restarted during the upgrade. This causes CMS  
data to be lost. This data loss can be minimized if the upgrade is performed just  
after the last CMS measurement interval.  
All measurement data is lost during the upgrade (including BCMS). If needed,  
the reports may be printed before the upgrade begins.  
CMS could abort the processing of a call if a measured trunk that was part of the  
conference dropped off the call before the end of the call. Customers  
experiencing this symptom and who are running R3V4 CMS should update to  
r3v4ao.e or higher.  
Preventing Translation Errors  
When instructed in this chapter, perform the save translation command.  
Afterward, check for translation errors before proceeding with the upgrade.  
NOTE:  
Be sure that the translations get saved without errors before continuing with  
any upgrade.  
If errors are detected, refer to ‘‘No Translations After Upgrade’’ in Appendix B,  
‘‘Troubleshooting an Upgrade’’ to correct the problem. Do not continue with the  
upgrade until the errors are corrected.  
Communication Between Equipment Rooms  
For an upgrade where some of the equipment resides at a remote location, the  
upgrade activity will be much easier if temporary communications are  
established between the equipment rooms.  
Contact Network Technicians  
The technician for each public and private network accessed by the switch must  
be contacted before the upgrade begins. Otherwise, if these technicians are not  
aware of the service interruption caused by the upgrade, it is possible that  
network-access trunk facilities will be busied out at the far end.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Read This First  
3
3-3  
Relocation of Port Circuit Packs  
With the possible exception of a port circuit pack in slot “01” of carrier “A” that  
must be moved for a TN570 Expansion Interface, an upgrade to Release 8 does  
not cause port circuit packs from the Release 5/6si control cabinet to be moved  
and manually retranslated. This is because a Release 5/6si PPN is always  
upgraded to an EPN. So, during the PPN upgrade to a Release 8r EPN, a  
Release 8r expansion control cabinet (with 14 to 16 available port slots) always  
replaces the Release 5/6si control cabinet (with 10 available port slots), providing  
a net gain of from 4 to 6 port slots.  
If a port circuit pack does reside in slot “01” of control cabinet “A,” the STS  
software upgrade retranslates this circuit pack to reside in an empty port slot in  
the new expansion control cabinet.  
For an upgrade to a critical reliability Release 8r, if a port circuit pack resides in  
slot “02” of port cabinet “B,” the STS software upgrade retranslates this circuit  
pack to occupy another empty port slot in the new expansion control cabinet.  
To provide maximum holdover for a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack that did  
not reside in the control carrier, the STS software upgrade relocates this circuit  
pack to occupy another empty port slot in the new expansion control cabinet.  
To ensure reliable DS1 timing in the upgraded Release 8r system, the STS  
software upgrade relocates the DS1 circuit packs serving as the primary and  
secondary timing sources to occupy 2 empty port slots in the new Release 8r  
PPN.  
When connecting adjuncts to an upgraded Release 8r, STS locates any new  
interface circuit packs (including TN577 Packet Gateway, TN553 Packet Data  
Line, and TN726B Data Line) in the first available slots of the first PPN port  
carrier.  
NOTE:  
To find out where STS relocated these circuit packs, refer to the annotated  
‘‘list configuration all" that STS provides with the new Release 8r removable  
media.  
Usable Circuit Packs  
Every circuit pack used in the upgraded Release 8r system must conform to the  
minimum usable vintage requirements for Release 8r. Those circuit packs  
shipped in the new Release 8r PPN or shipped loose with the new EPN  
equipment must meet the usable vintage specifications. In addition, at a presale  
site inspection, the remediation process must check the vintages of every  
Release 5/6si circuit pack that will be reused with the Release 8r and replace  
those circuit packs with unusable vintages. Refer to Technical Quarterly,  
Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices, for current  
information about usable vintages in a Release 8r system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Read This First  
3
3-4  
Site Inspections  
For the purposes of a Release 8r upgrade, most Release 5/6si systems are  
already equipped with the correct lightwave transceivers. Any older versions of  
these components must be replaced. The earlier versions of lightwave  
transceivers included the 4-series transceivers (4A through 4F). These  
transceivers supported fiber connections up to 7,000 feet (2133 m). Order the  
correct transceivers according to a separate PEC.  
Power and Ground  
The new multicarrier PPN cabinet or any EPN cabinet added for the upgrade can  
be either AC or DC powered. If an added cabinet is powered differently from the  
existing cabinets, the existing cabinets do not have to be converted since mixed  
power configurations are allowed. However, the system’s power and ground  
must be modified so the AC powered cabinets are grounded to the same  
single-point ground bar as the DC powered cabinets.  
DC Isolator  
Each management terminal connected to a DC-powered cabinet, by the  
asynchronous EIA RS-232 interface, requires a 116A isolator. The isolator is  
inserted at the RS-232 interface between the terminal and the interface  
connector to isolate ground between the system and external adjuncts.  
Emergency Transfer Stations  
During routine operation, the ground for the emergency transfer stations is  
derived from the system’s auxiliary cable. Disconnect this ground during the  
upgrade to disable the stations. A ground strap is run to the emergency transfer  
panel. Connect this strap shortly after removing power and disconnect it just  
before restoring power to the upgraded system.  
Converting the Translations  
The translations in the Release 5/6si system must be copied to a spare  
translation card and sent to Software Technical Support (STS) to be converted  
and written to a Release 8r removable media. This process takes 2 weeks. The  
Release 8r media (including 1 with translations) must be on-site before the  
upgrade begins. For each Release 8r processor, 2 media (1 system disk and 1  
backup removable media) must always be retained on site with the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Read This First  
3
3-5  
Software Upgrades  
After a software upgrade, several features require special attention because of  
screen changes or potential naming conflicts in the upgrade process. Most of  
these changes and conflicts relate either to a software upgrade from standard  
ACD to Call Vectoring or to changes in the ARS/AAR features to compensate for  
increasing uncertainty in the North American numbering plan. Also, if ARS is  
enabled (when upgrading from IR1 Release 8 to GD-91 software), it may be  
necessary to modify the Call Type field on the ARS Analysis screen to “unk” for all  
call types except “iop” or “int.”  
After the upgrade, the Software Associate should check these forms to ensure  
the upgraded translations are appropriate for the customer’s needs. Refer to  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide,  
for information to make any required changes.  
ISDN Gateway  
When upgrading to a Release 8r, upgrade the ISDN Gateway (if installed) to the  
correct software release. Call progress messages to the ISDN Gateway may be  
intermittently lost, therefore, this upgrade must occur at the same time as the  
system upgrade.  
Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for the correct software release.  
Single-Mode Fiber Attenuators  
Attenuators may be required when using single-mode fiber. See the table below.  
106060718  
106060734  
106061021  
5 dB attenuator  
10 dB attenuator  
15 dB attenuator  
2 for each fiber connection  
2 for each fiber connection  
2 for each fiber connection  
A different value attenuator may be required even though the fiber span is  
between the same 2 cabinets (local and remote cabinet). Refer to DEFINITY  
Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier  
Cabinets for detailed fiber attenuator information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Task Tables  
3
3-6  
Task Tables  
Table 3-1 provides the high-level tasks to perform the upgrades in this chapter.  
Table 3-1. Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r System  
á
Task Description  
Page  
3-8  
Busyout Multimedia Interface Circuit Packs  
Save Translations and Announcements  
Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance  
Label Cables  
3-9  
3-9  
3-12  
3-12  
3-12  
3-12  
3-13  
3-13  
3-13  
3-14  
3-14  
3-14  
3-14  
3-15  
3-15  
3-15  
3-15  
3-16  
3-18  
3-20  
3-22  
Check Link Status  
Disable TTI  
Power Down Existing System  
Remove Circuit Packs  
Disconnect TDM/LAN Cables and ICC Cables  
Remove the Existing Control Cabinet  
Install Port Cabinets  
Install Circuit Packs  
Install TDM/LAN Bus Terminators  
Connect TDM/LAN Cables and ICC Cables  
Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Optic Cabling — Standard  
Reliability Release 8r  
Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Optic Cabling — High Reliability  
Release 8r  
3-27  
Continued on next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Task Tables  
3
3-7  
Table 3-1. Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r System Continued  
á
Task Description  
Page  
Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Cabling — Critical Reliability  
Release 8r  
3-33  
Connect Power and Ground  
3-46  
3-47  
3-47  
3-47  
3-47  
3-47  
3-48  
3-48  
3-49  
3-49  
3-49  
3-51  
3-52  
3-52  
3-53  
3-53  
3-53  
3-53  
3-53  
3-54  
3-55  
3-55  
Install System Access Ports  
Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
Reboot the System  
Label Main Distribution Frame  
Reconnect Cables  
Power Up the EPN Cabinet  
Install Rear Ground Plates (Systems with Earthquake Protection)  
Install Cable Clamps  
Retranslate Port Circuits  
Re-record Announcements (TN750/B Only)  
Administer Fiber Links  
Enable TTI  
Check Link Status  
Resolve Alarms  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS  
Save Translations  
Return Replaced Equipment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Preliminary Procedures  
3
3-8  
Preliminary Procedures  
During an upgrade, STS must convert the Release 5/6si translations and write  
them to a Release 7r or later tape. The tape is sent to STS for conversion. During  
this time, the customer should put a freeze on any new translations while the  
spare tape is being converted. If not, be sure the customer’s switch administrator  
keeps detailed records of any translation changes made during that interval.  
These records will facilitate the reassignment of any changes after the upgrade.  
The new Release 8r removable media (1 with the converted translations, 2 if  
duplicated) must be on-site before the upgrade begins.  
Since a new Release 8r PPN is installed during the upgrade, STS changes the  
PN number of the Release 5/6si PPN to be converted to a Release 8r EPN. To  
minimize the renumbering of PNs and to minimize the rewiring and relabeling of  
the MDF, the tape conversion assigns the next PN number (after the highest  
numbered PN in the system) to the Release 5/6si PPN to become a Release 8r  
EPN. For example, if a Release 5/6si system with 2 PNs (a PPN and an EPN) were  
upgraded to a Release 8r, the tape conversion software assigns PN ‘‘1” to the  
new PPN and PN ‘‘3” to the additional EPN derived from the old Release 5/6si  
PPN.  
Make Spare Translation Card and Mail to STS for  
Upgrade  
A spare translation card must be acquired from the remediation before  
upgrading the system. For each processor, there must always be 2 translation  
cards on site with the system. Do not send a system or backup translation card to  
STS.  
1. Install the spare translation card into the TN777B on the existing system.  
2. Type save translation and press Enter. This instructs the system to write all  
translation information from memory to the translation card.  
NOTE:  
The off-site STS translation upgrade does not preserve the content of  
recorded announcements. Therefore, during the upgrade, any  
announcements stored on a TN750/B circuit pack must be  
re-recorded.  
3. Remove the spare translation card and insert the system translation card.  
4. Mail the spare translation card to STS (with next-day delivery).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Preliminary Procedures  
3
3-9  
Check Software Release Letter  
1. Check the Software Release Letter that accompanies the Release 8  
removable media. This letter contains the recommended upgrade  
procedures. Always use the Software Release Letter when upgrading a  
system.  
2. If the letter is not included with the Release 8 removable media, perform  
the following procedures.  
Busyout Multimedia Interface Circuit Packs  
Perform this step only if the system is high or critical reliability and contains  
MMCH circuit packs. Multimedia-to-voice station calls are not preserved on an  
upgrade. Failure to busy-out the TN787 Multimedia Interface circuit packs will  
result in unusable TN787 and TN788 Multimedia Voice Conditioner ports.  
1. Type display system-parameters customer-options and press Enter. If  
the MMCH option is set to y, continue to step 2. If not, skip to ‘‘Save  
Translations and Announcements’’.  
2. Type list configuration all and press Enter. Locate all of the TN787  
Multimedia Interface circuit packs.  
3. Type busyout board <location> and press Enter for each TN787. This  
prevents any further multimedia-to-voice connections and drops all active  
connections.  
Save Translations and Announcements  
1. Log in at the management terminal on the Release 5/6 system.  
2. If the system is duplex, type status system and press Enter to verify the  
system is in the ‘‘active/standby" mode.  
3. Type save translation and press Enter. This instructs the system to write all  
translation information from memory to the translation cards.  
4. Check for translation errors before proceeding with the upgrade. If errors  
are detected, refer to ‘‘No Translations After Upgrade’’ in Appendix B,  
‘‘Troubleshooting an Upgrade’’ to correct the problem. Do not continue  
until the errors are corrected.  
5. If the system contains a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack, type  
display announcements and press Enter.  
6. If administered recorded announcements are listed, type save  
announcements and press Enter.  
7. Remove the translation card and install the backup removable media or  
card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-10  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
During the wiring of the PPN installation, label the MDF with the new PN number  
of the Release 5/6si PPN. The STS software upgrade assigns the next PN number  
(after the highest numbered PN in the Release 5/6si system) to the upgraded  
Release 8r EPN.  
Required Tools  
The following tools and items may be required during the upgrade:  
1/4-inch flat blade screwdriver  
1/4-inch socket with ratchet (optional)  
Long-nose pliers to straighten backplane pins  
Static-proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit  
packs  
Labels for identifying the port circuit packs and cables attached to the  
rear of cabinets  
Repair kit for backplane pins (KS-22876 L2 or equivalent)  
One copy of each of the following manuals:  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Maintenance for R8r  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Administrator’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-11  
Required Hardware  
The equipment in Table 3-2 must be on-site before the upgrade begins.  
Table 3-2. Required Hardware  
Equipment  
Description  
Quantity  
J58890N  
Expansion Control Cabinet  
1
1
106647985  
103281788  
TN775B Maintenance circuit pack  
TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack  
Depends on reliability type  
and number of PNs  
103281812  
TN573B Switched Node Interface circuit pack  
Depends on reliability type  
and number of PNs  
407439975 or  
407598325  
20-Foot Multi-Mode Fiber Optic Cable  
20-Foot Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable  
1 to 12  
1
106455348 or  
106455363 or  
107731853  
9823-A Lightwave Transceiver  
9823-B Lightwave Transceiver  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
2 to 12  
2 to 12  
2 to 12  
1
2
3
J58890to-O L1  
106689516  
846307817  
846307809  
H600-248 G1  
846408268  
846408386  
846408250  
846408243  
Release 8 Removable Media  
2 or 4  
4
TN771D Maintenance Test circuit pack  
Lower Rear Cover  
1 or 2  
5
1
Ground Plate  
1
6
ICC Cables  
2
Earthquake Front Panel (earthquake protection only)  
Earthquake Ground Plate (earthquake protection only)  
Stiffener (earthquake protection only)  
1
1
1
1
Earthquake Front Mounting Angle (earthquake  
protection only)  
2
106060718  
106060734  
106061021  
5 dB attenuator (single-mode fiber only)  
10 dB attenuator (single-mode fiber only)  
15 dB attenuator (single-mode fiber only)  
2 for each fiber connection  
2 for each fiber connection  
2 for each fiber connection  
2
2
1. For each fiber connection, 1 lightwave transceiver is installed in 1 port network, and a like transceiver  
in the adjacent port network. 4E transceivers cannot be reused. Additional transceivers, ordered  
separately, ship loose with the EPN equipment.  
2. The 300A is connected using 2 fiber optic cables. 5, 10, or 15 dB attenuators may be required.  
3. Depending on the reliability type of the Release 8r system. Two removable media are required for a  
standard reliability system; 4 for a high or critical reliability system.  
4. Depending on the number of EPNs in a critical reliability Release 8r system.  
5. Required for the ‘‘B" port cabinet of a critical reliability Release 8r EPN.  
6. Required for a critical reliability Release 8r EPN.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-12  
Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance  
1. During the upgrade, follow routine preventive maintenance procedures on  
the system to be upgraded. For more information, refer to the “Preventive  
Maintenance” section in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server  
Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
Label Cables  
1. To make reconnecting the cables simpler and more reliable, label every  
connector cable associated with the system.  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter.  
2. Make note of all enabled links.  
3. Type status link <number> and press Enter.  
4. Check the following items and note which links are in-service. You will  
need this information after the upgrade.  
PPP links  
Audix links  
ISDN  
BX25  
Ethernet  
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each enabled link.  
Disable TTI  
!
CAUTION:  
If you do not disable the TTI, the translations can be corrupted.  
1. Make sure the ISDN is in service. If not, attempt to busy out and release  
the ISDN D-channel/link. This will bring the ISDN trunks back into service.  
2. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter.  
3. On the second screen, set the Enabled?field to n to de-activate the TTI  
feature.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-13  
Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before  
powering down the system cabinet can damage the LAN Gateway disk.  
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. See the DEFINITY Communications  
System Generic 3 Installation, Administration and Maintenance of  
CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway for the procedure to log  
on.  
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.  
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.  
4. Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu.  
5. Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors.  
Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System  
1. If a DEFINITY AUDIX System resides in the system to be upgraded, shut  
down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down.  
Refer to the ‘‘DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures’’ at the end of this  
chapter.  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down  
the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk.  
2. Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors.  
Power Down Existing System  
1. At each PPN cabinet power supply, set the main circuit breaker to OFF.  
!
CAUTION:  
Powering down the PPN will cause important system data, such as  
BCMS data, records of queued ACD calls, Automatic Wakeup  
requests, and Do Not Disturb requests to be lost. Refer to DEFINITY  
Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r,  
for information about preparing the system for a power down.  
2. At each EPN cabinet power supply, set the main circuit breaker to OFF.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-14  
Disconnect Power and Ground  
1. Disconnect the cabinet power cords from the rear of each cabinet.  
2. Disconnect the 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) coupled bonding conductor wire.  
3. Disconnect the 6 AWG (#40) (4.1 mm2) cabinet ground wire from the  
ground bar in the cabinet.  
Install Emergency Transfer Ground Wire  
!
CAUTION:  
To avoid contaminating single-point ground, do not connect the ground  
strap while the system is powered up.  
1. Connect a 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) wire either to pin 49 of the connecting  
block or to pin 49 of the CAP (cable access panel) associated with the  
emergency transfer panel.  
2. Route the other end of the wire to an approved ground and connect.  
Disconnect Equipment and Cables  
1. Disconnect all of the connector cables attaching to the PPN.  
2. Disconnect the PC from the TERM connector.  
3. Remove the ground plate(s) from between all of the PPN cabinets.  
4. Remove the top and bottom rear covers from all of the PPN cabinets.  
Remove Circuit Packs  
1. Label each port circuit pack in the control cabinet with its slot number.  
2. Remove all circuit packs and power units from the control cabinet. Store  
the circuit packs in the static-proof packaging.  
NOTE:  
If a TN756 tone-detector/generator was removed from the Release  
5/6si, a new Release 8r tone clock (TN2182B) replaces this circuit  
pack. The TN2182B Tone-Clock replaces the tone detector circuits  
on the TN756. A TN2182B eliminates the need for a TN748B.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-15  
Disconnect TDM/LAN Cables and ICC Cables  
1. Remove and retain all of the TDM/LAN cables.  
2. If the Release 5/6si system is standard reliability, remove and retain the  
ICC cables.  
3. If the Release 5/6si system is duplicated, remove the ICC cables. They are  
replaced with new ICC cables (H600-248 G1).  
Remove the Existing Control Cabinet  
Since the control cabinet is at the bottom of the port network, dismantle the  
cabinet stack. Disconnect all the power, ground, TDM, ICC, and connector  
cables.  
1. Remove the cabinet clip between each cabinet or front earthquake plate  
as provided.  
2. Remove the rear ground plate.  
3. Remove the port cabinets from the stack.  
!
CAUTION:  
A port cabinet may weigh as much as 125 pounds. Use lifting  
precautions.  
4. If the system is duplicated, remove the control cabinet in position ‘‘B." It is  
not reused.  
5. If the basic control cabinet in position ‘‘A" is earthquake mounted, remove  
and retain the hardware securing the cabinet to the floor.  
6. Remove the basic control cabinet. It is not reused.  
Unpack and Install Expansion Control Cabinet  
1. Unpack and inspect the J58890N Expansion Control Cabinet.  
2. Position the expansion control cabinet at the desired location.  
3. Reinstall the earthquake mounting hardware, if required.  
Install Port Cabinets  
1. Replace the port cabinets into their proper positions.  
NOTE:  
For a duplicated Release 5/6si, the J58890M Control Cabinet can be  
replaced by a J58890H Port Cabinet in position ‘‘B."  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-16  
Install Circuit Packs  
1. Replace the circuit packs and power supplies in port cabinets “C” and “D”  
if they were previously removed.  
2. Using the label on the front of the carrier and the annotated “list  
configuration all” (provided with the Release 8r removable media), install  
the control circuit packs into the new expansion control cabinet.  
3. Install the port circuit packs into the “A” cabinet using the label on the front  
of the carrier and the annotated “list configuration all” as a guide.  
NOTE:  
Since the new Release 8r expansion control carrier has 6 more port  
slots than the removed control carrier, there should be no need to  
retranslate these circuit packs.  
4. For an EPN in a critical reliability system, install a TN2182B Tone-Clock  
and a TN570 EI in slots “1” and “2” of port cabinet “B.” See Table 3-3.  
Table 3-3. TN570 Expansion Interface Requirements  
2 PNs w/o Critical 2 PNs w/Critical 3 PNs w/o Critical 3 PNs w/Critical  
Cabinet  
PPN  
Reliability  
Reliability  
Reliability  
Reliability  
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
EPN 1  
EPN 2  
N/A  
N/A  
Change Cabinet Address Plugs  
If a duplicated control cabinet was removed from position “B” and was not  
replaced with a new port cabinet, the upgraded EPN’s port cabinets occupy  
different positions in the cabinet stack.  
1. Behind each port cabinet, find the address plug attached to 2 of the 6  
backplane pins to the right of the pin-field block for slot “00.”  
2. Change the location of each port cabinet address plug to reflect the  
cabinet’s current position. See Figure 3-1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-17  
6
4
5
1
2
7
3
add_plug CJL 050906  
Figure Notes  
1. Address Plug (Shown Set to Carrier D) 5. Right Edge of Cabinet  
2. Carrier B Jumper Location (Default)  
3. Carrier C Jumper Location  
4. Right Edge of Backplane  
6. Backplane Slot 00  
7. To Connector Panel  
Figure 3-1. Cabinet Address Plug Location  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-18  
Install TDM/LAN Bus Terminators  
1. If the Release 5/6si PPN has only 1 cabinet, install the 2 AHF110 TDM/LAN  
bus terminators per Figure 3-2.  
Figure Notes  
1. Control Cabinet (“A” Position)  
3. AHF110 TDM LAN/Bus Terminator  
(Slot 01)  
2. AHF110 TDM LAN/Bus Terminator  
(Slot 18)  
Figure 3-2. TDM/LAN Bus Terminators for Single-Carrier Cabinet EPN  
2. If the Release 5/6si PPN has more than 1 cabinet:  
a. Install the AHF110 TDM/LAN bus terminator in Slot 03 on the right  
side of the expansion control cabinet as shown in Figure 3-3.  
b. Install the AHF110 TDM/LAN bus terminator on the top port cabinet,  
at the end of the daisy chain of the bus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-19  
Figure Notes  
1. AHF110 TDM LAN/Bus Terminator  
2. Slot 17  
6. Slot 18  
7. J58890H Port Cabinet (“D”  
Position)  
3. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L3)  
4. Slot 00  
8. J58890H Port Cabinet (“C”  
Position)  
5. Slot 03  
9. J58890H Port Cabinet (“B” Position)  
10. J58890NExpansion Control Cabinet  
(“A” Position)  
Figure 3-3. TDM/LAN Connections for Release 5/6si EPN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-20  
Connect TDM/LAN Cables and ICC Cables  
1. Route and connect the TDM/LAN cables. If any of the Release 5/6si port  
cabinets (being upgraded to Release 8r cabinets) were originally R1V3  
port cabinets, use the following steps to route a cable between an R1V3  
upper cabinet and cabinet beneath it. Do not run a new cable through the  
existing slot in the rear shelf of the upper cabinet.  
a. Loosen the 2 left connector panel screws, then remove the other 2  
connector panel screws.  
b. Attach the TDM/LAN cable to the backplane and slide the cable  
between the connector panel and the rear shelf (not through the  
existing slot in the shelf). Route the cable along the bottom of the  
cabinet.  
c. Replace and tighten the connector panel screws.  
2. For a critical reliability system, connect the ICC cables as shown in Table  
3-4, Figure 3-4, and Figure 3-5.  
NOTE:  
For a duplicated cabinet, do not use the ICC cables (H600-259 G1)  
removed from the duplicated Release 5/6si PPN. Use the new ICC  
cables (H600-248 G1) supplied with the upgrade.  
Table 3-4. Intercabinet Cable Connections  
Connect ICC Cables  
From  
Pin-Field Block  
To  
Pin-Field Block  
Carrier  
Carrier  
EPN  
J58890N  
ICCA  
ICCB  
J58890H  
ICCA  
ICCB  
3. On the “A” carrier, verify the CFY1 current limiter (CURL) connects to  
pinfield block “00” (see Figure 3-4).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-21  
ICCB  
20  
ICCA  
20  
TERM  
19  
19  
25 12  
24  
2
1
2
1
14  
1
CURL  
Pinfield  
00  
00  
3
2
1
0
Figure 3-4. ICC Pinfield Blocks on J58890N Expansion Control Cabinet  
24  
ICCB  
00  
3 2 1 0  
6.00  
5.00  
4.00  
3.00  
2.00  
1.00  
0.00  
ICCA  
Figure 3-5. ICC Pinfield Blocks on J58890H Port Cabinet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Optic  
Cabling Standard Reliability Release 8r  
After all fiber optic equipment is installed, refer to Chapter A, ‘‘Fiber Link  
Administration’’.  
1. Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave  
transceiver. Label every cable installed. This section provides figures  
showing typical examples of these connections.  
The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled “TX” (transmit) or “RX”  
(receive), while the fibers attaching to each connector are numbered either “1” or  
“2.” See Figure 3-7.  
Collocated Port Networks  
For a standard reliability system with 1 collocated EPN, use 1 fiber optic cable  
and 2 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks.  
For a standard reliability system with 2 collocated EPNs, use 3 fiber optic cables  
and 6 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks.  
NOTE:  
Based on floor plan considerations, the length of these cables may vary.  
20-foot (6.1 m) cables are normally adequate for a Release 8r with 2 PNs.  
For collocated cabinets, route the fiber optic cables directly from the PPN to each  
EPN cabinet. Since a Release 8r PPN cabinet is collocated with a Single-Carrier  
Cabinet stack, the preferred routing is to run the cables down the cable tray and  
out the bottom of the PPN cabinet. The cables are then run to the EPN cabinet  
and up the outside of the rear panels to the desired carrier level.  
Fiber Remoted Port Networks  
For a standard reliability system with 1 fiber-remoted EPN, use 2 fiber optic  
cables,2 lightwave transceivers, and 2 lightguide interface units (provided by the  
PSC).  
For a standard reliability system with 2 fiber-remoted EPNs, use 6 fiber optic  
cables, 6 lightwave transceivers, and 6 lightguide interface units (provided by  
the PSC).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-23  
DS1 CONV-Remoted Port Networks  
For a standard reliability system with 1 DS1 CONV-remoted EPN, use 2 DS1  
CONV circuit packs (TN1654), 2 DS1 Conv-to-EI cables (846448637 and/or  
846448645), two H-600-348 cables, from 1 to 4 pairs of Channel Service Units  
(CSUs), and from 1 to 4 pairs of MDF cables (provided with the CSUs).  
NOTE:  
The TN1654 requires the use of a TN573B Switched Node Interface circuit  
pack  
For a standard reliability system with 2 DS1 CONV-remoted EPNs, this  
arrangement requires:  
6 DS1 CONV circuit packs (TN1654)  
6 DS1 CONV-to-EI cables (846448637 and/or 846448645)  
6 H-600-348 cables  
3, 6, 9, or 12 pairs of CSUs  
3, 6, 9, or 12 pairs of wall-field cables (provided with CSUs)  
5, 10, or 15 dB attenuators (single-mode fiber only)  
5dB Attenuator  
10dB Attenuator  
106060718  
106060734  
106061021  
For 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind port carrier B of the multicarrier PPN. See Figure 3-6 and Figure  
3-7:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1B02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect 1 end of the appropriate fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver at slot 1B02.  
c. Route the fiber optic cable from the lightwave transceiver to the  
cabinet’s cable tray and down out of the cabinet to the EPN stack.  
d. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-24  
2. Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 2:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A01.  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable from the PPN to the  
lightwave transceiver at slot 2A01.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
d. Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable, and place the coil  
either in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf (holding the  
power supply) of the PPN cabinet.  
Figure Notes  
1. Cabinet 1 PPN  
4. From Cabinet 3 A1 to Cabinet 1 C2  
5. From Cabinet 2 A2 to Cabinet 3 A2  
6. From Cabinet 1 B2 to Cabinet 2 A1  
2. Cabinet Stack 2 EPN 1  
3. Cabinet Stack 3 EPN 2  
Figure 3-6. Standard RDeoliwanbloialditfyromRWelwewa.sSeom8ranwuailtsh.co2mo. Arll3MPaonuratlsNSeetawrchorAkndsDownload.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-25  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff05 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
5. TX Connector  
6. RX Connector  
2. To PPN Carrier B Slot 1B02  
3. To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01  
(Cabinet Stack 2)  
Figure 3-7. Typical Fiber Optic Connections  
For 1 or 2 Fiber-Remoted Expansion Port  
Networks  
1. Behind port carrier B of the multicarrier PPN. See Figure 3-6 and Figure  
3-8:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1B02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
c. Route the cable to the cabinet cable tray and out of the cabinet  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
d. Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interface unit provided.  
e. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-26  
2. Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 2:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A01.  
b. Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
c. Route the cable down the outside of the rear covers and through  
the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
d. Connect the fiber optic cable to the lightguide interface unit.  
e. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
f. Coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and place the coil in the cable  
manager.  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
cydf013 CJL102396  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
2. PPN Carrier B Slot 1B02  
5. Fiber Optic Cross-Connect Facility  
6. Lightguide Interface Unit (LIU)  
3. EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01 (Cabinet 7. TX Connector  
Stack 2)  
8. RX Connector  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
Figure 3-8. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-27  
Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Optic  
Cabling High Reliability Release 8r  
1. Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave  
transceiver.  
This section provides figures showing typical ways of making these connections.  
The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled “TX” (transmit) or “RX”  
(receive), while the fibers attaching to each connector are numbered “1” or “2.”  
See Figure 3-10.  
Collocated Port Networks  
For a high reliability system with 1 collocated EPN, use 1 fiber optic cable and 2  
lightwave transceivers, or 1 single-mode fiber optic cable and 2 single-mode  
lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks.  
For a high reliability system with 2 collocated EPN, use 3 fiber optic cables and 6  
lightwave transceivers, or 3 single-mode fiber optic cables and 6 single-mode  
lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks.  
NOTE:  
Based on floor plan considerations, the length of these cables may vary.  
20-foot (6.1 m) cables are normally adequate for a Release 8r with 2 port  
networks.  
For collocated cabinets, route the fiber optic cables directly from the PPN to each  
EPN cabinet. Since a Release 8r PPN cabinet is collocated with a Single-Carrier  
Cabinet stack, the preferred routing is to run the cables down the cable tray and  
out the bottom of the PPN cabinet. The cables are then run to the EPN cabinet  
and up the outside of the rear panels to the desired carrier.  
Fiber-Remoted Port Networks  
For a high reliability system with 1 fiber-remoted EPN, use 2 fiber optic cables, 2  
lightwave transceivers, and 2 lightguide interface units (provided by the PSC).  
For a high reliability system with 2 fiber-remoted EPNs, use 6 fiber optic cables, 6  
lightwave transceivers, and 6 lightwave-interface units (provided by the PSC).  
DS1 CONV-Remoted Port Networks  
For a high reliability system with 1 DS1 CONV-remoted expansion port network,  
use 2 DS1 CONV circuit packs (TN1654), 2 DS1 CONV-to-EI cables (846448637  
and/or 846448645), 2 H-600-348 cables, from 1 to 4 pairs of channel service  
units (CSUs), and from 1 to 4 pairs of wall-field cables (provided with the CSUs).  
NOTE:  
The TN1654 requires a TN573B Switch Node Interface circuit pack  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-28  
For a high reliability system with 2 DS1 Conv-remoted expansion port networks,  
this arrangement requires:  
6 DS1 Converter circuit packs (TN1654)  
6 DS1 Converter-to-EI cables (846448637 and/or 846448645)  
6 H-600-348 cables  
3, 6, 9, or 12 pairs of CSUs  
3, 6, 9, or 12 pairs of wall-field cables (provided with CSUs)  
For 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind port carrier C of the multicarrier PPN. See Figure 3-9 and Figure  
3-10:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1C02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect 1 end of the appropriate fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver at slot 1C02.  
c. Route the fiber optic cable from the lightwave transceiver to the  
cabinet’s cable tray and down, out of the cabinet, to the EPN stack.  
d. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control cabinet A EPN stack 2:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable from the PPN to the  
lightwave transceiver at slot 2A01.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
d. Coil up the surplus fiber optic cable, and place the coil either in the  
cable manager or on the bottom shelf (holding the power supply) of  
the PPN cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-29  
For 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind port carrier D of the multicarrier PPN:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1D02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect 1 end of the appropriate fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver at slot 1D02.  
c. Route the cable to the cabinet’s cable tray and down, out of the  
cabinet, to the EPN stack.  
d. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 3:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 3A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable from the PPN to the  
lightwave transceiver at slot 3A01.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
d. Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and place it either in the cable  
manager or on the bottom shelf (holding the power supply) of the  
PPN cabinet.  
3. Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 2:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
c. Route the cable down the outside of the rear covers to the other  
EPN stack.  
d. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-30  
4. Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 3:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 3A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable from the PPN to the  
lightwave transceiver at slot 3A02.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
d. Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and attach it (with a cable tie) to a  
leg of an EPN cable clamp.  
Figure Notes  
1. Cabinet 1 PPN  
3. Cabinet Stack 3 EPN 2  
2. Cabinet Stack 2 EPN 1  
Figure 3-9. High Reliability Release 8r with 2 or 3 Port Networks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-31  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff05 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
5. TX Connector  
6. RX Connector  
2. To PPN Carrier C Slot 1C02  
3. To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01  
(Cabinet Stack 2)  
Figure 3-10. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1  
For 1 or 2 Fiber-Remoted Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind port carrier C of the multicarrier PPN. See Figure 3-9 and Figure  
3-11:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1C02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
c. Route the fiber cable to the cabinet cable tray and out of the  
cabinet through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect  
facility.  
d. Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interface unit provided.  
e. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-32  
2. Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 2:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect a fiber cable to the transceiver just installed.  
c. Route the fiber cable down the outside of the rear covers and  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
d. Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interface unit provided.  
e. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
f. Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and place it in the cable manager.  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
cydf013 CJL102396  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
5. Fiber Optic Cross-Connect Facility  
6. Lightguide Interface Unit (LIU)  
7. TX Connector  
2. To PPN Carrier B Slot 1C02  
3. To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01  
(Cabinet Stack 2)  
8. RX Connector  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
Figure 3-11. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-33  
Interconnect Port Networks with Fiber Cabling —  
Critical Reliability Release 8r  
1. Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave  
transceiver. This section provides figures showing typical ways of making  
these connections.  
The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled “TX” (transmit) or “RX”  
(receive), while the fibers attaching to each connector are numbered “1” or “2.”’  
See Figure 3-13.  
Collocated Port Networks  
For a critical reliability system with 1 collocated expansion port network, use 2  
fiber optic cables and 4 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks.  
For a critical reliability system with 2 collocated expansion port networks, use 6  
fiber optic cables and 12 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks.  
NOTE:  
Based on floor plan considerations, the length of these cables may vary.  
20-foot (6.1 m) cables are normally adequate for a Release 8r with 2 port  
networks.  
For collocated cabinets, route the fiber optic cables directly from the PPN to each  
EPN cabinet. Since a Release 8r PPN cabinet is collocated with a Single-Carrier  
Cabinet stack, the preferred routing is to run the cables down the cable tray and  
out the bottom of the PPN cabinet. The cables are then run to the EPN cabinet  
and up the outside of the rear panels to the desired carrier level.  
Fiber-Remoted Port Networks  
For a critical reliability system with 1 fiber-remoted EPN, use 4 fiber optic cables,  
4 lightwave transceivers, and 4 lightguide interface units (provided by the PSC).  
For a critical reliability system with 2 fiber-remoted EPN, use 12 fiber optic  
cables, 12 lightwave transceivers, and 12 lightguide interface units (provided by  
the PSC).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-34  
DS1 CONV-Remoted Port Networks  
For a critical reliability system with 1 DS1 CONV-remoted EPN, this arrangement  
requires:  
Four DS1 CONV circuit packs (TN1654)  
Four DS1 CONV-to-EI cables (847245750 and/or 847245768)  
Four H-600-348 cables  
Two, 4, 6, or 8 pairs of channel service units (CSUs)  
Two, 4, 6, or 8 pairs of wall-field cables (provided with the CSUs)  
5, 10, or 15 dB attenuators (single-mode fiber only).  
5dB Attenuator  
10dB Attenuator  
15dB Attenuator  
106060718  
106060734  
106061021  
For a critical reliability system with 2 DS1 CONV-remoted EPNs, this arrangement  
requires:  
12 DS1 CONV circuit packs (TN1654)  
12 DS1 CONV-to-EI cables (847245750 and/or 847245768)  
12 H-600-348 cables  
6, 12, 18, or 24 pairs of CSUs  
6, 12, 18, or 24 pairs of wall-field cables (provided with CSUs)  
5, 10, or 15 dB attenuators (single-mode fiber only).  
5dB Attenuator  
10dB Attenuator  
15dB Attenuator  
106060718  
106060734  
106061021  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-35  
For 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind port carrier C of the multicarrier PPN. See Figure 3-12 and Figure  
3-13:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1C02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect 1 end of the appropriate fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver just installed.  
c. Route the fiber optic cable from the lightwave transceiver to the  
cabinet’s cable tray and down, out of the cabinet, to the EPN stack.  
d. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind port cabinet B of EPN stack 2:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2B02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable coming from the PPN  
to the lightwave transceiver just installed.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
d. Coil the surplus fiber cable and place it either in the cable manager  
or on the bottom shelf (holding the power supply) of the PPN  
cabinet.  
3. Behind port carrier D of the multicarrier PPN:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 1D02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
c. Route the fiber cable to the cabinet’s cable tray and down, out of  
the cabinet, to the EPN stack.  
d. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-36  
4. Behind control cabinet A of EPN stack 2:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on the connector at slot 2A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable coming from the PPN  
to the lightwave transceiver at slot 2A01.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
d. Coil the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager or on  
the bottom shelf (holding the power supply) of the PPN cabinet.  
Figure Notes  
1. Cabinet 1 PPN  
3. Cabinet Stack 3 EPN 2  
2. Cabinet Stack 2 EPN 1  
Figure 3-12. Critical Reliability Release 8r with 2 or 3 Port Networks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-37  
RX TX  
4
3
4
3
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff06 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
5. EPN1 Cabinet B Slot 2B02  
6. Fiber Optic Cable  
7. TX Connector  
2. To PPN Carrier D Slot 1D02  
3. To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01  
(Cabinet Stack 2)  
8. RX Connector  
4. PPN Carrier C Slot 1C02  
Figure 3-13. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-38  
Switch-Connected Port Networks  
For 1 to 15 Standard Reliability EPNs.  
1. Behind the PPN cabinet. See Figure 3-14:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1E02.  
b. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1B02.  
c. Connect 1 end of the metallic intercarrier cable to the lightwave  
transceiver at slot 1E02.  
d. Route the intercarrier cable from the lightwave transceiver to the  
cabinet cable tray and upward to carrier ‘‘B."  
e. Connect the other end of the intercarrier cable to the lightwave  
transceiver at slot 1B02.  
f. Attach the intercarrier cable (with cable ties) to the wall of the cable  
tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind switch node carrier E of PPN cabinet 1. See Figure 3-14:  
a. For each EPN, install 1 lightwave transceiver on a cable connector  
with the following order of slots: 1E20, 1E03, 1E19, 1E04, 1E18,  
1E05, and so forth.  
b. Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave  
transceiver, just installed.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cables (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
3. Behind control cabinet A of each single-carrier EPN:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot A01.  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed, at slot A01.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
d. Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable, and place the coil  
either in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf (holding the  
power supply) of the PPN cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-39  
Figure Notes  
1. Cabinet 1 PPN with 1 Switch Node 4. Add Links to EPNs in Alternating  
Order (20, 3, 19, 4, 18, 5, and so forth)  
2. Cabinet Stack 2-16 EPN  
5. To additional EPNs  
3. Metallic Cable (H600-278)  
Figure 3-14. Fiber Optic Connections Through Center Stage Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-40  
For 1 to 15 High Reliability EPNs.  
1. Behind the PPN cabinet. See Figure 3-15:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1E02.  
b. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1C02.  
c. Connect 1 end of the metallic intercarrier cable to the lightwave  
transceiver at slot 1E02.  
d. Route the intercarrier cable from the lightwave transceiver to the  
cabinet’s cable tray and upward to carrier ‘‘C."  
e. Connect the other end of the intercarrier cable to the lightwave  
transceiver at slot 1C02.  
f. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1E20.  
g. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1D02.  
h. Connect 1 end of the metallic intercarrier cable to the lightwave  
transceiver at slot 1E20.  
i. Route the intercarrier cable from the lightwave transceiver to the  
cabinet’s cable tray and upward to carrier ‘‘D."  
j. Connect the other end of the intercarrier cable to the lightwave  
transceiver at slot 1D02.  
k. Attach the intercarrier cables (with cable ties) to the wall of the  
cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind switch node carrier E of PPN cabinet 1. See Figure 3-15:  
a. For each EPN, install 1 lightwave transceiver on a cable connector  
with the following order of slots: 1E03, 1E19, 1E04, 1E18, 1E05,  
1E17, and so forth.  
b. Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave  
transceiver, just installed.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cables (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable-tie positions.  
d. Behind control cabinet A of each single-carrier EPN:  
e. Install the same kind of lightwave transceiver on cable connector at  
slot A01.  
f. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed, at slot A01.  
g. Coil the surplus length of fiber optic cable, and place the coil either  
in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf (holding the power  
supply) of the PPN cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-41  
]
Figure Notes  
1. Cabinet 1 PPN with 1 Switch Node  
2. Cabinet Stack 2-16 EPN  
3. H600-278 Metallic Cable  
4. Add Links to EPNs in Alternating  
Order (3, 19, 4, 18, 5, 17, and so forth)  
5. To Additional EPNs  
Figure 3-15. Fiber Optic Connections Through Center Stage Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-42  
For 1 to 15 Critical Reliability EPNs.  
1. Behind the PPN cabinet. See Figure 3-16:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1E01.  
b. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1E02.  
c. Connect the metallic intracarrier cable to the lightwave transceivers  
at slots 1E01 and 1E02.  
d. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1D01.  
e. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1D02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceivers  
f. Connect the metallic intracarrier cable to the lightwave transceivers  
at slots 1D01 and 1D02.  
2. Behind switch node carrier E of PPN cabinet 1:  
a. For each EPN, install 1 lightwave transceiver on a cable connector  
with the following order of slots: 1E20, 1E03, 1E19, 1E04, 1E18,  
1E05, and so forth.  
b. Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave  
transceiver, just installed.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cables (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable-tie positions.  
3. Behind control cabinet A of each single-carrier EPN:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed, at slot A01.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
d. Coil the surplus length of fiber optic cable, and place the coil either  
in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf (holding the power  
supply) of the PPN cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-43  
4. Behind switch node carrier D of PPN cabinet 1:  
a. For each EPN, install 1 lightwave transceiver on a cable connector  
with the following order of slots: 1E20, 1E03, 1E19, 1E04, 1E18,  
1E05, and so forth.  
b. Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave  
transceiver, just installed.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cables (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
5. Behind port cabinet B of each single-carrier EPN:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot B02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed, at slot B02.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the rear  
covers of the EPN stack.  
d. Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable, and place the coil  
either in the cable manager or on the bottom shelf (holding the  
power supply) of the PPN cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-44  
Figure Notes  
1. Cabinet 1 with 1 Duplex Switch  
Node  
4. Add Links to EPNs in Alternating Order  
(20, 3, 19, 4, 18, 5, and so forth)  
2. Cabinet Stack 2-16 EPN  
3. H600-278 Metallic Cable  
5. Add Links to EPNs in Alternating Order  
(20, 3, 19, 4, 18, 5, and so forth)  
6. To additional EPNs  
Figure 3-16. Fiber Optic Connections Through Center Stage Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-45  
DS1 CONV-Remoted Cabinets  
The distance between the DS1 facilities and associated equipment room  
hardware and cabling is a maximum of approximately 200 circuit miles (322 km)  
for analog voice and 500 circuit miles (805 km) for digital (no analog voice  
stations).  
NOTE:  
These limits for DS1 remoting is the maximum distance between any 2 port  
networks in a Release 8r system with either direct or switched port network  
connections with a TN1654 DS1 Converter Circuit pack.  
Digital public network tie trunk facilities provide the end-to-end connectivity  
between the port networks. For either type of port network (PPN or EPN), a  
TN1654 DS1 Converter circuit pack serves as the port network interface to  
the DS1 facilities. As a PPN interface, a TN1654 DS1-CONV can reside in  
either:  
A port carrier (in any port slot)  
A switch-node carrier (in port slot “1” or “21”)  
As an EPN interface, a TN1654 DS1 CONV can reside in an expansion control  
carrier (in any port slot).  
DS1 Cabling within the Local Port Networks. Use the running list that  
accompanies the upgrade equipment to determine which cable connects where.  
The following paragraphs only provide conceptual information about wiring a  
DS1 Converter interface either to an expansion interface or to a switch node  
interface, not step-by-step procedures for wiring a specific Release 8r system.  
NOTE:  
It is important to label every cable installed.  
A cable connects each DS1 CONV either to the appropriate TN570 expansion  
interface (for a direct connection to another port network) or to the appropriate  
TN573B SN Interface (for a switched connection to another port network).  
NOTE:  
These cables usually connect to TN570 expansion interfaces (already  
installed) for direct connections between the new PPN and either 1 or 2  
EPNs.  
On the DS1 CONV side, a 4C retainer binds this shielded cable to the DS1 CONV  
port connector. On the EI/SNI side, a 4B retainer binds the cable to the EI/SNI  
port connector. The DS1 CONV-to-EI/SNI cable also provides a piggy-back  
connector enabling subsequent access to the public network.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-46  
Table 3-5 lists the cable numbers and lengths for the possible connections.  
Table 3-5. Numbers and Lengths of DS1 CONV-to-EI/SNI Cables  
Connection Type  
Comcode Number  
847245750  
Length  
Within same carrier  
1 foot (0.305 m)  
5.5 feet (1.677 m)  
Between 2 carriers in  
same port network  
846448768  
Between 2 carriers in  
adjacent networks  
846448776, and one  
846885259 bracket  
1 foot (0.3.5 m) (used with two  
9823As, & one 20-foot (6.1 m)  
fiber optic cable)  
DS1 CONV Cabling to the Public Network. Use the running list that  
accompanies the upgrade equipment to determine which cable connects where.  
The following paragraphs only provide conceptual information about wiring a  
DS1 CONV interface to a wall-field block, not step-by-step procedures for wiring  
a specific Release 8r system.  
If already connected to either an expansion or switch node interface, a DS1  
CONV circuit pack already resides either in an EPN expansion control carrier or  
in a PPN port carrier or switch node carrier.  
Depending on the traffic requirements between the 2 port networks, a 25-foot  
(7.625 m) H600-348 cable extends from the piggy-back connector (on each DS1  
CONV-to-EI/SNI cable) to from 1 to 4 CSUs. This cable branches to four 15-pin  
subminiature D-type connectors (labeled “01” to “04”) to make the CSU  
connections. Then, in turn, the CSUs connect to the wall-field block  
(corresponding to the equipment location of the DS1 CONV) at port connections  
“8,” “7,” “6,” and “5” (in descending order).  
Neglecting overhead, this wiring arrangement can provide PN-to-PN  
communication at the bandwidth of up to 4 DS1 CONV spans (1.544 Mbps  
each). Between each port network’s wall field, the port networks communicate  
across leased lines in the public network.  
Connect Power and Ground  
1. Reconnect the 6 AWG (#40) (4.1 mm2) cabinet ground wire to the  
single-point ground bar on the cabinet.  
2. Reconnect the 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) coupled bonding conductor wire.  
3. Reconnect the cabinet power cords at the rear of each cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-47  
Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages  
1. Verify every circuit pack reused in the upgrade conforms to the usable  
vintage requirements for a Release 8r system (see Reference Guide for  
Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices).  
Install System Access Ports  
1. Before connecting various endpoints that use EIA interfaces to the system,  
install up to 8 loop-around connections for Mode 2-to-Mode 3 (and vice  
versa) data conversion.  
From the outgoing perspective of the system communicating with an EIA  
endpoint, these loop-around connections convert Mode 3 data (circuit-switched  
packet data, with undefined bit rates and packet specifications) to Mode 2 data  
(low-speed, usually asynchronous, data at rates of 300 to 19,200 bps) by:  
Accepting Mode 3 data off the LAN bus (from the SPE) at a TN553 Packet  
Data Line circuit pack, where Mode 3-to-Mode 2 conversion is done  
Routing the converted data through the cross-connect field and back to a  
TN726B Data Line where the equivalent Mode 2 data can access the TDM  
bus, for subsequent routing to an EIA endpoint  
The endpoints that use these EIA interfaces and, therefore, require the Mode  
2-to-Mode 3 conversion include:  
Generic 3 Management Applications (G3-MA)  
Remote Management Terminal  
Basic Call Management System (BCMS) terminal  
Call Detail Recording Unit (CDRU)/Centralized Attendant Service Plus  
(CAS+)  
Property Management System (PMS)  
Printers  
Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
1. Reseat the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly into the backplane.  
Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System  
1. Reseat the AUDIX assembly to its backplane connectors.  
Remove Emergency Transfer Ground Wire  
1. RemovDeotwhneloagdrforoumndWwwwi.rSeomfroanmuatlsh.ceome.mAell rMgaenunaclsySteraarnchsfAenrduDnowit.nload.  
             
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-48  
Reboot the System  
1. Connect the management terminal to the TERMINAL connector on the rear  
of PPN control carrier “A,” or install the G3-MA according to DEFINITY  
Communications System Generic 3 Management Applications —  
Operations, 585-229-202.  
2. Insert the new Release 8r system removable media in the optical drive.  
3. Behind each EPN cabinet, set the circuit breaker to ON.  
4. At the PPN power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
5. The system performs a reset level 4 rebooting process, loading blank  
translations from the disk. Rebooting takes 5 to 11 minutes.  
6. Type reset system 4 and press Enter. This instructs the system to perform  
a reset level 4 rebooting process, loading the upgraded STS translations  
from the new removable media. Rebooting takes 5 to 11 minutes.  
7. Log in as craft at the login:prompt on the terminal and set the time to  
ensure the system is booted properly.  
8. After about 2 minutes, type status spe and press Enter. The standby  
handshakefield must be upbefore continuing with the upgrade.  
9. Type reset spe standby 4 and press Enter. This changes the standby SPE  
to active and vice versa. This takes about 10 minutes.  
10. If the system is high or critical reliability, type status spe and press Enter.  
The handshake, refresh, and shadowingfields must be upbefore  
continuing with the upgrade. Also, the standby side must be  
in-service. The heartbeat on the standby SPE flashes yellow.  
11. Type restore disk [spe-a or both] full and press Enter. This instructs  
the system to write the upgraded STS translation information from memory  
to the disk(s).  
Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway.  
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.  
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.  
4. Select Restart System from the Reset System menu.  
Label Main Distribution Frame  
1. Label the MDF with the new PN number of the Release 8r EPN. The STS  
software upgrade assigns the next PN number, after the highest  
numbered PN in the Release 5/6si system, to the upgraded EPN.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-49  
Reconnect Cables  
1. Behind each EPN cabinet power supply, set the circuit breaker to OFF.  
NOTE:  
Powering down an EPN cabinet without powering down the PPN will  
set off alarms. However, these alarms should clear after power is  
restored to the EPN.  
2. Replace all cables that were labeled and removed.  
3. Install the top and bottom rear covers. Be sure the correct rear covers are  
installed on the new J58890N Expansion Control Cabinet. Do not use  
these rear covers on the port cabinets.  
NOTE:  
The rear covers for Release 8r control carriers may need 2 detents (1  
for the TDM/LAN cable and another for the ICC cables). If the  
Release 5/6si was upgraded to a critical reliability Release 8r and  
the EPN was originally an R1V3, replace the lower rear cover of port  
cabinet “B” with a new cover (846307817) so the ICC cables and the  
new ground plate can be installed between cabinets “A” and “B.”  
Power Up the EPN Cabinet  
1. Behind each EPN cabinet power supply, set the circuit breaker to ON.  
After about 40 seconds, EPN power and PPN/EPN communications return.  
2. After power returns to the EPN and all trouble is cleared, verify the  
EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO. This restores  
the system to the normal mode.  
Install Rear Ground Plates (Systems with  
Earthquake Protection)  
1. Loosen the 4 screws at the bottom of the top cabinet and at the top of the  
cabinet underneath the top cabinet. See Figure 3-17.  
2. Align the mounting holes in the rear ground plate over the bottom screws  
in the top cabinet. See Figure 3-17.  
3. Align the mounting holes in the ground plate with the 4 holes at the top of  
the cabinet below the top cabinet. Slide the mounting plate down to seat  
on the screws.  
4. Check all TDM bus cables and the ICC to be sure they are not pinched by  
the plates.  
5. Repeat Steps 1-3 until the rear ground plates are installed between all  
stacked cabinets.  
6. Do notDtiogwhntloeand ftrhoem sWcwrwe.wSosmyaenut.als.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-50  
Install Front Ground Plates (Systems with  
Earthquake Protection)  
Use 1 front ground plate between 2 stacked cabinets.  
1. At the front of the cabinets, align the holes in the top of the front ground  
plate with the holes at the bottom of the upper cabinet, and insert the 4  
screws. Do not tighten the screws yet. See Figure 3-17.  
2. At the front of the cabinets, align the holes in the bottom of the front  
ground plate with the holes at the top of the lower cabinet. Insert the 4  
supplied #12-24 x 1/2-inch (1.27 cm) thread-forming screws. Do not  
tighten the screws yet.  
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all stacked cabinets are fastened together.  
4. Tighten all screws securely.  
3
1
2
grdpltec LJK 031096  
Figure Notes  
1. Front Ground Plate or Cabinet Clip  
2. Battery  
3. Rear Ground Plate  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 3-17. Rear Ground Plate and Front Plate or Cabinet Clip Side View  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-51  
Install Cabinet Clips (Systems without  
Earthquake Protection)  
A cabinet clip is required between each pair of stacked cabinets.  
1. At the front of the cabinets, install a cabinet clip between each pair of  
cabinets by hooking the clip into the slot of the upper cabinet and  
snapping the straight leg of the clip into the slot on the lower cabinet. See  
Figure 3-18.  
Figure Notes  
1. Control Cabinet  
4. Port Cabinet  
5. Cabinet Clips  
2. Port Cabinet or Expansion Control Cabinet  
3. Port Cabinet  
Figure 3-18. Location of Cabinet Clips  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-52  
Install Cable Clamps  
1. Behind the cabinets, using screws provided, install 2 cable clamps on  
each ground plate. See Figure 3-19. These clamps hold the port cables.  
cadf008 CJL 103096  
Figure Notes  
1. Port Cabinet  
3. Cable Clamps  
4. Ground Plate  
2. Control Cabinet  
Figure 3-19. Location of Ground Plate and Cable Clamps  
Retranslate Port Circuits  
If port circuit packs in the Release 5/6si control cabinet were relocated in order  
to:  
Use a TN748B to replace the tone detector circuits on a TN756  
Put a critical port circuit pack, requiring longer nominal battery holdover (a  
DS1 or an Announcement circuit pack), in a port slot  
Put a TN570 EI circuit pack in port slot 1 or port slot 2 (for a second EPN)  
Put a TN755B power supply in port slots 16 and 17  
1. Verify the port circuit packs were retranslated during the off-site software  
upgrade. If not, retranslate them now. Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-53  
Re-record Announcements (TN750/B Only)  
1. The off-site STS translation upgrade does not preserve the contents of  
recorded announcements. Therefore, if a TN750/B Announcement circuit  
pack resides in the system, re-record the announcements that were stored  
on the circuit pack.  
NOTE:  
If a TN750C resides in the system, re-recording of announcements is  
not necessary.  
Administer Fiber Links  
1. After all fiber optic equipment is installed, refer to Chapter A, ‘‘Fiber Link  
Administration’’.  
Enable TTI  
1. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter.  
2. On the second screen, set the Enabled?field to y to activate the TTI  
feature.  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter.  
2. Make note of all enabled links.  
3. Type status link <number> and press Enter.  
4. Check the following items and note which links are in-service.  
PPP links  
Audix links  
CMS links at both ends (Also, check the recovery time.)  
ASAI links at the DEFINITY ECS end  
5. Check that DS1 trunks and BRI phones are functioning normally.  
6. Repeat steps 3 - 5 for each enabled link.  
Resolve Alarms  
1. Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-54  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination  
to INADS  
1. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and  
ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps  
in the shaded box. See ‘‘Where to Call for Technical Support’’ on page -xx  
for telephone numbers.  
NOTE:  
As part of the system registration process, the INADS Database  
Administrator enables Alarm Origination.  
2. When administration is completed, log in as craft at the Login:prompt.  
"init" login administration:  
1. Log in as init.  
2. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter  
to verify that the customer options are properly set.  
3. Go to screen 6, QSIG Optional Features, and set the Basic Call  
Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services  
Protocol b or d on an ISDN-PRI trunk group before the upgrade.  
4. Type change system-parameters offer-options and press Enter.  
5. If the Activate Offerfield is n, set it to y and press Ta b . A warning  
message lets you know whether you need to save translations and  
reboot to make the change permanent.  
6. Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes.  
7. Contact the requester when done.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
Release 5/6si to Release 8r  
3
3-55  
Save Translations  
1. Type save translation and press Enter to get upgraded translations onto  
disk. If the translations were corrupted during the upgrade, the following  
error message displays when logging in:  
!
WARNING:  
Translation corruption detected; call Lucent Technologies distributor  
immediately.  
NOTE:  
The save translation command cannot function if the translation  
corruption message appears.  
Return Replaced Equipment  
1. Return replaced equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the  
requirements outlined in:  
BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations  
Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Upgrading R5si/R6si to R8r EPN and Adding Memory  
DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures  
3
3-56  
DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures  
Power Down the AUDIX System  
A yellow caution sticker on the system’s power unit notifies technicians to shut  
down the DEFINITY AUDIX System prior to powering down the system.  
1. Log into the AUDIX System as craft.  
2. Type reset system shutdown and press Enter. Press Enter once.  
NOTE:  
Do not press Enter again. This will force the AUDIX to shutdown  
immediately, dropping all active calls on the AUDIX.  
3. The “SHUTDOWN Completed” message appears when the AUDIX is  
successfully shutdown. This takes about 2 minutes.  
4. The AUDIX System can now be removed for service.  
Power Up the AUDIX System  
If the AUDIX was removed from the cabinet:  
1. Re-install the AUDIX and allow it to boot up automatically.  
2. Check for AUDIX System errors.  
If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet but power was removed from the  
cabinet:  
1. Power up the cabinet. The AUDIX reboots automatically.  
2. Check for AUDIX System errors.  
If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet and the cabinet was not powered  
down:  
1. At the AUDIX console, hold the crtl key and type cc.  
2. Type 5 at the prompt. In about 2 minutes, the AUDIX boots up.  
3. When the system initialization is complete, log in as craft.  
4. Check for AUDIX System errors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
4
4-1  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc  
Processor to R8r  
4
This chapter provides the information necessary to perform an upgrade from  
either a Release 5/6 system with a RISC Processor, or from a Generic 3 (G3) vs  
system with an Intel® 386 processor, to a Release 8r system.  
The upgrade to a Release 8r system requires a major change of hardware and  
software. The port circuit packs from the present system may be reused only if a  
site inspection determines that the port circuit pack vintages are usable in the  
Release 8r.  
Some of the I/O cables from the existing system may be too short to reach from  
the Release 8r cabinet to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). If so, the cables  
must be replaced as part of the upgrade process.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Read This First  
4
4-2  
Read This First  
Service Interruption  
This upgrade process requires a service interruption that depends on whether  
the Release 8r cabinet can be installed while the present system is in service. In  
this case, the service interruption may only be about 2 hours. If, however, the  
present system must be removed to allow room for the Release 8r cabinet, then  
the service interruption may be 8 hours, or more.  
This upgrade must be closely coordinated with the customer and the local  
account team.  
Call Management System (CMS)  
The CMS link is dropped and restarted during the upgrade. This causes CMS  
data to be lost. This data loss can be minimized if the upgrade is performed just  
after the last CMS measurement interval.  
All measurement data is lost during the upgrade (including BCMS). If needed,  
the reports may be printed before the upgrade begins.  
CMS could abort the processing of a call if a measured trunk that was part of the  
conference dropped off the call before the end of the call. Customers  
experiencing this symptom and who are running R3V4 CMS should update to  
r3v4ao.e or higher.  
Preventing Translation Errors  
When instructed in this chapter, perform the save translation command.  
Afterward, check for translation errors before proceeding with the upgrade.  
NOTE:  
Be sure that the translations get saved without errors before continuing with  
any upgrade.  
If errors are detected, refer to ‘‘No Translations After Upgrade’’ in Appendix B,  
‘‘Troubleshooting an Upgrade’’ to correct the problem. Do not continue with the  
upgrade until the errors are corrected.  
Communication Between Equipment Rooms  
For an upgrade where some of the equipment resides at a remote location, the  
upgrade activity is much easier if temporary communication is established  
between the equipment rooms.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Read This First  
4
4-3  
Usable Circuit Packs  
Every circuit pack used in the Release 8 system must conform to the minimum  
usable vintage requirements for that system. At a presale site inspection, the  
remediation process checks the vintages of existing circuit packs to be reused in  
the Release 8 system. Circuit packs with unusable vintages must be replaced.  
Refer to Technical Quarterly, Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages, Change  
Notices, and to the Software Release Letter, for information about usable circuit  
pack vintages. For information about usable vintages of non-United States circuit  
packs, refer to the ITAC’s Tech Alert from your regional distributor.  
Contact Network Technicians  
Contact the technician for each public and private network accessed by the  
system before the upgrade begins. Otherwise, it is possible that network-access  
trunk facilities will be busied out at the far end.  
Required Tools  
The following tools and items may be required during the upgrade:  
1/4-inch flat blade screwdriver  
1/4-inch socket with ratchet (optional)  
Long-nose pliers to straighten backplane pins  
Static-proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit  
packs  
Labels for identifying the port circuit packs and cables attached to the  
rear of cabinets  
One dozen #8 self-tapping screws  
Repair kit for backplane pins (KS-22876 L2 or equivalent)  
One copy of each of the following manuals:  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Maintenance for R8r  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Administrator’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Task Tables  
4
4-4  
Task Tables  
Table 4-1 provides the high-level tasks to perform the upgrade in this chapter.  
Table 4-1. Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r  
Task Description  
Page  
4-6  
Software Upgrade  
Check Link Status  
4-7  
4-7  
Disable TTI  
4-8  
Power Down Present System  
Remove the Present System  
Remove Emergency Transfer Ground Wire  
4-8  
4-8  
4-9  
4-9  
4-9  
4-10  
4-11  
4-11  
4-11  
4-11  
4-12  
4-12  
4-13  
4-15  
4-15  
4-16  
4-16  
4-16  
4-16  
List Configuration Software Long  
Restore Disk Full  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
Set Date and Time  
Re-Record Announcements (TN750/B)  
Install Remaining Hardware and Administer the System  
Enable TTI  
Check Link Status  
Enable Scheduled Maintenance  
Continued on next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Task Tables  
4
4-5  
Task Description  
Page  
4-16  
4-17  
4-18  
4-18  
4-18  
Resolve Alarms  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS  
Save Translations  
Back Up Disk  
Return Replaced Equipment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Preliminary Procedures  
4
4-6  
Preliminary Procedures  
Software Upgrade  
For this upgrade, a Translation Upgrade Tool (TUT) is required. The translations  
on the translation card must be copied to tape. This procedure must be  
performed before the upgrade begins.  
1. Copy the translations in the present system to a spare translation card.  
Typ e save translation and press Enter. This instructs the system to write all  
translation information from memory to the translation card.  
NOTE:  
The off-site STS translation upgrade does not preserve the content of  
recorded announcements. Therefore, during the upgrade, any  
announcements stored on a TN750/B circuit pack must be  
re-recorded. The TN750C Announcement circuit pack stores  
announcements in non-volatile memory; saving the announcements  
is not needed.  
2. Mail the translation card to Software Technical Support (STS) (with  
next-day delivery) to be converted and written to a Release 8r removable  
media. This process takes several days. The new Release 8r software  
removable media (including 1 with translations) must be on-site before the  
upgrade begins. For each Release 8r processor, 2 removable media (1  
system and 1 backup) must always be retained on site with the system.  
3. Insert the original translation card back into the present system.  
4. If possible, the customer should put a freeze on any new translations while  
the spare tape is being converted. If not, be sure the customer’s switch  
administrator keeps detailed records of any translation changes made  
during that interval. These records will facilitate the reassignment of any  
changes on the Release 8r removable media after the upgrade.  
Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance  
During the upgrade, follow routine preventive maintenance procedures on the  
system to be upgraded. For information about the procedures and necessary  
equipment, refer to the “Preventive Maintenance” section in DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Remove the Present System  
4
4-7  
Remove the Present System  
If the equipment room is large enough to allow the Release 8r cabinet to  
be installed while the present system is in service, skip to ‘‘Install the  
Release 8r Cabinets’’ on page 4-11. Return to this section when finished.  
If the present system must be removed to make room for the Release 8r  
cabinet, perform the following.  
Save Translations and Announcements  
1. Log in at the management terminal on the present system.  
2. Type save translation and press Enter. This command instructs the system  
to write all translation information from memory to the translation card.  
3. Check for translation errors before proceeding with the upgrade. If errors  
are detected, refer to ‘‘No Translations After Upgrade’’ in Appendix B,  
‘‘Troubleshooting an Upgrade’’ to correct the problem. Do not continue  
with the upgrade until the errors are corrected.  
4. If the system contains a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack, type  
display announcements and press Enter.  
NOTE:  
The TN750C Announcement circuit pack contains non-volatile  
memory and does not require backup.  
5. If administered recorded announcements are listed, type save  
announcements and press Enter.  
6. Remove the translation card and install the backup translation card.  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Write down  
all enabled links.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for all links.  
3. Write down which links are in service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Remove the Present System  
4
4-8  
Disable TTI  
!
CAUTION:  
If you do not disable the TTI, the translations can be corrupted.  
1. Make sure the ISDN is in service. If not, attempt to busy out and release  
the ISDN D-channel/link. This will bring the ISDN trunks back into service.  
2. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter.  
3. On the second screen, set the Enabled?field to n to de-activate the TTI  
feature.  
Disable Alarm Origination to INADS  
1. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
2. Type neither in the Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers field.  
3. For some releases of software, disable Cleared Alarm Notification  
and Restart Notificationfield before submitting the form.  
!
CAUTION:  
If Alarm Origination is not disabled, the system may generate alarms,  
resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets.  
Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before  
powering down the system cabinet can damage the LAN Gateway disk.  
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. See DEFINITY Communications  
System Generic 3 Installation, Administration and Maintenance of  
CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway for the procedure to log  
on.  
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.  
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.  
4. Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu.  
5. Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Remove the Present System  
4
4-9  
Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down the  
1. If a DEFINITY AUDIX System resides in the system to be upgraded, shut  
down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down.  
Refer to ‘‘DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures’’ on page 4-19.  
2. Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors.  
Power Down Present System  
!
CAUTION:  
Powering down the PPN will cause important system data, such as BCMS  
data, records of queued ACD calls, Automatic Wakeup requests, and Do  
Not Disturb requests to be lost. Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r, for information  
about preparing the system for a power down.  
1. At the PPN cabinet power supply, set the main circuit breaker to OFF.  
Install Emergency Transfer Ground Wire  
!
CAUTION:  
To avoid contaminating single-point ground, do not connect the ground  
strap while the system is powered up.  
1. Connect a 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) wire either to pin 49 of the connecting  
block or to pin 49 of the CAP (cable access panel) associated with the  
emergency transfer panel.  
2. Route the other end of the wire to an approved ground and connect.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Remove the Present System  
4
4-10  
Disconnect Power and Ground  
1. Disconnect the cabinet power cords from the rear of the cabinet.  
2. Disconnect the 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) coupled bonding conductor wire.  
3. Disconnect the 6 AWG (#40) (4.1 mm2) CABINET GROUND wire from the  
ground bar in the cabinet.  
Remove the Present System  
1. Disconnect the management terminal from the TERM connector.  
2. Remove all of the 25-pair cables from the rear of the system. Retain any  
cables that can be reused with the Release 8r cabinet.  
3. Remove the AC power cord from the system.  
4. Remove the ground wires from the system. If the wires can reach the  
Release 8r cabinet, retain them for connection to the Release 8r system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Install the Release 8r Cabinets  
4
4-11  
Install the Release 8r Cabinets  
Unpack and Install the Release 8r Cabinet  
1. Refer to the installation instructions in DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier  
Cabinets.  
!
CAUTION:  
Do not power up the Release 8r system.  
2. Return to this section when the installation of the Release 8r is completed.  
Remove Emergency Transfer Ground Wire  
1. If the Release 8r is being installed while the present system is in service:  
a. Connect a 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) wire either to pin 49 of the  
connecting block or to pin 49 of the CAP (cable access panel)  
associated with the emergency transfer panel.  
b. Route the other end of the wire to an approved ground and  
connect.  
2. If the present system was removed to make room for the Release 8r  
cabinet:  
a. Disconnect the 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) wire (installed earlier) from  
the connecting block or pin 49 of the CAP (cable access panel).  
Power-Up the Release 8r  
1. Insert the new Release 8r removable media into the optical drive.  
2. Power up the Release 8r cabinet and allow the system to boot up  
completely.  
List Configuration Software Long  
1. Type list configuration software long and press Enter to verify the  
removable media contains the required Release 8 software.  
2. Make note of the entire alphanumeric string of the software version. This  
information is used later.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Install the Release 8r Cabinets  
4
4-12  
Restore Disk Full  
1. Type restore disk full and press Enter. This instructs the system to copy  
the entire removable media to disk and takes about 30 minutes to  
complete. Release 8 system software with translations are now resident on  
the disk.  
NOTE:  
Until this command finishes, the system provides no user feedback  
on the management terminal. Do not press Enter while the command  
executes. Doing so causes the terminal screen to clear as the  
command finishes, erasing any success/failure messages the  
system may provide.  
2. Type upgrade software G3V8r.xx.x.xxx.x <entire alphanumeric  
string of target software version>and press Enter. This takes  
about 15 minutes to complete. For Release 5, this is call preserving.  
3. Login as craft at the login:prompt.  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
You can set up to 15 customized daylight savings time rules. If you have switches  
in several different time zones, you can set up rules for each. A daylight savings  
time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition to and from daylight  
savings time. It also specifies the increment at which to transition.  
NOTE:  
The default daylight savings rule is 0, no daylight savings.  
1. Type change daylight-savings-rules and press Enter.  
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES  
Rule  
0:  
Change Day  
Month___Date  
Time____Increment  
No Daylight Savings  
1:  
Start: first Sunday___ on or after April___ 1 at _2:00  
Stop: first Sunday___ on or after October_ 25 at _2:00  
Start: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after ____ __ at __:__  
01:00  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Install the Release 8r Cabinets  
4
4-13  
2. Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day,  
Month, Date, Time, and Increment(for example, 1:00 equals one hour)  
fields for each rule.  
NOTE:  
You can change any rule except rule 0 (zero). You cannot delete a  
daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and  
Time screens.  
3. Press Enter.  
Set Date and Time  
1. Type set time and press Enter.  
2. Verify the screen displays the Date and Time screen. See Screen 4-1. The  
cursor is positioned on the Day of the Week:field.  
.
DATE AND TIME  
DATE  
TIME  
Day of the Week: Tuesday  
Day of the Month: 8  
Month: February  
Year: 2000  
Hour: 20  
Minute: 30  
Second: XX  
Type: standard  
Daylight Savings Rule: 0  
Screen 4-1. Typical Date and Time Screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Install the Release 8r Cabinets  
4
4-14  
3. Type the day of the week in English (Sunday through Saturday). See  
Table 4-2 for English day of the week names.  
Table 4-2. English Day of the Week Names  
Day Number  
Day Name  
Sunday  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
4. The cursor is positioned on the Month:field. Type the current month in  
English (January through December). See Table 4-3 for English month  
names. After the month is entered, press Ta b to move to next field.  
Table 4-3. English Month Names  
Month Number Month Name  
1
January  
February  
March  
2
3
4
April  
5
May  
6
June  
7
July  
8
August  
September  
October  
November  
December  
9
10  
11  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Install the Release 8r Cabinets  
4
4-15  
5. The cursor is positioned on the Day of the Month:field. Type the day  
of month (1 through 31) and press Tab to move to the next field.  
6. The cursor is positioned on the Year:field. Type the current year and  
press TAB to move to the next field.  
7. The cursor is positioned on the Hour:field. Type the current hour for a  
24-hour clock. Press Ta b to move to the next field.  
8. The cursor is positioned on the Minute:field. Type current minute (0  
through 59). Seconds cannot be set.  
9. Type standard or daylight savings in the Typefield.  
10. Type the rule (number) in the Daylight Savings Rulefield.  
11. Press Enter when the information is correct.  
12. Type display time and press Enter to verify date/time data.  
Re-Record Announcements (TN750/B)  
1. Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Administrator’s Guide to record announcements.  
NOTE:  
The TN750C Announcement circuit pack stores announcements in  
non-volatile memory; re-recording the announcements is not  
needed.  
Copy Announcements (TN750/B)  
1. If the system contains a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack, type  
display announcements and press Enter.  
2. If administered recorded announcements are listed, type copy announce  
and press Enter.  
NOTE:  
The TN750C Announcement circuit pack stores announcements in  
non-volatile memory; saving the announcements is not needed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Upgrade Completion  
4
4-16  
Upgrade Completion  
Install Remaining Hardware and Administer the  
System  
1. If the present system was removed to make room for the Release 8r  
cabinet, skip to Step 3.  
2. If the Release 8r cabinet was installed while the present system is in  
service, return to ‘‘Remove the Present System’’ on page 4-7. Return to  
this section when finished.  
3. Connect all new and reusable I/O cables to the Release 8r cabinet.  
Cross-connect at the MDF as required.  
4. Remove all reusable circuit packs from the present system and install into  
the Release 8r cabinet. Install any new circuit packs into the Release 8r  
cabinet.  
5. Install fiber optic cables and administer the fiber links as needed. Refer to  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and  
Test for Multicarrier Cabinets.  
6. Administer any new translations, as required.  
Enable TTI  
1. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter.  
2. On the second screen, set the Enabled?field to y to activate the TTI  
feature.  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Compare it  
with the earlier status.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for each link.  
Enable Scheduled Maintenance  
1. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter. Use this  
screen to enable scheduled daily maintenance.  
Resolve Alarms  
1. Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Upgrade Completion  
4
4-17  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination  
to INADS  
1. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and  
ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps  
in the shaded box. See ‘‘Where to Call for Technical Support’’ on page -xx  
for telephone numbers.  
NOTE:  
As part of the system registration process, the INADS Database  
Administrator enables Alarm Origination.  
2. When administration is completed, log in as craft at the Login:prompt.  
Administration:  
1. Log in as init at the Login: prompt.  
2. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter  
to verify that the customer options are properly set.  
3. Go to screen 6, QSIG Optional Features, and set the Basic Call  
Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services  
Protocol b or d on an ISDN-PRI trunk group before the upgrade.  
4. Type change system-parameters offer-options and press Enter.  
5. Set the Activate Offerfield to y and press Ta b . A warning message  
lets you know the offer category along with the model to determine the  
system capacities (limits) and allowable hardware.  
6. Press Enter to effect the changes.  
7. When done, contact the field technician.  
8. Contact the requester when done.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
Upgrade Completion  
4
4-18  
Save Translations  
1. Type save translation and press Enter to get upgraded translations onto  
disk. If the translations were corrupted during the upgrade, the following  
error message displays when logging in:  
!
WARNING:  
Translation corruption detected; call Lucent Technologies distributor  
immediately.  
NOTE:  
The save translation command cannot function if the translation  
corruption message appears.  
Back Up Disk  
1. Type backup disk and press Enter to backup all changed files.  
2. Type test stored-data long and press Enter. This instructs the system to  
verify the consistency of the MSS files (on the disk and removable media).  
Return Replaced Equipment  
1. Return replaced equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the  
requirements outlined in:  
BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations  
Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures  
4
4-19  
DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures  
Power Down the AUDIX System  
A yellow caution sticker on the system’s power unit notifies technicians to shut  
down the DEFINITY AUDIX System prior to powering down the system.  
1. Log into the AUDIX System as craft.  
2. Type reset system shutdown. Press Enter once.  
NOTE:  
Do not press Enter again. This will force the AUDIX to shutdown  
immediately, dropping all active calls on the AUDIX.  
3. The “SHUTDOWN Completed” message appears when the AUDIX is  
successfully shutdown. This takes about 2 minutes.  
4. The AUDIX System can now be removed for service.  
Power Up the AUDIX System  
If the AUDIX was removed from the cabinet:  
1. Re-install the AUDIX and allow it to boot up automatically.  
2. Check for AUDIX System errors.  
If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet but power was removed from the  
cabinet:  
1. Power up the cabinet. The AUDIX reboots automatically.  
2. Check for AUDIX System errors.  
If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet and the cabinet was not powered  
down:  
1. At the AUDIX console, hold the crtl key and type cc.  
2. Type 5 at the prompt. In about 2 minutes, the AUDIX boots up.  
3. When the system initialization is complete, log in as craft.  
4. Check for AUDIX System errors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
G3vs with Intel 386 or Risc Processor to R8r  
DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures  
4
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Single-Mode Fiber Attenuators  
5
5-1  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module  
to R8r EPN  
5
This chapter provides the information necessary to upgrade a DEFINITY G2  
universal module to a multicarrier EPN of a R8r system.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide  
lists Release 8 features and functions, and provides the commands, procedures,  
and forms to initialize and administer the system.  
Single-Mode Fiber Attenuators  
Attenuators may be required when using single-mode fiber. See the table below.  
106060718  
106060734  
106061021  
5 dB attenuator  
10 dB attenuator  
15 dB attenuator  
2 for each fiber connection  
2 for each fiber connection  
2 for each fiber connection  
A different value attenuator may be required even though the fiber span is  
between the same 2 cabinets (local and remote cabinet). Refer to DEFINITY  
Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier  
Cabinets for detailed fiber attenuator information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Read This First  
5
5-2  
Read This First  
Service Interruption  
The upgrade process requires a service interruption of about 40 minutes.  
Coordinate this service interruption with the customer and the local account  
team.  
Call Management System (CMS)  
The CMS link is dropped and restarted during the upgrade. This causes CMS  
data to be lost. This data loss can be minimized if the upgrade is performed just  
after the last CMS measurement interval.  
All measurement data is lost during the upgrade (including BCMS). If needed,  
the reports may be printed before the upgrade begins.  
CMS could abort the processing of a call if a measured trunk that was part of the  
conference dropped off the call before the end of the call. Customers  
experiencing this symptom and who are running R3V4 CMS should update to  
r3v4ao.e or higher.  
Preventing Translation Errors  
When instructed in this chapter, perform the save translation command.  
Afterward, check for translation errors before proceeding with the upgrade.  
NOTE:  
Be sure that the translations get saved without errors before continuing with  
any upgrade.  
If errors are detected, refer to ‘‘No Translations After Upgrade’’ in Appendix B,  
‘‘Troubleshooting an Upgrade’’ to correct the problem. Do not continue with the  
upgrade until the errors are corrected.  
Contact Network Technicians  
Contact the technician for each public and private network accessed by the  
system before the upgrade begins. Otherwise, if these technicians are not aware  
of the service interruption caused by the upgrade, it is possible that  
network-access trunk facilities will be busied out at the far end.  
Communication Between Equipment Rooms  
For an upgrade where some of the equipment resides at a remote location, the  
upgrade activity is much easier if temporary communication is established  
between the equipment rooms.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Read This First  
5
5-3  
Relocation of Port Circuit Packs  
An upgrade to Release 8 does not cause G2 port circuit packs to be moved and  
manually retranslated. This is because a G2 universal module is always  
upgraded to an EPN. So, during the upgrade, a Release 8 expansion control  
carrier (with 18 available port slots) always replaces the G2 module control  
carrier (with no port slots), providing a net gain of 18 port slots.  
Usable Circuit Packs  
Each circuit pack used in the upgraded Release 8 system must conform to the  
minimum usable vintage requirements for Release 8. Those circuit packs  
shipped in the new Release 8 PPN or shipped loose with the new EPN equipment  
should always meet the usable vintage specifications. In addition, at a presale  
site inspection, the remediation process must check the vintages of every G2  
circuit pack (including any CFY1 current limiters) that will be reused in the  
upgraded Release 8 and replace those circuit packs that have unusable  
vintages. Refer to Technical Monthly, “Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages  
and Change Notices,” for current information about usable vintages in a Release  
8 system.  
In most configurations, the 2- or 3-circuit pack combination of a tone generator  
pack, tone detector pack, and/or call classifier pack can be replaced with the  
TN2182 circuit pack, freeing up 1 or 2 port slots.  
Since Release 8 supports non-United States call-processing applications, a wide  
variety of non-United States circuit packs can be used. Contact your Lucent  
Technologies representative for more information.  
Site Inspections  
For the purposes of a Release 8 upgrade, most G2 systems are already  
equipped with the correct TDM/LAN cables (WP-91716 L6 and L7) and the  
correct lightwave transceivers (9823A or 9823B). However, some G2 systems  
contain earlier versions of these components, and (based on a site inspection)  
these older components must be replaced.  
The 2 earlier versions of the TDM/LAN cable included the WP-91112 (L1 and L2)  
and the WP-91716 (L1 and L2). Both of these versions had white labels. In  
contrast, the correct cables (WP-91716 L6 and L7) have blue labels. If a  
remediation site inspection reveals that the older cables reside in the system,  
replace the older cables under the remediation process.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Read This First  
5
5-4  
Earlier versions of lightwave transceivers include the 4-series transceivers (4A  
through 4F). These transceivers support fiber connections up to 7,000 feet (2134  
m) apart; whereas the 9823A supports connections up to 5,000 feet (1524 m),  
and the 9823B supports connections up to 25,000 feet (7620 m). A single mode  
fiber transceiver (300A) supports distances of up to 115,000 feet (21.7 miles,  
35 km). If the site inspection reveals that the older 4-series transceivers reside in  
the system, Order the correct transceivers according to a separate PEC.  
NOTE:  
Using the 300A may require 5 or 10 dB attenuators. Contact your Lucent  
Technologies representative for more information.  
NOTE:  
The 9823A transceiver is not a direct replacement for the 4-series  
transceiver (since a pair of 9823A transceivers cannot replace a pair of  
4-series transceivers supporting a connection of between 5,000 feet  
(1524 m) and 7,000 feet (2134 m)).  
Power and Ground  
The new multicarrier PPN cabinet or any EPN cabinet added for the upgrade can  
be either AC- or DC-powered. If an added cabinet is powered differently from the  
existing cabinets, the existing cabinets do not have to be converted since mixed  
power configurations are allowed. However, the system’s power and grounding  
must be modified so that the AC-powered cabinets are grounded to the same  
single-point ground point as the DC-powered cabinets.  
If a new AC-powered cabinet is to be added, provide a separate AC receptacle  
to support the new cabinet. This AC receptacle must not be shared with any  
other equipment and must not be controlled by a wall switch. For the  
convenience and safety of equipment-room personnel, the receptacle should not  
be located under the MDF.  
NOTE:  
The new AC-powered PPN for a Release 8 upgrade has different power  
requirements than the G2 system. Refer to the DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 System Description Pocket Reference  
for information.  
DC Isolator  
Each device connected to a DC-powered cabinet, from the asynchronous EIA  
RS-232 interface, requires a 116A isolator. Insert the isolator at the RS-232  
interface between the device and the interface connector to isolate ground  
between the system and external adjuncts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Read This First  
5
5-5  
Power-Failure Stations  
During routine system operation, the ground for the power-failure stations is  
derived from the system’s auxiliary cable. This ground is disconnected during  
the upgrade, thus disabling the power-failure stations. Therefore, a ground strap  
must be run to the power-failure transfer panel. Connect this strap shortly after  
removing power and disconnect it just before restoring power to the system.  
To minimize downtime, power-failure transfer equipment should be tested and, if  
need be, repaired before the hardware upgrade begins.  
Software  
If the customer plans to emulate existing G2 translations in the upgraded  
Release 8, then these translations must be copied to a spare tape and sent to  
Software Technical Support (STS) so that reports of the current G2 translations  
and a G3-MA diskette with basic station translations can be generated. This  
process may take several days. STS must return the G2 reports and the diskette  
to the Project Manager before the upgrade can begin. For each G2 processor,  
retain 2 tapes (1 system tape and 1 backup tape) on site with the G2 system.  
After the reports arrive, many features require special attention because of  
feature differences, screen changes, and potential naming conflicts in the  
upgrade process.  
During the upgrade, the Software Specialist should implement DEFINITY ECS  
Release 8 translations that are appropriate for the customer’s needs. For  
information to make the required changes, refer to:  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s  
Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Read This First  
5
5-6  
Alarm Connection  
The D6 connector on G2 systems had 31 alarm-monitor appearances (Unit 1 to  
Unit 31) for external equipment. The AUXILIARY connector on an R8 PPN only  
has appearances for 1M (major alarm) and 1m (minor alarm). If the G2 system  
being upgraded used more than 1 major or more than 1 minor alarm-monitor  
appearance, these extra appearances, they can either be distributed to the  
AUXILIARY connector on a DEFINITY ECS Release 8 EPN, or “ganged” so that  
several external devices share the same appearance. The alarms can also be  
accommodated by paralleling them to the above connections.  
NOTE:  
When several external devices are ganged to the same appearance, each  
device loses its individual identity. An alarm on a shared appearance only  
denotes that 1 of several devices reported a problem. Subsequent  
maintenance effort is needed to determine which device reported the  
problem and the nature of the problem.  
The control circuit pack behind the AUXILIARY connector detects external  
alarms with a ground-detector chip. Therefore, to gang several external  
devices, every device must be able to return a true relay ground closure to  
the AUXILIARY connector. Alternatives, such as a TTL low driver, are  
inadequate.  
The following tables correlate wall-field terminal numbers, connector pin  
numbers, lead colors, and lead designations for the G2 D6 and DEFINITY ECS  
Release 8 AUXILIARY connectors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Read This First  
5
5-7  
Table 5-1. Pinouts for D6 Connector on G2 System  
Terminal  
Number  
Pin #  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
Color  
W-BL  
W-O  
W-G  
W-BR  
W-S  
Designation  
Terminal #  
Pin #  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
Color  
BL-W  
O-W  
G-W  
BR-W  
S-W  
Designation  
UNIT19  
1
UNIT20  
2
3
UNIT22  
4
UNIT21  
5
UNIT24  
6
UNIT23  
7
8
UNIT25  
9
UNIT27  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
UNIT26  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
R-BL  
R-O  
UNIT29  
BL-R  
O-R  
UNIT28  
UNIT31  
UNIT30  
R-G  
AUXCTMP  
EXTEQMN  
AUXCRCT  
AUXCCB  
AUXCFAN  
EXTPRMJ  
UNIT2  
G-R  
UNIT32  
R-BR  
R-S  
BR-R  
S-R  
EXTEQMJ  
AUXCHO  
AUXCFRQ  
BK-BL  
BK-O  
BK-G  
BK-BR  
BK-S  
Y-BL  
Y-O  
BL-BK  
O-BK  
G-BK  
BR-BK  
S-BK  
BL-Y  
O-Y  
EXTPRMN  
UNIT1  
UNIT3  
UNIT5  
UNIT7  
UNIT9  
UNIT11  
UNIT12  
UNIT14  
UNIT16  
UNIT18  
TIP0  
UNIT4  
UNIT6  
UNIT8  
Y-G  
UNIT10  
G-Y  
Y-BR  
Y-S  
BR-Y  
S-Y  
UNIT13  
UNIT15  
UNIT17  
V-BL  
V-O  
BL-V  
O-V  
V-G  
G-V  
V-BR  
V-S  
RING0  
RING1  
BR-V  
S-V  
TIP1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Read This First  
5
5-8  
Table 5-2. Pinouts for Auxiliary Connector on Release 8 Systems  
Terminal  
Number  
Terminal  
Number  
Pin #  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
Color  
W-BL  
W-O  
W-G  
W-BR  
W-S  
Designation  
AUXMJ  
Pin #  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
Color  
BL-W  
O-W  
G-W  
BR-W  
S-W  
Designation  
1
2
GRD  
GRD  
GRD  
GRD  
GRD  
GRD  
GRD  
3
AUXMN  
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
R-BL  
R-O  
BL-R  
O-R  
R-G  
G-R  
R-BR  
R-S  
BR-R  
S-R  
BK-BL  
BK-O  
BK-G  
BK-BR  
BK-S  
Y-BL  
Y-O  
XFER48  
XFER48  
XFER48  
XFER48  
XFER48  
XFER48  
XFER48  
BL-BK  
O-BK  
G-BK  
BR-BK  
S-BK  
BL-Y  
O-Y  
GRD  
GRD  
GRD  
GRD  
GRD  
GRD  
GRD  
Y-G  
G-Y  
Y-BR  
Y-S  
GRD  
GRD  
GRD  
BR-Y  
S-Y  
ACC48A  
ACC48B  
ACC48C  
V-BL  
V-O  
BL-V  
O-V  
V-G  
EXT_ALM  
G-V  
EXT_ALM_RT  
INADS RING  
V-BR  
V-S  
BR-V  
S-V  
INADS TIP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Read This First  
5
5-9  
Save Translations  
1. Log in at the Manager II on the G2.  
2. Type rtx (run tape, execute) and press Enter. This instructs the system to  
write all translation information from memory to the tape.  
3. Remove the system tape and install the backup tape.  
4. Type rtx and press Enter.  
Make Source Tape for TRACS Report  
A spare G2 tape must be acquired from the remediation before performing the  
following steps. For each processor, there must always be 2 tapes on site with  
the G2 system. Do not send a system or backup tape to STS. After performing  
the previous procedures, copy the G2 translations to the spare tape used to  
make the TRACS report.  
1. Remove the backup tape and install the spare tape.  
2. Type rtx and press Enter. This command instructs the system to write all  
translation information from memory to the tape.  
3. Remove the source tape.  
4. Insert the system tape.  
5. Mail the source tape (next-day delivery) to STS for use in making the G2  
TRACS report.  
System Upgrades  
There are many configurations of DEFINITY G2 in the field. Each system can  
have a unique configuration. However, to simplify Release 8 upgrades:  
The existing common control is always replaced by a multicarrier PPN  
Existing traditional modules are replaced by EPNs  
Existing universal modules are upgraded to EPNs  
A new multicarrier cabinet would then always serve as the PPN. If a G2 universal  
module is upgraded to a DEFINITY ECS Release 8 EPN, hardware changes  
(including carrier replacement) are required.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Task Tables  
5
5-10  
Task Tables  
Table 5-3, Table 5-4, and Table 5-5 provide the high-level tasks to perform the  
upgrades detailed in this chapter. Refer to the appropriate page for detailed  
instructions for each step.  
Table 5-3. Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r — Standard Reliability  
á
Task Description  
Page  
5-9  
Save Translations  
Make Source Tape for TRACS Report  
Required Hardware  
5-9  
5-15  
5-16  
5-16  
5-17  
5-17  
5-17  
5-17  
5-18  
5-18  
5-18  
5-19  
5-23  
5-23  
5-26  
5-26  
5-35  
5-35  
5-36  
5-37  
5-38  
5-40  
5-40  
Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance  
Label Cables  
Check Link Status  
Disable TTI  
Disconnect Cables  
Install Circuit Packs  
Interconnect Port Networks  
Remove Power-Failure Ground Wire  
Boot the Release 8 System  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
Set Date and Time  
Set Additional Administration  
Reconnect Cables to Upgraded EPN Cabinet  
Continued on next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Task Tables  
5
5-11  
Table 5-3. Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r — Standard Reliability Continued  
á
Task Description  
Page  
5-41  
5-41  
5-41  
5-41  
5-41  
5-41  
5-42  
5-42  
5-43  
5-43  
Power Up the EPN Cabinets  
Retranslate Port Circuits  
Enable TTI  
Check Link Status  
Resolve Alarms  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS  
Save Translations  
Back Up Disk  
Return Replaced Equipment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Task Tables  
5
5-12  
Table 5-4. Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r — High Reliability  
á
Task Description  
Page  
5-45  
5-45  
5-46  
5-46  
5-46  
5-46  
5-47  
5-47  
5-47  
5-47  
5-51  
5-51  
5-55  
5-55  
5-66  
5-66  
5-67  
5-67  
5-69  
5-71  
5-71  
5-72  
5-72  
5-72  
5-72  
5-72  
5-73  
5-73  
5-74  
5-74  
Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance  
Label Cables  
Check Link Status  
Disable TTI  
Power Down G2 System  
Install Power-Failure Transfer Ground Wire  
Disconnect Cables  
Remove Circuit Packs from Module Control Carrier A  
Remove CURL from Module Control Carrier A  
Remove Module Control Carrier A  
Unpack and Inspect Expansion Control Carrier  
Install New Expansion Control Carrier A  
Install Circuit Packs  
Interconnect Port Networks — High Reliability  
Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages  
Remove Power-Failure Ground Wire  
Boot the Release 8 System  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
Set Date and Time  
Set Additional Administration  
Reconnect Cables  
Power Up the EPN Cabinets  
Retranslate Port Circuits  
Enable TTI  
Check Link Status  
Enable TTI  
Resolve Alarms  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination to INADS  
Save Translations  
Back Up Disk  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Task Tables  
5
5-13  
Table 5-5. Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r — Critical Reliability  
á
Task Description  
Page  
5-75  
Upgrade Cabinets  
Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance  
Label Cables  
5-76  
5-76  
Check Link Status  
5-77  
Disable TTI  
5-77  
Power Down G2 System  
Disconnect Cables  
5-77  
5-78  
Remove Module Control Carriers A and B  
Prepare the New A and B Position Carriers  
Test the CURL  
5-78  
5-78  
5-79  
5-83  
5-84  
5-90  
Install Circuit Packs  
5-90  
Interconnect Port Networks — Critical Reliability  
Remove Power-Failure Ground Strap  
Boot the Release 8 System  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
Set Date and Time  
5-91  
5-105  
5-106  
5-106  
5-107  
5-108  
5-110  
5-110  
5-111  
5-111  
5-111  
5-111  
5-111  
Set Additional Administration  
Close Upgraded EPN Cabinet and Reconnect Cables  
Power Up the EPN Cabinets  
Retranslate Port Circuits  
Enable TTI  
Check Link Status  
Enable Scheduled Maintenance  
Continued on next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Task Tables  
5
5-14  
Table 5-5. Tasks to Upgrade to Release 8r — Critical Reliability  
Continued  
á
Task Description  
Page  
Resolve Alarms  
5-112  
5-112  
5-113  
5-113  
5-113  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination  
Save Translations  
Back Up Disk  
Return Replaced Equipment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-15  
Standard Reliability  
Required Hardware  
The equipment in Table 5-6 must be on-site before the upgrade begins. To place  
a claim for missing equipment, as part of the Streamlined Implementation  
process, call 1-800-772-5409, or the number provided by your Lucent  
Technologies representative.  
Table 5-6. Required Hardware  
Equipment  
Description  
Quantity  
PEC 6300-05X Processor Port Network  
1
J58890AF-1  
106647985  
Expansion Control Carrier  
TN775B Maintenance  
1
1
103557294  
or  
103281788  
TN776 Expansion Interface  
2 or 6 1  
TN570 Expansion Interface  
2 or 6 1,2  
1 or 3 3  
2 or 6 4  
407439975  
20-Foot Multi-mode Fiber Optic Cable  
9823A Lightwave Transceiver  
106455348  
or  
106455363  
9823B Lightwave Transceiver  
2 or 6 5  
1. Depending on the number of Release 8 EPNs. Two are required for a standard  
reliability system with 2 port networks; 6 with 3 port networks. Either 1 or 4 Expansion  
Interfaces (EIs) are shipped loose with the EPN equipment. The factory has installed  
either 1 or 2 EIs in the new PPN.  
2. Required port network interfaces in a Release 8 system with the optional packet bus.  
3. Depending on the number of DEFINITY ECS Release 8 EPNs. Two or 6 are required  
if the PPN and EPN(s) are remotely located. Assuming acceptable lengths, the fiber  
that previously connected an upgraded G2 universal module (not a traditional  
module) to the G2 TMS has the correct transceiver connectors and can be reused.  
4. One pair for each fiber connection. For each connection, either 1 lightwave  
transceiver is installed in an EPN and 1 in the PPN. A transceiver can be reused from  
each upgraded G2 universal module. Additional transceivers, ordered separately,  
are also shipped loose with the EPN equipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-16  
Required Tools  
The following tools and items may be required during the upgrade:  
High-intensity flashlight or AC drop light  
3/8-inch flat-blade screwdriver with a 10-inch shank (minimum)  
5/16-inch and 1/4-inch sockets with a ratchet and 10-inch extension  
Long-nose pliers to disconnect ground straps and straighten backplane  
pins  
Static-proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit  
packs  
Labels for identifying the port circuit packs and cables attached to the  
rear of cabinets  
Twelve spare #12 and #10 self-tapping screws  
Four spare carrier ground straps  
Wrist ground strap  
Repair kit for backplane pins (KS-22876 L2 or equivalent)  
One copy of each of the following manuals:  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Maintenance for R8si or DEFINITY Enterprise Communications  
Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Administrator’s Guide  
Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance  
During the upgrade, follow routine preventive maintenance procedures on the  
system to be upgraded. For information about the procedures and necessary  
equipment, refer to the “Preventive Maintenance” section in DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
Label Cables  
To make reconnecting the cables simpler and more reliable, label both ends of  
the connector cables associated with the carrier to be removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-17  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Write down  
all enabled links.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for all links.  
3. Write down which links are in service.  
Disable TTI  
!
CAUTION:  
If you do not disable the TTI, the translations can be corrupted.  
1. Make sure the ISDN is in service. If not, attempt to busy out and release  
the ISDN D-channel/link. This will bring the ISDN trunks back into service.  
2. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter. Use screen 2  
to disable Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) by changing the value to  
n.  
Power Down G2 System  
1. At the common control’s power distribution unit, set the main circuit  
breaker to OFF.  
2. At the universal module’s power distribution unit, set the main circuit  
breaker to OFF.  
Install Power-Failure Transfer Ground Wire  
!
CAUTION:  
To avoid contaminating single-point ground, do not connect the ground wire  
while the system is powered up.  
1. Connect a 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) wire to pin 49 of the connecting block  
or to pin 49 of the CAP (cable access panel) on the power-failure transfer  
panel.  
2. Route the opposite end of the wire to an approved ground and connect.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-18  
Disconnect Cables  
1. With the cable retainer in front of you and the part number visible (4B or  
4C), locate the slot that is almost vertical. This slot is adjacent to the part  
number. Insert a #2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and twist. The  
retainer will snap open easily. Remove the cable.  
2. Disconnect the cables associated with the carrier to be removed.  
3. Remove the rear doors from the cabinet.  
4. Behind a previously upgraded cabinet, remove all of the rear panels. Two  
different types of screws hold the back panels to the cabinet. Remove the  
#10 screws with a screwdriver or a 1/4-inch socket. Remove the #12  
screws with a screwdriver or a 5/16-inch socket.  
Remove Circuit Packs from Module Control  
Carrier A  
1. To ensure that power units in the “A” carrier are properly replaced, label  
each power unit with its slot number.  
2. Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the “A” carrier.  
3. Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier “A.” Store the circuit  
packs in the static-proof packaging.  
4. Remove all circuit pack blanks.  
5. Remove the front trim plate from the “A” carrier by pulling it straight off.  
Remove CURL from Module Control Carrier A  
1. Remove the CFY1 current limiter (CURL) from the pin-field block marked  
“CURL” on the “A” carrier. The CURL is reused in the Release 8 EPN.  
NOTE:  
Verify the CURL meets the minimum usable vintage requirements.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-19  
Remove Module Control Carrier A  
Disconnect TDM/LAN Cables  
NOTE:  
Note the position of the TDM/LAN cables before disconnecting.  
1. Disconnect 1 end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “A” and “C”  
carriers) from the “A” carrier. See Figure 5-1.  
2. Disconnect 1 end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “A” and “D”  
carriers) from the “A” carrier.  
!
WARNING:  
When removing the TDM/LAN cables from a previously upgraded  
carrier, be careful that none of the short pieces of shrink tubing come  
off the 4 corner pins of the pin-field block. Otherwise, when the new  
equipment is connected, -48 volts could short to ground.  
3. On port carrier J58890BB-1, connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to  
Slot 02. On port carriers J58890BB-2 and J58890BB-3, connect the TDM  
cables to Slot 01.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-20  
Figure Notes  
1. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
2. ZAHF4 TDM/LAN Terminator  
3. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L6)  
4. Module Control Carrier (“A” Position)  
5. Port Carrier (“D” Position)  
6. Port Carrier (“E” Position)  
7. Slot 21  
8. Slot 01  
9. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L7)  
Figure 5-1. TDM/LAN Connections for Standard Reliability Module  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-21  
Remove Carrier Ground Straps  
1. Disconnect the top and bottom ground straps from the “A” carrier. See  
Figure 5-2. These straps will reconnect to the new “A” carrier.  
Figure Notes  
1. Rear of Cabinet  
4. Module Control Carrier (“A”  
Position)  
2. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
3. Ground Jumpers  
5. Port Carrier (“D” Position)  
Figure 5-2. Location of Ground Jumpers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-22  
2. Disconnect the “P1” and “P2” cables from the “A” carrier. See Figure 5-3.  
3. Remove the fan trim plate by pulling it straight off.  
4. Clean or replace the air filter (403326820) if necessary.  
5. In front of the carrier, remove the 4 screws (top 2 first) holding the “A”  
carrier to the cabinet frame. Use a long-handle screwdriver or 5/16-inch  
socket with a 10-inch extension.  
6. Behind the carrier, remove the 2 screws holding the “A” carrier’s rear  
connector panel to the cabinet frame.  
7. Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches. Be sure that no cables or wiring  
harnesses are caught on the cabinet/carrier framework.  
!
CAUTION:  
Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the  
framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the  
carrier.  
8. Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet.  
Figure Notes  
1. Rear of Control Carrier  
2. P2 Connector  
3. P1 Connector  
Figure 5-3. Location of P1 and P2 Connectors  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-23  
Unpack and Inspect Expansion Control Carrier  
1. Inspect the new J58890AF Expansion Control Carrier for any damage.  
Also verify that the backplane pins are not bent.  
2. Place the expansion control carrier on the floor so that the rear of the  
carrier faces up.  
3. Install the CFY1 current limiter (CURL) on the “A” carrier to the pin-field  
block labeled “CURL” Install the CURL with the components on the left.  
4. At the rear connector panel, determine which connectors will have a cable  
attached, and install a 4B cable retainer on each of these connectors.  
Install New Expansion Control Carrier A  
1. Install the carrier in position “A” by aligning the plastic alignment tips on  
the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the cabinet. These  
alignment tips support the carrier while installing the screws. Ensure that  
the power cords are properly placed in the slots at the sides of the carrier.  
2. Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self-tapping screws saved from the  
removal of the old carrier.  
NOTE:  
Carefully realign the threads on the self-tapping screws by turning  
them counterclockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid  
stripping the threads out of the framework.  
3. Connect the “P2” and “P1” cables to the “A” carrier. See Figure 5-3. Snap  
the connector lock into place to ensure the connection is properly made.  
4. Connect the 8 ground straps from the “C” carrier to the new “A” carrier.  
See Figure 5-2.  
5. Connect the 8 ground straps from the “D” carrier to the new “A” carrier.  
6. For AC-powered systems, install the 2 new ground straps. One strap  
connects ground point “1” to the “A” carrier frame (right side), and the  
other connects ground point “8” to the “A” carrier frame (left side).  
NOTE:  
DC-powered systems do not use these carrier ground straps.  
7. Connect the remaining end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “A” and  
“D” carriers) to the pin-field block marked “TDM” on the right side of the  
“A” carrier. See Figure 5-4 and Table 5-7.  
8. Connect the remaining end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “A” and  
“C” carriers) to the pin-field block marked “TDM” on the left side of the “A”  
carrier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-24  
Figure Notes  
1. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
2. ZAHF4 TDM/LAN Terminator  
3. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L6)  
6. Port Carrier (“E” Position)  
7. Slot 21  
8. Slot 01  
4. Module Control Carrier (“A” Position) 9. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L7)  
5. Port Carrier (“D” Position) 10. Control Carrier (“B” Position)  
Figure 5-4. TDM/LAN Connections for Standard Reliability Release 8 EPN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-25  
9. On port carrier J58890BB-1, connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to  
Slot 02. On port carriers J58890BB-2 and J58890BB-3, connect the TDM  
cables to Slot 01.  
Table 5-7. TDM/LAN Connections  
"J" Number  
J58890BB-1  
Carrier Type  
LHS Slot  
RHS Slot  
Port  
Port  
21  
21  
21  
21  
02  
01  
01  
02  
J58890BB-2  
J58890BB-3  
J58890AF  
Port  
EPN Control “A”  
10. Install the front trim plate on the “A” carrier. Install the fan trim plate.  
11. Install the power units (removed from G2 universal module) into the “A”  
carrier. Do not interchange the physical locations of the units. The  
631AR1, 631WA1, 631DA1, or 644A install in the left side, while the  
631BR1, 631WB1, 631DB1, or 645B install in the right side.  
NOTE:  
In most cases, the new Release 8 carrier will contain the same power  
supplies as in the existing system. However, a Release 8 carrier may  
contain a 649A Power Unit. If so, re-use the power units from the G2  
power module.  
12. If the expansion control carrier contains a 631BR1, 631WB1, or 645B  
power unit, install the previously removed TN736 power unit in port slots  
“18” and “19” of the carrier (adjacent to the 631BR1, 631WB1, or 645B). If  
the system is equipped for neon message waiting, a TN752 or TN755  
power unit must be used.  
NOTE:  
The TN736 is not required when the 631DB1 or 645B power unit is  
used in the J58890AF-1 expansion control carrier or the J58890BB-2  
or J58890BB-3 port carriers. It is required in the J58890BB-1 port  
carrier, regardless of which 631 power unit is provided. Use the  
TN752 or TN755 if the system contains neon message waiting.  
13. Connect the white power cords to the power units.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-26  
Install Circuit Packs  
1. Install the new Release 8 control circuit packs into carrier “A.” Use the  
new label and the annotated “list configuration all” (provided with the  
Release 8 removable media) as a guide.  
NOTE:  
Currently, the TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack resides in a port slot of  
the universal module being upgraded. Relocate this circuit pack to  
the “TONE CLOCK” slot of carrier “A.” Lucent Technologies  
recommends upgrading to the TN2182 Tone-Clock.  
2. Install circuit pack blanks in slots not equipped with circuit packs.  
3. For a directly-connected standard reliability Release 8 system with 2 port  
networks, ensure the PPN and this EPN are both equipped with a TN776  
or TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack.  
For a directly-connected system with 3 port networks, ensure the PPN and  
each EPN have two TN776 or TN570 circuit packs.  
Interconnect Port Networks  
Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823A lightwave transceivers can interconnect  
PNs up to 4,900 feet (1493 m) apart. Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823B  
lightwave transceivers can interconnect PNs up to 25,000 feet (7620 m) apart.  
The 300A fiber optic lightwave transceiver can interconnect PNs up to  
115,000 feet (21.7 miles, 35 km) apart.  
NOTE:  
These distance limits are approximate measurements of the actual fiber  
right-of-way (not of the shortest linear distance) between the 2 endpoints.  
NOTE:  
It is important to label every cable that you install.  
NOTE:  
Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave  
transceiver. This section provides figures offering suggested ways of  
making these connections.  
The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled either “TX”  
(transmit) or “RX” (receive), while the fibers attaching to each connector are  
numbered either “1” or “2.” A viable fiber connection is only made when  
both fibers in each cable (“1” and “2”) route from the “TX” connector of a  
port network to the “RX” connector of its adjacent port network. See Figure  
5-6.  
NOTE:  
When finished, refer to Appendix A, ‘‘Fiber Link Administration’’ to  
adminisDteorwtnhloeadfifbroemrWlinwkws.S.omanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-27  
Collocated Port Networks  
For a standard reliability system with 1 collocated EPN, use 1 fiber optic cable  
and 2 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks.  
For a standard reliability system with 2 collocated EPNs, use 3 fiber optic cables  
and 6 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks.  
NOTE:  
Based on floor-plan considerations, the length of these cables may vary.  
20 foot (6.1 m) cables are normally adequate for a Release 8 with 2 port  
networks.  
For collocated cabinets, route the fiber optic cables directly from the PPN to the  
EPN cabinet. If a “DEFINITY style” PPN cabinet is collocated with another  
“DEFINITY style” EPN cabinet, the preferred routing is to run the cables up the  
cable tray and out the top of the PPN cabinet. The cables are then run to the  
other cabinet, through the top of the cabinet, and down the cable tray to the  
desired carrier level.  
If a “DEFINITY style” PPN cabinet is collocated with either a small cabinet,  
medium cabinet, or single-carrier cabinet stack, the preferred routing is to run the  
cables down the cable tray and out the bottom of the PPN cabinet. The cables  
are then run to the EPN cabinet and up the outside of the rear panels to the  
desired carrier level.  
Fiber-Remoted Port Networks  
For a standard reliability system with 1 fiber-remoted EPN, use 2 fiber optic  
cables, 2 lightwave transceivers, and 2 lightguide interconnect units (provided  
by the PSC).  
For a standard reliability system with 2 fiber-remoted EPNs, use 6 fiber optic  
cables, 6 lightwave transceivers, and 6 lightguide interconnect units (provided  
by the PSC).  
For fiber-remoted cabinets, route the cables down the cable tray and out the  
bottom of the cabinet to the MDF where the lightguide interconnect units are  
located.  
In either case, use cable ties to secure the cable against the walls of the cable  
tray at the cable tie positions built into the trays.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-28  
For Either 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 (see Figure 5-5, Figure 5-6, and  
Figure 5-7):  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect 1 end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver,  
just installed, at slot 1A01.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed, at slot 2A01.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and  
attach it to the wall of the cable tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-29  
For Two Collocated Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect 1 end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver,  
just installed, at slot 1A02.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed, at slot 3A01.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and  
attach it to the wall of the cable tray.  
3. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect 1 end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver,  
just installed, at slot 2A02.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-30  
4. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed, at slot 3A02. See Figure 5-8.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and  
attach it to the wall of the cable tray.  
Figure Notes  
1. Cabinet 1 Processor Port Network  
2. Cabinet 2 Expansion Port Network 1  
3. Cabinet 3 Expansion Port  
Network 2  
Figure 5-5. Standard RDeoliwanbloialditfyromRWelwewa.sSeom8awnuiatlhs.cTowm.oAlol Mr aTnhuarleseSePaorcrhtANndetDwowonrlkoasd.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-31  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff05 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
5. TX Connector  
6. RX Connector  
2. To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A01  
3. To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01  
Figure 5-6. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff05 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
5. TX Connector  
6. RX Connector  
2. To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A02  
3. To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 3A01  
Figure 5-7. Collocated Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-32  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff05 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
5. TX Connector  
6. RX Connector  
2. To PPN Carrier A Slot 2A02  
3. To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 3A02  
Figure 5-8. Collocated Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2  
For Either One or Two Fiber-Remoted Expansion Port Networks  
1. At control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1. See Figure 5-5 through Figure 5-9.  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the cable (with cable ties) to the wall of the cable  
tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-33  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber cable (with cable ties) to the wall of the  
cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager.  
For Two Fiber-Remoted Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-34  
3. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
4. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-35  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
cydf013 CJL102396  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
5. Optical Cross-Connect Facility  
6. 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit  
7. TX Connector  
2. To EPN1 Carrier A Slot 2A02  
3. To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A02  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
8. RX Connector  
Figure 5-9. Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2  
Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages  
Verify that each G2 circuit pack reused in the upgrade conforms to the usable  
vintage requirements for a Release 8 system (see Reference Guide for Circuit  
Pack Vintages and Change Notices).  
Remove Power-Failure Ground Wire  
Remove the 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) ground wire from the power-failure transfer  
unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-36  
Boot the Release 8 System  
1. Connect the PC to the “TERMINAL” connector behind PPN control carrier  
“A,” or install the G3-MA according to the “Set Up G3-MA” chapter of  
DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Management Applications  
Operations.  
2. Insert the translation card in the TN794 faceplate.  
3. At the EPN power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
4. At the PPN power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
5. The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process, loading default  
system translations from the translation card. This takes 8 to 11 minutes.  
6. Get the order number of the upgrade, and call the regional CSA to request  
an “init” login so that the right-to-use options can be enabled on the  
upgraded system.  
7. To use Access Security Gateway (ASG), see Appendix C, ‘‘Access  
Security Gateway’’.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-37  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
You can set up to 15 customized daylight savings time rules. If you have cabinets  
in several different time zones, you can set up rules for each on a location basis.  
A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition  
to and from daylight savings time. It also specifies the increment at which to  
transition.  
NOTE:  
The default daylight savings rule is 0, no daylight savings.  
1. Type change daylight-savings-rules and press Enter.  
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES  
Rule  
0:  
Change Day  
Month___Date  
Time____Increment  
No Daylight Savings  
1:  
Start: first Sunday___ on or after April ___ 1 at _2:0001:00  
Stop: first Sunday___ on or after October _ 25 at _2:00  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
2. Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day,  
Month, Date, Time, and Incrementfields for each rule. (for example,  
1:00 equals one hour)  
NOTE:  
You can change any rule except rule 0 (zero). You cannot delete a  
daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and  
Time screens.  
3. When done, press Enter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-38  
Set Date and Time  
1. Type set time and press Enter to bring up the Date and Time screen.  
DATE AND TIME  
DATE  
TIME  
Day of the Week: Tuesday  
Day of the Month: 8  
Month: February  
Year: 2000  
Hour: 20  
Minute: 30  
Second: XX  
Type: standard  
Daylight Savings Rule: 0  
Screen 5-1. Typical Date and Time Screen  
2. Type the day of the week in English (Sunday through Saturday). See  
Table 5-8 for English day of the week names.  
Table 5-8. English Day of the Week Names  
Day Number  
Day Name  
Sunday  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-39  
3. The cursor is positioned on the Month:field. Type the current month in  
English (January through December). See Table 5-9 for English month  
names. After the month is entered, press Ta b to move to next field.  
Table 5-9. English Month Names  
Month Number Month Name  
1
January  
February  
March  
2
3
4
April  
5
May  
6
June  
7
July  
8
August  
September  
October  
November  
December  
9
10  
11  
12  
4. The cursor is positioned on the Day of the Month:field. Type the day  
of month (1 through 31) and press Tab to move to the next field.  
5. The cursor is positioned on the Year:field. Type the current year and  
press TAB to move to the next field.  
6. The cursor is positioned on the Hour:field. Type the current hour for a  
24-hour clock. Press Ta b to move to the next field.  
7. The cursor is positioned on the Minute:field. Type current minute (0  
through 59). Seconds cannot be set.  
8. Type standard or daylight savings in the Typefield.  
9. Type the rule (number) in the Daylight Savings Rulefield.  
10. Press Enter when the information is correct.  
11. Type display time and press Enter to verify date/time data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-40  
Set Additional Administration  
1. Type list configuration software-version and press Enter to compare the  
version number of the Release 8 software program (displayed on the  
terminal) with the TN786B version number (written on a label on the  
TN786B’s faceplate). If the version numbers are not the same, change the  
version number on the TN786B label so that they agree.  
2. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter.  
Use this screen to enable the customer’s right-to-use options on the  
upgrade order. See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release  
8 Administrator’s Guide, for details.  
3. Type change site-data and press Enter. Use this screen to assign  
system-specific information (such as building, floor, stations, and so  
forth).  
4. Type save translation and press Enter. This instructs the system to write all  
translation information from memory to the translation card.  
!
CAUTION:  
If the terminal screen displays “translation corruption detected; call  
Lucent Technologies distributor immediately”, an error was detected  
in the translations. Call your Lucent Technologies representative.  
Reconnect Cables to Upgraded EPN Cabinet  
1. At the power distribution unit of the upgraded EPN, set the main circuit  
breaker to OFF.  
NOTE:  
Powering down an EPN without powering down the PPN will set off  
alarms. However, these alarms should clear after power is restored  
to each EPN.  
2. Temporarily disconnect the lightwave transceivers and fiber optic cables  
from the appropriate carriers.  
3. Replace the rear doors or rear panels previously removed.  
4. At the EPN cabinet, reconnect the lightwave transceivers, fiber optic  
cables, and the connector cables.  
5. Install the front door on the EPN cabinet if previously removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-41  
Power Up the EPN Cabinets  
1. At each EPN power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
After about 40 seconds, EPN power and PPN/EPN communications return.  
2. After power returns to each EPN and all trouble is cleared, verify the  
EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO. This restores  
the system to the normal mode.  
Retranslate Port Circuits  
If port circuit packs in the G2 module control carrier were relocated in order to  
place:  
A critical port circuit pack, requiring longer nominal battery holdover (such  
as a DS1 or an Announcement circuit pack), in a port slot  
A TN736, TN752, or TN755 power supply in port slots “18” and “19”  
A TN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface in port slot “1”  
A TN776 or TN570 in port slot “2” (for a second directly connected EPN)  
of the new expansion control carrier, verify that they were retranslated during the  
off-site software upgrade. If not, they must be retranslated now. Refer to  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide,  
for instructions on performing the retranslations.  
Enable TTI  
Typ e change system-parameters features and press Enter. Use this screen to  
change the TTI field back to its previous value before the upgrade.  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Compare it  
with the earlier status.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for each link.  
Enable Scheduled Maintenance  
Typ e change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter. Enable the  
scheduled daily maintenance.  
Resolve Alarms  
Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY  
Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-42  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination  
to INADS  
1. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and  
ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps  
in the shaded box. See ‘‘Where to Call for Technical Support’’ on page -xx  
for telephone numbers.  
NOTE:  
As part of the system registration process, the INADS Database  
Administrator enables Alarm Origination.  
2. When administration is completed, log in as craft at the Login:prompt.  
"init" login administration:  
1. Log in as init.  
2. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter  
to verify that the customer options are properly set.  
3. Go to screen 6, QSIG Optional Features, and set the Basic Call  
Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services  
Protocol b or d on an ISDN-PRI trunk group before the upgrade.  
4. Type change system-parameters offer-options and press Enter.  
5. If the Activate Offerfield is n, set it to y and press Ta b . A warning  
message lets you know whether you need to save translations and  
reboot to make the change permanent.  
6. Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes.  
7. Contact the requester when done.  
Save Translations  
1. Type save translation and press Enter to get upgraded translations onto  
disk. If the translations were corrupted during the upgrade, the following  
error message displays when logging in:  
!
WARNING:  
Translation corruption detected; call Lucent Technologies distributor  
immediately.  
NOTE:  
The save translation command cannot function if the translation  
corruption message appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Standard Reliability  
5
5-43  
Back Up Disk  
1. Type backup disk and press Enter to backup all changed files.  
2. Type test stored-data long and press Enter. This instructs the system to  
verify the consistency of the MSS files (on the disk and removable media).  
Return Replaced Equipment  
Return unused G2 equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the  
requirements outlined in:  
BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations  
Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-44  
High Reliability  
Required Hardware  
The equipment in Table 5-10 must be on-site before the upgrade begins. To  
place a claim for missing equipment, as part of the Streamlined Implementation  
process, call 1-800-772-5409, or the number provided by your Lucent  
Technologies representative.  
Table 5-10. Required Hardware  
Equipment  
Description  
Quantity  
J58890A  
Processor Port Network  
1
(PEC 6300-05X)  
J58890AF  
106647985  
Expansion Control Carrier  
TN775B Maintenance  
1
1
103557294  
or  
103281788  
TN776 Expansion Interface  
2 or 6 1  
TN570 Expansion Interface  
Removable Media  
2 or 6 1,2  
4
J58890TO-1 L1  
407439975  
20-Foot Multi-mode Fiber Optic Cable  
9823-A Lightwave Transceiver  
1 or 3 3  
2 or 6 4  
106455348  
or  
106455363  
9823-B Lightwave Transceiver  
2 or 6 5  
1. Use 2 for a high reliability system with 2 port networks; 6 with 3 port networks. Either 1  
or 4 Expansion Interfaces (EIs) ship loose with the EPN equipment. The factory has  
installed either 1 or 2 EIs in the new PPN.  
2. Required port network interfaces in a Release 8 system with the optional packet bus.  
3. Use 2 or 6 if the PPN and EPN(s) are remotely located. The fiber that previously  
connected an upgraded G2 universal module (not a traditional module) to the G2 TMS  
has the correct transceiver connectors and, therefore, can be reused.  
4. One pair for each fiber connection. For each connection, install one 9823-type  
lightwave transceiver in an EPN and 1 in the PPN. A 9823-type transceiver can be  
reused from each upgraded G2 universal module. Additional transceivers also ship  
loose with the EPN equipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-45  
Required Tools  
The following tools and items may be required during the upgrade:  
High-intensity flashlight or AC drop light  
3/8-inch flat-blade screwdriver with a 10-inch shank (minimum)  
5/16-inch and 1/4-inch sockets with a ratchet and 10-inch extension  
Long-nose pliers to disconnect ground straps and straighten backplane  
pins  
Static-proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit  
packs  
Labels for identifying the port circuit packs and cables attached to the  
rear of cabinets  
Twelve spare #12 and #10 self-tapping screws  
Four spare carrier ground straps  
Wrist ground strap  
Repair kit for backplane pins (KS-22876 L2 or equivalent)  
One copy of each of the following manuals:  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Maintenance for R8r  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Administrator’s Guide  
Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance  
Follow routine preventive maintenance procedures on the system to be  
upgraded. For information about the procedures and necessary equipment, refer  
to the “Preventive Maintenance” section in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications  
Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
Label Cables  
To make reconnecting the cables simpler and more reliable, label both ends of  
the connector cables associated with the carrier to be removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-46  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Write down  
all enabled links.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for all links.  
3. Write down which links are in service.  
Disable TTI  
!
CAUTION:  
If you do not disable the TTI, the translations can be corrupted.  
1. Make sure the ISDN is in service. If not, attempt to busy out and release  
the ISDN D-channel/link. This will bring the ISDN trunks back into service.  
2. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter.  
3. On the second screen, set the Enabled?field to n to prevent the TTI  
feature from activating.  
Power Down G2 System  
At the power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to OFF.  
Install Power-Failure Transfer Ground Wire  
!
CAUTION:  
To avoid contaminating single-point ground, do not connect the ground wire  
while the system is powered up.  
1. Connect a 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) wire to pin 49 of the connecting block  
or to pin 49 of the CAP (cable access panel) on the power-failure transfer  
panel.  
2. Route the opposite end of the wire to an approved ground and connect.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-47  
Disconnect Cables  
1. With the cable retainer in front of you and the part number visible (4B or  
4C), locate the slot that is almost vertical. This slot is adjacent to the part  
number. Insert a #2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and twist. The  
retainer will snap open easily. Remove the cable.  
2. Disconnect the cables associated with the carrier to be removed.  
3. Remove the rear doors from the cabinet.  
4. Remove all of the rear panels. Two different types of screws hold the  
panels to the cabinet. Remove the #10 screws with a screwdriver or a  
1/4-inch socket. Remove the #12 screws with a screwdriver or a 5/16-inch  
socket.)  
Remove Circuit Packs from Module Control  
Carrier A  
1. To ensure that power units in the “A” carrier are properly replaced, label  
each power unit with its slot number.  
2. Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the “A” carrier.  
3. Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier “A.” Store the circuit  
packs in the static-proof packaging.  
4. Remove the circuit pack blanks from the empty slots.  
5. Remove the front trim plate from the “A” carrier by pulling it straight off.  
Remove CURL from Module Control Carrier A  
Remove the CFY1 current limiter (CURL) from the pin-field block marked “CURL”  
on the “A” carrier. The CURL will be reused in the Release 8 EPN.  
NOTE:  
Verify that the CURL meets the minimum usable vintage requirements.  
Remove Module Control Carrier A  
NOTE:  
Note the position of each TDM/LAN cables before disconnecting.  
1. Disconnect both TDM/LAN cables from the “A” carrier. See Figure 5-10.  
Leave the other end connected to the “C” carrier.  
!
CAUTION:  
When removing the TDM/LAN cables from a previously upgraded  
carrier, be careful that none of the short pieces of shrink tubing come  
off the 4 corner pins of the pin-field block. Otherwise, when the new  
eqDouwipnlmoaednfrtomisWcwown.nSeomcatenuda,ls-.4co8mv. oAllltsMacnouuallsdSseahrochrtAtnod gDorowunlnoadd..  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-48  
2. On port carrier J58890BB-1, connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to  
Slot 02. On port carriers J58890BB-2 and J58890BB-3, connect the TDM  
cables to Slot 01.  
Figure Notes  
1. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
6. Port Carrier (“E” Position)  
7. Slot 21  
2. ZAHF4 TDM/LAN Terminator  
3. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L6)  
4. Module Control Carrier (“A” Position)  
5. Port Carrier (“D” Position)  
8. Slot 01  
9. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L7)  
Figure 5-10. TDM/LAN Connections for High Reliability System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-49  
3. Disconnect the 16 ground straps from the top and bottom of the “A”  
carrier. See Figure 5-11. These straps reconnect to the new “A” carrier.  
Figure Notes  
1. Rear of Cabinet  
4. Module Control Carrier (“A” Position)  
5. Port Carrier (“D” Position)  
2. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
3. Ground Jumpers  
Figure 5-11. Locations of Ground Jumpers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-50  
4. Disconnect the “P1” and “P2” cables from the “A” carrier. See Figure 5-12.  
5. Slide the latch up, and disconnect the “P1” cable from the “B” carrier.  
Figure Notes  
1. Rear of Control Carrier  
2. P2 Connector  
3. P1 Connector  
Figure 5-12. Location of P1 and P2 Connectors  
6. Remove the fan trim plate by pulling it straight off.  
7. Clean or replace the air filter (403326820) if necessary.  
8. In the front of the carrier, remove the 4 screws (top 2 first) holding the “A”  
carrier to the cabinet frame. Use a long handle screwdriver or 5/16-inch  
socket with a 10-inch (25 cm) extension.  
9. Behind the carrier, remove the 2 screws holding the “A” carrier’s rear  
connector panel to the cabinet frame.  
10. Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm). Be sure that no cables  
or wiring harnesses are caught on the cabinet/carrier framework.  
!
CAUTION:  
Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the  
framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the  
carrier.  
11. Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-51  
Unpack and Inspect Expansion Control Carrier  
1. Inspect the new J58890AF Expansion Control Carrier for any damage.  
Also verify that the backplane pins are not bent.  
2. Place the expansion control carrier on the floor so that the rear of the  
carrier faces up.  
3. Install the CFY1 current limiter (CURL) on the “A” carrier to the pin-field  
block marked “CURL.” Install the CURL with the components on the left.  
4. At the rear connector panel, determine which connectors will have a cable  
attached, and install a 4B cable retainer on each of these connectors.  
Install New Expansion Control Carrier A  
1. Install the carrier in position “A” by aligning the plastic alignment tips on  
the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the cabinet. These  
alignment tips support the carrier while installing the screws. Ensure that  
the power cords are properly placed in the slots at the sides of the carrier.  
2. Fasten the carrier into position with the 4 self-tapping screws saved from  
the removal of the old carrier.  
!
CAUTION:  
Carefully realign the threads on the self-tapping screws by turning  
them counterclockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid  
stripping the threads out of the framework.  
3. Behind the carrier, replace the 2 screws saved from the removal of the old  
carrier.  
4. Connect the “P2” and “P1” cables to the “A” carrier. See Figure 5-12.  
Snap the connector lock into place to ensure the connection is properly  
made.  
5. Connect the “P1” cable to the “C” carrier. Snap the connector lock into  
place to ensure the connection is properly made.  
6. Connect the 8 ground straps from the “D” carrier to the new “A” carrier  
See Figure 5-11. These straps were left connected to the “D” carrier.  
7. Connect the 8 ground straps from the “C” carrier to the new “A” carrier.  
These straps were left connected to the “C” carrier.  
8. For an AC-powered system, install the 2 new carrier ground straps. One  
strap connects ground point “1” to the A-carrier frame (right side), and the  
other connects ground point “8” to the A-carrier frame (left side).  
NOTE:  
DC-powered carriers do not use these carrier ground straps.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-52  
9. Connect the remaining end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “A” and  
“D” carriers) to the pin-field block marked “TDM” on the right side of the  
“A” carrier. See Figure 5-13 and Table 5-11. The other end remained  
connected to the “D” carrier when the old carrier was removed.  
10. Connect the remaining end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “A” and  
“C” carriers) to the pin-field block marked “TDM” on the left side of the “A”  
carrier. The other end remained connected to the “C” carrier when the old  
carrier was removed.  
11. On port carrier J58890BB-1, connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to  
Slot 02. On port carriers J58890BB-2 and J58890BB-3, connect the TDM  
cables to Slot 01.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-53  
Figure Notes  
1. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
2. ZAHF4 TDM/LAN Terminator  
3. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L6)  
6. Port Carrier (“E” Position)  
7. Slot 21  
8. Slot 02  
4. Expansion Control Carrier (“A” Position) 9. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L7)  
5. Port Carrier (“D” Position) 10. Port Carrier (“B” Position)  
Figure 5-13. TDM/LAN Connections for High Reliability Release 8 EPN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-54  
Table 5-11. TDM/LAN Connections  
"J" Number  
J58890BB-1  
J58890BB-2  
J58890BB-3  
J58890AF  
Carrier Type  
LHS Slot  
RHS Slot  
Port  
Port  
21  
21  
21  
21  
02  
01  
01  
02  
Port  
EPN Control “A”  
12. Install the front trim plate on the “A” carrier.  
13. Install the power units (removed from G2 module control carrier) into the  
“A” carrier. Do not interchange the physical locations of the units. The  
631AR1, 631WA1, 631DA1, or 644A install in the left side, while the  
631BR1, 631WB1, 631DB1, or 645B install in the right side.  
NOTE:  
In most cases, the new Release 8 carrier will contain the same power  
supplies as in the existing system. However, the new Release 8  
carrier may contain a 649A Power Unit. If so, use the power units  
from the G2 power module.  
14. If the expansion control carrier contains a 631BR1, 631WB1, or 645B  
power unit, install the previously removed TN736 power unit in port slots  
“18” and “19” of the carrier (adjacent to the 631BR1, 631WB1, or 645B). If  
the system is equipped for neon message waiting, a TN752 or TN755  
power unit must be used.  
NOTE:  
The TN736 is not required when the 631DB1 or 645B power unit is  
used in the J58890AH control carrier or the J58890BB-2 or  
J58890BB-3 port carriers. It is required in the J58890BB-1 port  
carrier, regardless of which 631 power unit is provided. Use the  
TN752 or TN755 if the system is equipped with neon message  
waiting.  
15. Connect the white power cords to the power units.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-55  
Install Circuit Packs  
1. Install the new Release 8 control circuit packs into carrier “A.” Use the new  
label and the annotated “list configuration all” (provided with the Release  
8 removable media) as a guide.  
NOTE:  
Currently, the TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack resides in a port slot of  
the universal module being upgraded. Relocate this circuit pack to  
the “TONE CLOCK” slot of carrier “A.” Lucent Technologies  
recommends that you upgrade to the TN2182 Tone-Clock.  
2. Install circuit pack blanks in slots not equipped with circuit packs.  
3. For a directly-connected high reliability Release 8 system with 2 port  
networks, ensure the PPN and this EPN are both equipped with a TN776  
or TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack.  
For a directly-connected system with 3 port networks, ensure that the PPN  
and each EPN have two TN776 or TN570 circuit packs.  
Interconnect Port Networks High Reliability  
Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823A lightwave transceivers can interconnect  
PNs up to 4,900 feet (1493 m) apart. Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823B  
lightwave transceivers can interconnect PNs up to 25,000 feet (7620 m) apart. A  
300A fiber optic lightwave transceiver can interconnect PNs up to 115,000 feet  
(21.7 miles, 35 km) apart.  
NOTE:  
These distance limits are approximate measurements of the actual fiber  
right-of-way (not of the shortest linear distance) between the 2 endpoints.  
NOTE:  
It is important to label every cable that you install.  
NOTE:  
Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave  
transceiver. This section provides figures offering the suggested way of  
making these connections.  
The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled either “TX”  
(transmit) or “RX” (receive), while the fibers attaching to each connector are  
numbered either “1” or “2.” A viable fiber connection is only made when  
both fibers in each cable (“1” and “2”) route from the “TX” connector of a  
port network to the “RX” connector of its adjacent port network. See Figure  
5-16.  
NOTE:  
When finished, refer to Appendix A, ‘‘Fiber Link Administration’’ to  
administer the fiber links.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-56  
Collocated Port Networks  
For a high reliability system with 1 collocated expansion port network, use 1 fiber  
optic cable and 2 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks.  
For a high reliability system with 2 collocated expansion port networks, use 3  
fiber optic cables and 6 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks.  
NOTE:  
Based on floor plan considerations, the length of these fiber cables may  
vary. 20 foot (6.1 m) cables are normally adequate for a Release 8 with  
2 port networks.  
For collocated cabinets, the fiber optic cables should be routed directly from the  
PPN to the EPN cabinet. If a “DEFINITY style” PPN cabinet is collocated with  
another “DEFINITY style” EPN cabinet, the preferred routing is to run the cables  
up the cable tray and out the top of the PPN cabinet. The cables are then run to  
the other cabinet, through the top of the cabinet, and down the cable tray to the  
desired carrier level.  
NOTE:  
Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation  
and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets, for additional guidelines about fiber  
routing.  
If a “DEFINITY style” PPN cabinet is collocated with either a small cabinet,  
medium cabinet, or single-carrier cabinet stack, the preferred routing is to run the  
cables down the cable tray and out the bottom of the PPN cabinet. The cables  
are then run to the EPN cabinet and up the outside of the rear panels to the  
desired carrier level.  
Fiber-Remoted Port Networks  
For a high reliability system with 1 fiber-remoted expansion port network, 2 fiber  
optic cables, 2 lightwave transceivers, and 2 lightguide interconnect units  
(provided by the PSC) are required.  
For a high reliability system with 2 fiber-remoted expansion port networks, 6 fiber  
optic cables, 6 lightwave transceivers, and 6 lightguide interconnect units  
(provided by the PSC) are required.  
For fiber-remoted cabinets, route the cables down the cable tray and out the  
bottom of the cabinet to the cross-connect field where the lightguide interconnect  
units are located.  
In either case, use cable ties to secure the cable against the walls of the cable  
tray at the cable tie positions built into the trays.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-57  
For Either 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks  
1. At control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 (see Figure 5-15 through Figure  
5-18):  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just  
installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil the surplus of fiber optic cable and  
carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-58  
For Two Collocated Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver just installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and  
attach it to the wall of the cable tray.  
3. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A02.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
4. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just  
installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and  
attach it to the wall of the cable tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-59  
Figure Notes  
1. Cabinet 1 Processor Port Network  
2. Cabinet 2 Expansion Port Network 1  
3. Cabinet 3 Expansion Port  
Network 2  
Figure 5-14. High Reliability Release 8 with Two or Three Port Networks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-60  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff05 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
5. RX Connection  
6. TX Connection  
2. To PPN Carrier C Slot 1C02  
3. To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01  
Figure 5-15. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff05 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
5. RX Connection  
6. TX Connection  
2. To PPN Carrier A Slot 1D02  
3. To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 3A01  
Figure 5-16. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-61  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff05 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
5. RX Connection  
6. TX Connection  
2. To EPN Carrier A Slot 2A02  
3. To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 3A02  
Figure 5-17. Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2  
For Either One or Two Fiber-Remoted Expansion Port Networks  
1. At control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 (see Figure 5-19 through Figure  
5-22):  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-62  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager.  
For 2 Fiber-Remoted Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-63  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A01.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect the remaining end of the fiber cable to the transceiver just  
installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager.  
3. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A02.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
4. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A02.  
NOTE:  
Attenuators may be required for single mode fiber using a  
300A Lightwave Transceiver  
Connect the remaining end of the cable to the transceiver just  
installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-64  
Figure Notes  
1. Cabinet 1 Processor Port Network  
2. Cabinet 2 Expansion Port Network 1  
3. Cabinet 3 Expansion Port  
Network 2  
Figure 5-18. High Reliability Release 8 with Two or Three Port Networks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-65  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
cydf013 CJL102396  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
5. Optical Cross-Connect Facility  
6. 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit (LIU)  
7. TX COnnector  
2. To PPN Carrier C Slot 1C02  
3. To EPN 1 Carrier A Slot 2A01  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
8. RX Connector  
Figure 5-19. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
cydf013 CJL102396  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
5. Optical Cross-Connect Facility  
6. 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit  
7. TX Connector  
2. To PPN Carrier D Slot 1D02  
3. To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A01  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
8. RX Connector  
Figure 5-20. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-66  
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
cydf013 CJL102396  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
5. Optical Cross-Connect Facility  
6. 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit  
7. TX Connector  
2. To EPN1 Carrier A Slot 2A02  
3. To EPN2 Cabinet A Slot 3A02  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
8. RX Connector  
Figure 5-21. Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2  
Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages  
Verify that each reused circuit pack conforms to the usable vintage requirements  
for a Release 8 system (see Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and  
Change Notices).  
Remove Power-Failure Ground Wire  
Remove the 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) ground wire from the power-failure transfer  
unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-67  
Boot the Release 8 System  
1. Connect the management terminal to the “TERMINAL” connector behind  
PPN control carrier “A,” or install the G3-MA according to the “Set Up  
G3-MA” chapter of DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3  
Management Applications Operations, 585-229-202.  
2. Insert the translation cards in the TN794 faceplates.  
3. At each EPN power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
4. At the PPN power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
5. The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process, loading the  
default system translations from the translation card. This takes 8 to 11  
minutes.  
6. Get the order number of the upgrade, and call the regional CSA to request  
an “init” login so the right-to-use options can be enabled on the upgraded  
system.  
7. To use Access Security Gateway (ASG), see Appendix C, ‘‘Access  
Security Gateway’’.  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
You can set up to 15 customized daylight savings time rules. If you have cabinets  
in several different time zones, you can set up rules for each on a location basis.  
A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition  
to and from daylight savings time. It also specifies the increment at which to  
transition.  
NOTE:  
The default daylight savings rule is 0, no daylight savings.  
1. Type change daylight-savings-rules and press Enter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-68  
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES  
Month___Date  
Rule  
0:  
Change Day  
Time____Increment  
No Daylight Savings  
1:  
Start: first Sunday___ on or after April ___ 1 at _2:0001:00  
Stop: first Sunday___ on or after October _ 25 at _2:00  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
2. Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day,  
Month, Date, Time, and Incrementfields for each rule. (for example,  
1:00 equals one hour)  
NOTE:  
You can change any rule except rule 0 (zero). You cannot delete a  
daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and  
Time screens.  
3. When done, press Enter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-69  
Set Date and Time  
1. Type set time and press Enter to bring up the Date and Time screen.  
.
DATE AND TIME  
DATE  
TIME  
Day of the Week: Tuesday  
Day of the Month: 8  
Month: February  
Year: 2000  
Hour: 20  
Minute: 30  
Second: XX  
Type: standard  
Daylight Savings Rule: 0  
Screen 5-2. Typical Date and Time Screen  
2. Type the day of the week in English (Sunday through Saturday). See  
Table 5-12 for English day of the week names.  
Table 5-12. English Day of the Week Names  
Day Number  
Day Name  
Sunday  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-70  
3. The cursor is positioned on the Month:field. Type the current month in  
English (January through December). See Table 5-13 for English month  
names. After the month is entered, press Ta b to move to next field.  
Table 5-13. English Month Names  
Month Number Month Name  
1
January  
February  
March  
2
3
4
April  
5
May  
6
June  
7
July  
8
August  
September  
October  
November  
December  
9
10  
11  
12  
4. The cursor is positioned on the Day of the Month:field. Type the day  
of month (1 through 31) and press Tab to move to the next field.  
5. The cursor is positioned on the Year:field. Type the current year and  
press TAB to move to the next field.  
6. The cursor is positioned on the Hour:field. Type the current hour for a  
24-hour clock. Press Ta b to move to the next field.  
7. The cursor is positioned on the Minute:field. Type current minute (0  
through 59). Seconds cannot be set.  
8. Type standard or daylight savings in the Typefield.  
9. Type the rule (number) in the Daylight Savings Rulefield.  
10. Press Enter when the information is correct.  
11. Type display time and press Enter to verify date/time data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-71  
Set Additional Administration  
1. Type list configuration software-version long and press Enter to  
compare the version number of the DEFINITY ECS Release 8 software  
program with the version number (written on a label on the processor’s  
faceplate). If the version numbers are not the same, change the version  
number on the processor label so that they agree.  
2. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter.  
Use this screen to enable the Release 8 option and to assign the  
customer’s other right-to-use options on the G2-to-DEFINITY ECS Release  
8 upgrade order. See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server  
Release 8 Administrator’s Guide, for details on enabling these options.  
3. Type change site-data and press Enter. Use this screen to assign  
system-specific information (such as building, floor, stations, and so  
forth).  
4. Type status system 1 and press Enter to verify the system is in the  
“active/standby” mode.  
5. Type save translation and press Enter. This instructs the system to write all  
translation information from memory to the translation card.  
!
WARNING:  
If the terminal screen displays “translation corruption detected; call  
Lucent Technologies distributor immediately”, an error was detected  
in the translations.  
Reconnect Cables  
1. At the power distribution unit of the upgraded EPN, set the main circuit  
breaker to OFF.  
NOTE:  
Powering down an EPN without powering down the PPN will set off  
alarms. However, these alarms should clear after power is restored  
to each EPN.  
2. Temporarily disconnect the lightwave transceivers and fiber optic cables,  
already labeled, from the appropriate carriers.  
3. Replace the back doors or back panels.  
4. At the EPN cabinet, reconnect the lightwave transceivers, fiber optic  
cables, and the connector cables associated with the carrier being  
replaced.  
5. Install the front door on the EPN cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-72  
Power Up the EPN Cabinets  
1. At each EPN power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
After about 40 seconds, EPN power and PPN/EPN communications return.  
2. After power returns to each EPN and all trouble is cleared, verify that the  
EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO. This restores  
the system to the normal mode.  
Retranslate Port Circuits  
If port circuit packs in the G2 module control carrier were relocated in order to  
put:  
A critical port circuit pack, requiring longer nominal battery holdover (such  
as a DS1 or an Announcement circuit pack), in a port slot  
A TN736, TN752, or TN755 power supply in port slots “18” and “19”  
A TN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface in port slot “1”  
A TN776 or TN570 in port slot “2” (for a second directly connected EPN)  
of the new expansion control carrier, verify that they were retranslated during the  
off-site software upgrade. If not, they must be retranslated now. Refer to  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide,  
for instructions on performing the retranslations.  
Enable TTI  
1. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter.  
2. On the second screen, set the Enabled?field to y to activate the TTI  
feature.  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Compare it  
with the earlier status.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for each link.  
Enable Scheduled Maintenance  
Typ e change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter. Enable the  
scheduled daily maintenance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-73  
Resolve Alarms  
Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY  
Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8si.  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination  
to INADS  
1. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and  
ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps  
in the shaded box. See ‘‘Where to Call for Technical Support’’ on page -xx  
for telephone numbers.  
NOTE:  
As part of the system registration process, the INADS Database  
Administrator enables Alarm Origination.  
2. When administration is completed, log in as craft at the Login:prompt.  
"init" login administration:  
1. Log in as init.  
2. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter  
to verify that the customer options are properly set.  
3. Go to screen 6, QSIG Optional Features, and set the Basic Call  
Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services  
Protocol b or d on an ISDN-PRI trunk group before the upgrade.  
4. Type change system-parameters offer-options and press Enter.  
5. If the Activate Offerfield is n, set it to y and press Ta b . A warning  
message lets you know whether you need to save translations and  
reboot to make the change permanent.  
6. Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes.  
7. Contact the requester when done.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
High Reliability  
5
5-74  
Save Translations  
1. Type save translation and press Enter to get upgraded translations onto  
disk. If the translations were corrupted during the upgrade, the following  
error message displays when logging in:  
!
WARNING:  
Translation corruption detected; call Lucent Technologies distributor  
immediately.  
NOTE:  
The save translation command cannot function if the translation  
corruption message appears.  
Back Up Disk  
1. Type backup disk and press Enter to backup all changed files.  
2. Type test stored-data long and press Enter. This instructs the system to  
verify the consistency of the MSS files (on the disk and removable media).  
Return Replaced Equipment  
Return unused G2 equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the  
requirements outlined in:  
BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations  
Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-75  
Critical Reliability  
Upgrade Cabinets  
An existing universal module cabinet is always upgraded to an EPN.  
Required Hardware  
The equipment in Table 5-14 must be on-site before the upgrade begins. To  
place a claim for missing equipment, as part of the Streamlined Implementation  
process, call “1-800-772-5409” or the number provided by your Lucent  
Technologies representative.  
Table 5-14. Required Hardware  
Equipment  
PEC 6300-05X  
J58890AF  
Description  
Quantity  
Processor Port Network  
Expansion Control Carrier  
Port Carrier  
1
1
1
1
J58890BB-3  
106647985  
TN775B Maintenance  
TN776 Expansion Interface  
1
103557294  
or  
103281788  
4 or 12  
1 2  
TN570 Expansion Interface  
Removable Media  
4 or 12 ,  
J58890TO-1 L1  
H-600-204 G1  
407439975  
4
3
ICC  
2
4
20-Foot Multi-mode Fiber Optic Cable  
9823-A Lightwave Transceiver  
2 or 6  
106455348  
or  
4 or 12 (See Note 1)  
106455363  
9823-B Lightwave Transceiver  
TN771D Maintenance Test  
4 or 12 (See Note 1)  
1 or 2  
106689516  
1. Use 4 for a critical reliability system with 2 port networks or 12 with 3 port networks.  
Either 2 or 8 Expansion Interfaces (EIs) ship loose with the EPN equipment. The factory  
has installed the other 2 or 4 EIs in the new PPN.  
2. Required port network interfaces in a Release 8 system with the optional packet bus.  
3. Required for an EPN in a critical reliability system.  
4. Use 4 or 12 if the EPNs and the PPN are remotely located. Assuming acceptable  
lengths, the fibers previously connecting an upgraded G2 universal module (not a  
traditional module) to the G2 TMS have the correct transceiver connectors and can be  
reused.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-76  
Required Tools  
The following tools and items may be required during the upgrade:  
High-intensity flashlight or AC drop light  
3/8-inch flat-blade screwdriver with a 10-inch shank (minimum)  
5/16-inch and 1/4-inch sockets with a ratchet and 10-inch extension  
Long-nose pliers to disconnect grounding straps and straighten  
backplane pins  
Static-proof or original circuit pack packaging for transporting circuit  
packs  
Labels for identifying the port circuit packs and cables attached to the  
rear of cabinets  
Twelve #12 and #10 self-tapping screws  
Four spare carrier grounding straps  
Wrist ground strap  
Repair kit for backplane pins (KS-22876 L2 or equivalent)  
One copy of each of the following manuals:  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Maintenance for R8r  
— DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8  
Administrator’s Guide  
Follow Routine Preventive Maintenance  
During the upgrade, follow routine preventive maintenance procedures on the  
system to be upgraded. For information about the procedures and necessary  
equipment, refer to the “Preventive Maintenance” section in DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
Label Cables  
To make reconnecting the cables simpler and more reliable, label both ends of  
the connector cables associated with the carrier to be removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-77  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Write down  
all enabled links.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for all links.  
3. Write down which links are in service.  
Disable TTI  
!
CAUTION:  
If you do not disable the TTI, the translations can be corrupted.  
1. Make sure the ISDN is in service. If not, attempt to busy out and release  
the ISDN D-channel/link. This will bring the ISDN trunks back into service.  
2. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter.  
3. On the second screen, set the Enabled?field to n to prevent the TTI  
feature from activating.  
Power Down G2 System  
At the power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to OFF.  
Install Power-Failure Transfer Ground Wire  
!
CAUTION:  
To avoid contaminating single-point ground, do not connect the ground wire  
while the system is powered up.  
1. Connect 1 end of a 10 AWG (#25) (2.6 mm2) wire either to pin 49 of the  
connecting block or to pin 49 of the CAP (cable access panel) associated  
with the power-failure transfer panel.  
2. Route the opposite end of the wire to an approved ground source and  
connect.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-78  
Disconnect Cables  
1. With the cable retainer in front of you and the part number visible (4B or  
4C), locate the slot that is almost vertical. This slot is adjacent to the part  
number. Insert a flat blade screwdriver with a 1/4-inch blade into the slot  
and twist. The retainer will snap open easily. Remove the cable.  
2. Disconnect previously labeled cables associated with the carrier to be  
removed.  
3. Behind a “DEFINITY style” cabinet, remove the back doors from the  
cabinet.  
4. Behind a previously upgraded cabinet, remove all of the back panels.  
(Two different types of screws hold the back panels to the cabinet. The  
#10 screws can be removed with a screwdriver or a 1/4-inch socket. The  
#12 screws can be removed with a screwdriver or a 5/16-inch socket.)  
Remove Circuit Packs from Module Control  
Carriers A and B  
1. To ensure that power units in the “A” and “B” carriers are properly  
replaced, label each power unit with its slot number.  
2. Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the “A” and “B”  
carriers.  
3. Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier “A.” Store the circuit  
packs in the static-proof packaging.  
4. Remove all circuit packs from carrier “B.” Store the circuit packs in the  
static-proof packaging.  
5. Remove the circuit pack blanks from slots that do not contain circuit  
packs.  
6. Remove the front trim plate from the “B” carrier by pulling it straight off.  
Then remove the front trim plate from the “A” carrier.  
Remove CURL from Module Control Carrier A  
Remove the CFY1 current limiter (CURL) from the pin-field block marked “CURL”  
on the “A” carrier. The CURL will be reused in the DEFINITY ECS Release 8 EPN.  
NOTE:  
Note the position of the components on the left side of the CURL.  
NOTE:  
Verify that the CURL meets the minimum usable vintage requirements.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-79  
Remove Module Control Carriers A and B  
1. Remove the TDM/LAN cable from between the “A” and “B” carriers. See  
Figure 5-23. This cable will be reused.  
2. Disconnect 1 end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “A” and “D”  
carriers) from the “A” carrier. Leave the other end connected to the “D”  
carrier, and move the cable into a position so that it will not interfere with  
removing the “A” carrier.  
NOTE:  
Note the position of the TDM/LAN cable before disconnecting.  
3. Disconnect 1 end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “B” and “C”  
carriers) from the “B” carrier. Leave the other end connected to the “C”  
carrier, and move the cable into a position so that it will not interfere with  
removing the “B” carrier.  
!
CAUTION:  
When removing the TDM/LAN cables from a previously upgraded  
carrier, be careful that none of the short pieces of shrink tubing come  
off the 4 corner pins of the pin-field block. Otherwise, when the new  
equipment is connected, -48 volts could short to ground.  
4. Remove and retain the 8 ground straps from between the “A” and “B”  
carriers. See Figure 5-24.  
5. Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps from between the “A” and “D”  
carriers. These straps will reconnect to the new “A” carrier.  
6. Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps from between the “B” and “C”  
carriers. These straps will reconnect to the new “B” carrier.  
7. Disconnect the “P1” (small 9-pin) connector and the “P2” (large 38-pin)  
connector from the “A” carrier. See Figure 5-25. Move the cables into a  
position where they will not interfere with removing the carrier.  
8. Slide the latch up, and disconnect the “P1” (small 9-pin) connector from  
the “B” carrier. Move the cable into a position where it will not interfere with  
removing the carrier.  
9. Disconnect and remove the ICC cables. See Figure 5-23. They will not be  
reused.  
10. Remove the fan trim plate by pulling it straight off.  
11. Clean or replace the air filter (403326820) if necessary.  
12. In front of carrier, remove the 4 screws (top 2 first) holding the “B” carrier  
to the cabinet frame. Use a long-handle screwdriver or 5/16-inch socket  
with a 10-inch extension.  
13. Behind the carrier, remove the 2 screws holding the “B” carrier’s rear  
connector panel to the cabinet frame.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-80  
14. Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches; then, from the back, be sure that no  
cables or wiring harnesses are caught on the cabinet/carrier framework.  
!
CAUTION:  
Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the  
framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the  
carrier.  
15. Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet.  
16. Repeat Steps 12 through 15 for the “A” carrier.  
17. On port carrier J58890BB-1, connect the TDM cable or the TDM  
terminator to Slot 02. On port carriers J58890BB-2 and J58890BB-3,  
connect the TDM cables or the TDM terminator to Slot 01. If the port  
carrier has J58890BB-1 and J58890BB-2 printed on it, treat it as a  
J58890BB-1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-81  
Figure Notes  
1. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
2. ZAHF4 TDM/LAN Terminator  
3. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L6)  
7. Slot 21  
8. Slot 01  
9. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L7)  
4. Module Control Carrier (“A”  
Position)  
10. Duplicated Module Control Carrier  
(“B” Position)  
5. Port Carrier (“D” Position)  
6. Port Carrier (“E” Position)  
11. ICCA Cable (Slot 03)  
12. ICCB Cable  
Figure 5-22. TDM/LAN Connections for Duplicated G2 Universal Module  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-82  
Figure Notes  
1. Rear of Cabinet  
4. Ground Jumpers  
2. Module Control Carrier (“A” Position)  
5. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
6. Port Carrier (“D” Position)  
3. Expansion Module Control Carrier  
(“B” Position)  
Figure 5-23. Locations of Ground Jumpers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-83  
Figure Notes  
1. Rear of Control Carrier  
2. P2 Connector  
3. P1 Connector  
Figure 5-24. Location of P1 and P2 Connectors  
Prepare the New A and B Position Carriers  
1. Inspect the new carriers for any damage. Verify that the backplane pins  
are not bent.  
2. Place the expansion control carrier on the floor so that the rear of the  
carrier faces up.  
3. Install the CFY1 current limiter (CURL) on the “A” carrier to the pin-field  
block marked “CURL.” The CURL is inserted with the components on the  
left side as viewed from the rear.  
4. At the rear connector panel, determine which connectors will have a cable  
attached, and install a 4B cable retainer on each of these connectors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-84  
Install the New A and B Position Carriers  
1. Install the J58890AF Expansion Control Carrier in position “A” by lining up  
the plastic alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes  
in the cabinet. These alignment tips will support the carrier while the  
screws are being replaced. Ensure that the power cords are properly  
placed in the slots at the sides of the carrier.  
2. Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self-tapping screws saved from the  
removal of the old carrier.  
!
CAUTION:  
Carefully realign the threads on the self-tapping screws by turning  
them counterclockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid  
stripping the threads out of the framework.  
3. Behind the carrier in a “DEFINITY style” cabinet, replace the 2 screws  
saved from the removal of the old carrier.  
4. Install the J58890BB-3 port carrier in position “B” by lining up the plastic  
alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the  
cabinet. These alignment tips support the carrier while the screws are  
being replaced. Ensure the power cords are properly placed in the slots at  
the sides of the carrier.  
5. Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self-tapping screws saved from the  
removal of the old carrier.  
6. Connect the “P2” and “P1” (large and small) connectors to the “A” carrier.  
Snap the connector lock into place to ensure the connection is properly  
made. See Figure 5-25.  
7. Connect the “P1” (small) connector to the “B” carrier. To get enough slack  
in the cables, cut the tie wrap holding the intercabinet cables from the  
upright in the area of the carrier being installed. Snap the connector lock  
into place to ensure the connection is properly made.  
8. Connect the 8 ground straps from the “D” carrier to the new “A” carrier.  
See Figure 5-24. These straps were left connected to the “D” carrier.  
9. Connect the 8 ground straps from the “C” carrier to the new “B” carrier.  
These straps were left connected to the “C” carrier.  
10. Install the 8 ground straps between the new “A” and “B” carriers. These  
straps were removed from the old carriers.  
11. For an AC-powered expansion control carrier, install the 2 new carrier  
ground straps. One strap connects ground point “1” to the A-carrier frame  
(on the right side), and the other connects ground point “8” to the A-carrier  
frame (on the left side).  
NOTE:  
DC-powered carriers do not use these carrier ground straps.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-85  
12. Connect the loose end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “A” and “D”  
carriers) to the pin-field block marked “TDM” on the right side of the “A”  
carrier (see Figure 5-26 and Table 5-15). The other end remained  
connected to the “D” carrier when the old carrier was removed.  
13. Connect the loose end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “B” and “C”  
carriers) to the pin-field block marked “TDM” on the right side of the “B”  
carrier. The other end remained connected to the “C” carrier when the old  
carrier was removed.  
14. Install the TDM/LAN cable between the “A” and “B” carriers. The cable is  
connected to the “A” and “B” carriers at the pin-field blocks marked  
TDM” on the left side of each carrier.  
Table 5-15. TDM/LAN Connections  
"J" Number  
J58890BB-1  
J58890BB-2  
J58890BB-3  
J58890AF  
Carrier Type  
LHS Slot  
RHS Slot  
Port  
Port  
21  
21  
21  
21  
02  
01  
01  
02  
Port  
EPN Control “A”  
15. On port carrier J58890BB-1, connect the TDM cable or the TDM  
terminator to Slot 02. On port carriers J58890BB-2 and J58890BB-3,  
connect the TDM cables or the TDM terminator to Slot 01. If the port  
carrier has J58890BB-1 and J58890BB-2 printed on it, treat it as a  
J58890BB-1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-86  
Figure Notes  
1. ZAHF4 TDM/LAN Terminator  
2. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L6)  
3. Slot 21  
5. Slot 02  
6. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L7)  
7. ICCA and ICCB Connectors)  
4. Inter-Carrier Cables (“A” and “B”)  
H600-204, G1  
Figure 5-25. TDM/LAN Connections for Critical Reliability Release 8 EPN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-87  
16. Install the front trim plates; first on the “A” carrier, and then on the “B”  
carrier.  
17. Install the ICC cables (H600-204 G1) between carriers “A” and “B.”  
Connect the cables to the “ICC” pin-field block on both carriers (see  
Figure 5-27 and Figure 5-28 and Table 5-16). Install the cable so that the  
dark stripe is on the bottom at both ends.  
!
CAUTION:  
While installing the ICC cable connectors, be careful not to bend any  
backplane pins. Double check each connection to verify that the  
pins are straight.  
18. Install the power units (removed from G2 universal module) into the “A”  
carrier. There are 4 different pairs of power units available. They are the  
631AR1 and 631BR1, the 631WA1 and 631WB1, the 631DA1 and  
631DB1, and the 644A and 645B.  
Do not interchange the physical locations of the units. Install the 631AR1,  
631WA1, 631DA1 or 644A in the left side. Install the 631BR1, 631WB1,  
631DB1 or 645B in the right side.  
19. If the expansion control carrier contains a 631BR1, 631WB1, or 645B  
power unit, install the previously removed TN736 power unit in port slots  
“18” and “19” of the carrier (adjacent to the 631BR1, 631WB1, or 645B). If  
the system contains neon message waiting, a TN752 or TN755 power unit  
must be used.  
NOTE:  
The TN736 is not required when the 631DB1 or 645B power unit is  
used in the J58890AH control carrier or the J58890BB-2 or  
J58890BB-3 port carriers. It is required in the J58890BB-1 port  
carrier regardless of which 631 power unit is provided. Use the  
TN752 or TN755 if the system is equipped with neon message  
waiting.  
20. Connect the power cords to the power units. The power cords are the  
white cables equipped with plugs that are run through the slots in the front  
of each carrier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-88  
Table 5-16. Intercarrier Cable Connections  
Connect ICC Cables  
From  
Pin-Field Block  
To  
Carrier  
Carrier  
Pin-Field Block  
EPN  
J58890AF  
ICCA  
ICCB  
J58890BB  
ICCA  
ICCB  
Figure Notes  
1. ICCA Connectors  
2. ICCB Connectors  
3. CURL (Current Limiter) Connectors  
Figure 5-26. ICC Connections for the Expansion Control Carrier  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-89  
Figure Notes  
1. ICCA Connectors  
2. ICCB Connectors  
Figure 5-27. ICC Connections for the Port Carrier  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-90  
Test the CURL  
1. Plug the cabinet power cord into the appropriate receptacle.  
2. At the power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
3. Unplug the power cord from the power unit “B” (right-hand side) in the “A”  
carrier.  
4. The fans must be running. If not, check the installation of the CURL.  
5. Reconnect the power cord to the power unit in the “A” carrier, then unplug  
the power cord from power unit “B” (right-hand side) in the “B” carrier.  
6. The fans must be running. If not, check the installation of the CURL.  
7. Reconnect the power cord to the power unit in the “B” carrier.  
8. At the power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to OFF.  
Install Circuit Packs  
1. Install the new Release 8 control circuit packs into carriers “A” and “B.”  
Use the new decal and the annotated “list configuration all” (provided with  
the Release 8 translation card) as a guide.  
NOTE:  
Currently, both TN768 Tone Clock circuit packs reside in port slots of  
the universal module being upgraded. As part of this step, relocate  
these circuit packs to the “TONE CLOCK” slot of carrier “A” and port  
slot “1” of carrier “B.”  
2. For a directly-connected critical reliability Release 8 system with 2 port  
networks, ensure that the PPN and this EPN are both equipped with 2  
TN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface circuit packs.  
For a directly-connected system with 3 port networks, ensure that the PPN  
and each EPN have 4 TN776s or TN570s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-91  
Interconnect Port Networks Critical Reliability  
Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823A lightwave transceivers can interconnect  
PNs up to 4,900 feet (1493 m) apart. Fiber optic cabling terminated to 9823B  
lightwave transceivers can interconnect PNs up to 25,000 feet (7620 m) apart.  
NOTE:  
These distance limits are approximate measurements of the actual fiber  
right-of-way (not of the shortest linear distance) between the 2 endpoints.  
NOTE:  
It is important to label every cable that you install.  
NOTE:  
Keep track of which fiber attaches to which connector on each lightwave  
transceiver. This section provides figures offering the suggested way of  
making these connections.  
The connectors on the lightwave transceivers are labeled either “TX”  
(transmit) or “RX” (receive), while the fibers attached to each connector are  
numbered either “1” or “2.” A viable fiber connection is only made when  
both fibers in each cable (“1” and “2”) route from the “TX” connector of a  
port network to the “RX” connector of its adjacent port network. For an  
example, refer to Figure 5-29 on page 5-96.  
NOTE:  
When finished, refer to Appendix A, ‘‘Fiber Link Administration’’ to  
administer the fiber links.  
Collocated Port Networks  
For a critical reliability system with 1 collocated EPN, use 2 fiber optic cables and  
4 lightwave transceivers to directly connect the networks. For a critical reliability  
system with 2 collocated EPNs, use 6 fiber optic cables and 12 lightwave  
transceivers to directly connect the networks.  
NOTE:  
Based on floor-plan considerations, the length of these cables may vary.  
Twenty-foot (6.1 m) cables are normally adequate for a Release 8 with 2  
port networks.  
For collocated cabinets, the fiber optic cables should be routed directly from the  
PPN to the EPN cabinet. If a “DEFINITY style” PPN cabinet is collocated with  
another “DEFINITY style” EPN cabinet, route the cables up the cable tray and out  
the top of the PPN cabinet. The cables are then run to the other cabinet, through  
the top of the cabinet, and down the cable tray to the desired carrier level.  
If a “DEFINITY style” PPN cabinet is collocated with either a small cabinet,  
medium cabinet, or single-carrier cabinet stack, route the cables down the cable  
tray and out the bottom of the PPN cabinet. The cables are then run to the EPN  
cabinet and up the outside of the rear panels to the desired carrier level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-92  
Fiber-Remoted Port Networks  
For a critical reliability system with 1 fiber-remoted EPN, use 4 fiber optic cables,  
4 lightwave transceivers, and 4 lightguide interconnect units (provided by the  
PSC). For a critical reliability system with 2 fiber-remoted EPNs, use 12 fiber optic  
cables, 12 lightwave transceivers, and 12 lightguide interconnect units (provided  
by the PSC).  
For fiber-remoted cabinets, route the cables down the cable tray and out the  
bottom of the cabinet to the MDF to the lightguide interconnect units.  
For Either 1 or 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks  
1. At control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 (see Figure 5-28 through Figure  
5-31):  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A01.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A01.  
Connect the other end of the fiber cable to the transceiver just  
installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil the surplus fiber optic cable and  
attach it to the wall of the cable tray.  
3. Behind control carrier B of PPN cabinet 1:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1B01.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
4. Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2B02.  
Connect the other end of the fiber cable to the transceiver just  
installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil the surplus fiber optic cable and  
attach it to the wall of the cable tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-93  
For 2 Collocated Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A02.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A01.  
Connect the other end of the fiber cable to the transceiver just  
installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil up the surplus fiber optic cable and  
attach it to the wall of the cable tray.  
3. Behind control carrier B of PPN cabinet 1:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1B02.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
4. Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3B02.  
Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed, at slot 3B02.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil up the surplus length of fiber optic  
cable, and carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray.  
5. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2A02.  
Connect 1 end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver,  
just installed, at slot 2A02.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-94  
6. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A02.  
Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed, at slot 3A02.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil the surplus fiber optic cable, and  
carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray.  
7. Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 2B03.  
Connect 1 end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver,  
just installed, at slot 2B03.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
8. Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3B03.  
Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed, at slot 3B03.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
At the top of the cabinet, coil the surplus fiber optic cable, and  
carefully attach the coil to the wall of the cable tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-95  
Figure Notes  
1. Cabinet 1 PPN  
2. Cabinet 2 EPN 1  
3. Cabinet 3 EPN 2  
Figure 5-28. Critical Reliability Release 8 with 2 or 3 Port Networks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-96  
RX TX  
4
3
4
3
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff06 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
5. EPN1 Carrier B Slot 2B02  
6. Fiber Optic Cable  
7. TX Connector  
2. To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A01  
3. To EPN1 Carrier A Slot 2A01  
4. PPN Carrier B Slot 1B01  
8. RX Connector  
Figure 5-29. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-97  
RX TX  
4
3
4
3
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff06 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
5. To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A01  
6. Fiber Optic Cable  
7. TX Connector  
2. To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A02  
3. To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A01  
4. To PPN Carrier B Slot 1B02  
8. RX Connector  
Figure 5-30. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-98  
RX TX  
4
3
4
3
RX TX  
2
1
2
1
cydff06 CJL 103196  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
5. To EPN2 Carrier B Slot 3B03  
6. Fiber Optic Cable  
7. TX Connector  
2. To EPN1 Carrier A Slot 2A02  
3. To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A02  
4. To EPN1 Carrier B Slot 2B03  
8. RX Connector  
Figure 5-31. Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-99  
For Either 1 or 2 Fiber-Remoted Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1 (see Figure 5-33 through Figure  
5-35):  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A01.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A01.  
Connect the fiber optic cable to the lightwave transceiver slot 2A01.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and place it in the cable manager.  
3. Behind control carrier B of PPN cabinet 1:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1B01.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
4. Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2B02.  
Connect the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and place it in the cable manager.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-100  
For Two Fiber-Remoted Expansion Port Networks  
1. Behind control carrier A of PPN cabinet 1:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 1A02.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
2. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 3A01.  
Connect the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the fiber cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil the surplus fiber optic cable and place it in the cable manager.  
3. Behind control carrier B of PPN cabinet 1:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1B02.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
4. Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3B02.  
Connect the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-101  
5. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2A02.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
6. Behind control carrier A of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3A02.  
Connect the fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the fiber cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager.  
7. Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 2:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 2B03.  
Connect a fiber optic cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the fiber cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
8. Behind port carrier B of EPN cabinet 3:  
Install a lightwave transceiver on the cable connector at slot 3B03.  
Connect the fiber cable to the transceiver just installed.  
Route the fiber cable to the cable tray and down, out of the cabinet,  
through the cable manager to the PDS cross-connect facility.  
Connect the fiber cable to the lightguide interconnect unit provided.  
Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable tie positions.  
Coil up the surplus fiber cable and place it in the cable manager.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-102  
Rear View  
Rear View  
Rear View  
Port Carrier  
-
J58890BB  
Port Carrier  
-
J58890BB  
Port Carrier  
-
J58890BB  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
2
1
1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C
B
A
C
B
C
B
Control Carrier - J58890AJ  
Port Carrier  
-
J58890BB  
Port Carrier  
-
J58890BB  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
AUX  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Terminal  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
To Cabinet 2  
B3  
To Cabinet 2  
B2  
..........................................................  
To Cabinet 3  
B2  
To Cabinet 1  
B2  
..........................................  
.............................................................  
Control Carrier - J58890AH  
Expansion Control Carrier - J58890AF  
Expansion Control Carrier - J58890AF  
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
To Cabinet 3  
B3  
To Cabinet 1  
B1  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
AUX  
.............1  
.
9
..  
1
.
8
.
1.  
7
..  
1
.
6
.
1.  
5
..1  
.
4
..  
1
.3  
.
1
.
2
..  
1
.
1
.
1.  
0..9...8...7..6...5..4...3..2  
.
AUX  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
AUX  
Terminal  
TRM  
TRM  
A
A
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
To Cabinet 2  
A2  
To Cabinet 2  
A1  
To Cabinet 3  
A1  
..........................................................  
To Cabinet 1  
A2  
.............................................................  
..........................................  
To Cabinet 3  
A2  
..........................................................  
Fan  
Fan  
Fan  
Fan  
Fan  
Fan  
Fan  
Fan  
Fan  
To Cabinet 1  
A1  
Port Carrier  
-
J58890BB  
Port Carrier  
-
J58890BB  
Port Carrier J58890BB  
-
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
E
D
E
D
E
Port Carrier  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
-
J58890BB  
Port Carrier  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
-
J58890BB  
Port Carrier  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
-
J58890BB  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Power-Distribution  
Unit  
Power-Distribution  
Unit  
Power-Distribution  
Unit  
Cabinet 1  
PPN  
Cabinet 2  
EPN 1  
Cabinet 3  
EPN 2  
Figure 5-32. Critical Reliability Release 8 with 2 or 3 Port Networks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-103  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
2. To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A01  
3. To EPN1 Carrier A Slot 2A01  
4. To PPN Carrier B Slot 1B01  
5. To EPN1 Carrier B Slot 2B02  
6. Fiber Optic Cable  
7. Optical Cross-Connect Facility  
8. 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit  
9. TX Connector  
10. RX Connector  
Figure 5-33. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-104  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
2. To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A02  
3. To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A01  
4. To PPN Carrier B Slot 1B02  
5. To EPN2 Carrier B Slot 3B02  
6. Fiber Optic Cable  
7. Optical Cross-Connect Facility  
8. 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit  
9. TX Connector  
10. RX Connector  
Figure 5-34. Fiber Optic Connections PPN to EPN2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-105  
Figure Notes  
1. Lightwave Transceiver  
2. To PPN Carrier A Slot 1A02  
3. To EPN2 Carrier A Slot 3A01  
4. To PPN Carrier B Slot 1B02  
5. To EPN2 Carrier B Slot 3B02  
6. Fiber Optic Cable  
7. Optical Cross-Connect Facility  
8. 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit  
9. TX Connector  
10. RX Connector  
Figure 5-35. Fiber Optic Connections EPN1 to EPN2  
Verify Usable Circuit Pack Vintages  
Verify that each circuit pack reused in the upgrade conforms to the usable  
vintage requirements for a DEFINITY ECS Release 8 system (see Reference  
Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-106  
Remove Power-Failure Ground Strap  
Remove the ground strap from the power-failure transfer unit.  
Boot the Release 8 System  
1. Connect the management terminal to the “TERMINAL” connector behind  
PPN control carrier “A,” or install the G3-MA according to the “Set Up  
G3-MA” chapter of DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3  
Management Applications Operations, 585-229-202.  
2. Insert the translation cards in the TN794 faceplates.  
3. At each EPN power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
4. At the PPN power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
5. The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process, loading the  
default system translations from the translation cards. This takes 8 to 11  
minutes.  
6. Get the order number of the upgrade and call the regional CSA to request  
an “init” login so the right-to-use options can be enabled.  
7. To use Access Security Gateway (ASG), see Appendix C, ‘‘Access  
Security Gateway’’.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-107  
Set Daylight Savings Rules  
You can set up to 15 customized daylight savings time rules. If you have cabinets  
in several different time zones, you can set up rules for each on a location basis.  
A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to transition  
to and from daylight savings time. It also specifies the increment at which to  
transition.  
NOTE:  
The default daylight savings rule is 0, no daylight savings.  
1. Type change daylight-savings-rules and press Enter.  
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES  
Rule  
0:  
Change Day  
Month___Date  
Time____Increment  
No Daylight Savings  
1:  
Start: first Sunday___ on or after April ___ 1 at _2:0001:00  
Stop: first Sunday___ on or after October _ 25 at _2:00  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Start: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
Stop: first _________ on or after _________ __ at __:__  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
2. Type the appropriate start and stop information in the Change Day,  
Month, Date, Time, and Incrementfields for each rule. (for example,  
1:00 equals one hour)  
NOTE:  
You can change any rule except rule 0 (zero). You cannot delete a  
daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the Locations or Date and  
Time screens.  
3. When done, press Enter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-108  
Set Date and Time  
1. Type set time and press Enter to bring up the Date and Time screen.  
DATE AND TIME  
DATE  
TIME  
Day of the Week: Tuesday  
Day of the Month: 8  
Month: February  
Year: 2000  
Hour: 20  
Minute: 30  
Second: XX  
Type: standard  
Daylight Savings Rule: 0  
Screen 5-3. Typical Date and Time Screen  
2. Type the day of the week in English (Sunday through Saturday). See  
Table 5-17 for English day of the week names.  
Table 5-17. English Day of the Week Names  
Day Number  
Day Name  
Sunday  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-109  
3. The cursor is positioned on the Month:field. Type the current month in  
English (January through December). See Table 5-18 for English month  
names. After the month is entered, press Ta b to move to next field.  
Table 5-18. English Month Names  
Month Number Month Name  
1
January  
February  
March  
2
3
4
April  
5
May  
6
June  
7
July  
8
August  
September  
October  
November  
December  
9
10  
11  
12  
4. The cursor is positioned on the Day of the Month:field. Type the day  
of month (1 through 31) and press Tab to move to the next field.  
5. The cursor is positioned on the Year:field. Type the current year and  
press TAB to move to the next field.  
6. The cursor is positioned on the Hour:field. Type the current hour for a  
24-hour clock. Press Ta b to move to the next field.  
7. The cursor is positioned on the Minute:field. Type current minute (0  
through 59). Seconds cannot be set.  
8. Type standard or daylight savings in the Typefield.  
9. Type the rule (number) in the Daylight Savings Rulefield.  
10. Press Enter when the information is correct.  
11. Type display time and press Enter to verify date/time data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-110  
Set Additional Administration  
1. Type list configuration software-version long and press Enter to  
compare the version number of the Release 8 software program  
(displayed on the terminal) with the version number (written on a label on  
the processor’s faceplate). If the version numbers are not the same,  
change the version number on the processor label so that they agree.  
2. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter.  
Use this screen to enable the G3 V6 option and to assign the customer’s  
other right-to-use options on the Release 8 upgrade order. See DEFINITY  
Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide, for  
details on enabling these options.  
3. Type change site-data and press Enter. Use this screen to assign  
system-specific information (such as building, floor, stations, and so  
forth).  
4. Type status system 1 and press Enter to verify that the system is in the  
“active/standby” mode.  
5. Type save translation and press Enter. This instructs the system to write all  
translation information from memory to the translation cards.  
!
WARNING:  
If the terminal screen displays “translation corruption detected; call  
Lucent Technologies distributor immediately”, an error was detected  
in the translations. Call your Lucent Technologies representative.  
Close Upgraded EPN Cabinet and Reconnect  
Cables  
1. At the upgraded EPN, set the main circuit breaker to OFF.  
NOTE:  
Powering down an EPN without powering down the PPN will set off  
alarms. However, these alarms should clear after power is restored  
to each EPN.  
2. Temporarily disconnect the lightwave transceivers and fiber optic cables  
from the appropriate carriers.  
3. Replace the back doors or back panels previously removed.  
4. At the EPN cabinet, reconnect the lightwave transceivers, fiber optic  
cables, and the connector cables associated with the carrier being  
replaced.  
5. Install the front door on the EPN cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-111  
Power Up the EPN Cabinets  
1. At each EPN power distribution unit, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
After about 40 seconds, EPN power and PPN/EPN communications return.  
2. After power returns to each EPN and all trouble is cleared, verify that the  
EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO. This restores  
the system to the normal mode.  
Retranslate Port Circuits  
If port circuit packs were relocated in order to put:  
A critical port circuit pack, requiring longer nominal battery holdover (such  
as a DS1 or an Announcement circuit pack), in a port slot  
A TN736, TN752, or TN755 power supply in port slots “18” and “19”  
A TN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface in port slot “1”  
A TN776 or TN570 in port slot “2” (for a second directly connected EPN)  
of the new expansion control carrier, verify that they were retranslated during the  
off-site software upgrade. If not, they must be retranslated now. Refer to  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide.  
Enable TTI  
1. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter.  
2. On the second screen, set the Enabled?field to y to activate the TTI  
feature.  
Check Link Status  
1. Type display communication-interface links and press Enter. Compare it  
with the earlier status.  
2. Type status link number and press Enter. Repeat this step for each link.  
Enable Scheduled Maintenance  
Typ e change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter. Enable the  
scheduled daily maintenance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-112  
Resolve Alarms  
Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY  
Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8si or DEFINITY  
Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
Enable Customer Options and Alarm Origination  
1. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade from the project manager and  
ask the regional Customer Software Administration to complete the steps  
in the shaded box. See ‘‘Where to Call for Technical Support’’ on page -xx  
for telephone numbers.  
NOTE:  
As part of the system registration process, the INADS Database  
Administrator enables Alarm Origination.  
2. When administration is completed, log in as craft at the Login:prompt.  
"init" login administration:  
1. Log in as init.  
2. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter  
to verify that the customer options are properly set.  
3. Go to screen 6, QSIG Optional Features, and set the Basic Call  
Setup field to y if the customer was using Supplementary Services  
Protocol b or d on an ISDN-PRI trunk group before the upgrade.  
4. Type change system-parameters offer-options and press Enter.  
5. If the Activate Offerfield is n, set it to y and press Ta b . A warning  
message lets you know whether you need to save translations and  
reboot to make the change permanent.  
6. Press Enter to effect the changes or Cancel if there were no changes.  
7. Contact the requester when done.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-113  
Save Translations  
1. Type save translation and press Enter to get upgraded translations onto  
disk. If the translations were corrupted during the upgrade, the following  
error message displays when logging in:  
!
WARNING:  
Translation corruption detected; call Lucent Technologies distributor  
immediately.  
NOTE:  
The save translation command cannot function if the translation  
corruption message appears. See ‘‘Troubleshooting an Upgrade’’ on  
page B-1.  
Back Up Disk  
1. Type backup disk and press Enter to backup all changed files.  
2. Type test stored-data long and press Enter. This instructs the system to  
verify the consistency of the MSS files (on the disk and removable media).  
Return Replaced Equipment  
Return replaced equipment to Lucent Technologies according to the  
requirements outlined in:  
BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations  
Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Multicarrier G2 Universal Module to R8r EPN  
Critical Reliability  
5
5-114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Single-Mode Fiber Attenuators  
6
6-1  
Adding or Removing Cabinet  
Hardware  
6
This chapter contains information to add or remove cabinet hardware. To install  
adjunct or peripheral equipment, refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications  
Server Release 8 Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals.  
To add fiber optic cables to an existing system, refer to DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets.  
Single-Mode Fiber Attenuators  
Attenuators may be required when using single-mode fiber. See the table below.  
106060718  
106060734  
106061021  
5 dB attenuator  
10 dB attenuator  
15 dB attenuator  
2 for each fiber connection  
2 for each fiber connection  
2 for each fiber connection  
A different value attenuator may be required even though the fiber span is  
between the same 2 cabinets (local and remote cabinet). Refer to DEFINITY  
Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier  
Cabinets for detailed fiber attenuator information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add Circuit Packs  
6
6-2  
Add Circuit Packs  
When installing additional features or equipment, it may be necessary to install  
additional circuit packs. This is a general procedure to use when adding features  
or equipment that require adding circuit packs.  
1. Log onto the system and answer y to the Suppress Alarm Origination  
question during login.  
2. Install the circuit pack into the carrier.  
3. Log off the system after the addition (and any required administration) is  
complete.  
For information about administering circuit packs and other equipment, refer to  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
List of Circuit Packs  
6
6-3  
List of Circuit Packs  
Table 6-1 lists the circuit packs sorted by apparatus code, including circuit  
packs used in non-United States installations.  
Table 6-1. Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules  
Apparatus Code  
631DA1  
631DB1  
644A1  
Name  
Type  
AC Power Unit  
AC Power Unit  
DC Power Unit  
DC Power Unit  
DC Power Unit  
DC Power Supply  
Current Limiter  
Current Limiter  
Memory Expansion  
DEFINITY AUDIX R3 System  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Control  
645B1  
649A  
676B/C  
982LS  
CFY1B  
CPP1  
ED-1E546  
(TN2169)  
(TN2170)  
(TN566)  
Port  
Assembly  
(TN567)  
ED-1E546  
(TN2208)  
(TN2170)  
Call Visor ASAI over the DEFINITY (LAN) Gateway  
R1  
Port  
Assembly  
J58890M1  
(TN801)  
CallVisor ASAI/CallVisor PC/LAN over the DEFINITY  
LAN Gateway R2  
Port  
Assembly  
TN417  
Auxiliary Trunk  
Port  
TN419B  
TN420B/C  
TN429B/C/D  
TN433  
Tone-Clock  
Control  
Service  
Port  
Tone Detector  
Direct Inward/Outward Dialing (DIOD) Trunk  
Speech Synthesizer  
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk  
Tie Trunk - Australia  
Service  
Port  
TN436B  
TN437  
Port  
Continued on next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
List of Circuit Packs  
6
6-4  
Table 6-1. Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued  
Apparatus Code  
TN438B  
TN439  
Name  
Type  
Central Office Trunk  
Tie Trunk  
Port  
Port  
TN447  
Central Office Trunk  
Speech Synthesizer  
Tie Trunk- U.K.  
Port  
TN457  
Service  
Port  
TN458  
TN459B  
TN464C/D/E/F  
TN465/B/C  
TN467  
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk  
DS1 Interface - T1, 24 Channel - E1, 32 Channel  
Central Office Trunk  
Analog Line  
Port  
Port  
Port  
Port  
TN468B  
TN479  
Analog Line  
Port  
Analog Line  
Port  
TN497  
Tie Trunk - Italy  
Port  
TN553  
Packet Data Line  
ISDN-BRI 4-Wire S/T-NT Interface  
Expansion Interface  
Switch Node Clock  
Switch Node Interface  
DS1 Converter - T1, 24 Channel  
DS1 Tie Trunk  
Port  
TN556B/C/D  
TN570/B/C  
TN572  
Port  
Port  
Control  
Control  
Port  
TN573/B  
TN574  
TN722B  
TN725B  
TN726/B  
TN735  
Port  
Speech Synthesizer  
Data Line  
Service  
Port  
MET Line  
Port  
TN742  
Analog Line  
Port  
TN744/B  
TN744/C/D  
TN746/B  
TN747/B  
TN748/B/C/D  
Call Classifier  
Service  
Service  
Port  
Call Classifier - Detector  
Analog Line  
Central Office Trunk  
Tone Detector  
Port  
Service  
Continued on next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
List of Circuit Packs  
6
6-5  
Table 6-1. Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued  
Apparatus Code  
TN750/B/C  
TN753/B  
TN754/B/C  
TN755/B  
TN756  
Name  
Type  
Announcement  
Service  
Port  
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk  
Digital Line 4-Wire DCP  
Neon Power Unit  
Tone Detector  
Port  
Power  
Service  
Port  
TN758  
Pooled Modem  
TN760B/C/D/E  
TN762/B  
TN763B/C/D  
TN765  
Tie Trunk  
Port  
Hybrid Line  
Port  
Auxiliary Trunk  
Port  
Processor Interface  
DS1 Interface - T1, 24 Channel  
Tone-Clock  
Control  
Port  
TN767B/C/D/E  
TN768  
Control  
Port  
TN769  
Analog Line  
TN771/D  
TN773  
Maintenance/Test  
Processor  
Service  
Control  
Service  
Port  
TN775/B/C  
TN776  
Maintenance  
Expansion Interface  
Tone-Clock  
TN780  
Control  
Control  
Control  
Service  
Service  
Control  
Control  
Control  
Port  
TN786  
Processor  
TN786B  
Processor  
TN787F/G/H/J/K  
TN788B  
Multimedia Interface  
Multimedia Voice Conditioner  
Radio Controller  
Processor  
TN789  
TN790/B  
TN792  
Duplication Interface (DUPINT)  
Analog Line  
TN793  
TN794  
Network Control/Packet Interface (NetPkt)  
Processor  
Control  
Control  
TN796B  
Continued on next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
List of Circuit Packs  
6
6-6  
Table 6-1. Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued  
Apparatus Code  
TN797  
Name  
Type  
Analog CO Trunk and Line Combo  
Control-LAN (C-LAN)  
IP Interface Assembly  
PRI to BRI Converter  
System Access/Maintenance  
32-MB Memory  
Port  
TN799  
Port  
TN802B  
TNPRI/BRI  
TN1648/B  
TN1650B  
TN1654  
TN1655  
TN1657  
TN2135  
TN2136  
TN2138  
TN2139  
TN2140/B  
TN2144  
TN2146  
TN2147/C  
TN2149  
TN2180  
TN2181  
TN2182/B  
TN2183  
TN2184  
TN2198  
TN2199  
TN2202  
TN2211  
TN2224/B  
Port  
Port  
Control  
Control  
Port  
DS1 Converter - T1, 24 Channel/E1, 32 Channel  
Packet Interface  
Control  
Control  
Port  
Disk Drive  
Analog Line  
Digital Line 2-Wire DCP  
Central Office Trunk  
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk  
Tie Trunk - Hungary, Italy  
Analog Line  
Port  
Port  
Port  
Port  
Port  
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk  
Central Office Trunk  
Analog Line  
Port  
Port  
Port  
Analog Line  
Port  
Digital Line 2-Wire DCP  
Tone-Clock -Tone Detector and Call Classifier  
Analog Line  
Port  
Control  
Port  
DIOD Trunk  
Port  
ISDN-BRI 2-Wire U Interface  
Central Office Trunk  
Ring Generator  
Port  
Port  
Power  
Control  
Port  
Optical Drive  
Digital Line, 24-Port, 2-Wire DCP  
Continued on next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
List of Circuit Packs  
6
6-7  
Table 6-1. Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued  
Apparatus Code  
TN2305  
Name  
Type  
ATM Interface (multimode fiber)  
ATM Interface (single-mode fiber)  
DS1 Interface  
Port  
TN2306  
Port  
TN2313  
Port  
UN330B  
Duplication Interface  
Control  
Control  
Control  
Power  
Power  
UN331B  
Processor  
UN332/B/C  
WP-90510  
WP-91153  
Mass Storage/Network Control  
AC Power Supply (Compact Single-Carrier Cabinet)  
AC Power Supply (Single-Carrier Cabinet)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-8  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
This chapter details the installation of the fiber optic cable using the DEFINITY  
fiber optic pass-thru kit for Multicarrier Cabinets (MCC) only. This kit (comcode  
848029278) provides the equipment necessary to install the fiber optic  
connectors and associated cabling.  
Unpack and Inspect  
1. Verify the equipment received. See Figure 6-1. Actual equipment may vary  
in appearance and may ship in separate packages.  
2. See Table 6-2 for a list of part comcodes.  
2
1
3
6
5
7
8
4
indapkit RPY 012398  
Figure Notes  
1. Pass-thru Tool  
5. Fiber Optic Cable Disconnect Label  
2. SC-SC Fiber Optic Adapter 6. I/O Connector Adapter Bracket  
3. ST-SC Fiber Optic Adapter  
4. Fiber Optic Cable  
7. Cable Tie  
8. Cable Tie Mount  
Figure 6-1. Fiber Pass-Thru Kit Equipment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-9  
Table 6-2. Parts List  
Quantity Description  
Comcode  
1
Pass-thru Tool  
847978715  
107118903  
107087967  
107122640  
847978673  
848029286  
407814672  
403053150  
1
Beige SC-SC Fiber Optic Adapter (multimode)  
Beige ST-SC Fiber Optic Adapter (multimode)  
Ten-foot (3 m) Fiber Optic Cable (multimode)  
I/O Connector Adapter Bracket  
Fiber Optic Cable Disconnect Label  
Cable Ties  
1
1
1
1
10  
6
Cable Tie Mounts  
LASER Product  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
IEC 825 1993  
The DEFINITY ECS may contain a Class 1 LASER device if single-mode fiber  
optic cable is connected to a remote Expansion Port Network (EPN). The LASER  
device operates within the following parameters:  
Maximum Power Output: -5dBm  
Wavelength: 1310 nm  
Mode Field Diameter: 8.8 microns  
!
CAUTION:  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than  
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-10  
Cabinet Preparation  
1. Open the front door.  
NOTE:  
Administration may be required before removing the circuit pack in  
the following step.  
2. Determine which slot (1 or 2) will contain the new fiber optic circuit pack.  
Remove the circuit pack or the blanking plate from this slot.  
NOTE:  
If a circuit pack is removed from the required slot, it must be installed  
into a different slot in the cabinet. All translations associated with this  
circuit pack must also be moved.  
3. Remove the circuit pack or the blanking plate from the slot next to the slot  
determined in step 2. Two consecutive open slots are required to install  
the fiber optic adapter.  
NOTE:  
If a circuit pack was removed in step 3, it will be replaced into the  
same slot, later in this section.  
4. Install the new circuit pack.  
5. Open the rear door.  
6. From the rear, remove the I/O cable connector associated with the slot that  
will contain the new fiber optic circuit pack. See Figure 6-2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-11  
1
2
lcda8fop RPY 021198  
Figure Notes  
1. Press tab down  
2. Pull connector forward  
Figure 6-2. Remove the I/O Cable Connector  
7. Using a supplied cable tie, secure the removed I/O connector to nearby  
cabling. See Figure 6-3.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-12  
lcda9fop RPY 021398  
1
Figure Notes  
1. Tie wrap  
Figure 6-3. Secure the I/O Cable Connector  
8. From the front, remove the fan cover. See Figure 6-4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-13  
R
S
E
E
T
Y
N
/
E
T
X
E
O
NO  
/
N
K
C
A
N
W
O
B
D
T
/
T
O
O
U
H
S
BOT  
AUDIX  
S
M
R
ALARMS  
A
L
R
TR  
R
MER  
E
E
lcda3fop EWS 110398  
Figure 6-4. Remove the Fan Cover  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-14  
Install the Pass-thru Kit  
1. Snap the SC-SC fiber optic adapter on the pass-thru tool. See Figure 6-5.  
Use the beige adapter even if single-mode fiber is being installed. The  
SC-SC adapter is better suited for cable routing in the next steps.  
NOTE:  
If single-mode fiber is being installed, the beige adapter will be  
replaced with a blue adapter, later in this section.  
1
dafocoup RPY 062497  
Figure Notes  
1. Pass-thru Tool  
2. SC-SC Fiber Optic Adapter  
Figure 6-5. Fiber Optic Adapter and Pass-Thru Tool  
2. Slide the tool to the rear of the cabinet. See Figure 6-6.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-15  
lcda2fop RPY 021098  
Figure 6-6. Insert the Pass-thru Tool  
!
!
CAUTION:  
Avoid bending fiber optic cables to a radius smaller than 1.5 inches  
(3.8 cm), to prevent mechanical stress on the cables.  
CAUTION:  
During the actual installation of fiber optic components, use either all beige  
or all blue adapters. Beige denotes multimode fiber and blue denotes  
single-mode fiber. Do not mix beige with blue.  
3. Attach the supplied fiber optic cable to the adapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-16  
4. Pull the tool (with adapter and cable attached) out through the front of the  
cabinet. See Figure 6-7.  
lcda6fop RPY 021698  
Figure 6-7. Fiber Optic Cable and Adapter  
5. From the rear, route the fiber optic cable through the opening vacated by  
the I/O cable connector.  
6. If necessary, remove the fiber adapter from the tool and plug the fiber  
optic cable into the SC-SC (single-mode) or ST-SC (multimode) adapter.  
See Figure 6-8. Check the house cabling before selecting a coupling to  
use.  
7. From the front of the I/O connector adapter bracket (with fiber cable),  
snap the coupling into the supplied I/O connector adapter bracket.  
8. Snap the I/O connector adapter bracket into the I/O connector opening.  
9. Attach the outside fiber plant to the I/O connector on the rear of the  
cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-17  
2
2
1
4
3
lcda7fop KLC 051198  
Figure Notes:  
1. Fiber cable  
3. SC-SC adapter  
4. SC-ST adapter  
2. I/O connector adapter bracket  
Figure 6-8. Bracket Attachments  
10. Wrap the cable disconnect label around the fiber optic cable. See  
Figure 6-9.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-18  
1
prda0001 RPY 021898  
Figure Notes  
1. To outside plant fiber  
Figure 6-9. Cable Disconnect Label  
11. Close the rear door.  
!
CAUTION:  
Avoid bending fiber optic cables to a radius smaller than 1.5 inches  
(3.8 cm), to prevent mechanical stress on the cables. Plan the use of  
cable ties to avoid crimping the cable or creating a fixed stress point  
where, at a later time, movement of the cable causes it to exceed the  
minimum bend radius.  
!
CAUTION:  
Be careful not to crimp the fiber cable when you are performing the  
following step.  
12. Replace the fan cover. See Figure 6-10.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-19  
R
S
E
E
T
YES  
N
/
E
T
X
E
O
NO  
/
N
K
C
A
N
W
O
B
D
T
/
T
O
O
U
H
S
B
IX  
AUDIX  
D
U
ALARMS  
TR  
EMER  
lcda5fop EWS 110398  
Figure 6-10. Replace the Fan Cover  
13. Connect the fiber cable to the angled connector on the front of the circuit  
pack. See Figure 6-11.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-20  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
C
TONE-  
CLOCK  
EXPN  
INTFC  
POWER UNIT  
scdafo_4 KLC 051298  
Figure 6-11. Connect Fiber Cable to Circuit Pack  
14. Dress the cable using the supplied cable ties and cable tie mounts. See  
Figure 6-12.  
NOTE:  
Dress the fiber optic cable straight down the front of the circuit pack.  
Do not allow the cable to cross in front of another circuit pack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add the Fiber Optic Cable  
6
6-21  
lcda4fop RPY 021398  
Figure 6-12. Dress the Cable  
15. If a circuit pack was removed to access 2 open slots (from ‘‘Cabinet  
Preparation’’ on page 6-10), replace the circuit pack into its original slot.  
16. Close the front door.  
17. Discard the pass-thru tool.  
Test the Installation  
1. Login to the management terminal.  
2. Administer the system by referring to the ATM section of the Installation  
and Test for Adjuncts and Peripherals.  
3. Type list configuration all and press Enter to determine if the new circuit  
pack appears in the correct slot and that there are no circuit pack  
conflicts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-22  
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an  
Existing System  
Figure 6-13 shows a typical multicarrier EPN cabinet. Each EPN cabinet is  
normally positioned adjacent to the PPN cabinet but may be located remotely in  
a different room or a different building.  
Port Carrier "C"  
Port Carrier "B"  
Control Carrier "A"  
Fans 2  
Port Carrier "D"  
Port Carrier "E"  
Power Distribution  
3
0075_0 RBP 080196  
Figure 6-13. Typical Multicarrier EPN Cabinet  
1. Uncrate and position the cabinet as instructed at the beginning of this  
chapter.  
2. Install earthquake protection as instructed on page 1-9.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-23  
Connect Power and Ground  
1. For an AC- or DC-powered system, connect power and ground to the  
cabinet as instructed in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server  
Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets.  
2. Connect the approved ground to the new cabinet as instructed in  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and  
Test for Multicarrier Cabinets.  
NOTE:  
Do not power up the system until all power and ground connections  
are completed.  
Interconnect Cabling Release 8r  
For fiber optic cabling information and comcode numbers, refer to DEFINITY  
Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier  
Cabinets. The fiber connections installed in this section are later administered  
using the fiber link administration instructions in Appendix A, ‘‘Fiber Link  
Administration’’.  
NOTE:  
Use multi-mode fiber transceivers and fiber optic cables between cabinets  
unless single-mode is required for distance restrictions.  
Direct-Connect New EPN to Existing PPN  
(Standard Reliability)  
P2  
P1  
DATA  
DUPLICATION  
OPTION  
TERMINAL  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CLOCK AUX  
PROCESSOR COMMUNICATION  
INTERFACE  
EQUIPMENT TERMINAL  
0063_0 RBP 071096  
Figure 6-14. Rear of J58890AH Control Carrier (PPN)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-24  
1. Install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 on the rear of the PPN  
Control Carrier. See Figure 6-14.  
2. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver. Label the cable to make the connections to the EPN cabinet  
easier.  
3. Route the fiber cable to the J58890AF Expansion Control Carrier in the  
EPN cabinet.  
4. On the rear of the EPN Expansion Control Carrier, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2.  
5. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from the PPN Control Carrier to the  
TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the EPN Expansion Control  
Carrier. Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on the PPN  
transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the EPN transceiver and  
vice versa.  
Direct-Connect New EPN to Existing PPN (High  
or Critical Reliability)  
1. On the rear of the Duplicated Control Carrier, install a 9823A lightwave  
transceiver onto Slot 1.  
2. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver. Label the cable to make the connections to the EPN cabinet  
easier.  
3. Route the fiber cable to the J58890BB Port Carrier in position C in the EPN  
cabinet.  
4. On the rear of the Port Carrier, install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto  
Slot 2.  
5. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from the PPN Duplicated Control  
Carrier to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the EPN Port  
Carrier. Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on the PPN  
transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the EPN transceiver and  
vice versa.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-25  
Direct-Connect New EPN to Existing PPN and  
EPN (Standard Reliability)  
For the following connection example, the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 1, the  
first EPN cabinet (next to the PPN cabinet) is called Cabinet 2, and the last EPN  
cabinet is called Cabinet 3.  
1. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position C in Cabinet 1, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2.  
2. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver. Label the cable to make the connections to Cabinet 3 easier.  
3. Route the fiber cable to the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3.  
4. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1.  
5. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1 to  
the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Expansion Control  
Carrier in Cabinet 3. Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on  
1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver  
and vice versa.  
6. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2.  
7. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver. Be sure to label the cable.  
8. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2.  
9. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 2 to the TX and RX  
connectors on the transceiver on the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet  
3. Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is  
connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa.  
10. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1.  
11. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver on the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2.  
12. Route the fiber cable to the Port Carrier in position B in Cabinet 1.  
13. Install a 9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 on the Port Carrier in  
position D in Cabinet 1.  
14. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 2 to the TX and RX  
connectors on the transceiver on the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1. Be sure the  
cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the  
RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-26  
Direct-Connect New EPN to Existing PPN and  
EPN (High or Critical Reliability)  
For the following connection example, the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 1, the  
first EPN cabinet (next to the PPN cabinet) is called Cabinet 2, and the last EPN  
cabinet is called Cabinet 3.  
1. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position C in Cabinet 1, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2.  
2. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver. Label the cable to make the connections to Cabinet 2 easier.  
3. Route the fiber cable to the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2.  
4. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1.  
5. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1 to  
the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Expansion Control  
Carrier in Cabinet 2. Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on  
1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver  
and vice versa.  
6. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2.  
7. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver. Be sure to label the cable.  
8. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2.  
9. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 2 to the TX and RX  
connectors on the transceiver on the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet  
3. Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is  
connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa.  
10. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1.  
11. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver on the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 3.  
12. Route the fiber cable to the Port Carrier in position D in Cabinet 1.  
13. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position D in Cabinet 1, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2.  
14. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 3 to the TX and RX  
connectors on the transceiver on the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1. Be sure the  
cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the  
RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-27  
Interconnect Cabling Release 8r  
For more fiber optic cabling information, refer to DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets.  
Switch-Connect New EPN to Existing PPN and  
EPN (Standard Reliability)  
For the following connection example, the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 1, the  
first EPN cabinet is called Cabinet 2, and the EPN cabinet containing the Switch  
Node Carrier is called Cabinet 4.  
NOTE:  
For the following example, add links to PNs in alternating order, for  
example: 20 and 2, 19 and 3, 18 and 4, and so forth.  
1. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position B in Cabinet 1, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 (1B02). See Figure 6-15.  
2. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver. Label the cable to make the connections to Cabinet 4 easier.  
3. Route the fiber cable to the Port Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4.  
4. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 (4E02).  
5. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1 to  
the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Port Carrier in Cabinet  
4. Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is  
connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa.  
6. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 (2A01).  
7. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver. Be sure to label the cable.  
8. At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4, install a  
9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 20 (4E20).  
9. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 2 to the TX and RX  
connectors on the transceiver on the Switch Node Carrier in Cabinet 4. Be  
sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is  
connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa.  
10. Connect an H600-278 Metallic Cable from Slot 1 in the Expansion Control  
Carrier in Cabinet 4 (4A01) to Slot 19 on the Switch Node Carrier in  
position E in Cabinet 4 (4E19).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-28  
Figure Notes:  
1. Cabinet 1 (PPN)  
3. Cabinet 2, 3, and 5 through 16  
(MCC or SCC EPNs)  
2. Cabinet 4 (MCC EPN with One Switch  
Node)  
Figure 6-15. Switch-Connected Release 8r with SNC in EPN  
Switch-Connect New EPN to Existing PPN and  
EPN (High Reliability)  
For the following connection example, the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 1, the  
first EPN cabinet is called Cabinet 2, and the EPN cabinet containing the Switch  
Node Carrier is called Cabinet 4.  
NOTE:  
For the following example, add links to PNs in alternating order, for  
example: 20 and 2, 19 and 3, 18 and 4, and so forth.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-29  
1. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position C in Cabinet 1, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 (1C02). See Figure 6-16.  
2. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver. Label the cable to make the connections to Cabinet 4 easier.  
3. Route the fiber cable to the Port Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4.  
4. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 (4E02).  
5. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in Cabinet 1 to  
the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Port Carrier in Cabinet  
4. Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is  
connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa.  
6. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in Cabinet 2, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 (2A01).  
7. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver. Be sure to label the cable.  
8. At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4, install a  
9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 20 (4E20).  
9. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 2 to the TX and RX  
connectors on the transceiver on the Switch Node Carrier in Cabinet 4. Be  
sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is  
connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa.  
10. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position D in Cabinet 1, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 (1D02).  
11. Connect a 20-foot fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on the  
transceiver. Be sure to label the cable.  
12. Route the fiber cable to Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4.  
13. At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4, install a  
9823A lightwave transceiver onto Slot 3 (4E03).  
14. Connect the 20-foot fiber optic cable from Cabinet 1 to the TX and RX  
connectors on the transceiver on the Switch Node Carrier in Cabinet 4. Be  
sure the cable connected to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is  
connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver and vice versa.  
15. Connect an H600-278 Metallic Cable from Slot 1 in the Expansion Control  
Carrier in Cabinet 4 (4A01) to Slot 19 on the Switch Node Carrier in  
position E in Cabinet 4 (4E19).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-30  
Figure Notes:  
1. Cabinet 1 (PPN)  
3. Cabinet 4 (MCC EPN  
with One Switch Node)  
2. Cabinet 2, 3, and 5 through 16 (MCC or SCC EPNs)  
Figure 6-16. Switch-Connected Release 8r with SNC in EPN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-31  
Switch-Connect New EPN to Existing PPN and  
EPN (Critical Reliability)  
For the following connection example, the PPN cabinet is called Cabinet 1, the  
first EPN cabinet is called Cabinet 2, and the EPN cabinet containing the Switch  
Node Carrier is called Cabinet 4.  
NOTE:  
For the following example, add links to PNs in alternating order, for  
example: 20 and 2, 19 and 3, 18 and 4, and so forth.  
1. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position C in Cabinet 1, install a lightwave  
transceiver onto Slot 2 (1C02). See Figure 6-17.  
2. Connect a 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on  
the transceiver. Label the cable to make the connections to Cabinet 4  
easier.  
3. Route the fiber cable to the Switch Node Carrier in position D in Cabinet 4.  
4. At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position D in Cabinet 4, install a  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 (4E02).  
5. Connect the 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in Cabinet  
1 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver on the Switch Node  
Carrier in Cabinet 4. Be sure the cable connected to the TX connector on  
1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on the other transceiver  
and vice versa.  
6. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position D in Cabinet 1, install a lightwave  
transceiver onto Slot 2 (1D02).  
7. Connect a 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on  
the transceiver. Be sure to label the cable.  
8. At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position D in Cabinet 4, install a  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 (4D02).  
9. Connect the 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable from the Port Carrier in position  
D in Cabinet 1 to the TX and RX connectors on the transceiver. Be sure to  
label the cable.  
10. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position B in Cabinet 2, install a 9823A  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 (2B02).  
11. Connect a 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on  
the transceiver. Be sure to label the cable.  
12. At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position D in Cabinet 4, install a  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 20 (4D20).  
13. Connect the 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable from the transceiver on the  
Switch Node Carrier position D in Cabinet 4. Be sure the cable connected  
to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on  
the other transceiver and vice versa.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-32  
14. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in position A in Cabinet 2,  
install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 1 (2A01).  
15. Connect a 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on  
the transceiver. Be sure to label the cable.  
16. At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4, install a  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 20 (4E20).  
17. Connect the 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable from the transceiver on the  
Switch Node Carrier position E in Cabinet 4. Be sure the cable connected  
to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on  
the other transceiver and vice versa.  
18. At the rear of the Port Carrier in position B in Cabinet 3, install a lightwave  
transceiver onto Slot 2 (3A01).  
19. Connect a 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on  
the transceiver. Be sure to label the cable.  
20. At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position E in Cabinet 4, install a  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 3 (4E03).  
21. Connect the 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable from the transceiver on the  
Switch Node Carrier position E in Cabinet 4. Be sure the cable connected  
to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on  
the other transceiver and vice versa.  
22. At the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier in position A in Cabinet 3,  
install a lightwave transceiver onto Slot 2 (3B02).  
23. Connect a 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable to the TX and RX connectors on  
the transceiver. Be sure to label the cable.  
24. At the rear of the Switch Node Carrier in position D in Cabinet 4, install a  
lightwave transceiver onto Slot 3 (4D03).  
25. Connect the 20-foot (6 m) fiber optic cable from the transceiver on the  
Switch Node Carrier position D in Cabinet 4. Be sure the cable connected  
to the TX connector on 1 transceiver is connected to the RX connector on  
the other transceiver and vice versa.  
NOTE:  
Continue connecting the fiber cables in this manner until all fiber  
connections are made. Be sure to add links to PNs in alternating  
order (20 and 2, 19 and 3, 18 and 4, and so forth).  
26. Connect an H600-278 Metallic Cable from Slot 1 in the Expansion Control  
Carrier in Cabinet 4 (4A01) to Slot 19 on the Switch Node Carrier in  
position E in Cabinet 4 (4E19).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Install a New EPN Cabinet in an Existing System  
6-33  
Figure Notes:  
1. Cabinet 1 (PPN)  
3. Cabinet 2, 3, and 5 through 16 (MCC or SCC  
EPNs) H600-278 Metallic Cable  
2. Cabinet 4 (MCC EPN with One  
Duplex Switch Node)  
Figure 6-17. Switch-Connected Release 8r with SNC in EPN  
27. Connect an H600-278 Metallic Cable from Slot 2 in the Port Carrier in  
position B in Cabinet 4 (4B02) to Slot 19 on the Switch Node Carrier in  
position D in Cabinet 4 (4D19).  
NOTE:  
Both fibers from each PN must connect to the same slot number in  
each Switch Node Carrier. For example: if Slot 3A01 of EPN 3  
connects to Switch Node Carrier Slot 4E19, then Slot 3B02 of EPN 3  
must connect to Switch Node Carrier Slot 4D19.  
28. Proceed to Appendix A, ‘‘Fiber Link Administration’’ to add the new fiber  
links.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System  
6-34  
Remove an EPN Cabinet from an  
Existing System  
All Systems  
Before starting the EPN removal process, perform the following:  
NOTE:  
If you do not disable the TTI, the translations can be corrupted.  
1. Type change system-parameters features and press Enter. Use screen 2  
to disable Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) by changing the setting to  
n.  
2. Unadminister all of the affected trunks, attendant consoles, voice  
terminals, and data modules associated with the port circuit packs in the  
EPN cabinet being removed. These port-related translations must be  
unadministered before removing any hardware. Refer to DEFINITY  
Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide for  
more information.  
Unadminister Fiber Links (Simplex Systems)  
The fiber links routing to and from the EPN cabinet being removed must be  
unadministered before removing any hardware from the cabinet.  
!
CAUTION:  
Failure to unadminister fiber links before removing hardware causes  
unnecessary alarm reports to INADS and causes errors that are very  
difficult to clear.  
The fiber links are administered to match hardware and the Fiber Optic Cable  
Running List. Fiber link administration creates translation data by identifying the  
endpoint pairs for each link. To properly unadminister the fiber links, this  
translation data must be removed.  
1. Unadminister the TN570 Expansion Interface and the TN574 or TN1654  
DS1 Converter circuit packs. Type change circuit-packs and press Enter.  
Scroll through the screens until the carrier containing the circuit packs is  
displayed. Remove the TN570 and the TN574 or TN1654 circuit packs  
from the slot locations on the screen. Press Enter when finished.  
2. Type list fiber and press Enter. All administered fiber connections are  
displayed. Make note of which fiber links are to be removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System  
6-35  
3. Type change fiber link and press Enter. The Fiber Link Administration  
screen appears. Use this screen to unadminister fiber links, each of which  
is identified by a fiber number.  
a. The Is one endpoint remoted via DS1 Converter  
complex?field must remain administered.  
b. Remove the location of the TN570 and the TN574 or TN1654 circuit  
pack for both ENDPOINT-1 and ENDPOINT-2.  
4. Scroll to screen 2.  
a. Type no, as applicable, in each Facility Installed?field (A,  
B, C, and D).  
b. The Bit Rate:field must remain administered if other fiber  
connections associated with the facility will remain.  
field must remain administered.  
d. The Line Coding: field must remain administered.  
5. For a T1 site, proceed to ‘‘T1 Installations Only’’. For an E1 site, proceed to  
‘‘E1 Installations Only’’.  
T1 Installations Only  
1. The Framing Mode:field is display only.  
2. The DS1CONV-1 Line Compensation:and the DS1CONV-2 Line  
Compensation:fields are display only.  
3. Remove the Facility Circuit ID:from the facilities being  
unadministered, if used. Press Enter.  
4. A display similar to the following appears after the procedure is  
completed:  
RESET PORT-NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 (COLD) PERFORMED.  
E1 Installations Only  
1. The CRC?field must remain administered.  
2. The Line Termination:field is display only.  
3. Remove the Facility Circuit IDinformation from the facilities being  
unadministered, if used. Press Enter.  
4. A display similar to the following appears after the procedure is  
completed:  
RESET PORT-NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 (COLD) PERFORMED.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System  
6-36  
All Installations  
1. When the system reset is finished, type status port-network 2 and press  
Enter. The Port Network Status screen appears. Verify that PNC Active is  
“up” and that the Service State is “in.”  
2. A Span LED, on the front of the DS1 Converter circuit pack, must be off for  
each inactive facility administered. For example, if Facility A and Facility B  
are unadministered, then the top 2 Span LEDs on the circuit pack must be  
off. If the yellow LEDs are on, then problems were encountered during the  
unadministration of hardware. Span LEDs associated with administered  
facilities (C and D, in this example) should be on.  
Removing the Hardware  
1. Be sure that you have unadministered the trunks, attendant consoles,  
voice terminals, and data modules associated with the port circuit packs  
in the EPN cabinet.  
2. Remove the fiber optic cables from the fiber transceivers at both ends of  
the fiber span. Carefully coil the fiber optic cables. Avoid bending cables  
to a radius smaller than 1.5 inches (3.8 cm).  
3. Remove the fiber transceivers from the DS1 and/or DS1 converter circuit  
packs at both ends of each fiber span.  
4. Remove the 25-pair cables from the connector panel on each carrier of  
the EPN.  
5. Type remove cabinet <number> and press Enter. This removes the EPN  
cabinet administration.  
6. Remove the power cords from the power units in each carrier in the EPN  
and remove the AC power cord or DC power wires.  
7. Check the grounding scheme for the cabinets. Perform the following:  
a. If any cabinet ground wires connect in series between the EPN  
cabinet and any other cabinet, remove the wires from the EPN  
cabinet and connect them to the next cabinet in the ground plane.  
!
CAUTION:  
Never leave cabinets ungrounded. When a ground wire is  
removed from a series-connected cabinet, the ground plane  
becomes open with respect to all subsequent cabinets.  
b. If any cabinet ground wires connect in parallel to other cabinets, or  
connect directly to the AC power panel ground or other approved  
ground, remove the wire from each end of the ground span.  
8. Carefully remove the EPN cabinet. The cabinet may weigh as much as  
800 pounds. Use caution.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System  
6-37  
9. Type change system-parameters featuresand press Enter. Use this  
screen to change the TTI field back to its previous setting before the  
upgrade.  
10. When finished, place dust covers over all exposed fiber couplings that  
remain after the fiber optic cables are removed.  
11. If any fiber optic cables were removed from Lightguide Interconnect Units  
(LIUs) or Fiber Patch Panels, remove the associated cable labeling. This  
will prevent confusion if existing fiber is later moved.  
12. Return all unused equipment (not owned by the customer) to Lucent  
Technologies according to the requirements outlined in:  
BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations  
Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns  
13. If any message waiting lamps are on, skip to ‘‘Troubleshooting’’ on page  
6-40.  
Unadminister Fiber Links (Duplex Systems)  
The fiber links routing to and from the EPN cabinet being removed must be  
unadministered before removing any hardware from the cabinet.  
!
CAUTION:  
Failure to unadminister fiber links before removing hardware causes  
unnecessary alarm reports to INADS and causes errors that are very  
difficult to clear.  
The fiber links are administered to match hardware and the Fiber Optic Cable  
Running List. Fiber link administration creates translation data by identifying the  
endpoint pairs for each link. To properly unadminister the fiber links, this  
translation data must be removed.  
1. Type list fiber and press Enter. All administered fiber connections are  
displayed. Make note of the fiber links to be removed.  
2. Type change fiber link and press Enter. The Fiber Link Administration  
screen appears. On screen 1:  
a. Remove the Board Location: information for ENDPOINT-1 and  
ENDPOINT-2. This is the cabinet, carrier, and slot that identifies the  
physical location of an SNI or EI circuit pack that is the first  
endpoint of the fiber link. Repeat for the remaining endpoints.  
b. The Board Typefield is display only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System  
6-38  
c. In the DS1CONV Board Location: field, remove the cabinet,  
carrier, and slot that identifies the physical location of DS1  
Converter circuit pack in the first endpoint of the duplicate fiber link.  
Endpoint-1’s duplicate along with Endpoint-2’s duplicate make up  
the duplicate fiber link called the B-PNC link.  
d. The DS1CONV Board Type: field is a display only field.  
e. The Is one endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter  
Complex?field must remain administered if other fiber connections  
associated with the facility will remain.  
3. Scroll to screen 2.  
a. Remove the DS1 Converter Facilities information. In the Facility  
Installed?field, type no for all facilities (A, B, C, and D) to be  
removed.  
b. The Bit Rate: field must remain administered.  
field must remain administered.  
d. The data in the Line Coding: field must remain administered.  
4. For a T1 site, proceed to ‘‘T1 Installations Only’’. For an E1 site, proceed to  
‘‘E1 Installations Only’’.  
T1 Installations Only  
1. The Framing Mode:field is display only.  
2. The DS1CONV-1 Line Compensation:and the DS1CONV-2 Line  
Compensation:fields are display only.  
3. Remove the Facility Circuit IDinformation from the facilities being  
unadministered, if used. Press Enter.  
4. A display similar to the following appears after the procedure is  
completed:  
RESET PORT-NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 (COLD) PERFORMED.  
E1 Installations Only  
1. The CRC?field must remain administered.  
2. The Line Termination:field is display only.  
3. Remove the Facility Circuit IDinformation from facilities being  
unadministered, if used. Press Enter.  
4. A display similar to the following appears after the procedure is  
completed:  
RESET PORT-NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 (COLD) PERFORMED.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System  
6-39  
All Installations  
1. When the system reset is finished, type status port-network 2 and press  
Enter. The Port Network Status screen appears. Verify that PNC Active is  
“up” and that the Service State is “in.”  
2. A Span LED, on the front of the DS1 Converter circuit pack, must be off for  
each inactive facility administered. For example, if Facility A and Facility B  
are unadministered, then the top 2 Span LEDs on the circuit pack must be  
off. If the yellow LEDs are on, then problems were encountered during the  
unadministration of hardware. Span LEDs associated with administered  
facilities (C and D, in this example) should be on.  
Removing the Hardware  
1. Be sure that you have unadministered the trunks, attendant consoles,  
voice terminals, and data modules associated with the port circuit packs  
in the EPN cabinet.  
2. Remove the fiber optic cables from the fiber transceivers at both ends of  
the fiber span. Carefully coil the fiber optic cables. Avoid bending cables  
to a radius smaller than 1.5 inches (3.8 cm).  
3. Remove the fiber transceivers from the DS1 and/or DS1 converter circuit  
packs at both ends of each fiber span.  
4. Remove the 25-pair cables from the connector panel on each carrier of  
the EPN.  
5. Type remove cabinet <number> and press Enter. This removes the EPN  
cabinet administration.  
6. Remove the power cords from the power units in each carrier in the EPN  
and remove the AC power cord or DC power wires.  
7. Check the grounding scheme for the cabinets. Perform the following:  
a. If any cabinet ground wires connect in series between the EPN  
cabinet and any other cabinet, remove the wires from the EPN  
cabinet and connect them to the next cabinet in the ground plane.  
!
CAUTION:  
Never leave cabinets ungrounded. When a ground wire is  
removed from a series-connected cabinet, the ground plane  
becomes open with respect to all subsequent cabinets.  
b. If any cabinet ground wires connect in parallel to other cabinets, or  
connect directly to the AC power panel ground or other approved  
ground, remove the wire from each end of the ground span.  
8. Carefully remove the EPN cabinet. The cabinet may weigh as much as  
800 pounds. Use caution.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Remove an EPN Cabinet from an Existing System  
6-40  
9. Type change system-parameters featuresand press Enter. Use this  
screen to change the TTI field back to its previous value before the  
upgrade.  
10. When finished, place dust covers over all exposed fiber couplings that  
remain after the fiber optic cables are removed.  
11. If any fiber optic cables were removed from Lightguide Interconnect Units  
(LIUs) or Fiber Patch Panels, remove the associated cable labeling. This  
will prevent confusion if existing fiber is later moved.  
12. Return all unused equipment (not owned by the customer) to Lucent  
Technologies according to the requirements outlined in:  
BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations  
Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns  
Troubleshooting  
Message Waiting Lamps On  
This usually means that all affected port-related translations were not  
unadministered.  
1. Type clear amw all <extension> and press Enter. This clears the message  
waiting lamp for the specified extension.  
2. Repeat the command for each extension with a lit message waiting lamp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add External Modem to EPN  
6
6-41  
Add External Modem to EPN  
U.S. Robotics Model USR 33.6 EXT External  
Modem  
3
1
TERMINAL  
2
cydfepnm KLC 100397  
Figure Notes:  
1. U.S. Robotics External Modem  
2. RS-232 Cable  
3. Expansion Port Network  
Figure 6-18. Connect External Modem to EPN  
1. Connect an RS-232 cable to the modem. See Figure 6-18.  
NOTE:  
In the following steps, a PC with Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0 may  
be substituted for the dumb terminal. Use the Hyperterminal  
(terminal emulation) application.  
2. Connect the opposite end of the RS-232 cable to a dumb terminal.  
3. Set the dumb terminal to full duplex mode.  
4. Type AT&N6 to set the baud rate to 9600.  
NOTE:  
The modem connects at 9600 baud but throughput is at 1200 baud.  
5. Type AT&W0 to save the setting into non-volatile RAM.  
6. Set Switch 5 to the OFF (up) position to disable auto answer.  
7. Disconnect the RS-232 cable from the terminal and connect it to the  
TERMINAL connector on the rear of the system cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add DCS Interface  
6
6-42  
Add DCS Interface  
Systems in a Distributed Communications System (DCS) network are  
interconnected by both tie trunks (for voice communications) and data links (for  
control and transparent feature information). These data links, also called DCS  
signaling links, support the feature transparency.  
Various subsets (depending on the specific configuration) of DS1 Interface  
circuit packs (including TN464F, TN767E, and TN760E) provide the  
voice-communications interface.  
Meanwhile, the data link interface (between the processor and the physical  
signaling link) is provided by (or through) a TN799 Control-LAN circuit pack. In  
some configurations, the TN799 passes the signaling information over a separate  
10BaseT TCP/IP network (usually via a hub). For use with 10BaseT, connect the  
appropriate pins of the I/O field to the hub. For pinouts and diagrams, refer to the  
installation manual for your cabinet type. In other configurations, the TN799  
circuit pack carries signaling over point-to-point protocol (PPP) for subsequent  
inclusion (via the switching fabric) in the same DS1 bit stream as the DCS voice  
transmissions.  
A TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack (installed in the PPN) can interface external  
Stratum 3 synchronization for DS1 connections.  
For further information about DCS, refer to the following documents:  
AT&T System 75/85 Network and Data Services Reference Manual  
System 75 Application Notes Network Services  
DEFINITY ECS Release 8 Administration for Network Connectivity  
Add Circuit Packs  
A TN464F, TN767E, or TN760E DS1 circuit pack is required for PPP connections.  
A TN799 Control-LAN circuit pack is also required.  
1. Determine the port assignments of the circuit packs to be added. If there  
are no available port slots in the processor cabinet for the Control-LAN  
circuit pack, place it in a R8 EPN cabinet port slot. You do not need to  
power down the cabinet to install the circuit pack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add DCS Interface  
6
6-43  
Install Cables  
1. Install cable from the cabinet to a hub or 110 (purple) wall field as  
required. Connect the 259A connector to the port slot containing the  
Control-LAN circuit pack. See Figure 6-19. For a pinout of TN799, see  
Table 6-3.  
1
2
3
cydflan2 EWS 101398  
Figure Notes  
1. 259A Connector  
2. DW8A Cable  
3. Hub or 110 (Purple) Wall Field  
Figure 6-19. Cable Connection for Control-LAN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add DCS Interface  
6
6-44  
Table 6-3. TN799 Pinout  
Peripheral  
Backplane Pin  
25-Pair Wire Color  
Lead Name Connector Pin  
103  
003  
104  
004  
White/Orange  
Orange/White  
White/Green  
Green/White  
TD+  
TD-  
27  
2
RD+  
RD-  
28  
3
Enter Added Translations  
1. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade. Call the regional CSA to  
perform the steps in this section.  
2. To enable DCS, set the DCSfield on the System Parameters-Customer  
Options screen to y.  
3. Administer the other required translation data using the forms listed under  
Distributed Communications System (DCS) in DEFINITY Communications  
System Administration for Network Connectivity.  
Save Translations  
1. If the system is high- or critical-reliability, type status spe and press Enter  
to verify that the standby SPE is refreshed and that the standby disk is in  
service.  
2. Enter save translation [spe-a or both] disk and press Enter. This  
command instructs the system to take all translation information in  
memory and write it to the disk(s).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-45  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
DEFINITY ECS IP Solutions allows you to send voice and fax from the DEFINITY  
ECS through an Internet protocol (IP) network to other DEFINITY ECSs having  
this feature or to other H.323 V2 compliant endpoints. It is implemented using the  
TN802/B IP Interface, which is a Windows NT server residing on the IP Interface  
Assembly inside the DEFINITY ECS.  
The IP Interface is an assembly composed of a TN802B circuit board, a  
processor card, and DSP resource card. For ordering purposes, the assembly is  
identified as a J58890MA-1 L30, but for simplicity, we refer to it in this book as the  
TN802B IP Interface.  
The TN802B IP Interface operates in two modes: IP Trunk, available with Release  
7 or later, and Media Processor (MedPro), available with Release 8. The IP Trunk  
mode is Internet Telephone Server—Enterprise (ITS-E) compatible, and the  
MedPro mode is H.323 V2 compatible. The TN802B IP Interface is backwards  
compatible and defaults to IP Trunk mode.You must administer it to use it in  
MedPro mode.  
For more information on the IP Interface capabilities and limitations, refer to the  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Overview.  
The following sections describe the process for  
Installing in Media Processor Mode  
Installing in IP Trunk Mode  
Upgrading a TN802 V3 (or later) to a TN802B (MedPro mode)  
!
WARNING:  
When connected remotely via pcANYWHERE, only use the pcANYWHERE  
Restart Host Computer button on the toolbar to restart Windows NT.  
Installing in Media Processor Mode  
To operate in MedPro mode, you must install the TN802B IP Interface and, if the  
system does not have one, you must also install and administer a TN799B C-LAN  
circuit pack. For C-LAN administration, refer to DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Administration for Network Connectivity.  
If you have existing TN802 IP Interface circuit packs, you can upgrade them  
either by replacing the circuit pack with a TN802B or by downloading the  
TN802B firmware onto the circuit packs (see ‘‘Upgrade to TN802B (R8)’’ on page  
6-76).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-46  
Prepare for Installation  
Have the following equipment on site before your shipment arrives:  
AC power outlets for the modem and monitor.  
Three unoccupied and adjoining port slots in the DEFINITY ECS for the  
TN802B IP Interface, if needed.  
The TN802B occupies only one slot, but it needs the two slots to its left for  
clearance.  
An additional unoccupied port slot for the TN799B, if needed. If you have  
an existing TN799 circuit pack, replace it with the TN799B.  
A 10 BaseT or 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connection into your local area  
network for the TN802B.  
A 10 BaseT Ethernet connection into your local area network for the  
TN799B.  
Two or more valid, unused IP addresses on your network (one for MedPro  
and one for C-LAN) that can be assigned to the IP Interface server. You  
also need the subnet mask and default gateway.  
An analog telephone line reserved (DID is okay) for the IP Interface  
diagnostic modem  
A valid telephone number reserved for the IP Interface diagnostic modem  
In addition if non-U.S. customer:  
Modem comparable to a U.S. Robotics Sportster Model USR 33.6 EXT.  
Cable from modem to TN802B external cable assembly.  
We recommend that you protect your cabinet with an uninterruptible power  
system (UPS).  
Check your Shipment  
When your DEFINITY ECS order arrives at your site, check the contents (see  
Table 6-4).  
1. Inspect the shipping carton for damage before opening it. If the box is  
damaged, do not open it. Inform the shipping company, and ask for  
instructions on filing a claim.  
2. If the box is undamaged, check the contents against the packing slip.  
Check the condition of each component, and note any damage or  
shortages on the packing slip. The carton should contain the following for  
each IP Interface ordered:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-47  
Table 6-4. Required Hardware  
Comcode/Code  
Description  
Quantity  
108525528  
TN799B C-LAN circuit pack. One  
TN799B supports more than one  
TN802B.  
1
1 or more  
J58890MA-1 L30  
601939804  
TN802B IP Interface Assembly  
H600-512,G1 external cable assembly 1 or more  
259A connector  
1
1
1
CAT5 or better cable  
407633999  
601087091  
U.S. Robotics Sportster external  
modem, Model USR 33.6 EXT (U.S.  
customers only). Non-U.S. customers  
must provide a modem comparable to  
this model.  
20-ft DB-25 serial cable from modem  
to TN802B external cable assembly  
(U.S. customers only). Non-U.S.  
1
customers must provide a serial cable.  
3. Read and follow any directions inserted into the package by the factory.  
The TN802B external cable assembly is a bundle of cables with an amphenol  
connector at the end of the bundle and various PC-type connectors (VGA,  
Universal Serial Bus [USB], mouse, keyboard, Ethernet, modem, and COM2) at  
the ends of the individual cables. See Figure 6-20. Look for the label where the  
bundle enters the amphenol connector.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-48  
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
cbdfocto AWF 122398  
Figure Notes  
1. Amphenol connector to connector  
corresponding to TN802B slot  
5. To mouse  
6. To ethernet  
2. To VGA monitor  
3. To USB (not used)  
4. To keyboard  
7. 25-pin male connector to modem  
8. 25-pin male connector to COM2  
Figure 6-20. TN802B IP Interface External Cable Assembly  
Connect the Cables  
1. Determine into which port slots you are putting the TN799B C-LAN and  
TN802B IP Interface circuit packs.  
NOTE:  
Make sure that at least 3 adjacent slots are free for the TN802B.  
From the rear of the cabinet:  
2. If adding a new TN799B, connect the 259A connector to the backplane  
connector corresponding to the TN799B slot.  
3. If adding a new TN799B, connect one end of the DW8 cable to the 259A  
connector. Connect the other end to the customer’s network.  
4. Connect the amphenol connector on the external cable assembly to the  
backplane connector corresponding to the TN802B slot (the highest  
numbered connector of the 3 slots required)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-49  
Connect the Modem  
NOTE:  
These instructions are for connecting the U.S. Robotics modem supplied to  
U.S. customers only. If using a different modem, follow the manufacturer’s  
instructions on connecting the modem.  
1. Connect the RS232 port of the modem to the MODEM connector of the  
TN802B external cable assembly.  
NOTE:  
Check the labels near the connectors; the MODEM and COM2  
connectors look the same.  
2. Connect an analog telephone line to the left most analog-line port on the  
modem as shown in Figure 6-21.  
3. Make sure that the modem’s DIP switches are set as shown in  
Figure 6-21 and Table 6-5.  
4. Plug the modem into an AC power outlet.  
5. Turn on the modem using the switch on the front of the modem.  
1
3
4
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
modfrobo KLC 030499  
Figure Notes  
1. Connect analog line here.  
2. DIP switch 5 must be up.  
3. Connect MODEM connector here.  
4. Connect power connector here.  
Figure 6-21. External Modem Connections for U.S. Robotics Modem  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-50  
Table 6-5. U.S. Robotics Modem Dip Switch Settings  
Dip  
Switch  
Setting  
Description  
UP  
DOWN  
Data Terminal Ready normal  
Data Terminal Ready override  
1
UP  
DOWN  
Verbal result codes  
Numeric result codes  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
UP  
DOWN  
Suppress result codes  
Display result codes  
UP  
DOWN  
Echo offline commands  
No echo, offline commands  
UP  
DOWN  
Auto answer on first ring or higher if specified in NVRAM  
Auto answer off  
UP  
DOWN  
Carrier detect normal  
Carrier detect override  
UP  
DOWN  
Load NVRAM defaults  
Load factory defaults  
UP  
DOWN  
Dumb mode  
Smart mode  
Connect the Ethernet  
1. Connect the network cable to the ETHERNET connector on the TN802B  
external cable assembly.  
NOTE:  
You need a CAT5 or better cable for 100-Mbyte operation.  
Install the Circuit Packs  
!
CAUTION:  
When adding or replacing any hardware, be sure to ground yourself against  
electrostatic discharge (ESD) by wearing a grounded wrist strap.  
NOTE:  
The TN799B and TN802B circuit packs are hot-swappable, so you do not  
need to power down the carrier to install them.  
If you need to remove the TN802B IP Interface from the carrier at a later  
time, shut down Windows NT first by pressing the recessed reset button on  
the faceplate (see Figure 6-22) of the TN802B IP Interface until the LCD  
shows a flashing MSHUT *. When the flashing stops and the asterisk  
disappears (about 2 min), it is safe to remove the circuit pack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-51  
1
2
3
4
5
fpdfmapd KLC 030899  
Figure Notes  
1. LCD display  
4. PCMCIA card slot  
5. Yellow PCMCIA disk-in-use LED  
2. Reset button (recessed)  
3. Red board status LED  
Figure 6-22. TN802B IP Interface faceplate  
NOTE:  
If replacing the existing TN799 circuit pack, remove it first and replace it  
with the new one.  
1. Insert the TN799B circuit pack into the port slot identified earlier.  
NOTE:  
To properly seat the circuit pack, push firmly on the front of the  
faceplate until the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier. Then  
close the latch until it is fully engaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-52  
2. Insert the TN802B IP Interface into the right most of the three slots you  
reserved for it (see Figure 6-23) and seat it properly.  
When you plug in the TN802B IP Interface Assembly, the circuit pack  
starts to boot and the LCD reads PC Boot. The circuit pack reboots  
automatically, and after about 3 to 4 minutes the LCD changes to IPTRK*,  
the default mode, or MEDPRO*.  
If the TN802B is pre-administered at the factory, it reboots several times to  
initialize to MedPro mode.  
If the TN802B is not pre-administered, go to ‘‘Administration Steps’’ on  
page 6-53  
NOTE:  
For an initial installation, the TN802B IP Interface needs to be  
administered first (see ‘‘Administer the IP Interface’’ on page 6-53).  
2
1
1
1
0
1
n
indfmapd KLC 031299  
Figure 6-23. J58890MA-1 L30 IP Interface Assembly  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-53  
Administer the TN799B C-LAN  
Refer to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Administration for  
Network Connectivity.  
Administer the IP Interface  
Administration is usually done remotely; call your service representative to start  
the process.  
Administration Steps  
NOTE:  
Refer to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Administration for  
Network Connectivity for Release 8 for specific information.  
1. Log in as craft.  
2. Type change node-names and press Enter.  
3. On screen 2, type in the node name and IP address for the TN802B.  
change node-names  
Name  
Page 2 of 6  
IP Address  
NODE NAMES  
IP Address  
Name  
clan-a1  
clan-b1  
default  
med-a1  
192.168.1 .31  
192.168.2 .31  
0 .0 .0 .0  
192.168.1 .81  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4. Type change circuit-pack and press Enter.  
5. Check the Code column to see if the slots above the TN802B say  
DSMAPD or MEDPRO.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-54  
.
change circuit-packs  
Cabinet: 1  
Page 1 of 5  
CIRCUIT PACKS  
Carrier: A  
Carrier Type: processor  
Slot Code Sf Mode  
Name  
Slot Code Sf Mode  
11: MEDPRO  
12: MEDPRO  
13: TN802 B  
14:  
Name  
RESERVED-IP  
RESERVED-IP  
MAPD BOARD  
01: TN754  
02: TN758  
DIGITAL LINE  
POOLED MODEM  
03: TN2144  
04: TN746 B  
05  
ANALOG LINE  
ANALOG LINE  
15:  
16:  
06: TN771 C  
07: TN464 F  
08: TN2140  
09: TN767 E  
10: TN799 B  
MAINTENANCE/TEST  
DS1 INTERFACE  
E&M TIE TRUNK  
DS1 INTERFACE  
CONTROL-LAN  
’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict.  
6. If not, type MEDPRO in the slot just above TN802B slot and press Enter.  
Changing the one entry automatically changes the entry above it. If it is in  
IP Trunk mode, you get the following error message:  
MedPro type requires TN802 with application. Type  
MEDPRO on circuit-packs form.  
7. Type change ip-interfaces and press Enter.  
8. Type in the information for the TN802B IP Interface,  
9. Set the Enabledfield to y, and press Enter.  
NOTE:  
The customer provides the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway  
address.  
At this time the TN802B LCD reads PC BOOT *, and about 3 to 4 minutes  
later reads MEDPRO * with the asterisk flashing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-55  
.
change ip-interfaces  
Page 1 of 2  
Network regions are interconnected? n  
En-  
abled Type  
Addr Rgn  
Net  
Bcast/Gway  
Slot Code Sfx Node Name  
Subnet Mask  
n C-LAN 01A09 TN799  
clan-a1  
255.255.255.0 192.168.1 .100 1  
y
n
MEDPRO 01A13 TN802 B med-a1  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
255.255.255.0  
192.168.1 .21 1  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Test the External Connection to the LAN  
To test the external IP connections, ping the IP Interface server, and ping a  
known computer connected to your network. If everything is configured correctly,  
the Resultcolumn on the Ping Results screen reads pass. If it reads abort,  
verify the IP-address information and check the connectivity, including the  
cabling.  
1. Type ping ip-address nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn board UUCSS and press Enter.  
The variable nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the IP address of the TN802B IP  
Interface and UUCSS is the cabinet, carrier, and slot of the TN802B IP  
Interface.  
ping ip-address 192.168.10.21  
PING RESULTS  
End-pt IP  
Port  
Port Type Result  
MEDPRO PASS  
Time(ms) Error Code  
10 1124  
192.168.10.21  
01A13  
2. Type ping ip-address nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn board UUCSS and press Enter.  
The variable nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the IP address of the customer’s  
gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet, carrier, and slot of the TN802B IP  
Interface.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-56  
3. Type ping ip-address nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn board UUCSS and press Enter.  
The variable nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the IP address of another computer  
beyond the gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet, carrier, and slot of the  
TN802B IP Interface.  
The TN802B IP Interface is now installed in the DEFINITY carrier and connected  
to the IP network.  
Installing in IP Trunk Mode  
NOTE:  
IP Trunk mode should only be used to maintain compatibility with existing  
Release 7 IP Trunk or ITS-E installations. We strongly recommend that  
MedPro mode be used whenever possible.  
Prepare for Installation  
Have the following equipment on site before your shipment arrives:  
A mouse, keyboard, and VGA monitor for use during the installation of the  
server. You also need AC power outlets for the modem and monitor.  
Three adjoining, unoccupied port slots in the DEFINITY ECS  
The TN802B IP Interface slides into only 1 slot, but its faceplate occupies  
3 slots.  
A 10 BaseT or 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connection into the customer’s local  
area network (LAN)  
A valid, unused IP address on the customer’s LAN that can be assigned to  
the IP Interface server. You also need the subnet mask, default gateway,  
domain name, and so forth from the customer’s network administrator.  
An analog telephone line reserved for the IP Interface diagnostic modem  
A valid telephone number reserved for the IP Interface diagnostic modem  
If non-U.S. customer:  
Modem comparable to a U.S. Robotics, Inc. Sportster Model USR 33.6  
EXT.  
A cable from the modem to the TN802B external cable assembly.  
We recommend that you protect the cabinet where the IP Interface is installed  
with an uninterruptible power system (UPS).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-57  
Check your Shipment  
When your DEFINITY ECS order arrives at the customer’s site, check the  
contents (see Table 6-6).  
1. Inspect the shipping carton for damage before opening it. If the box is  
damaged, do not open it. Inform the shipping company, and ask for  
instructions on filing a claim.  
2. If the box is undamaged, check the contents against the packing slip.  
Check the condition of each component, and note any damage or  
shortages on the packing slip. The carton should contain the following for  
each IP Interface ordered:  
.
Table 6-6. Required Hardware  
Comcode/Code  
J58890MA-1 L30  
601939804  
Description  
Quantity  
1
TN802B IP Interface Assembly  
H600-512,G1 external cable assembly  
1
1
407633999  
U.S. Robotics Sportster external  
modem, model number USR 33.6 EXT  
(U.S. customers only) 1  
601087091  
20-ft DB-25 serial cable from modem  
to TN802B external cable assembly  
(U.S. customers only) 2  
1
1. For non-U.S. customers, you need a modem comparable to the U.S. Robotics  
Sportster and a serial cable.  
The TN802B external cable assembly is a bundle of cables with an amphenol  
connector at the end of the bundle and various PC-type connectors (VGA,  
Universal Serial Bus [USB], mouse, keyboard, Ethernet, modem, and COM2) at  
the ends of the individual cables. See Figure 6-24. Look for the label where the  
bundle enters the amphenol connector.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-58  
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
cbdfocto AWF 122398  
Figure Notes  
1. Amphenol connector to connector  
corresponding to TN802B slot  
5. To mouse  
6. To ethernet  
2. To VGA monitor  
3. To USB (not used)  
4. To keyboard  
7. 25-pin male connector to modem  
8. 25-pin male connector to COM2  
Figure 6-24. TN802B IP Interface External Cable Assembly  
3. Read and follow any directions inserted into the package by the factory.  
Connect the Cables  
1. Determine into which port slot you are putting the TN802B IP Interface.  
NOTE:  
Make sure that at least 3 adjoining slots are free.  
2. From the rear of the cabinet, connect the amphenol connector on the  
external cable assembly to the backplane connector corresponding to  
that slot (the highest numbered connector of the 3 slots required).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-59  
Connect the Modem  
NOTE:  
These instructions are for connecting the U.S. Robotics modem supplied to  
U.S. customers only. If using a different modem, follow the manufacturer’s  
instructions on connecting the modem.  
1. Connect the RS232 port of the modem to the MODEM connector of the  
TN802B external cable assembly.  
NOTE:  
Check the labels near the connectors; the MODEM and COM2  
connectors look the same.  
2. Connect an analog telephone line to the leftmost analog-line port on the  
modem as shown in Figure 6-25.  
3. Make sure that the modem’s DIP switches are set as shown in  
Figure 6-25 and Table 6-7.  
4. Plug the modem into an AC power outlet.  
5. Turn on the modem using the switch on the front of the modem.  
1
3
4
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
modfrobo KLC 030499  
Figure Notes  
1. Connect analog line here.  
2. DIP switch 5 must be up.  
3. Connect MODEM connector here.  
4. Connect power connector here.  
Figure 6-25. External Modem Connections for U.S. Robotics Sporster  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-60  
Table 6-7. U.S. Robotics Modem Dip Switch Settings  
Dip  
Switch  
Setting  
Description  
UP  
DOWN  
Data Terminal Ready normal  
Data Terminal Ready override  
1
UP  
DOWN  
Verbal result codes  
Numeric result codes  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
UP  
DOWN  
Suppress result codes  
Display result codes  
UP  
DOWN  
Echo offline commands  
No echo, offline commands  
UP  
DOWN  
Auto answer on first ring or higher if specified in NVRAM  
Auto answer off  
UP  
DOWN  
Carrier detect normal  
Carrier detect override  
UP  
DOWN  
Load NVRAM defaults  
Load factory defaults  
UP  
DOWN  
Dumb mode  
Smart mode  
Connect the Monitor, Keyboard, and Mouse  
NOTE:  
Only make these connections if administered locally. Not necessary if  
administered remotely.  
You must connect these before inserting the TN802B IP Interface.  
1. Attach a VGA monitor to the VGA connector of the TN802B IP Interface  
external cable assembly.  
2. Attach the keyboard to the KEYBOARD connector of the external cable  
assembly.  
3. Attach the mouse to the MOUSE connector of the external cable  
assembly.  
4. Plug the monitor into an AC power receptacle and turn it on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-61  
Connect the Ethernet  
1. Connect the network cable to the ETHERNET connector on the TN802B  
external cable assembly.  
NOTE:  
You need a CAT5 or better cable for 100-Mbyte operation.  
Install the Circuit Pack  
!
CAUTION:  
When adding or replacing any hardware, be sure to ground yourself against  
electrostatic discharge (ESD) by wearing a grounded wrist strap.  
NOTE:  
The TN802B IP Interface is hot-swappable, so you do not need to power  
down the carrier to install it.  
If you need to remove the TN802B IP Interface from the carrier at a later  
time, shut down Windows NT first by pressing the recessed reset button on  
the faceplate (see Figure 6-26) of the TN802B IP Interface until the LCD  
shows a flashing MSHUT *. When the flashing stops and the asterisk  
disappears (about 2 min), it is safe to remove the circuit pack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-62  
1
2
3
4
5
fpdfmapd KLC 030899  
Figure Notes  
1. LCD display  
4. PCMCIA card slot  
5. Yellow PCMCIA disk-in-use LED  
2. Reset button (recessed)  
3. Red board status LED  
Figure 6-26. TN802B IP Interface faceplate  
NOTE:  
To properly seat the circuit pack, push firmly on the front of the faceplate  
until the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier. Then close the latch  
until it is fully engaged.  
1. Insert the TN802B IP Interface into the rightmost of the three slots you  
reserved for it (see Figure 6-27).  
When you plug in the TN802B IP Interface, the circuit pack starts to boot  
and the LCD reads PC Boot then after about 3 to 4 minutes it changes to  
IP TRK *, the default mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-63  
2
1
1
1
0
1
n
indfmapd KLC 031299  
Figure 6-27. J58890MA-1 L30 IP Interface Assembly  
Test the Modem  
1. Check for dial tone.  
2. Contact Lucent Technologies Customer Support and ask a representative  
to dial into your IP Interface server.  
Administer the IP Interface  
Adminstration is done either locally or remotely. If administered locally, proceed  
with the following adminstration steps on the attached keyboard, mouse, and  
monitor. If administered remotely, call your service representative to start the  
process.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-64  
Administration Steps  
1. Log in as craft.  
2. Type change circuit-pack and press Enter.  
3. Check the Code column to see if the slots above the TN802B say  
DSMAPD or MEDPRO.  
.
change circuit-packs  
Cabinet: 1  
Page 1 of 5  
CIRCUIT PACKS  
Carrier: A  
Carrier Type: processor  
Slot Code Sf Mode  
Name  
Slot Code Sf Mode  
11: DSMAPD  
Name  
RESERVED-IP  
01: TN754  
02: TN758  
03: TN2144  
04: TN746 B  
05  
DIGITAL LINE  
POOLED MODEM  
ANALOG LINE  
ANALOG LINE  
12: DSMAPD  
13: TN802 B  
14:  
15:  
16:  
RESERVED-IP  
MAPD BOARD  
06: TN771 C  
07: TN464 F  
08: TN2140  
09: TN767 E  
10: TN799 B  
MAINTENANCE/TEST  
DS1 INTERFACE  
E&M TIE TRUNK  
DS1 INTERFACE  
CONTROL-LAN  
’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict.  
4. If MEDPRO, go to the entry just above the TN802B that says MEDPRO.  
5. Type DSMAPD, and press Enter. Changing the one entry automatically  
changes the entry above it. If it is in IP Trunk mode, you get the following  
error message:  
MedPro type requires TN802 with application. Type  
MEDPRO on circuit-packs form.  
Log onto the TN802B Interface Server  
If administered remotely through pcANYWHERE:  
1. Dial in to the server through pcANYWHERE using the dialup number  
supplied.  
2. Click on the pcANYWHERE Remote Host Computer button on the toolbar  
to send CTRL ALT DEL to the host.  
3. Type administrator in the User Namefield.  
4. Type iptrunk in the Passwordfield and click OK.  
5. After logging on for the first time, change the administrator password and,  
if desired, the user name, to ensure security. See your Windows NT server  
documentation for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-65  
If administered locally on a monitor, keyboard, and mouse:  
1. Press CTRL, ALT, and DEL simultaneously.  
2. Type administrator in the User Namefield.  
3. Type iptrunk in the Passwordfield and click OK.  
4. After logging on for the first time, change the administrator password and,  
if desired, the user name, to ensure security. See your Windows NT server  
documentation for details.  
A-Law versus Mu-Law  
For systems using A-Law companding, an additional procedure is necessary.  
On the SAT:  
1. Busyout the trunk group associated with the IP trunk by typing busyout  
board UUCSS and pressing Enter.  
In the Windows interface to TN802B:  
1. Click on Control Panel > Services.  
2. Highlight IP Trunk Service, then click on Stop.  
3. In the lower left-hand corner, right-click Start > Explore.  
4. Go to the c: drive and click on its, then bin.  
5. Double-click on the its.ini file to open it in Notepad.  
6. Under the [MediaLib] section, go to COMPANDING=MLAW. Change  
MLAW to ALAW.  
7. Click on File > Save to save the file.  
8. Click on File > Exit to exit Notepad.  
9. Click on Control Panel > Services.  
10. Highlight IP Trunk Service, then click on Start.  
NOTE:  
Do not select Startup.  
After service has started, go to the SAT:  
1. Release the trunk group associated with the IP trunk by typing release  
board UUCSS and pressing Enter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-66  
Assign Server and Domain Names  
The Windows NT server identifies servers using a server name plus a domain  
name that locates the named server in a particular part of the network. The  
TN802B IP Interface is shipped with generic server and domain names. Assign  
replacement names that are meaningful within your network.  
1. Click on My Computer > Control Panel > Network.  
2. Select the Identification tab, then click Change.  
3. Type the new server name in the Computer Namefield.  
4. Type the new domain name in the Domainfield and click OK > OK >  
Close.  
5. When prompted to reboot the computer, select one of the following  
options:  
No if you have not assigned IP addresses then go to ‘‘Assign an IP  
Address’’  
Yes if you have assigned IP addresses.  
Assign an IP Address  
1. Click on My Computer > Control Panel > Network.  
2. Click the Protocols tab.  
3. Select TCP/IP Protocol from the list.  
4. Click the Properties option in the Network window.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-67  
5. Verify that the Adapterdrop down menu lists 2 DEC Ethernet adapters.  
!
CAUTION:  
Do not change any settings on the adapter labeled [1] for any  
reason.  
6. Select the DEC Ethernet adapter labeled [2].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-68  
7. Type a valid IP address for the IP Interface server in the IP Address:  
field.  
8. Type the appropriate subnet mask in the Subnet Mask:field.  
NOTE:  
Not all networks require steps 9 through 18. Check with the local  
network administrator to determine which are required.  
9. If you use gateways, type the IP address of the default gateway for the IP  
Interface server in the Default Gateway:field.  
10. Click on the DNS tab and verify that the domain DNS server is correct.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-69  
11. Type domain name in the Domainfield.  
12. If using DNS, click Add under the DNS Service Search Orderfield and  
type its IP address.  
13. Click on the WINS Address tab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-70  
14. Make sure the [2] DEC shows in the Adapterfield.  
15. If WINS server is available, type its IP address in the Primary WINS  
Serverfield.  
16. If DNS is available, select Enable DNS for Windows Resolution.  
17. If the network uses an imported LMHOSTS file, select Enable LMHOSTS  
Lookup and Import LMHOSTSand click OK.  
18. If the following dialog box opens, click Yes:  
At least one of the adapter cards has an empty primary  
WINS address. Do you want to continue?  
19. Click the Bindings tab to effect the changes.  
NetBIOS Interface, Server, and Workstation should now be enabled. If any  
are disabled (a red circle with a line through it), review the previous  
network-configuration steps for omissions or errors.  
20. Click Close.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-71  
If administered remotely through pcANYWHERE:  
21. Click on the pcANYWHERE Restart Host Computer button on the toolbar  
to restart the computer.  
If administered locally on a monitor, keyboard, and mouse:  
21. Click Yes in the dialog box to restart the computer.  
!
WARNING:  
When connected remotely via pcANYWHERE, only use the pcANYWHERE  
Restart Host Computer button on the toolbar to restart Windows NT.  
Check Network Services  
When the server restarts, make sure that the required network services have  
started correctly. If you see an error dialog box, then the network services did not  
start correctly. Also, check the NT Event Log.  
1. Click on My Computer > Control Panel > Network > Services. Make  
sure that the following services are listed:  
Computer Browser  
Microsoft Internet Information Server 2.0  
NetBIOS Interface  
RPC Configuration  
Server  
Workstation  
2. Click the Protocols tab, and examine the Network Protocols. TCP/IP  
protocol should be the only one listed.  
3. Click OK.  
Test the External Connection to the LAN  
To test the external IP connections, ping the IP Interface server and ping a known  
computer connected to your network.  
1. Click Start > Programs > Command Prompt.  
2. Type ping nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn (which is your IP address).  
If everything is configured correctly, the system responds with the  
following message:  
Reply from nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn: bytes=32 time<##ms  
TTL=###  
If no response, verify the IP-address information and check the  
connectivity, including the cabling.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-72  
3. At the command prompt, type ping nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn (which is the IP  
address of your gateway).  
If everything is configured correctly, the system responds with the  
following message:  
Reply from nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn: bytes=32 time<##ms  
TTL=###  
If no response, verify the IP address information and check the  
connectivity, including the cabling.  
I f all else fails, click on Start > Settings > Control Panel >  
Network. Select the Adapters tab and highlight the [2] DEC  
adapter.  
Click Properties > Change.  
From the Duplex Mode dropdown menu, select a setting that  
matches the switch/hub that the TN802B connects to. For example,  
10BaseT Full Duplex or 10BaseT No Link Test  
4. At the command prompt, type ping nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn (which is the IP  
address of another external computer beyond the gateway).  
If you have connectivity, the system responds with the following  
message:  
Reply from nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn: bytes=32 time<##ms  
TTL=###  
If no response, verify the IP address information and check the  
connectivity, including the cabling. Consult your IP network  
administrator.  
5. Type exit and press Enter.  
Test the IP Interface Onboard LAN Connections  
To test the onboard LAN connections, ping the IP Interface server and the  
processor on the TN802B IP Interface.  
1. Click Start > Programs > Command Prompt.  
2. Type ping 192.11.13.9 (which is the IP address of the internal IP Interface  
server).  
If everything is configured correctly, the system responds with the  
following message:  
Reply from 192.11.13.9: bytes=32 time<##ms TTL=###  
If no response, verify the IP address information and check the  
connectivity, including the cabling.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-73  
3. At the command prompt, type ping 192.11.13.8 (which is the IP address of  
the internal processor).  
If you have connectivity, the system responds with the following  
message:  
Reply from 192.11.13.8: bytes=32 time<##ms TTL=###  
If no response, verify the IP settings for Adapter [1].  
4. Type exit and press Enter.  
The TN802B IP Interface is now installed in the DEFINITY carrier and connected  
to the IP network. You can now use the Configuration Manager software  
(preinstalled on the TN802B hard disk) and DEFINITY ECS switch administration  
to administer connections to other IP Trunk and ITS-E equipment.  
Upgrading a TN802 V3 (or later) to a TN802B  
(MedPro mode)  
If you have a TN802 V3 (or later) IP Interface, you must either replace it with a  
TN802B circuit pack or upgrade the existing TN802 circuit pack to operate in  
MedPro mode. Also, to operate in the MedPro mode, the DEFINITY ECS switch  
must be Release 8 or later.  
NOTE:  
The TN802 IP Interface must be V3 or later to upgrade to TN802B.  
To upgrade the TN802 to a TN802B, you need the following hardware:  
Monitor, keyboard, and mouse to access the IP Interface’s Windows NT  
environment or pcANYWHERE software.  
10-Mbyte SanDisk PCMCIA flashcard loaded with the MedPro  
NTApplication Install Wizard  
TN802B label  
The upgrade adds or modifies the following directories or files on your  
computer’s hard drive:  
c:\dolan\*  
c:\mapd\dnld\medpro.img  
c:\mapd\dnld\tmp.img  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-74  
Connect the Monitor, Keyboard, and Mouse  
1. Attach a VGA monitor to the VGA connector of the TN802 IP Interface  
external cable assembly.  
2. Attach the keyboard to the KEYBOARD connector of the external cable  
assembly.  
3. Attach the mouse to the MOUSE connector of the external cable  
assembly.  
4. Plug the monitor into an AC power receptacle and turn it on.  
5. If upgrading locally, reboot Windows NT by pressing the recessed reset  
button on the faceplate (see Figure 6-26) of the TN802B IP Interface until  
the LCD shows a flashing MSHUT *. When the flashing stops and the  
asterisk disappears (about 2 min), it is safe to remove the circuit pack.  
6. After the TN802B is shut down, reseat the circuit pack to restart the  
system.  
7. Log in using ctrl alt del  
Upgrading IP trunks (R7) to H.323 trunks  
If there are existing IP trunk connections that you want to upgrade to H.323 trunk  
connections, do the following steps. Otherwise, go to ‘‘Upgrade to TN802B (R8)’’  
on page 6-76  
To upgrade an existing IP trunk (R7) to an H.323 trunk (R8) requires first getting  
IP information from the existing TN802 before upgrading the TN802 to TN802B.  
1. Click on My Computer > Control Panel > Network.  
2. Click the Protocols tab.  
3. Select TCP/IP Protocol from the list.  
4. Click the Properties option in the Network window. Write down the IP  
address, subnet address, and gateway address shown for adaptor [2]  
(see example below).  
NOTE:  
Do not use the addresses for adapter [1].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-75  
5. When done, click OK, OK.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-76  
Upgrade to TN802B (R8)  
NOTE:  
The upgrade takes about 20 minutes.  
1. Insert the flash disk into the right most slot on the TN802 IP trunk. On the  
monitor, a dialog box assigns a drive letter with the removable media  
designation; the default is D:.  
2. Right click on Start > Explore to open the Windows NT Exploring pane  
and select the drive letter indicated in step 1.  
3. Double-click on Medpro and select the Setup icon.  
4. Follow the Install Shield procedure to transfer all the necessary files to the  
TN802 IP Interface.  
NOTE:  
In the Finish dialog box, select I will restart later. Do not  
select Restart computer.  
This would be a good time to read the Readme.txt file.  
5. Click on Start > Settings > Control Panel > Services.  
6. Select IP Trunk and click on Startup.  
NOTE:  
Do not click on Start.  
7. Under Startup Type, select Disabled and click OK to disable IP Trunk  
mode.  
NOTE:  
If IP trunk and MedPro services are both set to automatic, the  
TN802B defaults to IP Trunk and MedPro features cannot be used.  
8. Select MedPro and click on Startup.  
NOTE:  
Do not click on Start.  
9. Under Startup Type, select Automatic and click OK to enable MedPro  
mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-77  
10. Click Start > Shut Down and select Restart the computer?  
or on the TN802:  
Press the recessed reset button on the faceplate (see Figure 6-26) until  
the LCD shows a flashing MSHUT *. When the flashing stops and the  
asterisk disappears (about 2 min), reseat the circuit pack to restart the  
system.  
or on the SAT:  
a. Type busyout board UUCSS and press Enter .  
b. Type reset board UUCSS and press Enter.  
c. Type release board UUCSS and press Enter.  
Once the system is completely initialized, the LCD reads MEDPRO *.  
!
WARNING:  
When connected remotely via pcANYWHERE, only use the  
pcANYWHERE Restart Host Computer button on the toolbar to  
restart Windows NT.  
11. Affix the new TN802B label to the circuit pack.  
12. Disconnect the monitor, keyboard, and mouse.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add IP Interface Assembly  
6
6-78  
Circuit Pack Verification  
1. Type change circuit-pack and press Enter.  
2. Check the Code column to see if it says DSMAPD or MedPro.  
.
change circuit-packs  
Cabinet: 1  
Page 1 of 5  
CIRCUIT PACKS  
Carrier: A  
Carrier Type: processor  
Slot Code Sf Mode  
Name  
Slot Code Sf Mode  
11: MEDPRO  
12: MEDPRO  
13: TN802 B  
14:  
Name  
RESERVED-IP  
RESERVED-IP  
MAPD BOARD  
01: TN754  
DIGITAL LINE  
POOLED MODEM  
ANALOG LINE  
ANALOG LINE  
02: TN758  
03: TN2144  
04: TN746 B  
05  
15:  
16:  
06: TN771 C  
07: TN464 F  
08: TN2140  
09: TN767 E  
10: TN799 B  
MAINTENANCE/TEST  
DS1 INTERFACE  
E&M TIE TRUNK  
DS1 INTERFACE  
CONTROL-LAN  
’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict.  
3. To correct it, go to the entry just above the TN802B that says DSMAPD.  
4. Type MEDPRO, and press Enter. Changing the one entry automatically  
changes the entry above it. If it is in IP Trunk mode, you get the following  
error message:  
MedPro type requires TN802 with application. Type  
MEDPRO on circuit-packs form.  
5. To complete the administration, refer to the DEFINITY ECS Release 8  
Network Connectivity book.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add TTC Japanese 2Mbit Trunks  
6
6-79  
Add TTC Japanese 2Mbit Trunks  
The TN2242 Japan 2Mbit trunk interconnects DEFINITY with other vendor  
equipment in Japan as well as to interconnect other DEFINITY switches through  
the Time Division Multiplexor device.  
Installation  
1. Determine the port assignment of the trunk from the Trunk Group screen.  
EXAMPLE:  
1
A
07  
01  
Cabinet (Port  
Network)  
Carrier  
Slot  
Number  
Port  
Number  
2. Install a TN2242 circuit pack in assigned carrier slot.  
3. Connect the H600-513 cable from the DEFINITY cabinet to the Time  
Division Multiplexor device.  
4. To administer forms, see the following sections in the DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide.  
For ISDN applications, see the “ISDN Service” section.  
For non-ISDN applications, see the “Managing Trunks” section.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-80  
Add a Control Carrier (Add  
Duplication)  
To upgrade a standard-reliability system to a high- or critical-reliability DEFINITY  
ECS Release 5 system, a second control carrier is added to carrier position “B”  
of the existing multicarrier cabinet PPN.  
Service Interruption  
1. Since the addition of the second control carrier requires a service  
interruption, notify the customer in advance as to when the addition will be  
carried out.  
Verify System Status  
1. Before proceeding, the system should be examined for alarms, and every  
problem should be corrected. The system must be alarm-free.  
Disable Alarm Origination  
1. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
2. Make a note of the Alarm Origination Activated field  
administration. If the feature is enabled, type nin this field and press Enter  
to disable Alarm Origination. This will be activated again later.  
!
WARNING:  
If you do not disable Alarm Origination before making changes to the  
switch, the switch may generate alarms, resulting in unnecessary  
trouble tickets. Reducing redundant and unnecessary trouble tickets  
is critical for measuring the quality of Lucent services and products.  
NOTE:  
For earlier releases of the system software, you may also need to  
disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart  
Notificationfields before you can submit the form successfully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-81  
Save Translations  
1. Log in at the management terminal.  
2. Type save translation [spe-a] disk and press Enter. This command  
instructs the system write all translation information from memory to disk.  
3. If the PPN or an EPN (where PPN Port Carrier B will be relocated) contains  
a TN750 Announcement circuit pack, type display announcements and  
press Enter.  
4. If administered recorded announcements are listed, type list  
configuration software-version and press Enter. Check screen 2 to see  
when the announcements were last saved. Save the current  
announcements by typing save announcements disk and pressing Enter.  
5. Type backup disk [spe-a] and press Enter. This instructs the system to  
backup the current information on disk to the system tape.  
6. Update backup tape, if required.  
Label Cables  
1. To make reconnecting the cables simpler and more reliable, label both  
ends of the connector cables associated with the port carrier “B” to be  
removed.  
Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in the control cabinet to be  
upgraded, prepare to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and  
allow the disk to completely spin down.  
!
CAUTION:  
Before using this procedure to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway,  
make sure that you save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the  
current system.  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before  
powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN  
Gateway disk.  
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. See DEFINITY Communications  
System Generic 3 Installation, Administration and Maintenance of  
CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway for the procedure to log  
in.  
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-82  
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.  
4. Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu.  
5. Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors.  
1. If a DEFINITY AUDIX resides in the PPN or an EPN (where PPN Port  
Carrier B will be relocated), shut down the AUDIX and allow the disk to  
completely spin down. Refer to ‘‘DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures’’ on  
page 6-141.  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down  
the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk.  
2. Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors.  
Power Down Port Networks  
1. At the PPN, set the main circuit breaker to OFF.  
2. At an EPN (where PPN port carrier B will be relocated), set the main circuit  
breaker to OFF.  
Remove Doors and Panels and Disconnect Cables  
1. Remove the front door from the PPN cabinet.  
2. With the cable retainer in front of you and the part number visible, locate  
the slot that is almost vertical. (This slot is adjacent to the part number.)  
Insert a flat blade screwdriver with a wide blade (1/4-inch recommended)  
into the slot, and twist. The retainer snap opens easily so that the cable  
can be removed.  
3. At the cabinet, disconnect previously labeled cables associated with the  
carrier to be removed.  
4. Remove the back doors from the cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-83  
Remove Circuit Packs from Port Carrier B  
1. To ensure that circuit packs and power units in the “B” carrier are properly  
replaced, label each component with its slot number.  
2. Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the “B” carrier.  
3. Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier “B.” Store the circuit  
packs in the static-proof packaging.  
4. Remove the circuit pack blanks from slots that do not contain circuit  
packs.  
5. Remove the front trim plate from the “B” carrier by pulling it straight off.  
Remove Port Carrier B  
1. Behind the PPN, disconnect and remove the ICCB cable from between  
carrier “B” and carrier “A.” It will not be reused.  
NOTE:  
Note the position of the TDM/LAN cables before disconnecting  
them.  
2. Disconnect 1 end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “B” and “C”  
carriers) from the “B” carrier (See Figure 6-28).  
3. Disconnect 1 end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “B” and “A”  
carriers) from the “B” carrier (See Figure 6-28).  
4. Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps (between the “B” and “C”  
carriers) from the “B” carrier (See Figure 6-29). These straps are  
reconnected to the new “B” carrier.  
5. Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps (between the “B” and “A”  
carriers) from the “B” carrier (See Figure 6-29). These straps are  
reconnected to the new “B” carrier.  
6. Disconnect the “P1” (small 9-pin) connector from the “B” carrier. Move the  
cable into a position where it will not interfere with removing the carrier.  
7. Behind the “B” carrier, remove the 2 screws holding the “B” carrier’s rear  
connector panel to the cabinet frame. These are frame ground screws.  
8. In front of “B” carrier, remove the 4 screws (top 2 first) holding the “B”  
carrier to the cabinet frame. Use a long-handle screwdriver or 5/16-inch  
socket with a 10-inch extension.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-84  
9. Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches; then, from the back, be sure that no  
cables or wiring harnesses are caught on the cabinet/carrier framework.  
!
CAUTION:  
Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the  
framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the  
carrier.  
10. Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet.  
TDM/LAN BUS TERMINATOR  
(ZAHF4)  
SLOT 21  
SEE NOTE  
J58890BB  
C
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
SLOT 21  
SEE NOTE  
J58890BB  
B
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
SLOT 21  
SLOT 01  
J58890AP-1  
A
CONTROL CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L7  
SEE NOTE  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
D
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
TDM/LAN BUS  
TERMINATOR  
(ZAHF4)  
SEE NOTE  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
E
PORT CARRIER  
REAR VIEW  
NOTE:  
ON PORT CARRIER J58890BB-1, CONNECT THE TDM/LAN CABLE OR TDM/LAN TERMINATOR TO  
SLOT 02. ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB-2 AND -3, CONNECT THE TDM/LAN CABLES TO SLOT 01.  
Figure 6-28. TDM/LAN Connections for Standard-Reliability PPN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-85  
1
1
2
4
P1  
P1  
2
4
P1  
P1  
3
3
3
3
P2  
P1  
P2  
P1  
5
6
5
6
P1  
P1  
P1  
P1  
7
8
Figure Notes  
1. Port Carrier "C"  
2. Port Carrier "B"  
3. Ground Jumpers  
4. Control Carrier “A”  
5. Port Carrier “D”  
6. Port Carrier “E”  
7. Cabinet with standard fan unit and carriers  
8. Cabinet with enhanced fan unit and enhanced  
carriers  
Figure 6-29. Locations of Ground Jumpers on standard and enhanced fan-unit cabinets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-86  
Prepare New Control Carrier B  
1. Visually inspect the new carrier for any damage. Verify that the backplane  
pins are not bent.  
NOTE:  
The enhanced R8r PPN AC carrier may look different than the other  
carriers because it comes with 16 new grounding jumpers and 8  
mounting screws.  
2. Place the control carrier on the floor so that the rear of the carrier faces up.  
3. Verify that the 2 AHF111 processor-bus (PX) terminators are installed on  
the “B” carrier to the pin-field blocks marked “PX” (top portion of slots “4”  
and “10”). The PX terminators are attached with the components on the  
left side as viewed from the rear.  
Install New Control Carrier B  
1. Install the J58890AP control carrier in position “B” by lining up the plastic  
alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the  
cabinet. These alignment tips will support the carrier while the screws are  
being replaced. Ensure that the power cords are properly placed in the  
slots at the sides of the carrier.  
2. Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self-tapping screws saved from the  
removal of the old carrier.  
!
CAUTION:  
Carefully realign the threads on the self-tapping screws by turning  
them clockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid stripping the  
threads out of the framework.  
3. Behind the carrier, replace the 2 screws saved from the removal of the old  
carrier. These are frame ground screws.  
4. Connect the “P1” (small) connector to the “B” carrier. To get enough slack  
in the cables, cut the tie wrap holding the intercabinet cable from the  
upright in the area being installed. Snap the connector lock into place to  
ensure the connection is properly made.  
5. Connect the 8 ground straps from the “C” carrier to the new “B” carrier  
(See Figure 6-29). These straps were left connected to the “C” carrier  
when the old “B” carrier was removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-87  
6. Connect the 8 ground straps from the “A” carrier to the new “B” carrier  
(See Figure 6-29). These straps were left connected to the “A” carrier  
when the old “B” carrier was removed.  
7. For a standard AC-powered control carrier, install the 4 carrier ground  
straps. The straps connect ground points G1 and G8 from the top of the  
B-carrier backplane to the B-carrier connector panel bracket and ground  
points G9 and G16 from the bottom of the B-carrier backplane to the  
B-carrier connector panel bracket.  
For an enhanced carrier, install the 16 carrier-ground straps. The straps  
connect ground points G1 through G8 from the top of the B-carrier  
backplane to the B-carrier connector panel and ground points G9 through  
G16 from the bottom of the B-carrier backplane to the B-carrier connector  
panel . Use the 8 screws to connect the ground straps to the connector  
panel (see Figure 6-30).  
NOTE:  
An enhanced carrier is used only in an R8r PPN cabinet that uses  
either AC power (U.S.) or Global power.  
NOTE:  
DC-powered cabinets DO NOT use any of the above carrier-ground  
straps.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-88  
1
2
3
4
P1  
P1  
lcdfgrn2 KLC 022100  
1
G
2
G
/
M
D
L
T
N
A
3
0
0
1
0
2
0
03  
04  
IAC  
I
1
9
G
2
4
3
0
1
G
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
1
1
Figure Notes  
1. Standard AC-powered Carrier  
3. Top Ground Straps  
2. Enhanced Carrier (in R8r PPNs using  
either AC power [U.S.] or Global  
power)  
4. Bottom Ground Straps  
Figure 6-30. Locations of Top and Bottom Ground Straps on Standard and  
Enhanced Carriers  
8. Connect the loose end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “C” and “B”  
carriers) to the pin-field block marked “TDM/LAN” on the right side of the  
“B” carrier (See Figure 6-31 and Table 6-8). The other end remained  
connected to the “C” carrier when the old carrier was removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-89  
TDM/LAN BUS TERMINATOR  
(ZAHF4)  
SLOT 21  
SEE NOTE  
J58890BB  
C
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
SLOT 21  
SLOT 00  
J58890AP-1  
B
CONTROL CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
SLOT 21  
SLOT 01  
J58890AP-1  
A
CONTROL CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L7  
SEE NOTE  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
D
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
TDM/LAN BUS  
TERMINATOR  
(ZAHF4)  
SEE NOTE  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
E
PORT CARRIER  
REAR VIEW  
NOTE:  
ON PORT CARRIER J58890BB-1, CONNECT THE TDM/LAN CABLE OR TDM/LAN TERMINATOR TO  
SLOT 02. ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB-2 AND -3, CONNECT THE TDM/LAN CABLES TO SLOT 01.  
Figure 6-31. TDM/LAN Connections for High-Reliability PPN  
9. Connect the loose end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “A” and “B”  
carriers) to the pin-field block marked “TDM/LAN” on the left side of the  
“B” carrier (See Figure 6-31 and Table 6-8). The other end remained  
connected to the “A” carrier when the old carrier was removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-90  
10. Connect the loose end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “C” and “B”  
carriers) to the pin-field block marked “TDM/LAN” on the right side of the  
“B” carrier (See Figure 6-31 and Table 6-8). The other end remained  
connected to the “C” carrier when the old carrier was removed.  
11. Connect the loose end of the TDM/LAN cable (between the “A” and “B”  
carriers) to the pin-field block marked “TDM/LAN” on the left side of the  
“B” carrier (See Figure 6-31 and Table 6-8). The other end remained  
connected to the “A” carrier when the old carrier was removed.  
Table 6-8. TDM/LAN Connections  
“J” Number  
J58890BB L1  
J58890BB L2  
J58890BB L3  
J58890AP  
Carrier Type  
Port  
LHS Slot  
RHS Slot  
21  
21  
21  
21  
02  
01  
01  
02  
Port  
Port  
Control  
12. Install the alarm duplication cable (H600-198 G1) between carriers “B”  
and “A.” Connect the cable to the “ICCA” pin-field block (to the right of the  
pin-field block for slot “00”) of both carriers. See Figure 6-32. Connect the  
“UAK” (upper) connector to carrier “B,” and connect the “LAK” (lower)  
connector to carrier “A.”  
!
CAUTION:  
While installing the ICC cable connectors, be careful not to bend any  
backplane pins. Double check each connection to verify that the  
pins are straight.  
NOTE:  
With a connector in each hand, flex the wires within the cable’s  
sheath to form a usable C-shaped cable.  
13. Install the ICCC cable (H600-182 G1) between carriers “B” and “A.”  
Connect the cable to the “ICCC” pin-field block (behind slot “01”) of both  
carriers. See Figure 6-32.  
14. Install the duplication cable (WP91954 L1) between carriers “B” and “A.”  
Connect the cable to the “ICCD” pin-field block (behind slot “02”) of both  
carriers. See Figure 6-32.  
NOTE:  
The duplication cable’s connectors are keyed to ensure proper  
positioning on the pin-field block.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-91  
ROW 49  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
ROW 35  
. .  
ICCB  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
ICCA  
ROW 25  
SLOT #  
PX  
ICCD  
ICCC  
TDM/LAN  
CURL  
05  
04  
02  
01  
00  
Figure 6-32. ICC Connections for R8r Control Carrier  
15. Install the front trim plate on the “B” carrier.  
16. Install the new power units into the “B” carrier. The 631DA1 or 644A is  
installed on the left side, while the 631DB1 or 645B and the 649A are  
installed on the right side.  
17. Connect the white power cords to the power units. The power cords are  
equipped with plugs that are run through the slots in the front of each  
carrier.  
Install Circuit Packs  
1. Install a new UN330B Duplication Interface circuit pack into carrier “A.”  
Use the decal as a guide.  
2. Install the new R8r control circuit packs into carrier “B.” Use the new decal  
(provided with the equipment) as a guide.  
3. Install the new TN570B Expansion Interface circuit packs into each port  
network, and (if not duplicating a switch node carrier) interconnect the  
port networks with the fiber optic cables.  
4. For a critical reliability R8r system, install a new TN771D Maintenance/Test  
circuit pack into an available port slot of each EPN (if not already present).  
5. Install circuit pack blanks in slots not equipped with circuit packs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-92  
Relocate Port Carrier B  
Refer to Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability) to relocate the  
removed port carrier.  
Connect Management Terminal or PC  
1. Behind control carrier “A,” disconnect the management terminal or PC  
cable from the “TERM” connector, and reconnect the cable to the “DOT”  
(duplication option terminal) connector.  
Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
1. Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors.  
Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System  
1. If a DEFINITY AUDIX System resides in the PPN or an EPN (where PPN  
port carrier “B” was relocated), reseat the AUDIX assembly to its  
backplane connectors.  
Power Up System  
1. At an EPN (where PPN port carrier “B” was relocated), set the main circuit  
breaker to ON.  
2. At the PPN, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
3. The system performs a level 4 rebooting process, loading the system  
program and default or current translations from the disk. Rebooting takes  
5 to 11 minutes.  
NOTE:  
Ignore alarms for now.  
4. Type the reset system 4 and press Enter to copy the translations from  
removable media to memory.  
5. Clear any alarms.  
6. Type save translation [both] and press Enter if translation changes were  
made in Step 8.  
7. Type restore disk [both] full and press Enter to copy the translations from  
removable media to disk.  
8. Verify that the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO.  
This restores the system to the normal operating mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add a Control Carrier (Add Duplication)  
6
6-93  
Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway.  
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.  
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.  
4. Select Restart System from the Reset System menu.  
Enable SPE Duplication  
1. If not also duplicating switch node carriers, refer to Duplication-Related  
System Parameters in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server  
Release 8 Administrator’s Guide, to enable Switch Processing Element  
(SPE) duplication.  
Enable PNC Duplication  
1. For a critical-reliability R8r system, type change system-parameters  
customer-options and press Enter. Use this screen to enable the Port  
Network Connectivity (PNC) duplication option.  
Resolve Alarms and Enable Alarm Origination  
1. Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
2. If the Alarm Origination Activatedfield administration is already  
set to y, be sure to enable Alarm Origination. Otherwise you do not need to  
enable Alarm Origination (proceed to the next section).  
3. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
The Alarm Origination Activatedfield was changed to Alarm  
Origination to OSS Numbersto support more than 1 OSS.  
4. Type first-only in this field to enable Alarm Origination (to the first OSS,  
which should be INADS).  
Be sure to enter y in both Cleared Alarm Notificationand  
Restart Notificationfields. Press Enter.  
5. Type save translation spe-a disk and press Enter.  
NOTE:  
The INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination as part of  
the registration process.  
!
WARNING:  
If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a  
services contract, the switch will not report any alarm to the TSC  
automatDicoawlnlylo,acdafruomsinWgwwth.SeomTaSnCuatlso.cbome. uAnll MabanleuatlsoSfeualrfcilhl tAhned Dsoewrnvliocaeds. contract.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-94  
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard  
Reliability)  
To upgrade to a standard reliability R8r with Center Stage Switch (CSS), a switch  
node carrier is added either to an empty “E” carrier position of an existing  
multicarrier port network or to the “D” carrier position.  
NOTE:  
To avoid moving a port carrier, the preferred practice is to place the new  
switch node carrier in an empty carrier position.  
Service Interruption  
1. Since the addition of the switch node carrier requires a service  
interruption, notify the customer in advance as to when the addition will  
take place.  
Verify System Status  
1. Before proceeding, examine the system for alarms and correct all  
problems. The system must be alarm-free.  
Disable Alarm Origination  
1. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
2. Make a note of the Alarm Origination Activatedfield  
administration. If the feature is enabled, type n in this field to disable  
Alarm Origination.  
!
WARNING:  
If you do not disable Alarm Origination before making changes to the  
switch, the switch may generate alarms, resulting in unnecessary  
trouble tickets. Reducing redundant and unnecessary trouble  
tickets.  
NOTE:  
For some releases of the software, disable Cleared Alarm  
Notificationand Restart Notificationfields before  
submitting the form.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-95  
Save Translations  
1. Log in at the management terminal.  
2. Type save translation disk and press Enter. This instructs the system to  
take all translation information in memory and write it to the disk.  
3. If the system contains a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack, type  
display announcements and press Enter.  
4. If administered recorded announcements are listed, type list  
configuration software-version and press Enter. Check screen 2 to find  
out when the announcements were last saved. Save the current  
announcements by typing save announcements disk and pressing Enter.  
5. Type backup disk and press Enter. This instructs the system to backup the  
current information on disk to the system tape(s).  
6. Update backup tape(s), if required.  
Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in the control cabinet to be  
upgraded, prepare to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and  
allow the disk to completely spin down.  
!
CAUTION:  
Make sure that you save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the  
current system.  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before  
powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN  
Gateway disk.  
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. See the DEFINITY Communications  
System Generic 3 Installation, Administration and Maintenance of  
CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway.  
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.  
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.  
4. Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu.  
5. Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System  
1. Shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin  
down. Refer to ‘‘DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures’’ on page 6-141.  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down  
the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk.  
2. Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors.  
Power Down Cabinet  
1. At the cabinet that is receiving the new switch node carrier, set the main  
circuit breaker to OFF.  
Remove Doors  
1. Remove the front and rear doors from the cabinet where the switch node  
carrier will be installed.  
Disconnect Ground Cables  
Skip these steps if a switch node carrier is being added to an empty carrier  
position.  
1. Label the ground cables associated with the port carrier to be removed.  
2. Disconnect the ground cables from the top of the port carrier to be  
removed. Allow the cables to hang down for now.  
Remove Circuit Packs from Port Carrier D  
Skip these steps if a switch node carrier is being added to an empty carrier  
position.  
1. To ensure that circuit packs and power units in the “D” carrier are properly  
replaced, label each component with its slot number.  
2. Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the “D” carrier.  
3. Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier “D.” Store the circuit  
packs in static-proof packaging.  
4. Remove the circuit pack blanks from slots that do not contain circuit  
packs.  
5. Remove the front trim plate from the “D” carrier by pulling it straight off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-97  
Remove Port Carrier D  
Skip these steps if a switch node carrier is being added to an empty carrier  
position.  
NOTE:  
Note the position of the TDM/LAN cables before disconnecting.  
1. If a switch node carrier is being installed in the “D” position of an EPN,  
remove the TDM/LAN cable from between the “D” and “A” carriers.  
For other EPNs or the PPN, disconnect 1 end of the TDM/LAN cable  
(between the “D” and “A” carriers) from the “D” carrier.  
2. Remove the ZAHF4 TDM/LAN bus terminator from slot “21” of the “D”  
carrier.  
3. Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps (between the “D” and “E”  
carriers) from the “D” carrier (See Figure 6-33). These straps will be  
reconnected to the new “D” carrier.  
4. Disconnect the 8 ground straps from the "D" carrier (between the “D” and  
“A” carriers or the "D"carrier and the enhanced fan unit—see Figure 6-33).  
Reconnect the 8 ground straps to the "D" carrier.  
5. Disconnect the “P1” (small 9-pin) connector from the “D” carrier. Move the  
cable into a position where it will not interfere with removing the carrier.  
6. Remove the 4 screws (top 2 first) holding the “D” carrier to the cabinet  
frame. Use a long-handle screwdriver or 5/16-inch socket with a 10-inch  
extension.  
7. Behind the “D” carrier in a “DEFINITY style” cabinet, remove the 2 screws  
holding the “D” carrier to the cabinet frame.  
8. Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches; then, from the back, be sure that no  
cables or wiring harnesses are caught on the cabinet/carrier framework.  
!
CAUTION:  
Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the  
framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the  
carrier.  
9. Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-98  
1
1
P1  
P1  
2
2
2
P2  
P2  
P1  
3
3
P1  
2
4
4
5
P1  
P1  
5
P1  
P1  
6
7
Figure Notes  
1. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
2. Ground Jumpers  
4. Switch Node Carrier (“D” Position)  
5. Switch Node Carrier (“E” Position)  
3. Control Carrier (“A” Position) 6. Cabinet with standard fan unit and carrier  
7. Cabinet with enhanced fan unit and  
enhanced carrier  
Figure 6-33. Locations of Ground Jumpers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-99  
Prepare New Switch Node Carrier D  
1. Visually inspect the new J58890SA Switch Node Carrier for any damage.  
Verify that the backplane pins are not bent.  
NOTE:  
The enhanced R8r PPN AC carrier may look different than the other  
carriers because it comes with 16 new grounding jumpers and 8  
mounting screws.  
2. Place the switch node carrier on the floor so that the rear of the carrier  
faces up.  
3. Verify that the four AHF105 switch node (SN) bus terminators are installed  
on the “D” carrier to the pin-field blocks marked “SNTRM” (top and bottom  
portions of slots “02” and “20”). See Figure 6-34. The SN bus terminators  
attach with the components on the left side as viewed from the rear.  
4. At the rear connector panel, determine which connectors will have a cable  
attached, and install a 4C cable retainer on each of these connectors.  
ROW 49  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
ROW 35  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
ROW 25  
SNITRM1  
TDM/LAN  
TDM/LAN  
04  
03  
02  
01  
00  
SLOT #  
ROW 24  
S.NI.TR.M.2  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
Figure 6-34. ICC Connections for Switch Node Carrier  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-100  
Install New Switch Node Carrier  
1. Install the switch node carrier into position “D” by lining up the plastic  
alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in the  
cabinet. These alignment tips support the carrier while the screws are  
being replaced. Ensure that the power cords are properly placed in the  
slots at the sides of the carrier.  
2. Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self-tapping screws.  
!
CAUTION:  
Carefully realign the threads on the self-tapping screws by turning  
them clockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid stripping the  
threads out of the framework.  
3. Behind the carrier, replace the 2 screws saved from the removal of the old  
carrier.  
4. Connect the “P1” (small) connector to the “D” carrier. If necessary, to get  
enough slack in the cables, cut the tie wrap holding the intercabinet cable  
from the upright in the area being installed. Snap the connector lock into  
place to ensure the connection is properly made.  
5. Connect the 8 ground straps from either the “A” carrier or the enhanced  
fan unit to the new "D" carrier. See Figure 6-33. These straps were left  
connected when the old “D” carrier was removed.  
6. Connect the 8 ground straps from the “E” carrier (if installed) to the new  
“D” carrier. See Figure 6-33. These straps were left connected to the “E”  
carrier when the old “D” carrier was removed.  
7. For a standard AC-powered control carrier, install the 4 carrier ground  
straps. The straps connect ground points G1 and G8 from the top of the  
B-carrier backplane to the B-carrier connector panel bracket and ground  
points G9 and G16 from the bottom of the B-carrier backplane to the  
B-carrier connector panel bracket.  
For an enhanced carrier, install the 16 carrier-ground straps. The straps  
connect ground points G1 through G8 from the top of the B-carrier  
backplane to the B-carrier connector panel and ground points G9 through  
G16 from the bottom of the B-carrier backplane to the B-carrier connector  
panel . Use the 8 screws to connect the ground straps to the connector  
panel (see Figure 6-35).  
NOTE:  
An enhanced carrier is used only in an R8r PPN cabinet that uses  
either AC power (U.S.) or Global power.  
NOTE:  
DC-powered cabinets DO NOT use any of the above carrier-ground  
sDtroawpnslo.ad from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-101  
1
2
3
4
P1  
P1  
lcdfgrn2 KLC 022100  
1
G
2
G
/
M
D
L
T
N
A
3
0
0
1
0
2
0
03  
04  
IAC  
I
1
9
G
2
4
3
0
1
G
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
1
1
Figure Notes  
1. Standard AC-powered Carrier  
3. Top Ground Straps  
2. Enhanced Carrier (in R8r PPNs using  
either AC power [U.S.] or Global  
power)  
4. Bottom Ground Straps  
Figure 6-35. Locations of Top and Bottom Ground Straps on Standard and  
Enhanced Carriers  
8. If the switch node carrier was installed in the “D” position of the PPN,  
install the TDM/LAN cable (between the “A” and “D” carriers) to the  
pin-field block labeled “TDM/LAN” on the right side of both carriers. See  
Figure 6-36 and Table 6-9.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-102  
9. If a switch node carrier was installed in the “D” position, verify that the  
ZAHF4 TDM/LAN bus terminator is installed at slot 02 of the switch node  
carrier “D”. See Figure 6-36.  
If a switch node carrier is being installed in the “E” position, verify that the  
ZAHF4 TDM/LAN bus terminator is installed at slot 21.  
10. Install the front trim plates on the “D” carrier.  
11. Install the new power units into the “D” carrier. Install a 649A on the left  
and right sides of the carrier.  
12. Connect the power cords to the power units. The power cords are the  
white cables equipped with plugs that are run through the slots in the front  
of each carrier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-103  
Figure Notes  
1. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
2. Port Carrier (“B” Position)  
3. Processor Carrier (“A” Position)  
4. Switch Node Carrier (“D” Position)  
5. TDM/LAN Bus Terminator (ZAHF4)  
6. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716 L7)  
Figure 6-36. TDM/LAN Connections for Standard Reliability R8r EPN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-104  
Table 6-9. TDM/LAN Connections  
“J” Number  
J58890BB L1  
J58890BB L2  
J58890BB L3  
J58890AP  
Carrier Type  
Port  
LHS Slot  
RHS Slot  
21  
21  
21  
21  
02  
01  
01  
02  
Port  
Port  
Control  
Install Circuit Packs  
1. Install the new circuit packs into carrier “D.” Use the decal and the  
upgrade configuration document (provided with the equipment) as a  
guide.  
2. Install circuit pack blanks in slots not equipped with circuit packs.  
Interconnect Port Networks  
1. Behind the cabinet containing the switch node carrier (See Figure 6-37):  
a. Connect the metallic intracarrier cable (H600-278) to slots 1D01  
and 1D02.  
2. Behind switch node carrier D of PPN cabinet 1 (See Figure 6-37):  
a. For each EPN, install 1 lightwave transceiver on a cable connector  
with the following order of slots: 1D20, 1D03, 1D19, 1D04, 1D18,  
1D05, and so forth.  
b. Connect 1 end of a fiber optic cable to each lightwave transceiver,  
just installed.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cables (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable-tie positions.  
3. Behind processor carrier A of each EPN cabinet:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1A01.  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed, at slot A01.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable-tie positions.  
d. Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable, and carefully attach  
the coil to the wall of the cable tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-105  
4. Behind port carrier B of each EPN cabinet:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on cable connector at slot 1B02.  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable-tie positions.  
d. Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable, and carefully attach  
the coil to the wall of the cable tray.  
REAR VIEW  
REAR VIEW  
PORT CARRIER - J58890BB  
PORT CARRIER - J58890BB  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
C
B
A
C
B
A
CONTROL CARRIER - J58890AP  
PORT CARRIER - J58890BB  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
CLOCK  
AUX  
TERMINAL  
TERMINAL  
9
8
1
TO CABINET 1, D3-D20  
BOTH CONNECTIONS FROM EACH  
EPN MUST GO TO THE SAME  
SLOT NUMBER (E.G. EPN  
CABINET 2, 2A1 TO 1E3 AND  
AND CABINET 2, 2B2 TO 1D3).  
CONTROL CARRIER - J58890AP  
EXPANSION CONTROL CARRIER - J58890AF  
CLOCK  
AUX  
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
AUX TERM  
TO CABINET 1, E3-E20  
FAN  
FAN  
FAN  
FAN  
FAN  
FAN  
SWITCH NODE CARRIER - J58890SA  
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13  
PORT CARRIER - J58890BB  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D
E
D
E
H600-278  
TO CABINET 2 THRU 16, B2  
ADD IN ALTERNATING  
ORDER: 20, 3, 19, 4,  
18, 5, ETC.  
PORT CARRIER - J58890BB  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
SWITCH NODE CARRIER - J58890SA  
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13  
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3 2 1  
H600-278  
TO CABINET 2 THRU 16, A1  
ADD IN ALTERNATING  
ORDER: 20, 3, 19, 4,  
18, 5, ETC.  
POWER DISTRIBUTION  
UNIT  
POWER DISTRIBUTION  
UNIT  
CABINET 2 THRU 16  
EPN  
CABINET 1  
PPN W/ONE DUPLEX SWITCH NODE  
Figure 6-37. Critical-Reliability Fiber-Optic Connections through Center Stage Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-106  
Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
1. Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors.  
Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System  
1. Reseat the AUDIX assembly to its backplane connectors.  
Power Up System  
1. At the cabinet containing the new switch node carrier, set the main circuit  
breaker to ON.  
2. The system performs the level 4 rebooting process, loading the system  
program and default or current translations from the disk. Rebooting takes  
5 to 11 minutes.  
NOTE:  
Ignore alarms for now.  
3. Type reset system 4 and press Enter to copy the translations from  
removable media to memory.  
4. Clear any alarms.  
5. Type save translation and press Enter if translation changes were made in  
Step 7 above.  
6. Type restore disk full and press Enter to copy the translations from  
removable media to disk.  
7. After the system reboot is finished and all trouble cleared, verify that the  
EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO. This restores  
the system to the normal operating mode.  
Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway.  
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.  
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.  
4. Select Restart System from the Reset System menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (Standard Reliability)  
6-107  
Resolve Alarms and Enable Alarm Origination  
1. Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
2. If the Alarm Origination Activated field administration that you  
previously noted is already set to y, be sure to enable Alarm Origination.  
Otherwise you do not need to enable Alarm Origination (proceed to the  
next section).  
3. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
The name of the Alarm Origination Activatedfield was changed to  
Alarm Origination to OSS Numbersto support more than 1 OSS.  
4. Type first-only in this field to enable Alarm Origination (to the first OSS,  
which should be INADS).  
Be sure to type y in both Cleared Alarm Notificationand Restart  
Notificationfields. Press Enter.  
5. Type save translation disk and press Enter.  
If you have lost the previous administration of the Alarm Origination  
field, you may register the system again with the INADS Database  
Administrator at the TSC. The INADS Administrator enables Alarm  
Origination as part of the registration process.  
!
WARNING:  
If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has  
purchased a services contract, the switch will not report any alarm to  
the TSC automatically, causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the  
services contract.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-108  
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or  
Critical Reliability)  
To upgrade to a high or critical reliability R8r, a second switch node carrier is  
added either to an empty “E” carrier position of an existing multicarrier port  
network or to the “D” carrier position (as the duplicate switch node carrier) of an  
existing multicarrier cabinet.  
NOTE:  
To avoid moving a port carrier, the preferred practice is to place the new  
switch node carrier in an empty carrier position.  
Service Interruption  
1. Since the addition of the second switch node carrier requires a service  
interruption, notify the customer in advance as to when the addition will be  
carried out.  
Verify System Status  
1. Before proceeding, the system should be examined for alarms, and every  
problem should be corrected. The system must be alarm-free.  
Disable Alarm Origination  
1. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
2. Make a note of the Alarm Origination Activatedfield  
administration. If the feature is enabled, type n in this field and press Enter  
to disable Alarm Origination.  
!
WARNING:  
If you do not disable Alarm Origination before making changes to the  
switch, the switch may generate alarms, resulting in unnecessary  
trouble tickets. Reducing redundant and unnecessary trouble  
tickets.  
NOTE:  
For some releases of the system software, you may also need to  
disable Cleared Alarm Notificationand Restart  
Notificationfields before submitting the form.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-109  
Save Translations  
1. Log in at the management terminal.  
2. If the system is high- or critical-reliability, type status spe and press Enter  
to verify that the standby SPE is refreshed and that the standby disk is in  
service.  
3. Type save translation [spe-a or both] disk and press Enter. This  
command instructs the system to take all translation information in  
memory and write it to the disk(s).  
4. If the system contains a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack, type  
display announcements and press Enter.  
5. If administered recorded announcements are listed, type list  
configuration software-version and press Enter. Check screen 2 to find  
out when the announcements were last saved. Save the current  
announcements by typing save announcements disk and pressing Enter.  
6. Type backup disk [spe-a or both] and press Enter. This instructs the  
system to backup the current information on disk to the system tape(s).  
7. Update backup tape(s), if required.  
Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in the control cabinet to be  
upgraded, prepare to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and  
allow the disk to completely spin down.  
!
CAUTION:  
Make sure that you save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the  
current system.  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before  
powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN  
Gateway disk.  
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. See the DEFINITY Communications  
System Generic 3 Installation, Administration and Maintenance of  
CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway.  
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.  
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.  
4. Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu.  
5. Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System  
1. Shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin  
down. Refer to ‘‘DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures’’ on page 6-141.  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down  
the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk.  
2. Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors.  
Power Down System  
1. At the PPN, set the main circuit breaker to OFF.  
Remove Doors and Panels and Disconnect Cables  
1. Remove the front door from the multicarrier cabinet where the switch node  
carrier will be installed.  
2. With the cable retainer in front of you and the part number visible, locate  
the slot that is almost vertical. (This slot is adjacent to the part number.)  
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver with a wide blade (1/4-inch recommended)  
into the slot, and twist the screwdriver. The retainer will snap open easily  
so that the cable can be removed.  
3. At the cabinet, disconnect the previously labeled cables associated with  
the carrier to be removed.  
4. Remove the rear doors from the cabinet.  
Remove Circuit Packs from Port Carrier D  
NOTE:  
Skip these steps if a switch node carrier is being added to an empty carrier  
position.  
1. To ensure that circuit packs and power units in the “D” carrier are properly  
replaced, label each component with its slot number.  
2. Disconnect the power cords from the power units in the “D” carrier.  
3. Remove all circuit packs and power units from carrier “D.” Store the circuit  
packs in the static-proof packaging.  
4. Remove the circuit pack blanks from slots that do not contain circuit  
packs.  
5. Remove the front trim plate from the “D” carrier by pulling it straight off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-111  
Remove Port Carrier D  
NOTE:  
Note the position of the TDM/LAN cables before disconnecting.  
1. If a switch node carrier is being installed in the “D” position of an EPN,  
remove the TDM/LAN cable from between the “D” and “A” carriers.  
For other EPNs or the PPN, disconnect 1 end of the TDM/LAN cable  
(between the “D” and “A” carriers) from the “D” carrier.  
2. Remove the ZAHF4 TDM/LAN bus terminator from slot “21” of the “D”  
carrier.  
3. Disconnect 1 end of the 8 ground straps (between the “D” and “E”  
carriers) from the “D” carrier (See Figure 6-38). These straps will be  
reconnected to the new “D” carrier.  
4. Disconnect the 8 ground straps from the "D" carrier (between the “D” and  
“A” carriers or the "D"carrier and the enhanced fan unit—see Figure 6-38).  
Reconnect the 8 ground straps to the "D" carrier.  
5. Disconnect the “P1” (small 9-pin) connector from the “D” carrier. Move the  
cable into a position where it will not interfere with removing the carrier.  
6. Remove the 4 screws (top 2 first) holding the “D” carrier to the cabinet  
frame. Use a long-handle screwdriver or 5/16-inch socket with a 10-inch  
extension.  
7. Behind the “D” carrier in a “DEFINITY style” cabinet, remove the 2 screws  
holding the “D” carrier to the cabinet frame.  
8. Slide the carrier forward 1 to 2 inches; then, from the back, be sure that no  
cables or wiring harnesses are caught on the cabinet/carrier framework.  
!
CAUTION:  
Cables and wiring harnesses can be damaged if they catch on the  
framework and if too much pressure is applied in removing the  
carrier.  
9. Remove the carrier by sliding it out the front of the cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-112  
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
2
4
5
4
5
6
7
Figure Notes  
1. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
4. Switch Node Carrier (“D” Position)  
5. Switch Node Carrier (“E” Position)  
2. Ground Jumpers  
3. Control Carrier (“A” Position) 6. Cabinet with standard fan unit and carrier  
7. Cabinet with enhanced fan unit and  
enhanced carrier  
Figure 6-38. Locations of Ground Jumpers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-113  
Prepare New Switch Node Carrier D  
1. Visually inspect the new carrier for any damage. Verify that the backplane  
pins are not bent.  
2. Place the switch node carrier on the floor so that the rear of the carrier  
faces up.  
3. Verify that the four AHF105 switch node (SN) bus terminators are installed  
on the “D” carrier to the pin-field blocks marked “SNTRM” (top and bottom  
portions of slots “02” and “20”). See Figure 6-39. The SN bus terminators  
are attached with the components on the left side as viewed from the rear.  
4. At the rear connector panel, determine which connectors will have a cable  
attached, and install a 4C cable retainer on each of these connectors.  
ROW 49  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
ROW 35  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
ROW 25  
SNITRM1  
TDM/LAN  
TDM/LAN  
04  
03  
02  
01  
00  
SLOT #  
ROW 24  
S.NI.TR.M.2  
. . . .  
. . . .  
. . . .  
Figure 6-39. ICC Connections for Switch Node Carrier  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-114  
Install New Switch Node Carrier D  
1. Install the J58890SA switch node carrier in position “D” by lining up the  
plastic alignment tips on the top rear of the carrier with the screw holes in  
the cabinet. These alignment tips will support the carrier while the screws  
are being replaced. Ensure that the power cords are properly placed in  
the slots at the sides of the carrier.  
2. Fasten the carrier into position with 4 self-tapping screws saved from the  
removal of the old carrier.  
!
CAUTION:  
Carefully realign the threads on the self-tapping screws by turning  
them clockwise 1 turn before tightening them to avoid stripping the  
threads out of the framework.  
3. Behind the carrier in a “DEFINITY style” cabinet, replace the 2 screws  
saved from the removal of the old carrier.  
4. Connect the “P1” (small) connector to the “D” carrier. If necessary, to get  
enough slack in the cables, cut the tie wrap holding the intercabinet cable  
from the upright in the area being installed. Snap the connector lock into  
place to ensure the connection is properly made.  
5. Connect the 8 ground straps from either the “A” carrier or the enhanced  
fan unit to the new "D" carrier. See Figure 6-38. These straps were left  
connected when the old “D” carrier was removed.  
6. Connect the 8 ground straps from the “E” carrier (if installed) to the new  
“D” carrier. See Figure 6-38. These straps were left connected to the “E”  
carrier when the old “D” carrier was removed.  
7. For a standard AC-powered control carrier, install the 4 carrier ground  
straps. The straps connect ground points G1 and G8 from the top of the  
B-carrier backplane to the B-carrier connector panel bracket and ground  
points G9 and G16 from the bottom of the B-carrier backplane to the  
B-carrier connector panel bracket.  
For an enhanced carrier, install the 16 carrier-ground straps. The straps  
connect ground points G1 through G8 from the top of the B-carrier  
backplane to the B-carrier connector panel and ground points G9 through  
G16 from the bottom of the B-carrier backplane to the B-carrier connector  
panel . Use the 8 screws to connect the ground straps to the connector  
panel (see Figure 6-40).  
NOTE:  
An enhanced carrier is used only in an R8r PPN cabinet that uses  
either AC power (U.S.) or Global power.  
NOTE:  
DC-powered cabinets DO NOT use any of the above carrier-ground  
straps.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-115  
1
2
3
4
P1  
P1  
lcdfgrn2 KLC 022100  
1
G
2
G
/
M
D
L
T
N
A
3
0
0
1
0
2
0
03  
04  
IAC  
I
1
9
G
2
4
3
0
1
G
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
1
1
Figure Notes  
1. Standard AC-powered Carrier  
3. Top Ground Straps  
2. Enhanced Carrier (in R8r PPNs using  
either AC power [U.S.] or Global  
power)  
4. Bottom Ground Straps  
Figure 6-40. Locations of Top and Bottom Ground Straps on Standard and  
Enhanced Carriers  
8. If a switch node carrier is being installed in the “D” position of the PPN,  
install the TDM/LAN cable (between the “E” and “D” carriers) to the  
pin-field block marked “TDM/LAN” on the right side of both carriers. See  
Figure 6-41 and Table 6-10.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-116  
9. Also, for the PPN, connect the loose end of the TDM/LAN cable (between  
the “A” and “D” carriers) to the other pin-field block marked “TDM/LAN” on  
the right side of the “D” carrier. See Figure 6-41 and Table 6-10. The other  
end remained connected to the “A” carrier when the old carrier was  
removed.  
TDM/LAN BUS TERMINATOR  
(ZAHF4)  
SEE NOTE  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
C POSITION  
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
ICCB  
ICCA  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
B POSITION  
SEE NOTE  
PORT CARRIER  
INTERCARRIER  
CABLES A AND B  
H600-204 G1  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
SLOT 21  
J58890AF-1  
A POSITION  
EXPANSION  
CONTROL  
CARRIER  
ICCB  
ICCA  
TDM/LAN BUS  
TERMINATOR  
(ZAHF4)  
J58890SA-1  
D POSITION  
SLOT 01  
SWITCH NODE CARRIER  
SLOT 01  
J58890SA-1  
E POSITION  
SWITCH NODE CARRIER  
REAR VIEW  
NOTE:  
ON PORT CARRIER J68890BB-1, CONNECT TDM/LAN CABLE OR TDM/LAN TERMINATOR TO SLOT 02.  
ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB-2 AND -3, CONNECT THE TDM/LAN CABLE OR TDM/LAN TERMINATOR  
TO SLOT 1.  
Figure 6-41. TDM/LAN Connections for Critical Reliability R8r EPN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-117  
TDM/LAN BUS TERMINATOR  
(ZAHF4)  
SEE NOTE  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
C POSITION  
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
ICCD  
ICCC  
SLOT 21  
J58890AP-1  
B POSITION  
CONTROL CARRIER  
INTERCARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
CABLES C AND D  
H600-182 AND WP-91954  
SLOT 21  
J58890AP-1  
A POSITION  
ICCD  
CONTROL  
CARRIER  
ICCC  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L7  
J58890SA-1  
D POSITION  
SLOT 01  
SWITCH NODE CARRIER  
TDM/LAN BUS  
TERMINATOR  
(ZAHF4)  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
SLOT 01  
J58890SA-1  
E POSITION  
SWITCH NODE CARRIER  
REAR VIEW  
NOTE:  
ON PORT CARRIER J68890BB-1, CONNECT TDM/LAN CABLE OR TDM/LAN TERMINATOR TO SLOT 02.  
ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB-2 AND -3, CONNECT THE TDM/LAN CABLE OR TDM/LAN TERMINATOR  
TO SLOT 1.  
Figure 6-42. TDM/LAN Connections for Critical Reliability R8r PPN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-118  
Table 6-10. TDM/LAN Connections  
“J” Number  
J58890BB L1  
J58890BB L2  
J58890BB L3  
J58890AP  
Carrier Type  
Port  
LHS Slot  
RHS Slot  
21  
21  
21  
21  
02  
01  
01  
02  
Port  
Port  
Control  
10. If a switch node carrier is being installed in the “D” position of an EPN,  
verify that the ZAHF4 TDM/LAN bus terminator is installed at slot “02” of  
expansion control carrier “A”. See Figure 6-42.  
If a switch node carrier is being installed in the “E” position of an EPN,  
verify that the ZAHF4 TDM/LAN bus terminator is installed at slot “21” of  
port carrier “D.”  
For a PPN, install the ZAHF4 TDM/LAN bus terminator at slot “01” of switch  
node carrier “E.”  
11. Install the front trim plates on the “D” carrier.  
12. Install the new power units into the carrier. One 649A is installed on the left  
and right sides of the carrier.  
13. Connect the power cords to the power units. The power cords are the  
white cables equipped with plugs that are run through the slots in the front  
of each carrier.  
Install Circuit Packs  
1. Install the new circuit packs into carrier “D.” Use the decal and the  
upgrade configuration document (provided with the equipment) as a  
guide.  
2. Install circuit pack blanks in slots not equipped with circuit packs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-119  
Interconnect Port Networks  
1. Behind the PPN cabinet (See Figure 6-37):  
a. Connect the metallic intracarrier cable between slots 1E01 and  
1E02.  
b. Connect the metallic intracarrier cable between slots 1D01 and  
1D02.  
2. Behind switch node carrier E of PPN cabinet 1 (See Figure 6-37):  
a. For each EPN, install one 9823-type lightwave transceiver on the  
following order of slots: 1E20, 1E03, 1E19, 1E04, 1E18, 1E05, and  
so forth.  
b. Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave  
transceiver, just installed.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cables (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable-tie positions.  
3. Behind control carrier A of each EPN cabinet:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on slot A01.  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable-tie positions.  
d. Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable, and carefully attach  
the coil to the wall of the cable tray.  
4. Behind switch node carrier D of PPN cabinet 1 (See Figure 6-37):  
a. For each EPN, install a lightwave transceiver on the following order  
of slots: 1E20, 1E03, 1E19, 1E04, 1E18, 1E05, and so forth.  
b. Connect 1 end of each fiber optic cable to each lightwave  
transceiver, just installed.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cables (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable-tie positions.  
5. Behind port carrier B of each EPN cabinet:  
a. Install a lightwave transceiver on slot B02.  
b. Connect the other end of the fiber optic cable to the lightwave  
transceiver, just installed.  
c. Carefully attach the fiber optic cable (with cable ties) to the wall of  
the cable tray at the built-in cable-tie positions.  
d. Coil up the surplus length of fiber optic cable, and carefully attach  
the coil to the wall of the cable tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-120  
REAR VIEW  
REAR VIEW  
PORT CARRIER - J58890BB  
PORT CARRIER - J58890BB  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
C
B
A
C
B
A
CONTROL CARRIER - J58890AP  
PORT CARRIER - J58890BB  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
CLOCK  
AUX  
TERMINAL  
TERMINAL  
9
8
1
TO CABINET 1, D3-D20  
BOTH CONNECTIONS FROM EACH  
EPN MUST GO TO THE SAME  
SLOT NUMBER (E.G. EPN  
CABINET 2, 2A1 TO 1E3 AND  
AND CABINET 2, 2B2 TO 1D3).  
CONTROL CARRIER - J58890AP  
EXPANSION CONTROL CARRIER - J58890AF  
CLOCK  
AUX  
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
AUX TERM  
TO CABINET 1, E3-E20  
FAN  
FAN  
FAN  
FAN  
FAN  
FAN  
SWITCH NODE CARRIER - J58890SA  
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13  
PORT CARRIER - J58890BB  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D
E
D
E
H600-278  
TO CABINET 2 THRU 16, B2  
ADD IN ALTERNATING  
ORDER: 20, 3, 19, 4,  
18, 5, ETC.  
PORT CARRIER - J58890BB  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
SWITCH NODE CARRIER - J58890SA  
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13  
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3 2 1  
H600-278  
TO CABINET 2 THRU 16, A1  
ADD IN ALTERNATING  
ORDER: 20, 3, 19, 4,  
18, 5, ETC.  
POWER DISTRIBUTION  
UNIT  
POWER DISTRIBUTION  
UNIT  
CABINET 2 THRU 16  
EPN  
CABINET 1  
PPN W/ONE DUPLEX SWITCH NODE  
Figure 6-43. Critical-Reliability Fiber-Optic Connections through Center Stage Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-121  
Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
1. Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors.  
Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System  
1. Reseat the AUDIX assembly to its backplane connectors.  
Power Up System  
1. At each EPN, if present, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
2. At the PPN, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
3. The system performs the level 4 rebooting process, loading the system  
program and default or current translations from the disk. Rebooting takes  
5 to 11 minutes.  
NOTE:  
Ignore alarms for now.  
4. Type reset system 4 and press Enter to copy the translations from  
removable media to memory.  
5. Clear any alarms.  
6. Type save translation [both] and press Enter if translation changes were  
made in Step 8 above.  
7. Type restore disk [both] full and press Enter to copy the translations from  
removable media to disk.  
8. After the system reboot is finished and all trouble cleared, verify that the  
EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO. This restores  
the system to the normal operating mode.  
Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway.  
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.  
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.  
4. Select Restart System from the Reset System menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Add a Switch Node Carrier (High or Critical Reliability)  
6-122  
Enable PNC Duplication  
All non-duplicated SNIs to SNI fiber links are automatically duplicated.  
1. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter. On  
screen 2, set the PNC Duplication?field to yes. Press Enter.  
2. Type change system-parameters duplication and press Enter. Change  
the Enable operation of PNC duplication?field to yes. Press  
Enter.  
3. Type status pnc and press Enter. Verify the Duplicated ?field is yes.  
Resolve Alarms and Enable Alarm Origination  
1. Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
2. If the Alarm Origination Activated field administration that you  
previously noted is already set to y, be sure to enable Alarm Origination.  
Otherwise you do not need to enable Alarm Origination (proceed to the  
next section).  
3. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
The name of the Alarm Origination Activatedfield was changed to  
Alarm Origination to OSS Numbersto support more than 1 OSS.  
4. Type first-only in this field to enable Alarm Origination (to the first OSS,  
which should be INADS).  
Be sure to type y in both Cleared Alarm Notificationand Restart  
Notificationfields if they are not enabled already. Press Enter.  
5. Type save translation [spe-a or both] disk and press Enter.  
If you have lost the previous administration of the Alarm Origination  
field, you may register the system again with the INADS Database  
Administrator at the TSC. The INADS Administrator enables Alarm  
Origination as part of the registration process.  
!
WARNING:  
If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has  
purchased a services contract, the switch will not report any alarm to  
the TSC automatically, causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the  
services contract.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add Center Stage Switch  
6
6-123  
Add Center Stage Switch  
Because of the numerous installation possibilities for center stage switches, this  
section is intended to provide general installation procedures only. For exact  
requirements per site, contact your Lucent Technologies representative.  
The center stage switch (CSS) is comprised of 1, 2, or 3 switch nodes (SNs).  
Each SN consists of a switch node carrier (SNC), or 2 SNCs for high reliability.  
Each SNC supports up to 16 switch node interface (SNI) circuit packs and up to  
16 EPNs. Connections between the CSS and PNs, and between SNs within the  
CSS, are generally made with fiber optic links. Figure 6-44 shows 1 switch node  
used as a center stage switch for 11 EPNs.  
1
2
3
4
cydfpbx3 RPY 081897  
Figure Notes  
1. Switch Node 1  
2. PPN Cabinet  
3. EPN Cabinet 1  
4. EPN Cabinet 11  
Figure 6-44. Single Switch Node CSS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add Center Stage Switch  
6
6-124  
Figure 6-45 shows 2 SNs used as a CSS for up to 23 EPNs. Use this configuration  
when high inter-SN traffic is expected.  
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
cydfpbx1 RPY 081897  
Figure Notes  
1. Switch Node (SN) 1  
2. Switch Node 2  
3. PPN Cabinet  
5. EPN Cabinet 11  
6. EPN Cabinet 12  
7. EPN Cabinet 23  
4. EPN Cabinet 1  
8. Inter-SN Connection (4 fibers)  
Figure 6-45. 2-Switch Node CSS with High Inter-SN Traffic  
Fiber Engineering for 2 SNs  
Switches with 2 SNs are connected by 1 to 7 fiber links to provide sufficient  
switching fabric at the CSS. The traffic in all locales within a single SN does not  
require engineering. Only traffic that links from locales in 1 SN to the other SN  
(and vice versa) must be engineered. The traffic that links across these fibers is  
simply the sum of the traffic that links to locales located in the other SN.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add Center Stage Switch  
6
6-125  
Figure 6-46 shows 2 SNs used as a CSS for up to 29 EPNs. Use this configuration  
when low inter-SN traffic is expected.  
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
cydfpbx1 RPY 081897  
Figure Notes  
1. Switch Node (SN) 1  
2. Switch Node 2  
3. PPN Cabinet  
5. EPN Cabinet 14  
6. EPN Cabinet 15  
7. EPN Cabinet 29  
4. EPN Cabinet 1  
8. Inter-SN Connection (1 fiber)  
Figure 6-46. 2-SN CSS with Low Inter-SN Traffic  
Fiber Engineering for 2 SNs  
Switches with 2 SNs are connected by 1 to 7 fiber links to provide sufficient  
switching fabric at the CSS. The traffic in all locales within a single SN does not  
require engineering. Only traffic that links from locales in 1 SN to the other SN  
(and vice versa) must be engineered. The traffic that links across these fibers is  
simply the sum of the traffic that links to locales located in the other SN.  
Figure 6-47 shows 3 SNs used as a CSS for up to 31 EPNs. Use this configuration  
when high inter-SN traffic is expected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add Center Stage Switch  
6
6-126  
4
5
6
7
7
1
10  
2
3
12  
11  
9
8
cydfpbx2 RPY 081897  
Figure Notes  
1. Switch Node (SN) 1  
2. Switch Node 2  
3. Switch Node 3  
4. PPN Cabinet  
7. Inter-SN Connections (3 fibers)  
8. EPN Cabinet 10  
9. EPN Cabinet 20  
10. Inter-SN Connection (2 fibers)  
11. EPN Cabinet 21  
5. EPN Cabinet 1  
6. EPN Cabinet 9  
12. EPN Cabinet 31  
Figure 6-47. 3-SN CSS with High Inter-SN Traffic  
Fiber Engineering for 3 SNs  
Switches with 3 SNs are connected by 1 to 7 fiber links to provide sufficient  
switching fabric at the CSS. The traffic in all locales within a single SN does not  
require engineering. Only traffic that links from locales in 1 SN to another SN (and  
vice versa) must be engineered. The traffic that links across these fibers is simply  
the sum of the traffic that links to locales located in the other SN.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add Center Stage Switch  
6
6-127  
Figure 6-48 shows 3 SNs used as a CSS for up to 43 EPNs. Use this configuration  
when low inter-SN traffic is expected.  
4
5
6
7
7
1
2
3
11  
10  
9
8
cydfpbx4 RPY 081897  
Figure Notes  
1. Switch Node (SN) 1  
2. Switch Node 2  
3. Switch Node 3  
4. PPN Cabinet  
7. Inter-SN Connections (1 fiber)  
8. EPN Cabinet 14  
9. EPN Cabinet 28  
10. EPN Cabinet 29  
5. EPN Cabinet 1  
6. EPN Cabinet 13  
11. EPN Cabinet 43  
Figure 6-48. 3-SN CSS with Low Inter-SN Traffic  
Fiber Engineering for 3 SNs  
Switches with 3 SNs are connected by 1 to 7 fiber links to provide sufficient  
switching fabric at the CSS. The traffic in all locales within a single SN does not  
require engineering. Only traffic that links from locales in 1 SN to another SN (and  
vice versa) must be engineered. The traffic that links across these fibers is simply  
the sum of the traffic that links to locales located in the other SN.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-128  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
A new port carrier can be installed when additional features or equipment  
exceed the capacity of the present system. Port carriers are identified as B, C, D,  
and E except for a PPN cabinet with the duplication option. The “B” carrier is the  
second control carrier. PEC 63155 provides the necessary equipment for adding  
the carrier.  
Add each new port carrier to a port network in the “B,” “C,” “D,” “E” order of  
carrier positions.  
Before proceeding with the addition of a port carrier, ensure that 3 TN1650B  
Memory Circuit Packs exist in the system. Refer to the section entitled ‘‘Remove  
the Circuit Packs’’ on page 1-11 for installation instructions.  
Before proceeding with the addition of a port carrier, ensure that the TN1657 Disk  
Drive is of Vintage 4 (or higher). Refer to Chapter 1, ‘‘Upgrading G3rV2, V3, V4 to  
R8r and Adding Memory’’ for installation instructions.  
Service Interruption  
1. Since the addition of port carriers requires a service interruption, notify the  
customer in advance as to when the addition will take place.  
Verify System Status  
1. Before proceeding, examine the system for alarms. Every problem should  
be corrected. The system must be alarm-free.  
Disable Alarm Origination  
1. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
2. Make a note of the Alarm Origination Activated field. If the feature  
is enabled, type n in this field to disable Alarm Origination.  
You will enable this feature again in 1 of the final processes.  
!
WARNING:  
If you do not disable Alarm Origination before making changes to the  
switch, the switch may generate alarms, resulting in unnecessary  
trouble tickets. Reducing redundant and unnecessary trouble tickets  
is critical for measuring the quality of Lucent services and products.  
NOTE:  
For some releases of the software, disable Cleared Alarm  
Notificationand Restart Notification fields before  
sDuobwmnliotatidnfgromthWewfowr.Smo.manuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-129  
Save Translations  
1. Log in at the management terminal.  
2. If the system is high- or critical-reliability, type status spe and press Enter  
to verify that the standby SPE is refreshed and that the standby disk is in  
service.  
3. Type save translation [spe-a or both] disk and press Enter. This  
command instructs the system to take all translation information in  
memory and write it to the disk(s).  
4. If the MCC port network contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack,  
type display announcements and press Enter.  
If administered recorded announcements are listed, type list  
configuration software-version and press Enter. Check screen 2 to find  
out when the announcements were last saved.  
Save the current announcements by typing save announcements and  
pressing Enter.  
5. Type backup disk [spe-a or both] and press Enter. This command  
instructs the system to backup the current information on disk to the  
system tape(s).  
6. Update backup tape(s), if required.  
Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in the control cabinet to be  
upgraded, prepare to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and  
allow the disk to completely spin down.  
!
CAUTION:  
Make sure that you save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the  
current system.  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before  
powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN  
Gateway disk.  
1. Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors in the  
carrier.  
2. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. See the DEFINITY Communications  
System Generic 3 Installation, Administration and Maintenance of  
CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway.  
3. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.  
4. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.  
5. Select DSohwuntldoaodwfrnomfrWomww.tShoemRaneusaelst.cSomy.sAtellmMamnuealnsuS.earch And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-130  
Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System  
1. If a DEFINITY AUDIX resides in the MCC port network to be upgraded,  
shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin  
down. Refer to ‘‘DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures’’ on page 6-141.  
!
WARNING:  
Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down  
the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk.  
2. Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors.  
Power Down MCC Port Network  
1. At the MCC port network, set the main circuit breaker to OFF.  
Install Port Carrier  
1. Open the rear doors.  
2. Remove the blank port carrier panel by pushing outward on panel from the  
rear of the cabinet until the panel clears the 4 retaining pins on the cabinet  
frame. See Figure 6-49.  
3. Use a screwdriver to loosen and remove the 4 retaining pins from the  
cabinet frame.  
4. Align the carrier through the front of the system cabinet with the 4 pilot  
holes on cabinet frame.  
NOTE:  
Support the carrier by the molded-in support pins above the top  
mounting holes.  
5. Insert self-tapping screws in the pilot holes and tighten.  
6. Attach the magnetically-held nomenclature panel to front of carrier.  
7. At the rear, install 8 grounding jumpers from the adjacent backplane to the  
new carrier backplane wiring (Figure 6-50 and Figure 6-51).  
8. Connect a 9-pin D subminiature plug on right side of cabinet to P1  
connector on carrier. If necessary, cut the tie wrap holding the intercabinet  
cable to the upright in the area of the carrier being installed.  
9. Connect the TDM/LAN cable to the newly installed port carrier. See Figure  
6-52, Figure 6-53, Figure 6-54, or Figure 6-55 and Table 6-11.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-131  
10. Install a 631AR, 631WA1, 631DA1, or 644A power unit in the leftmost slot  
and a 631BR, 631WB1, 631DB1, 645B, or 649A power unit in the  
right-most slot of installed port carrier as follows:  
a. Set the circuit breaker on the power unit to be added to OFF.  
b. Move locking slide on power unit to its leftmost position and open  
the lever.  
c. Align and slide the power unit into slot in the carrier until some  
resistance is felt.  
d. Lift the locking lever upward until it latches.  
e. Move the locking slide on power unit to its rightmost position.  
f. Connect a power cord inside the cabinet to the outlet on the power  
unit.  
g. Set the circuit breaker on the power unit to ON.  
11. Install a TN736 power converter in the slot next to the 631AR power  
converter or a TN752 power converter in the slot next to the 631WA1  
power converter on the left side of the carrier.  
NOTE:  
The TN736 is not required when the 631DB1 power unit is used in  
the J58890B-2 or J58890B-3 port carriers. It is required in the  
J58890B-1 port carrier regardless of which 631 power unit is  
provided. Use the TN752 or TN755B if the system is equipped with  
neon message waiting.  
12. Install the port circuit packs in the carrier.  
13. Connect the AC/DC power cords located inside the cabinet to the power  
units.  
14. Install the rear panels around the port carrier.  
15. Install cables from the port carrier to the MDF.  
16. Install the cable access panel, as required.  
Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
1. Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors in the  
carrier.  
Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System  
1. Reseat the AUDIX assembly into its backplane connectors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-132  
Power Up MCC Port Network  
1. At the MCC port network, set the main circuit breaker to ON.  
2. The system performs a level 4 rebooting process, loading the system  
program and default translations from the disk. Rebooting takes 5 to 11  
minutes.  
3. Refer to “Initialization and Recovery” and “LED Interpretation” chapters in  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for  
R8r, for circuit pack LED indications and management terminal displays  
that occur during system reboot.  
4. After the system reboot is finished and all trouble cleared, verify that the  
EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO. This restores  
the system to the normal operating mode.  
Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System  
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway.  
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.  
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.  
4. Select Restart System from the Reset System menu.  
Enter Added Translations  
1. Enter added translation data as applicable using DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide.  
Resolve Alarms and Enable Alarm Origination  
1. Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Maintenance for R8r.  
2. If the Alarm Origination Activatedfield administration is already  
set to y, be sure to enable Alarm Origination. Otherwise you do not need to  
enable Alarm Origination (proceed to the next section).  
3. Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.  
The Alarm Origination Activatedfield was changed to Alarm  
Origination to OSS Numbersto support more than 1 OSS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-133  
4. Type first-only in this field to enable Alarm Origination (to the first OSS,  
which should be INADS).  
Be sure to type y in both Cleared Alarm Notificationand Restart  
Notificationfields. Press Enter.  
NOTE:  
The INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination as  
part of the registration process.  
!
CAUTION:  
If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has  
purchased a services contract, the switch will not report any alarm to  
the TSC automatically, causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the  
services contract.  
Save Translations  
1. If the system is high- or critical-reliability, type status spe and press Enter  
to verify that the standby SPE is refreshed and that the standby disk is in  
service.  
2. Type save translation [spe-a or both] disk and press Enter. This  
command instructs the system to take all translation information in  
memory and write it to the disk(s).  
3. If the MCC port network contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack,  
type list configuration software-version and press Enter.  
If screen 2 shows that recorded announcements were saved, these  
announcements can be restored using the restore announcements  
command. Type restore announcements and press Enter.  
4. Type backup disk [spe-a or both] and press Enter. This command  
instructs the system to backup the current information on disk to the  
removable media.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-134  
Update Port-Assignment Records  
1. Update the customer’s port-assignment records.  
CABINET  
FRAME  
RETAINING  
PINS  
Figure 6-49. Blank Carrier Panel (Rear View)  
CABINET  
FANS  
CONTROL CARRIER A  
GROUNDING  
JUMPER  
PORT CARRIER B  
REAR VIEW (COVERS REMOVED)  
Figure 6-50. Locations of Grounding Jumpers (Small Cabinet)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-135  
CABINET  
PORT CARRIER C  
PORT CARRIER B  
GROUNDING  
JUMPERS  
CONTROL CARRIER A  
FANS  
GROUNDING  
JUMPERS  
PORT CARRIER D  
PORT CARRIER E  
REAR VIEW (COVERS REMOVED)  
Figure 6-51. Locations of Grounding Jumpers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-136  
2
7
1
7
3
10  
7
3
8
4
9
7
5
3
7
2
6
cadf052 KLC 102297  
Figure Notes  
1. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
7. Slot 21  
8. Slot 00  
2. ZAHF4 TDM/LAN Terminator  
3. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716L6)  
4. Process Carrier (“A” Position)  
5. Port Carrier (“D” Position)  
6. Port Carrier (“E” Position)  
9. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716L7)  
10. Port Carrier (“B” Position)  
11. Slot TDM/LAN2 (20)  
Figure 6-52. TDM/LAN Bus Connections for Standard Reliability R8r PPN  
NOTE:  
On port carrier J58890BB-1, connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to  
slot 02. On port carriers J58890BB-2 and J58890BB-3, connect the TMD  
cables or TDM terminator to slot 01. If the port carrier has J58890BB-1 and  
J58890BB-2 stencilled on it, treat it as a J58890BB-1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-137  
2
7
7
7
1
10  
4
8
12  
11  
3
14  
8
3
13  
9
7
7
5
6
3
2
cadf051 KLC 102297  
Figure Notes  
1. Port Carrier (“C” Position)  
8. Slot 00  
2. ZAHF4 TDM/LAN Terminator  
9. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716L7)  
10. Process Carrier (“B” Position)  
11. ICCD Connector  
3. TDM/LAN Cable (WP91716L6)  
4. Process Carrier (“A” Position)  
5. Port Carrier (“D” Position)  
6. Port Carrier (“E” Position)  
7. Slot 21  
12. ICCC Connector  
13. Intercarrier Cable D (WP-91954)  
14. Intercarrier Cable C (H600-182)  
Figure 6-53. TDM/LAN Bus Connections for Critical-Reliability PPN  
NOTE:  
On port carrier J58890BB-1, connect the TDM cable or TDM terminator to  
slot 02. On port carriers J58890BB-2 and J58890BB-3, connect the TMD  
cables or TDM terminator to slot 01. If the port carrier has J58890BB-1 and  
J58890BB-2 stencilled on it, treat it as a J58890BB-1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-138  
TDM/LAN BUS TERMINATOR  
(ZAHF4)  
SLOT 21  
SEE NOTE  
J58890BB  
C
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
SLOT 21  
SEE NOTE  
J58890BB  
B
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
SLOT 21  
SLOT 02  
J58890AF  
A
EXPANSION  
CONTROL CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L7  
SEE NOTE  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
D
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
TDM BUS  
TERMINATOR  
(ZAHF4)  
SEE NOTE  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
E
PORT CARRIER  
REAR VIEW  
NOTE:  
ON PORT CARRIER J58890BB-1, CONNECT THE TDM CABLE OR TDM TERMINATOR TO SLOT 02.  
ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB-2 AND -3, CONNECT THE TDM CABLES TO SLOT 01.  
Figure 6-54. TDM/LAN Bus Connections for Standard- or High-Reliability  
EPN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-139  
TDM/LAN BUS TERMINATOR  
(ZAHF4)  
SEE NOTE  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
C
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
ICCB  
ICCA  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
SEE NOTE  
PORT CARRIER  
B
INTERCARRIER  
CABLES A AND B  
H600-204 G1  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
SLOT 02  
SLOT 21  
J58890AF-1  
A
EXPANSION  
CONTROL CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L7  
ICCB  
ICCA  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
D
SEE NOTE  
PORT CARRIER  
TDM/LAN CABLE  
WP91716 L6  
TDM/LAN BUS  
TERMINATOR  
ZAHF4  
SEE NOTE  
SLOT 21  
J58890BB  
E
PORT CARRIER  
REAR VIEW  
NOTE:  
ON PORT CARRIER J58890BB-1, CONNECT TDM/LAN CABLE OR TDM/LAN TERMINATOR TO SLOT 02.  
ON PORT CARRIERS J58890BB-2 AND -3, CONNECT THE TDM/LAN CABLE OR TDM/LAN TERMINATOR  
TO SLOT 01.  
Figure 6-55. TDM/LAN Bus Connections for Critical-Reliability EPN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Add MCC Port Carriers  
6
6-140  
Table 6-11. TDM/LAN Cable Connections  
“J” Number  
J58890B-1  
J58890B-2  
J58890B-3  
J58890AP  
J58890AF  
J58890AF  
Carrier Type  
Port  
LHS Slot  
RHS Slot  
21  
21  
21  
20  
21  
21  
02  
01  
01  
03  
02  
02  
Port  
Port  
PPN Control “A” or “B”  
AC EPN Control “A”  
DC EPN Control “A”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures  
6
6-141  
DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures  
Power Down the AUDIX System  
A yellow caution sticker on the system’s power unit notifies technicians to shut  
down the DEFINITY AUDIX System prior to powering down the system.  
1. Log into the AUDIX System as craft.  
2. Type reset system shutdown. Press Enter once.  
NOTE:  
Do not press Enter again. This will force the AUDIX to shutdown  
immediately, dropping all active calls on the AUDIX.  
3. The “SHUTDOWN Completed” message appears when the AUDIX is  
successfully shutdown. This takes about 2 minutes.  
4. The AUDIX System can now be removed for service.  
Power Up the AUDIX System  
If the AUDIX was removed from the cabinet:  
1. Re-install the AUDIX and allow it to boot up automatically.  
2. Check for AUDIX System errors.  
If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet but power was removed from the  
cabinet:  
1. Power up the cabinet. The AUDIX reboots automatically.  
2. Check for AUDIX System errors.  
If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet and the cabinet was not powered  
down:  
1. At the AUDIX console, hold the crtl key and type cc.  
2. Type 5 at the prompt. In about 2 minutes, the AUDIX boots up.  
3. When the system initialization is complete, log in as craft.  
4. Check for AUDIX System errors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Installing an Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) Module  
6-142  
Installing an Integrated Channel  
Service Unit (ICSU) Module  
The integrated channel service unit (ICSU) is a combination of a 120A CSU  
module integrated with a DS1 circuit pack. Use this device with the 700A DS1  
loopback jack when testing the DS1 span.  
Checking for required components  
The integrated channel service unit (ICSU) package contains:  
120A CSU module  
Cable H600-383  
4-pair modular cord  
Group 2, 50-Foot (15.2 m) cable (standard)  
Cord DW8A-DE  
4-pair modular cord to alarm contacts  
DS1 circuit pack  
The basic ICSU requires a TN474E or TN777D or later suffix. The  
enhanced integrated channel service unit requires a TN474F or TN777E or  
later suffix.  
Installing the 120A CSU  
See Figure 6-56.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Installing an Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) Module  
6-143  
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 AUX  
icsupic RBP 032896  
1. Rear of carrier containing DS1 circuit pack  
2. 120A CSU  
4. DW8A-DE 4-pair cord to alarm contacts (optional)  
5. To 25-pair connector on rear of carrier containing  
DS1 circuit pack  
3. 4-pair cord to network interface (H600-383)  
Figure 6-56. 120A Channel Service Unit Module  
!
!
CAUTION:  
Do not plug the 120A into any circuit pack other than a TN474F or TN777E  
or later release/vintage. Do not connect the 120A to any interface other than  
a network smart jack.  
Be sure the DS1 circuit pack is set for 24-channel operation (1.544 Mbps).  
The 120A does not operate with the 32-channel interface. A switch on the  
circuit pack or administration sets this option.  
CAUTION:  
Always wear an anti-static wrist strap when installing a 120A module. Do  
not touch the external alarm cable when it is connected to the 120A. Static  
discharge can damage connector terminals and relays.  
1. Unplug the DS1 circuit pack from its slot.  
2. Install a 4C retainer in the 50-pin plug associated with the DS1 circuit pack  
slot.  
3. Plug the 120A’s 25-pair connector directly into the plug associated with  
the DS1 circuit pack slot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Installing an Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) Module  
6-144  
4. Secure the 4C retainer around the 120A.  
5. Attach the supplied H600-383 cable to the 120A and to the network smart  
jack.  
This cable is directional. To determine the end that connects to the 120A,  
perform a continuity test between pins 3 and 7. The end with this  
continuity is the 120A end. The shield is grounded only at the 120A end.  
Use the cable provided. If cabling other than that provided with the 120A  
is used, observe the following guidelines:  
Use 24-gauge wire that provides individually shielded, twisted pairs  
for transmit and receive signals. Use the cable between the  
network interface and the 120A. Ground the shields of this cable  
only at the 120A end to avoid ground loops.  
Cabling between the network interface and 120A can have no  
bridge taps.  
If using standard house riser cable for connections between the  
network interface and the 120A, maintain a 100-pair separation  
between the receive and transmit twisted pairs.  
If using standard house riser cable for connections between the  
network interface and the 120A, allow no more than 2 cross  
connects to 110-type cross connect blocks.  
Never use quad cable (untwisted two pair telephone cable) in a  
DS1 line.  
Avoid mixing wires of different gauges in a DS1 line.  
6. If using external alarm equipment, attach the supplied DW8 cable to the  
120A and the external equipment. The maximum length of this cable  
depends on the alarm equipment.  
7. If a TN474F is used, make sure the circuit pack is set for 24-channel  
operation. Set the switch on the circuit pack as shown in Figure 2-1.  
8. From the DS1 circuit-pack screen of the system administration console,  
set the line compensation field to 0-133 feet (40.6 m).  
9. Reset the 120A by reseating the DS1 circuit pack.  
When you reinsert the DS1 circuit pack after installing a 120A CSU the  
120A resets. The DS1 circuit pack initializes and tests the 120A. When  
initialization and testing is complete, the green LED goes off. If the RED  
indicator is OFF after the test, the ICSU is working.  
10. If the circuits do not pass the self test, troubleshoot the 120A as instructed  
in Integrated CSU Module Installation and Operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
6
Installing an Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) Module  
6-145  
Table 6-12 provides the H600-383 cable pinouts. Table 6-13 provides the cable  
lengths for each cable group number.  
Table 6-12. H600-383 cable Pin Assignments  
Channel Service  
Network  
Pin  
1
Color  
BK  
Unit Designation Designation Function  
Line in 0  
Line in 1  
R1  
T1  
RCV  
XMT  
2
Y
3
Shield  
R
4
Line out 0  
Line out 1  
R
T
5
G
7
Shield  
7
Not assigned  
Not assigned  
8
Table 6-13. H600-383 cable Lengths by Group Number  
Group  
Length  
Group  
Length  
1
2
3
4
25 feet (7.7 m)  
50 feet (15.2 m)  
75 feet (22.9 m)  
100 feet (30.5 m)  
5
7
7
8
125 feet (38.1 m)  
200 feet (71 m)  
400 feet (122 m)  
750 feet (198.1 m)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Installing a 3150/3170 Channel Service Unit  
6
6-146  
Installing a 3150/3170  
Channel Service Unit  
1. Install the CSU as shown in Figure 6-57. For some installations (such as a  
DS1 converter), use a Y-cable to connect the DEFINITY System to the  
quad cable. Table 6-14 shows the Y-cable lengths. Be sure to label all  
cables.  
Figure 6-57 shows a typical connection from the H600-348 Quad cable to  
the CSU, through the H600-307 network cable, and to the network  
interface through the smart jacks. The quad cable provides up to four  
connections using a 15-pin connector that plugs into the DTE jack on each  
CSU. The H600-348 quad cable may require an adapter cable.  
AUX PORT COM PORT  
MODEM  
NETWORK  
POWER  
DTE  
POWER  
POWER  
POWER  
AUX PORT COM PORT  
AUX PORT COM PORT  
AUX PORT COM PORT  
MODEM  
MODEM  
MODEM  
NETWORK  
NETWORK  
NETWORK  
DTE  
DTE  
DTE  
3150csu RBP 062696  
1. H600-348 quad cable  
5. Network interface  
9. Cable C  
2. 15-pin male “D” connectors (to DTE jacks on CSU)  
3. Channel service unit (CSU)  
6. Smart jack (if provided)  
7. Cable A  
10. Cable D  
4. H600-307 cable (RJ-48C to RJ-48C)  
8. Cable B  
Figure 6-57. 3150/3170 Channel Service Unit Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Installing a 3150/3170 Channel Service Unit  
6
6-147  
10  
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11  
09 08 07 06 05  
04 03 02 01  
cydf010 RPY 090597  
1. Port carrier  
5. 50-Pin Male/50-pin female double-headed  
connector cable  
2. DS1 converter connector  
6. Quad cable (with 50-pin male connector) connects  
to the channel service unit.  
3. 50-pair female connector to DEFINITY System  
4. 14-Inch (35.57 cm) “Y” cable  
Figure 6-58. DS1 Converter Connections Using Double-Headed cable  
Table 6-14. “Y” cable Lengths (DS1 converter Only)  
Length  
(in/cm)  
Description  
Comcode  
14/35.5  
TN1754 to adjacent expansion interface circuit pack or  
TN573B switch node interface circuit pack in same carrier  
847245750  
70/177.8 TN1754 to expansion interface circuit pack or switch node  
interface in another carrier  
847245778  
14/35.5  
TN1754 to fiber optic transceiver (DC-powered cabinets only). 847245777  
This cable is for intercabinet cabling only.  
14/35.5  
TN1754 to adjacent TN570/B/C expansion interface circuit  
pack  
847747741  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Adding or Removing Cabinet Hardware  
Installing a 3150/3170 Channel Service Unit  
6
6-148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-1  
Fiber Link Administration  
A
This appendix describes the steps required to administer fiber links on G3rV4  
and later systems.  
Before starting the administration process, verify the following:  
1. Be sure all fiber optic transceivers and all fiber optic cables are correctly  
installed on the DS1 and/or DS1 converter circuit packs.  
2. Verify connections to the Lightguide Interconnect Units (LIUs) or shelves,  
to the fiber multiplexers, and to the outside world. Refer to Appendix A in  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 Installation and  
Test for Multicarrier Cabinets.  
Administer Fiber Links  
Administer system fiber link configurations to match the hardware installed and  
according to the Fiber Optic Cable Running List.  
NOTE:  
Fiber link administration interacts with or depends upon other system  
features that must be administered before it.  
Fiber link administration creates translation data by identifying the endpoint pairs  
for each link. Endpoints can be:  
An Expansion Interface (EI) circuit pack  
A Switch Node Interface (SNI) circuit pack  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-2  
Circuit Pack Form  
After installing the equipment (including circuit packs), the circuit packs must be  
administered before the fiber link is administered. Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise  
Communications Server Release 8 Administrator’s Guide for more information.  
The following information describes general circuit pack administration  
information:  
a. Use the Circuit Packs form to administer circuit packs to carrier slots.  
Install or administer the circuit packs (or assigned using the Circuit Packs  
form) before administering voice terminals, attendant consoles, or trunks.  
b. Each page of the form represents 1 carrier in the cabinet shown on the  
command line.  
c. Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Planning and  
Configuration for more information about circuit pack administration and  
port assignment records.  
d. For initial installation, assign circuit packs to slots using the hardware  
configuration layout record from the factory or Customer Services  
Organization. Do not arbitrarily assign circuit packs to slots.  
e. If the carrier type administered on the Cabinet Administration form does  
not match the physical hardware, question marks (??) may display in the  
Code fields.  
f. When a circuit pack in a slot differs from what has been administered on  
the form, a “#” displays between the “Sfx” and “Name” fields to indicate a  
conflict.  
g. For Release 8r, the number of slot fields displayed represents  
administrable slots for the given carrier type.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-3  
Administer Fiber Links on Simplex Systems  
Administer the TN570 Expansion Interface and the TN574 or TN1654 DS1  
Converter circuit packs.  
1. Type change circuit packs and press Enter. Scroll through the pages on  
the form until the carrier containing the new circuit packs displays on the  
screen.  
2. Enter the circuit packs into the appropriate slot locations on the form.  
Press Enter when finished.  
3. Type list fiber and press Enter. All administered fiber connections display.  
4. If a previously used fiber link is to be reused, enter add fiber <number>  
and press Enter. If this is a new fiber link, type add fiber next and press  
Enter. The Fiber Link Administration screen appears. Each fiber link is  
identified by a fiber number.  
a. Type y or n in the field Is one endpoint remoted via DS1  
Converter complex?and press Enter.  
b. Enter the location of the TN570 and the TN574 or TN1654 circuit  
packs for both ENDPOINT-1 and ENDPOINT-2.  
c. Scroll to page 2 of the form. Enter y as applicable, in each  
Facility Installed?field (A, B, C, and D).  
d. In the Bit Rate:field, type either 1.544 (T1) or 2.048 (E1).  
e. Enter the idle code in the Idle Code MSB (1) . . . . LSB  
(8):field. The default value is 11101000. It is recommended that  
the default value be used unless it becomes absolutely necessary  
to change it. The “MSB” means Most Significant Bit, the “LSB”  
means Least Significant Bit.  
f. In the Line Coding: field, enter the line coding information. This  
information should match the line coding of the facility. For T1,  
example line coding is b8zs. For E1, example line coding is hdb3.  
If this data is not correct, wideband errors (multimedia call  
handling) may occur.  
5. For T1 sites, refer to ‘‘T1 Installations Only’’. For E1 sites, refer to ‘‘E1  
Installations Only’’.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-4  
T1 Installations Only  
1. The Framing Mode:field is display only and shows the hardware setting.  
2. The DS1CONV-1 Line Compensation:and the DS1CONV-2 Line  
Compensation:fields are display only and show the hardware setting.  
3. In the Facility A Circuit ID:field, enter an optional facility name  
that is unique to each facility (up to 40 alphanumeric characters). Press  
Enter.  
4. A display similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration  
is completed:  
RESET PORT-NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 (COLD) PERFORMED.  
E1 Installations Only  
1. Type y or n in the CRC?field. The “CRC” means Cyclic Redundancy  
Check. This is an error detection algorithm.  
2. The Line Termination:field is display only. A 75 (75 Ohms) or 120  
(120 Ohms) typically displays.  
3. In the Facility A Circuit ID:field, enter an optional facility name  
that is unique to each facility (up to 40 alphanumeric characters). Press  
Enter.  
4. A display similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration  
is completed:  
RESET PORT-NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 (COLD) PERFORMED.  
All Installations  
1. When the system reset is finished, type status port-network 2 and press  
Enter. The Port Network Status screen appears. Verify that PNC Active is  
“up” and that the Service State is “in.”  
2. A Span LED, on the front of the DS1 Converter circuit pack, must be on for  
each active facility administered. For example, if Facility A and Facility B  
are administered, then the top 2 Span LEDs on the circuit pack must be on  
(yellow). The yellow LEDs are on only if no problems were encountered  
during the administration of hardware. Span LEDs associated with  
non-administered facilities (C and D, in this example) should be off.  
3. Perform a test call, if desired.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-5  
Administer Fiber Links on Duplex Systems  
All non-duplicated Switch Node Interfaces to Switch Node Interface fiber links  
are automatically duplicated. When PNC Duplication is enabled on the  
System-Parameters Customer-Options form, the following administration forms  
change:  
Cabinet Form Additional fields appear to allow administration of switch  
nodes to A-PNC and B-PNC sides of the CSS. The B-PNC is the  
duplicated hardware for the A-PNC. Either the A-PNC or the B-PNC can  
provide full customized service. B-PNC cannot be used in a simplex PNC  
configuration. Pairing of switch nodes is also defined here.  
Fiber Link Administration Form Additional fields appear to allow  
administration of fiber links on the B-PNC side of the CSS. If an endpoint  
on the A-PNC side is administered as an SNI, its corresponding endpoint  
on the B-PNC side is determined (if switch nodes are paired in the cabinet  
form prior to this administration) and displayed. However, administration  
of the duplicate B-PNC link is not enforced until duplication is in full  
operation.  
Duplication-Related System-Parameters Form An additional field  
appears to enable operation of PNC duplication.  
1. Type change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter. On  
Page 2 of the form, set the PNC Duplication?field to y. Press Enter.  
2. Type change system-parameters duplication and press Enter. Change  
the Enable operation of PNC duplication?field to y. Press Enter.  
3. Type status pnc and press Enter. Verify the Duplicated ?field is yes.  
4. Type list fiber and press Enter. All administered fiber connections display.  
5. If a previously used fiber link is to be reused, type add fiber <number>  
and press Enter. If this is a new fiber link, type add fiber next and press  
Enter.  
6. The Fiber Link Administration form appears. On Page 1 of the form:  
a. Enter the Board Location: for Endpoint-1 and Endpoint-2. This  
is the cabinet, carrier, and slot that identifies the physical location  
of an SNI or EI circuit pack that is the first endpoint of the fiber link.  
Repeat for the remaining endpoints.  
b. The Board Typefield is display only and shows the type of circuit  
pack in Endpoint-1.  
c. In the DS1CONV Board Location: field, enter the cabinet, carrier,  
and slot that identifies the physical location of DS1 Converter circuit  
pack in the first endpoint of the duplicate fiber link. Endpoint-1’s  
duplicate along with Endpoint-2’s duplicate make up the duplicate  
fiber link called the B-PNC link.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-6  
d. The DS1CONV Board Type: field is display only and shows the  
type of DS1 Converter circuit pack in Endpoint-1. The circuit pack  
type in Endpoint-1 (A-PNC) and Endpoint-1 (B-PNC) must match.  
e. In the Is one endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter  
Complex?field, type y to specify that a DS1 Converter complex is  
used to remote 1 endpoint. If y is entered, administer the A-PNC  
DS1 Converter Board Location on Page 1. The A-PNC DS1  
Converter Board Type displays.  
7. On Page 2 of the form:  
a. Administer the A-PNC DS1 Converter (DS1CONV) Attributes.  
b. Enter the DS1 Converter Facilities information. In the Facility  
Installed?field, type y for all installed facilities (A, B, C, and D).  
c. In the Bit Rate: field, type 1.544 for T1 operation or 2.048 for E1  
operation.  
NOTE:  
One bit rate applies for all facilities within the same DS1  
Converter complex. The Bit Rate:field displays only under  
Facility A.  
d. Enter the idle code in the Idle Code MSB (1) . . . . LSB  
(8):field. The default value is 11101000. It is recommended that  
the default value be used unless it becomes absolutely necessary  
to change it. The “MSB” means Most Significant Bit, the “LSB”  
means Least Significant Bit.  
e. Enter the appropriate data in the Line Coding: field. This data  
should match the line coding of the facility. For T1, example line  
coding is b8zs. For E1, example line coding is hdb3.  
f. Scroll to Page 3 and modify the fields as needed for the B-PNC.  
If this data is not correct, wideband errors (such as  
multimedia call handling) may occur.  
8. For T1 sites, refer to ‘‘T1 Installations Only’’. For E1 sites, refer to ‘‘E1  
Installations Only’’.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-7  
T1 Installations Only  
1. The Framing Mode:field is display only and shows the hardware setting.  
2. The DS1CONV-1 Line Compensation:and the DS1CONV-2 Line  
Compensation:fields are display only and show the hardware setting.  
3. In the Facility A Circuit ID:field, enter an optional facility name  
that is unique to each facility (up to 40 alphanumeric characters). Press  
Enter.  
4. A display similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration  
is completed:  
RESET PORT-NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 (COLD) PERFORMED.  
E1 Installations Only  
1. Type y or n in the CRC?field. The “CRC” means Cyclic Redundancy  
Check. This is an error detection algorithm.  
2. The Line Termination:field is display only. A 75 (75 Ohms) or 120  
(120 Ohms) typically displays.  
3. In the Facility A Circuit ID:field, enter an optional facility name  
that is unique to each facility (up to 40 alphanumeric characters). Press  
Enter.  
4. A display similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration  
is completed:  
RESET PORT-NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 (COLD) PERFORMED.  
All Installations  
1. When the system reset is finished, type status port-network 2 and press  
Enter. The Port Network Status screen appears. Verify that PNC Active is  
“up” and that the Service State is “in.”  
2. A Span LED, on the front of the DS1 Converter circuit pack, must be on for  
each active facility administered. For example, if Facility A and Facility B  
are administered, then the top 2 Span LEDs on the circuit pack must be on  
(yellow). The yellow LEDs are on only if no problems were encountered  
during the administration of hardware. Span LEDs associated with  
non-administered facilities (C and D, in this example) should be off.  
3. Perform a test call, if desired.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-8  
Fiber Link Administration Form  
This form administers fiber links, each of which is identified by a fiber number.  
NOTE:  
Fiber link administration only applies to R5r and later configurations.  
Port networks (PNs) are connected via direct fiber link connections or through a  
center stage switch (CSS) to provide the interconnection of port networks  
required for voice/data information transfer. The CSS is composed of "switch  
nodes" that can be interconnected in one or two levels to provide Port Network  
Connectivity (PNC). The CSS provides circuit-switched connectivity for voice and  
data communications as well as packet-switched connectivity. Fiber link  
administration permits an administration of translation data associated with a  
switch connection (such as optical fiber, metallic cable, or DS1CONV circuit  
packs and DS1 facility links between two endpoints). The two fiber endpoints can  
be:  
An expansion interface (EI) circuit pack  
A switch node interface (SNI) circuit pack  
NOTE:  
Only one administrative terminal can administer fiber links at a time;  
others can display fiber link information.  
Administration commands  
Use the following commands to administer the Fiber Link Administration form.  
Action  
Object  
Qualifier1  
add  
fiber-link  
link number or [‘next’]  
link number  
change fiber-link  
display  
list  
fiber-link  
fiber-link  
link number  
link number  
remove fiber-link  
link number  
1. Brackets [ ] indicate the qualifier is optional.  
Single quotes (‘ ’) indicate the text inside the quote  
must be entered exactly as shown or an  
abbreviated form of the word may be entered.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-9  
PNCs have three different reliability configurations (one for each system reliability  
configuration) as follows:  
System Configuration  
Standard Reliability  
High Reliability  
PNC  
Simplex Fibers  
Simplex Fibers to Expansion Port Networks and  
Duplicated Fibers between Processor Port  
Networks (PPN) and Switch Nodes  
Critical Reliability  
Duplicated Fibers  
Simplex PNC  
For Simplex PNC, PNC Duplication is disabled on the System-Parameters  
Customer-Options form and Operation of Duplication is disabled on the  
Duplication-Related System-Parameters form.  
Administration of PNC Duplication  
The PNC Duplication feature is enabled on the System-Parameters  
Customer-Options form and Operation of Duplication is enabled on the  
Duplication-Related System-Parameters form. When PNC Duplication is enabled  
on the System-Parameters Customer-Options form, the following administration  
forms change:  
Cabinet form Additional fields appear to allow administration of switch  
nodes to A-PNC and B-PNC sides of the CSS. The B-PNC is the  
duplicated hardware for the A-PNC. Either the A-PNC or the B-PNC can  
provide full customized service. B-PNC cannot be used in a simplex PNC  
configuration. Pairing of switch nodes is also defined here.  
Fiber Link form Additional fields appear to allow administration of fiber  
links on the B-PNC side of the CSS. If an endpoint on the A-PNC side is  
administered as an SNI, its corresponding endpoint on the B-PNC side is  
determined (if switch nodes are paired in the cabinet form prior to this  
administration) and displayed. However, administration of the duplicate  
B-PNC link is not enforced until duplication is in full operation.  
Duplication-Related System-Parameters form An additional field  
appears to enable operation of PNC duplication.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-10  
Form instructions  
Page 1 of the form  
Page 1 of 1  
FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION  
Fiber Link #: 1  
Is one endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter Complex? ___  
ENDPOINT-1  
(A-PNC)  
ENDPOINT-2  
(A-PNC)  
Board Location: _____  
Board Type: xxx  
Board Location: _____  
Board Type: xxx  
Screen 6-1. Fiber Link Administration form  
Basic Fiber Link Administration.  
The following fields appear:  
Fiber Link # Display-only field. From the command line, enter a 1- to  
3-digit number to uniquely identify a switch connection in the system and  
its duplicate if appropriate.  
Board Location Enter the cabinet, carrier, and slot that identifies the  
physical location of an SNI or EI board that is the first endpoint of the fiber  
link.  
Board Type Display-only field showing the type of circuit pack in  
Endpoint-1.  
Board Location Enter the cabinet, carrier, and slot that identifies the  
physical location of an SNI or EI board that is the second endpoint of the  
fiber link.  
Board Type Display-only field showing the type of circuit pack in  
Endpoint-2.  
Is one endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter Complex? Enter y to  
specify that a DS1 Converter complex is used to remote one endpoint. If a  
y is entered, A-PNC DS1 Converter circuit pack Location must be  
administered on Page 1. A-PNC DS1 Converter circuit pack Type displays.  
A-PNC DS1 Converter (DS1CONV) Attributes must be administered on  
Page 2 of this form.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-11  
Duplicated Fiber Link Administration.  
add fiber-link next  
Fiber Link #: 1  
Page 1 of 3  
FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION  
Is one endpoint remoted via DS1 Converter Complex? yes  
ENDPOINT-1  
(A-PNC)  
ENDPOINT-2  
(A-PNC)  
Board Location: 01E01  
Board Type: ei  
Board Location: 02A01  
Board Type: ei  
DS1CONV Board Location: 01B01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN574  
DS1CONV Board Location: 02B01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN574  
ENDPOINT-1  
ENDPOINT-2  
(B-PNC)  
(B-PNC)  
Board Location: 01D01  
Board Type: ei  
Board Location: 02A02  
Board Type: ei  
DS1CONV Board Location: 01C01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN574  
DS1CONV Board Location: 02C01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN574  
Screen 6-2. Fiber Link Administration form (page 1 of 3)  
The following fields appear when Administration of PNC Duplicationis  
enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options form:  
Fiber Link # Display-only field. From the command line, enter a 1- to  
3-digit number to uniquely identify a switch connection in the system and  
its duplicate if appropriate.  
Is one endpoint remoted via DS1 Converter Complex? Enter yes to  
specify that a DS1 converter complex is used to remote one endpoint. If  
yes is entered, A-PNC and B-PNC DS1 Converter (DS1CONV) Attributes  
must be administered on Pages 2 and 3 (respectively) of the form.  
Board Location Enter the cabinet, carrier, and slot that identifies the  
physical location of a circuit pack in the first endpoint of the duplicate fiber  
link. Endpoint-1’s duplicate along with Endpoint-2’s duplicate make up the  
duplicate fiber link called the B-PNC link.  
Board Type Display-only field showing the type of circuit pack in  
Endpoint-1. The circuit pack type in Endpoint-1 (A-PNC) and Endpoint-1  
(B-PNC) must be the same.  
DS1CONV Board Location Enter the cabinet, carrier, and slot that  
identifies the physical location of DS1 Converter circuit pack in the first  
endpoint of the duplicate fiber link. Endpoint-1’s duplicate along with  
Endpoint-2’s duplicate make up the duplicate fiber link called the B-PNC  
link.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-12  
DS1CONV Board Type Display-only field showing the type of DS1  
Converter circuit pack in Endpoint-1. The circuit pack type in Endpoint-1  
(A-PNC) and Endpoint-1 (B-PNC) must be the same. This field is updated  
via the Change Circuit-packs command.  
Board Location Enter the cabinet, carrier, and slot that identifies the  
physical location of a circuit pack in the second endpoint of the duplicate  
fiber link. Endpoint-2’s duplicate along with Endpoint-1’s duplicate make  
up the duplicate fiber link called the B-PNC link.  
Board Type Display-only field showing the type of circuit pack in  
Endpoint-2. The circuit pack type in Endpoint-2 (A-PNC) and Endpoint-2  
(B-PNC) must be the same.  
DS1CONV Board Location Enter the cabinet, carrier, and slot that  
identifies the physical location of DS1 Converter circuit pack in the second  
endpoint of the duplicate fiber link. Endpoint-2’s duplicate along with  
Endpoint-1’s duplicate make up the duplicate fiber link called the B-PNC  
link.  
DS1CONV Board Type Display-only field showing the type of DS1  
Converter circuit pack in Endpoint-2. The circuit pack type in Endpoint-2  
(A-PNC) and Endpoint-2 (B-PNC) must be the same. This field is updated  
via the Change Circuit-packs command.  
DS1C Converter Complex Administration for TN574 Circuit Packs.  
add fiber-link next  
Page 2 of 3  
FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION  
A-PNC DS1 CONVERTER (DS1CONV) ATTRIBUTES  
DS1CONV Board Location: 01B01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN574  
DS1CONV Board Location: 02B01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN574  
DS1 CONVERTER FACILITIES  
A
B
C
D
Facility Installed? yes  
Passes Far-end Clock? yes  
Digital Data Compatible? yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
Line Coding: ami-zcs ami-zcs ami-zcs  
ami-zcs  
Framing Mode: esf  
DS1CONV-1 Line Compensation: 1  
DS1CONV-2 Line Compensation: 1  
esf  
1
1
esf  
1
1
esf  
1
1
Facility A Circuit ID: 09876543  
Screen 6-3. Fiber Link Administration form for TN574 Circuit Pack (DS1 Converter  
Complex Administration) (page 2 of 3)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-13  
The following DS1 Converter Complex fields appear on Page 2 when the Is one  
endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter Complex field is y.  
NOTE:  
When you administer DS1 Converter TN1654 circuit packs, different fields  
display.  
DS1CONV Board Location Enter the cabinet, carrier, and slot that  
identifies the physical location of the converter circuit pack connected to  
the first endpoint of the fiber link. This is entered on Page 1 and displays  
on Page 2.  
DS1CONV Board Type Display-only field showing the type of DS1  
Converter circuit pack for the first endpoint.  
DS1CONV Board Location Enter the cabinet, carrier, and slot that  
identifies the physical location of the converter circuit pack connected to  
the second endpoint of the fiber link.  
DS1CONV Board Type Display-only field showing the type of DS1  
Converter circuit pack for the second endpoint. This field is updated via  
the Change Circuit-packs command.  
Facility Installed Enter yes in the B, C, and D columns under the DS1  
Converter Facilities heading to indicate that this DS1 facility is physically  
installed. At least facility A must be installed within the converter complex.  
Default is yes for Facility A.  
Passes Far-end Clock Enter "yes" in the B, C, and D columns under  
the DS1 Converter Facilities heading to indicate that this DS1 facility is  
suitable to be used as a clock source. If the DS1 signal does not come  
directly from the far end converter circuit pack or the network (such as  
when the signal is converted from digital to analog and then back to  
digital), enter "no.” Default is yes for Facility A.  
This field determines whether the DS1 converter circuit pack can use  
receive DS1 signal timing to time the transmit fiber signal. This is  
necessary for passing timing from a master PN to a slave PN across a  
Converter Complex.  
Digital Data Compatible Enter yes (default) in the B, C, and D  
columns under the DS1 Converter Facilities heading to indicate that this  
DS1 facility is suitable for transmission of digital data. At least Facility A  
must be suitable for transmission of digital data. If Customer Premises  
Equipment that alters digital data exists on this facility (such as with a  
channel expansion multiplexer), enter no.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-14  
Line Coding Enter the line coding format, ami-zcs (default), or  
ami-basic, b8zs, or hdb3 in the A, B, C, and D columns under the DS1  
Converter Facilities heading for each DS1 facility.  
When ami-zcs line coding is used, all-zero bytes are prevented from being  
transmitted on the DS1 facility because a 1 is arbitrarily written into the  
second position of each byte. Thus, if no measures are taken to prevent it,  
ami-zcs line coding results in data corruption. The DS1CONV circuit pack  
protects the packet facility (one of up to four facilities dynamically  
allocated by the DS1CONV circuit pack) from corruption through a special  
escape mechanism.  
When b8zs line coding is used, it maintains DS1 facility’s ones-density  
requirements by encoding a zero data byte into a specific unique pattern  
of bipolar violations on the DS1 line. The opposite end recognizes this  
pattern and replaces it with a zero data byte when the data is recovered at  
the receiving end.  
NOTE:  
Note that although the esf framing mode and b8zs line coding are  
the preferable modes of operation, you should confirm that the DS1  
facilities support them before selecting this line coding.  
Framing Mode Enter the framing format, esf (default) or d4, in the A,  
B, C, and D columns under the DS1 Converter Facilities heading for each  
DS1 facility.  
NOTE:  
The D4 format is supported by the Converter circuit packs, but  
because of problems inherent with this format (specifically, inability  
to frame on a bit stream that contains data that emulates the D4  
framing pattern), its use is discouraged.  
DS1CONV-1 Line Compensation — Enter the line compensation (1 to 5)  
in the A, B, C, and D columns under the DS1 Converter Facilities heading  
for each DS1 facility connected to ENDPOINT-1 (see Table 6-15).  
The DS1 line signal is pre-equalized at the transmitter so that DS1 line  
pulses are the correct amplitude and shape when they reach the Network  
Interface. The amount of equalization necessary is determined by the  
distance to the Network Interface (when the endpoint supplies a DSX-1  
interface) and also by the type of wiring used to connect to the Network  
Interface. The types of wiring allowed are 22 gauge ABAM (shielded  
twisted pair) cable, 24 gauge Premises Distribution System (PDS) wiring,  
and 26 gauge PDS wiring.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-15  
Table 6-15. Distance to DSX-1 Interface (feet  
Equalizer  
Setting  
22 AWG ABAM & 24 AWG PDS  
1 to 133  
26 AWG PDS  
1
2
3
4
5
0 to 90  
133 to 266  
90 to 180  
180 to 270  
270 to 360  
360 to 450  
266 to 399  
399 to 533  
533 to 655  
NOTE:  
The line equalization setting defaults to 2 and remains in effect until  
changed by administration. Because incorrect equalizer settings  
cause a potentially higher error rate on the DS1 facility, it is  
necessary to provide the correct settings based on the distance to  
the Network interface.  
If it is a TN574 circuit pack, the default for all facilities is 1.  
DS1CONV-2 Line Compensation Enter the line compensation (1 to 5)  
in the A, B, C, and D columns under the DS1 Converter Facilities heading  
for each DS1 facility connected to ENDPOINT-2 (see Table 6-15). The DS1  
line signal is pre-equalized at the transmitter so that DS1 line pulses are  
the correct amplitude and shape when they reach the Network Interface.  
The amount of equalization necessary is determined by the distance to  
the Network Interface (when the endpoint supplies a DSX-1 interface) and  
also by the type of wiring used to connect to the Network Interface. The  
types of wiring allowed are 22-gauge ABAM (shielded twisted pair) cable,  
24-gauge Premises Distribution System (PDS) wiring, and 26-gauge PDS  
wiring.  
Facility A Circuit ID Displays when the value in Facility  
Installedfor Facility A is yes. Enter up to 40 characters to identify the  
cabinet, carrier, and slot of the DS1 Converter circuit pack’s physical  
location.  
Similarly, Facility B Circuit ID, Facility C Circuit ID, and Facility D Circuit ID  
fields display for each of the DS1 Converter Facilities when yes is entered  
in the corresponding Facility Installed field.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-16  
Duplicated DS1C Converter Complex Administration  
for TN574 Circuit Packs.  
add fiber-link next  
Page 3 of 3  
FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION  
B-PNC DS1 CONVERTER (DS1CONV) ATTRIBUTES  
DS1CONV Board Location: 01C01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN574  
DS1CONV Board Location: 02C01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN574  
DS1 CONVERTER FACILITIES  
A
B
C
D
Facility Installed? yes  
Passes Far-end Clock? yes  
Digital Data Compatible? yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
Line Coding: ami-zcs ami-zcs ami-zcs  
ami-zcs  
Framing Mode: esf  
DS1CONV-1 Line Compensation: 1  
DS1CONV-2 Line Compensation: 1  
esf  
1
1
esf  
1
1
esf  
1
1
Facility B Circuit ID: 01112343  
Screen 6-4. Fiber Link Administration form for TN574 Circuit Pack (Duplicated DS1  
Converter Complex Administration) (page 3 of 3)  
Page 3 appears when the Is one endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter Complex  
field is "yes" and duplication is enabled.  
NOTE:  
When you administer DS1 Converter TN1654 circuit packs, different fields  
display.  
For field definitions of the fields displayed on page 3 of the Fiber Link  
Administration form, refer back to the previous section.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-17  
DS1 Converter Complex Administration for T1 TN1654 Circuit Packs.  
add fiber-link next  
Page 2 of 3  
FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION  
A-PNC DS1 CONVERTER (DS1CONV) ATTRIBUTES  
DS1CONV Board Location: 01B01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN1654  
DS1CONV Board Location: 02B01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN1654  
DS1 CONVERTER FACILITIES  
A
B
C
D
Facility Installed? yes  
Bit Rate: 1.544  
yes  
no  
no  
Facility Startup Idle Code: 11101000  
Line Coding: ami-zcs ami-zcs ami-zcs  
Framing Mode:  
ami-zcs  
DS1CONV-1 Line Compensation: 1  
DS1CONV-2 Line Compensation: 1  
1
1
1
1
1
1
Facility A Circuit ID: 09876543  
Facility B Circuit ID: 234567889  
Screen 6-5. Fiber Link Administration form for T1 TN1654 Circuit Pack (DS1 Converter  
Complex Administration) (page 2 of 3)  
The following unique fields display when administering a T1 TN1654 DS1  
Converter.  
Bit Rate Displays when the DS1 Converter circuit pack is TN1654.  
Enter either 1.544 for domestic T1 operation or 2.048 for international E1  
operation.  
NOTE:  
Since one bit rate applies for all facilities within the same DS1  
Converter complex, the Bit Ratefield displays only under  
Facility A.  
Facility Startup Idle CodeDisplays when the DS1 Converter circuit  
pack is TN1654. Enter 8 digits, each digit must be 0 or 1. The second digit  
must be 1. Default is 11101000. You can administer this field on a per  
circuit pack basis. This is the idle code used when a TN1654 first  
establishes a link on a T1/E1 facility. The initial idle code used by the  
TN1654 is overwritten by the center stage switch to an “all ones” pattern  
once framing is established on that T1/E1 facility.  
Framing Mode For TN1654 with 1.544 Mbps Bit Rate, this is a  
display-only field.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-18  
Duplicated DS1 Converter Complex Administration for T1 TN1654 Circuit  
Packs.  
add fiber-link next  
Page 2 of 3  
FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION  
A-PNC DS1 CONVERTER (DS1CONV) ATTRIBUTES  
DS1CONV Board Location: 01B01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN1654  
DS1CONV Board Location: 02B01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN1654  
DS1 CONVERTER FACILITIES  
A
B
C
D
Facility Installed? yes  
Bit Rate: 2.048  
yes  
yes  
no  
Facility Startup Idle Code: 11101000  
Line Coding: hdb3  
hdb3  
hdb3  
hdb3  
CRC? yes  
Line Termination:  
Facility A Circuit ID: 09876543  
Facility B Circuit ID: 234567889  
Facility C Circuit ID: 434566335  
Screen 6-6. Fiber Link Administration form for E1 TN1654 Circuit Pack (DS1 Converter  
Complex Administration) (page 2 of 3)  
The following unique fields display when administering a TN1654 DS1 Converter.  
Bit Rate A display-only field for TN1654 entered on page 3 of the form.  
See previous section. 1.544 indicates domestic T1 operation and 2.048  
indicates international E1 operation.  
DS1 Converter Complex Administration for E1 TN1654 Circuit Packs .  
The following unique fields display when administering a E1 TN1654 DS1  
Converter.  
Bit Rate Displays when the DS1 Converter circuit pack is TN1654.  
Enter either 1.544 for domestic T1 operation or 2.048 for international E1  
operation.  
NOTE:  
Since one bit rate applies for all facilities within the same DS1  
Converter complex, Bit Ratedisplays only under Facility A. To  
activate the desired Bit Rate, the toggle switch on the circuit pack  
must be set and it must correspond to the Bit Rate.  
Idle Code MSB(1) ... LSB(8) Displays when the DS1 Converter circuit  
pack is TN1654. Enter 8 digits, each digit must be 0 or 1. The second digit  
must be 1. Default is 11101000. You can administer this field on a per  
circuit pack basis.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-19  
CRC Displays when the DS1 Converter circuit pack is TN1654 and the  
Bit Rate is 2.048 Mbps. Enter yes to receive a “yellow 2” alarm for E1  
operation. Default is no. You can administer this field on a per circuit pack  
basis.  
Line Termination A display-only field for DS1 Converter circuit packs  
that are TN1654 and have a Bit Rate of 2.048 Mbps. It identifies facility  
connections as CEPT 75 ohm coaxial or 120 ohm CEPT twisted pair.  
Duplicated DS1 Converter Complex Administration for E1 TN1654 Circuit  
Packs.  
See the previous sections for screen layout and field definitions.  
add fiber-link next  
Page 3 of 3  
FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION  
B-PNC DS1 CONVERTER (DS1CONV) ATTRIBUTES  
DS1CONV Board Location: 01C01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN1654  
DS1CONV Board Location: 02C01  
DS1CONV Board Type: TN1654  
DS1 CONVERTER FACILITIES  
A
B
C
D
Facility Installed? yes  
Bit Rate: 2.048  
yes  
yes  
no  
Facility Startup Idle Code: 11101000  
Line Coding: hdb3  
hdb3  
hdb3  
hdb3  
CRC? yes  
Line Termination:  
Facility A Circuit ID: 0AABB01  
Facility B Circuit ID: 0CCDD02  
Facility C Circuit ID: 0EEFF03  
Screen 6-7. Fiber Line Administration form for B-PNC DS1 Converter  
(DS1CONV) Attributes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Fiber Link Administration  
Administer Fiber Links  
A
A-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
B
B-1  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
B
This appendix provides information to correct some problems when upgrading a  
system. The information in this appendix is a compilation of the most commonly  
reported troubles received by Tier 4 Support at Lucent Technologies. For general  
information on troubleshooting associated with maintenance procedures, see  
one of the following references:  
Chapter 5, Alarms, Errors and Troubleshooting, of the Release 8.2,  
Maintenance for R8r manual  
This appendix may be updated with new information at each product/document  
release. If you have troubleshooting or error recovery information that you think  
would be valuable to other technicians, please FAX your comments to us at  
1-303-538-1741 (United States).  
This appendix is organized into three main sections, as described below:  
New for Release 8 – provides information on introductions for Release 8  
that might result in upgrade problems  
Troubleshooting Guidelines – provides general procedures to try before  
escalating a problem  
Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades – provides specific troubleshooting  
procedures for common upgrade problems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
New for Release 8  
B
B-2  
New for Release 8  
ATM PNC Duplication (ATM PNC-DUP)  
Mass Storage System  
Control LAN (C-LAN)  
Control LAN (C-LAN)  
System Links (SYS-LINK)  
ATM PNC Duplication (ATM PNC-DUP)  
The PNC-DUP maintenance object tracks the health of the active and standby  
PNCs, controls planned and spontaneous interchanges, and manages related  
functions such as double call refresh and unrefresh, antithrashing, and so on.  
The main responsibility of PNC-DUP is to recover the system to full service in the  
event of a fault. In the event of multiple faults, PNC-DUP does its best to  
maximize service continuity.  
In systems with the Critical Reliability option, the following components, which  
together comprise the Port Network Connectivity (PNC), are duplicated:  
ATM-Expansion Interface (ATM-EI) circuit packs in the port networks (PNs)  
Fiber-optic cables connecting the above circuit packs to the ATM Switch  
Interface Modules  
ATM Switch  
Although not part of the PNC, Tone-Clock circuit packs are also duplicated in  
each PN. All systems have one Processor Port Network (PPN). ATM PNC systems  
can have up to 43 EPNs.  
PNC duplication architecture utilizes an active/standby duplication scheme in  
which one complete set of PNC components supports call processing, while the  
duplicate PNC is held in reserve. All calls on the active PNC are simultaneously  
set up, or shadowed, on the standby PNC in order for it to be capable of instantly  
assuming active status when necessary, allowing for interchanges without  
service disruption (in the case of single faults).  
PNC duplication does not introduce any additional types of hardware or  
hardware faults, and there are no tests associated with the PNC-DUP MO.  
Instead, its error log entries contain useful information about the occurrence and  
causes of interchanges in order to facilitate diagnosis of problems, which can  
then be addressed by using the documentation for the individual maintenance  
object involved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
New for Release 8  
B
B-3  
The following PNC duplication-related commands and their output screens are  
fully described in Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands, of the DEFINITY ECS  
Release 8 Maintenance for Release R8r book. The associated PNC-DUP  
maintenance object is found in Chapter 9 of the same reference.  
status pnc  
Displays information about the operational status of both  
PNCs including state of health, alarms, busyouts and locks,  
and so on.  
reset pnc  
interchange  
Used to initiate a demand PNC interchange. If the standby  
is healthy (state of health indexes all zero), there is no  
effect on service. Otherwise, calls may be dropped.  
set pnc  
Used to lock or unlock the active PNC, preventing  
interchanges. It does not interfere with double call setup.  
busyout pnc  
Removes the standby PNC from service.  
ATM Expansion Interface (ATM-EI)  
The ATM-EI maintenance object covers the ATM circuit pack administered as an  
ATM-Port Network Connectivity (PNC) Expansion Interface (ATM-EI). The ATM-EI  
provides PNC between a DEFINTY PPN and all the EPNs through the ATM  
switch.  
The circuit packs listed below are ATM-EI boards if they are administered to  
serve the ATM Port Network Connectivity (ATM-PNC) for DEFINITY.  
Echo  
Circuit pack  
TN2305B  
Fiber  
Multi mode  
Single mode  
cancellation  
Y
Y
TN2306B  
Mass Storage System  
The Mass Storage System (MSS) provides non-volatile storage for system  
software, translation data, announcement data and program update data. As  
shown in the figure below, the MSS consists of a Host Adapter circuit on the  
UN332C MSS-Network Control circuit pack (MSSNET), a Small Computer System  
Interface (SCSI) bus, a TN2211 Optical Drive circuit pack or a TN1656 Tape  
Drive circuit pack, and the TN1657 Disk Drive circuit pack. The Disk Drive acts  
as the primary storage device. The TN2211 Optical Drive or TN1656 Tape Drive  
serves as a bDaocwknulopaddferovmicWewawn.Sdomaasnuaalrse.cmomo.vAallbMleanmuaelsdSieuamrchfoArndsDyoswtenmloadd.ata.  
         
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
New for Release 8  
B
B-4  
Troubleshooting details for the Mass Storage System may be found under the  
R-MEDIA maintenance object in Chapter 9, Maintenance Object Repair  
Procedures, of the Release 8.2, Maintenance for R8r manual. Additional related  
maintenance objects associated with the Mass Storage System include  
STO-DATA, DISK, and H-ADAPTR.  
Red  
Green  
Yellow  
fpdf2211 KLC 010600  
Figure B-1. TN2211 faceplate  
The system is usually booted from the boot image stored on disk. The save  
translation and save announcements commands save to disk the  
memory-resident translation data and TN750-resident announcement data,  
respectively. The backup disk command copies data from the disk to the  
removable media for backup storage. The restore disk command copies data  
from the removable media back to disk. All MSS components reside in the SPE,  
or PPN control carrier (carrier A for a simplex SPE, carriers A and B for a  
duplicated SPE).  
The removable media circuit pack contains SCSI bus terminators, a -48V to +12V  
power converter, an industry standard SCSI-based removable media drive, and  
interface circuitry to the private bus to control the LEDs, detect the presence of  
the circuit pack, and identify the vintage of the hardware.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
New for Release 8  
B
B-5  
A -48V to +12V converter circuit on the TN2211 Optical Drive circuit pack  
provides power for both the Optical Drive and the Disk Drive. The presence of  
+12V on these circuit packs is monitored separately by maintenance software so  
that a failure of the +12V converter on the Removable Media circuit pack can be  
identified or ruled out as the source of the problem when the Disk Drive loses  
+12V power.  
The Host Adapter circuit pack, Removable Media Drive circuit pack, and Disk  
circuit pack are treated as separate, but related, maintenance objects  
(H-ADAPTR, R-MEDIA, and DISK). Since the Disk circuit pack is controlled by  
SCSI commands which are generated by the Host Adapter, problems with the  
Host Adapter can prevent communications with the Disk. Whenever the Host  
Adapter is taken out of service by the busy-out host-adapter command, or due  
to failure of a critical Host Adapter test, the Removable Media (R-MEDIA) and  
Disk (DISK) maintenance objects are also placed in a maintenance busyout  
state.  
Switch  
processor  
System  
memory  
SPE  
System bus  
SCSI bus  
MSSNET  
circuit  
pack  
Host  
adapter  
Private bus  
Mass  
storage  
system  
+12V  
Disk  
circuit  
pack  
Optical  
drive  
circuit  
pack  
Disk  
drive  
Tape  
drive  
Optical  
drive  
Tape  
circuit  
pack  
Optical  
disk  
Disk  
Tape  
Figure B-2. Mass Storage System interactions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
New for Release 8  
B
B-6  
Control LAN (C-LAN)  
The TN799 Control LAN (C-LAN) packet port circuit pack provides TCP/IP  
connection to adjuncts applications such as CMS, Intuity, and DCS Networking.  
The C-LAN circuit pack has 1 10baseT Ethernet connection and up to 16 DS0  
physical interfaces for PPP connections. Putting multiple C-LAN circuit packs into  
a -system gives additional TCP/IP capacity. In addition to the TCP/IP functionality,  
CLAN extends the ISDN capabilities for csi models by providing Packet bus  
access.  
A remote socket control link (RSCL) links the C-LAN and the SPE to pass call  
control and other management information. Since one link serves all the ports on  
the circuit pack, maintenance of the RSCL is part of the C-LAN circuit pack  
maintenance.  
The C-LAN TN799 circuit pack combines the functions of the PGATE and PI  
circuit packs into one circuit pack. The PGATE or PI can be used with the C-LAN  
to create an X.25-to-TCP/IP bridge for adjunct and DCS connectivity.  
Maintenance objects associated under the Control LAN area include CLAN-BD  
(Control LAN Circuit Pack), ETH-PT (Control LAN Ethernet), and PPP-PT (Control  
LAN Packet/Port).  
System Links (SYS-LINK)  
System Links are packet links that originate at the Packet Interface board and  
traverse various hardware components to specific endpoints. The hardware  
components involved on the forward and reverse routes can be different,  
depending upon the configuration and switch administration. Various types of  
links are defined by their endpoints:  
EAL  
Expansion Archangel Link terminating at an Expansion Interface board.  
This link carries CCMS messages.  
INL  
Indirect Neighbor Link terminating at a Switch Node Interface board  
PACL  
PNC ATM Control Link terminating at a PNC ATM EI board. This link carries  
ATM signaling commands from CaPro to the remote TN2238 (ATM-EI)  
boards.  
PGC  
PRI  
Packet Gateway Call-Control Link terminating at a Packet Gateway board  
ISDN PRI D-Channel Link terminating at a Universal DS1 board  
Remote Socket Control Link terminating at a C-LAN board  
Remote Socket Link teminating at a C-LAN board  
RSCL  
RSL  
SAP  
X.25  
System (Access) Port Link terminating at a Packet Data port  
BX.25 Link terminating at a Packet Gateway port  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
Troubleshooting Guidelines  
B
B-7  
The system links (SYS-LINK) maintenance object records all errors encountered  
on the links. Most of these events are not extraordinary unless they occur with an  
alarming frequency. The events are logged as they occur, leaving a “trail” to help  
analyze abnormal behavior exhibited by the endpoints attached to the links or  
the links themselves.  
When a link goes down, an alarm is raised immediately. For EAL, INL, and PACL  
link types a MINOR alarm is raised; for all other link types a WARNING alarm is  
raised. Other alarming conditions that do not cause the link to go down get a  
WARNING alarm, regardless of the link type.  
Troubleshooting Guidelines  
Before escalating a problem, try the troubleshooting procedures listed in this  
appendix. Also try the general troubleshooting procedures below.  
1. Check the software compatibility on the Software Release Letter. Be sure  
the software that you are upgrading from is compatible with the software  
that you are upgrading to.  
2. Check the Release 8 software tape (removable media) for defects. Type  
test removable-media UUCSS long and press Enter, if you are using R8  
software. If you are using R7 or prior software, type test tape UUCSS long  
and press Enter. If the tape (removable media) has errors, replace it.  
NOTE:  
Do not run the test removable-media short command, or the test  
tape short command. This test cannot find all of the bad sectors  
that may be present on the tape (removable media).  
3. If upgrading from G3V4 and earlier systems to a Release 8r, check the  
vintage of the disk drive. The disk drive must be TN1657 Vintage 4 or later.  
4. Always use the Software Release Letter that accompanies the software  
tape (removable media). If the letter is not available, use the appropriate  
chapter in this book.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
Troubleshooting Guidelines  
B
B-8  
Removable Media Troubleshooting Guidelines  
Use the following guidelines when troubleshooting and resolving removable  
media (R-MEDIA) problems.  
1. Avoid saving translations or announcements on the backup removable  
drive until all other removable media and Host Adapter problems have  
been resolved.  
If there is something wrong with the Mass Storage System, an attempt to  
save translations or announcements could destroy a good copy of the files  
on the removable media.  
2. In a system configured with duplicated SPEs, the tests run on the standby  
removable media circuit pack are identical to those run on the active  
removable media circuit pack. Communications between the active and  
standby SPEs is provided by the DUPINT circuit pack for both the control  
channel and memory shadowing. Therefore, problems with the DUPINT  
circuit pack may affect maintenance tests of the standby removable media  
circuit pack.  
3. Check the error log for power related problems and refer to the  
maintenance documentation on power.  
4. The data on the removable media will likely be destroyed if:  
The optical disk is removed when the amber LED on the removable  
media circuit pack is on.  
The removable media circuit pack is removed while the amber LED  
on the removable media circuit pack is on.  
Power is removed from the removable media while the amber LED  
on the removable media circuit pack is on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
B
Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades  
B-9  
Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades  
The subsections to follow present specific procedures for common upgrade  
problems, listed below:  
No Translations After Upgrade  
One Side Upgrades, the Other Side Does Not (No Shadowing); Active Side  
Has Correct R8 Load  
Tone Clock Does Not Function in New EPN  
Translation Corruption Detected  
Unsuccessful Translation Read on System Restart (If Upgrading  
From Pre-R7.1)  
Software Incompatibility  
Re-install the ISDN-PRI Links (Only for Failed Upgrades)  
No Translations After Upgrade  
This problem usually means that the save translation command, performed  
during the upgrade, was not successful. To recover:  
1. Install the backup tape (removable media) into the tape (removable  
media) drive. This tape (removable media) must contain the original  
translations before the upgrade started.  
2. Verify that the software is Release 8 and that shadowing is up.  
3. Copy the translations from the backup tape (removable media) to the disk.  
Typ e copy translation disk both and press Enter. This copies the  
translations from tape (removable media) to disk and takes about 30  
minutes.  
4. Type reset system 3 and press Enter.  
5. When the reboot is finished, the system should contain all of the  
translations from the backup tape (removable media).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
B
Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades  
B-10  
One Side Upgrades, the Other Side Does Not (No  
Shadowing); Active Side Has Correct R8 Load  
This problem indicates that the software version on the standby side is incorrect.  
1. Perform a “hot-swap” of the disk drives (move the standby disk to the  
active side and vice versa).  
2. Insert the Release 8 software removable media into the active optical disk  
drive.  
3. Type list configure software and press Enter to verify the removable  
media contains the required Release 8 software.  
4. If the software version on the removable media is incorrect, type restore  
disk full active and press Enter. This copies the entire backup removable  
media to disk and takes about 30 minutes. Do not use the “restore disk  
install” command.  
5. Perform a “hot-swap” of the disk drives (move the standby disk to the  
active side and vice versa).  
6. Perform a power-down reset on the standby side only. Disconnect the  
power cords (first from the left side and then the right side) from the power  
supplies on both sides of the standby SPE.  
Restore Disk Install or Restore Disk Full Fails  
This problem assumes that an MSS error was encountered, a restore disk full  
failed, or a restore disk install failed.  
1. This usually indicates that a bad removable media was used. To verify:  
a. Insert the suspect removable media into the removable media  
drive.  
b. Type test tape UUCSS long and press Enter.  
NOTE:  
Do not run the “test tape short” command. The short test  
cannot find all of the bad sectors that may be present on the  
removable media.  
c. If the removable media has errors, replace it.  
2. Insert a good Release 8 software removable media into the removable  
media drive.  
3. Test the removable media before starting the upgrade. Type test  
removable-media UUCSS long and press Enter, if you are using R8  
software. If you are using R7 or earlier software, type test tape UUCSS  
long and press Enter.  
NOTE:  
Do not run the test removable-media short command, or the test  
tape short command. The short test cannot find all of the bad  
sDeocwtonlrosadthfraomt mWawyw.bSoempanreuasles.ncotmo.nAltlhMeantuaaplseS(eraercmh oAvndabDolewnmloeadd.ia).  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
B
Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades  
B-11  
Message Waiting Lamps On (After Removing an  
EPN)  
All affected port-related translations were not unadministered before removing an  
EPN cabinet.  
1. Type clear amw all <extension> and press Enter. This clears the message  
waiting lamp for the specified extension.  
2. Repeat the command for each extension with a lit message waiting lamp.  
Tone Clock Does Not Function in New EPN  
1. If the existing system is pre-G3V4 and contains TN768 Tone-Clock circuit  
packs, remove the NETCON, PI, and tone translations before starting the  
upgrade. The active tone clock in 0x1c cannot be properly inserted while  
PI translations exist from the old carrier.  
2. Add the translations again after the upgrade.  
Translation Corruption Detected  
This usually means that the translations were not successfully backed up to the  
translation card or that the current software version may not be compatible with  
the new software version.  
NOTE:  
The Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) should be disabled before you  
save translations prior to an upgrade.  
1. Repeat the upgrade with the TTI disabled.  
Unsuccessful Translation Read on System Restart  
(If Upgrading From Pre-R7.1)  
1. Set the PPN circuit breaker to OFF.  
2. Install all old circuit packs: TN790, TN777B, TN765(s), and TN778.  
3. Insert the original translation card (or backup translation card) into the  
TN777B.  
4. Set the PPN circuit breaker to ON. This should correct the translation  
corruption problem.  
5. Contect your Lucent Technologies representative for help in repeating the  
upgrade.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Troubleshooting an Upgrade  
B
Troubleshooting Release 8 Upgrades  
B-12  
Software Incompatibility  
If these procedures do not clear the corruption problem, then the software  
versions may be incompatible. You may need to upgrade to an interim software  
version before upgrading to the final software version.  
1. Consult the remediation that came with the upgrade software.  
2. Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for this information.  
Re-install the ISDN-PRI Links (Only for Failed  
Upgrades)  
If your upgrade failed and you need to re-install the ISDN-PRI links, use this  
procedure.  
1. Type add data-module [PI ext] and press Enter.  
2. Type the information in the fields based on the information that you  
entered earlier.  
3. Type change communication-interface links and press Enter.  
4. Type the information in the fields based on the information that you  
entered earlier with one exception. Leave the Enablefield setting as it is.  
5. Type change communication-interface processor-channels and press  
Enter.  
6. Type the information in the fields based on the information that you  
entered earlier.  
7. Type change communication-interface links and press Enter.  
8. Type the information in the Enablefield based on the information that you  
entered earlier.  
9. Type save translation and press Enter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Access Security Gateway  
C
C-1  
Access Security Gateway  
C
This appendix provides information on how to administer Access Security  
Gateway (ASG). ASG employs a challenge/response protocol to confirm the  
validity of a user and reduce the opportunity for unauthorized access. ASG  
authenication will be imposed for Lucent services logins as indicated below:  
init - all types of access require ASG authenication  
inads - all types of access require ASG authenication  
craft - if accessing remotely, ASG authenication is required.  
NOTE:  
Craft login sessions from a direct connect management terminal continue  
to rely on password authenication.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Access Security Gateway  
Using the ASG Mobile  
C
C-2  
Using the ASG Mobile  
1. Double click on the ASG Mobile V1.1 on your desktop and an ASG Mobile  
V1.1 Login window appears.  
2. In the Tech IDfield, type your login ID, which is the name of the attached  
file (without the “.asg”). Your login ID is the same as your Lucent login (or  
an abbreviated part of it).  
3. Type the password twice. Note that the password is case-sensitive.  
NOTE:  
Your new password will be sent to you in a separate email.  
4. Click the OK button and an ASG Mobile V1.1 Authentication window  
appears.  
5. Use your communications package (for example, DNA, ProComm, or  
TerraNova) to dial the switch you need to contact.  
6. Log into your communications package window as either init, inads, or  
craft. Instead of a password prompt, a seven-digit (challenge) number  
appears in the window of your communications package.  
7. Move to the ASG Mobile V1.1 Authentication window.  
8. Type the 10-digit Product ID in the Equipment IDfield. The default ID is  
10 zeros (0000000000).  
9. Type init, inads, or craft in the Equipment Loginfield. The craft login ID  
is the default.  
10. Type the challenge number (from your communications package window)  
into the Challengefield. Do not use the “-” character.  
11. Type the trouble ticket number in the Ticket Numberfield. If there is no  
ticket number, you can use this field as a one-word comment field or leave  
it blank.  
12. Click the Start button. The Activity Statusfield displays “Started” and  
the Responsefield displays a new seven-digit number.  
13. Move to your communications package window.  
14. Type the new seven-digit (response) number in the Responsefield. Do  
not use the “-” character.  
DEFINITY ECS verifies the response. If correct, DEFINITY logs you on. If  
the response is incorrect, return to step 1. If this is the third rejection, see  
the maintenance book for your system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-1  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
Numerics  
800 service  
A service in the United States that allows incoming calls from certain areas to an assigned number  
for a flat-rate charge based on usage.  
A
AA  
Archangel. See angel.  
AAC  
ATM access concentrator  
AAR  
See Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR).  
abandoned call  
An incoming call in which the caller hangs up before the call is answered.  
Abbreviated Dialing (AD)  
A feature that allows callers to place calls by dialing just one or two digits.  
AC  
1. Alternating current.  
2. See Administered Connection (AC).  
AAR  
Automatic Alternate Routing  
ACA  
See Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA).  
ACB  
See Automatic Callback (ACB).  
ACD  
See Automatic Call Distribution (ACD).  
ACD agent  
See agent.  
ACU  
See Automatic calling unit (ACU)  
ACW  
See after-call work (ACW) mode.  
access code  
A 1-, 2-, or 3-digit dial code used to activate or cancel a feature, or access an outgoing trunk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-2  
access endpoint  
Either a nonsignaling channel on a DS1 interface or a nonsignaling port on an analog tie-trunk  
circuit pack that is assigned a unique extension.  
access tie trunk  
A trunk that connects a main communications system with a tandem communications system in an  
electronic tandem network (ETN). An access tie trunk can also be used to connect a system or  
tandem to a serving office or service node. Also called access trunk.  
access trunk  
See access tie trunk.  
ACCUNET  
A trademarked name for a family of digital services offered by AT&T in the United States.  
ACD  
See Automatic Call Distribution (ACD). ACD also refers to a work state in which an agent is on  
an ACD call.  
ACD work mode  
See work mode.  
active-notification association  
A link that is initiated by an adjunct, allowing it to receive event reports for a specific switch entity,  
such as an outgoing call.  
active-notification call  
A call for which event reports are sent over an active-notification association (communication  
channel) to the adjunct. Sometimes referred to as a monitored call.  
active notification domain  
VDN or ACD split extension for which event notification has been requested.  
ACU  
See Automatic calling unit (ACU).  
AD  
See Abbreviated Dialing (AD).  
ADAP  
AUDIX Data Acquisition Package  
ADC  
See analog-to-digital converter (ADC).  
adjunct  
A processor that does one or more tasks for another processor and that is optional in the  
configuration of the other processor. See also application.  
adjunct-control association  
A relationship initiated by an application via Third Party Make Call, the Third Party Take Control, or  
Domain (Station) Control capabilities to set up calls and control calls already in progress.  
adjunct-controlled call  
Call that can be controlled using an adjunct-control association. Call must have been originated  
via Third Party Make Call or Domain (Station) Control capabilities or must have been taken control  
of via Third Party Take Control or Domain (Station) Control capabilities.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-3  
adjunct-controlled split  
An ACD split that is administered to be under adjunct control. Agents logged into such splits must  
do all telephony work, ACD login/ logout, and changes of work mode through the adjunct (except  
for auto-available adjunct-controlled splits, whose agents may not log in/out or change work  
mode).  
adjunct-monitored call  
An adjunct-controlled call, active-notification call, or call that provides event reporting over a  
domain-control association.  
Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI)  
A recommendation for interfacing adjuncts and communications systems, based on the CCITT  
Q.932 specification for layer 3.  
ADM  
Asynchronous data module  
administer  
To access and change parameters associated with the services or features of a system.  
Administered Connection (AC)  
A feature that allows the switch to automatically establish and maintain end-to-end connections  
between access endpoints (trunks) and/or data endpoints (data modules).  
administration group  
See capability group.  
administration terminal  
A terminal that is used to administer and maintain a system. See also terminal.  
Administration Without Hardware (AWOH)  
A feature that allows administration of ports without associated terminals or other hardware.  
ADU  
See asynchronous data unit (ADU).  
AE  
See access endpoint.  
after-call work (ACW) mode  
A mode in which agents are unavailable to receive ACD calls. Agents enter the ACW mode to  
perform ACD-related activities such as filling out a form after an ACD call.  
AG  
ASAI Gateway  
agent  
A person who receives calls directed to a split. A member of an ACD hunt group or ACD split. Also  
called an ACD agent.  
agent report  
A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured agents.  
AIM  
Asynchronous interface module  
AIOD  
Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-4  
ALBO  
Automatic Line Build Out  
All trunks busy (ATB)  
ALM-ACK  
Alarm acknowledge  
American Standard Code for Information Interchange  
See ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange).  
AMW  
Automatic Message Waiting  
AN  
Analog  
analog  
The representation of information by continuously variable physical quantities such as amplitude,  
frequency, and phase. See also digital.  
analog data  
Data that is transmitted over a digital facility in analog (PCM) form. The data must pass through a  
modem either at both ends or at a modem pool at the distant end.  
analog telephone  
A telephone that receives acoustic voice signals and sends analog electrical signals along the  
telephone line. Analog telephones are usually served by a single wire pair (tip and ring). The  
model-2500 telephone set is a typical example of an analog telephone.  
analog-to-digital converter (ADC)  
A device that converts an analog signal to digital form. See also digital-to-analog converter  
(DAC).  
angel  
A microprocessor located on each port card in a processor port network (PPN). The angel uses  
the control-channel message set (CCMS) to manage communications between the port card and  
the archangel on the controlling switch-processing element (SPE). The angel also monitors the  
status of other microprocessors on a port card and maintains error counters and thresholds.  
ANI  
See Automatic Number Identification (ANI).  
ANSI  
American National Standards Institute. A United States professional/technical association  
supporting a variety of standards.  
answerback code  
A number used to respond to a page from a code-calling or loudspeaker-paging system, or to  
retrieve a parked call.  
AOL  
Attendant-offered load  
AP  
Applications processor  
APLT  
Advanced Private-Line Termination  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-5  
appearance  
A software process that is associated with an extension and whose purpose is to supervise a call.  
An extension can have multiple appearances. Also called call appearance, line appearance, and  
occurrence. See also call appearance.  
application  
An adjunct that requests and receives ASAI services or capabilities. One or more applications can  
reside on a single adjunct. However, the switch cannot distinguish among several applications  
residing on the same adjunct and treats the adjunct, and all resident applications, as a single  
application. The terms application and adjunct are used interchangeably throughout this  
document.  
applications processor  
A micro-computer based, program controlled computer providing application services for the  
DEFINITY switch. The processor is used with several user-controlled applications such as traffic  
analysis and electronic documentation.  
application service element  
See capability group.  
architecture  
ARS  
See Automatic Route Selection (ARS).  
ASAI  
See Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI)  
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange)  
The standard code for representing characters in digital form. Each character is represented by an  
8-bit code (including parity bit).  
association  
A communication channel between adjunct and switch for messaging purposes. An active  
association is one that applies to an existing call on the switch or to an extension on the call.  
asynchronous data transmission  
A method of transmitting data in which each character is preceded by a start bit and followed by a  
stop bit, thus permitting data characters to be transmitted at irregular intervals. This type  
transmission is advantageous when transmission is not regular (characters typed at a keyboard).  
Also called asynchronous transmission. See also synchronous data transmission.  
asynchronous data unit (ADU)  
A device that allows direct connection between RS-232C equipment and a digital switch.  
asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)  
A packet-like switching technology in which data is transmitted in fixed-size (53-byte) cells. ATM  
provides high-speed access for data communication in LAN, campus, and WAN environments.  
ATB  
See All trunks busy (ATB).  
ATD  
See Attention dial (ATD).  
attendant  
A person at a console who provides personalized service for incoming callers and voice-services  
users by performing switching and signaling operations. See also attendant console.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-6  
ATM  
See asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).  
attendant console  
The workstation used by an attendant. The attendant console allows the attendant to originate a  
call, answer an incoming call, transfer a call to another extension or trunk, put a call on hold, and  
remove a call from hold. Attendants using the console can also manage and monitor some system  
operations. Also called console. See also attendant.  
Attention dial (ATD)  
A command in the Hayes modem command set for asynchronous modems.  
Audio Information Exchange (AUDIX)  
A fully integrated voice-mail system. Can be used with a variety of communications systems to  
provide call-history data, such as subscriber identification and reason for redirection.  
AUDIX  
See Audio Information Exchange (AUDIX).  
auto-in trunk group  
Trunk group for which the CO processes all of the digits for an incoming call. When a CO seizes a  
trunk from an auto-in trunk group, the switch automatically connects the trunk to the destination —  
typically an ACD split where, if no agents are available, the call goes into a queue in which callers  
are answered in the order in which they arrive.  
Auto-In Work mode  
One of four agent work modes: the mode in which an agent is ready to process another call as  
soon as the current call is completed.  
Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR)  
A feature that routes calls to other than the first-choice route when facilities are unavailable.***  
Automatic Callback (ACB)  
A feature that enables internal callers, upon reaching a busy extension, to have the system  
automatically connect and ring both parties when the called party becomes available.  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)  
A feature that answers calls, and then, depending on administered instructions, delivers  
messages appropriate for the caller and routes the call to an agent when one becomes available.  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) split  
A method of routing calls of a similar type among agents in a call center. Also, a group of  
extensions that are staffed by agents trained to handle a certain type of incoming call.  
Automatic calling unit (ACU)  
A device that places a telephone call.  
Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA)  
A feature that tracks calls of unusual duration to facilitate troubleshooting. A high number of very  
short calls or a low number of very long calls may signify a faulty trunk.  
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)  
Representation of the calling number, for display or for further use to access information about the  
caller. Available with Signaling System 7.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-7  
automatic restoration  
A service that restores disrupted connections between access endpoints (nonsignaling trunks)  
and data endpoints (devices that connect the switch to data terminal and/or communications  
equipment). Restoration is done within seconds of a service disruption so that critical data  
applications can remain operational.  
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)  
A feature that allows the system to automatically choose the least-cost way to send a toll call.  
automatic trunk  
A trunk that does not require addressing information because the destination is predetermined. A  
request for service on the trunk, called a seizure, is sufficient to route the call. The normal  
destination of an automatic trunk is the communications-system attendant group. Also called  
automatic incoming trunk and automatic tie trunk.  
AUX  
Auxiliary  
auxiliary equipment  
Equipment used for optional system features, such as Loudspeaker Paging and Music-on-Hold.  
auxiliary trunk  
A trunk used to connect auxiliary equipment, such as radio-paging equipment, to a  
communications system.  
Aux-Work mode  
A work mode in which agents are unavailable to receive ACD calls. Agents enter Aux-Work mode  
when involved in non-ACD activities such as taking a break, going to lunch, or placing an outgoing  
call.  
AVD  
Alternate voice/data  
AWOH  
See Administration Without Hardware (AWOH).  
AWG  
American Wire Gauge  
AWT  
Average work time  
B
B8ZS  
Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution.  
bandwidth  
The difference, expressed in hertz, between the defined highest and lowest frequencies in a  
range.  
barrier code  
A security code used with the Remote Access feature to prevent unauthorized access to the  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-8  
baud  
A unit of transmission rate equal to the number of signal events per second. See also bit rate and  
bits per second (bps).  
BCC  
See Bearer capability class (BCC).  
BCMS  
Basic Call Management System  
BCT  
See business communications terminal (BCT).  
Bearer capability class (BCC)  
Code that identifies the type of a call (for example, voice and different types of data).  
Determination of BCC is based on the caller’s characteristics for non-ISDN endpoints and on the  
Bearer Capability and Low-Layer Compatibility Information Elements of an ISDN endpoint. Current  
BCCs are 0 (voice-grade data and voice), 1 (DMI mode 1, 56 kbps data transmission), 2 (DMI  
mode 2, synchronous/asynchronous data transmission up to 19.2 kbps) 3 (DMI mode 3, 64 kbps  
circuit/packet data transmission), 4 (DMI mode 0, 64 kbps synchronous data), 5 (temporary  
signaling connection, and 6 (wideband call, 128–1984 kbps synchronous data).  
BER  
Bit error rate  
BHCC  
Busy-hour call completions  
bit (binary digit)  
One unit of information in binary notation, having two possible values: 0 or 1.  
bits per second (bps)  
The number of binary units of information that are transmitted or received per second. See also  
baud and bit rate.  
bit rate  
The speed at which bits are transmitted, usually expressed in bits per second. Also called data  
rate. See also baud and bits per second (bps).  
BLF  
Busy Lamp Field  
BN  
Billing number  
BOS  
Bit-oriented signaling  
BPN  
Billed-party number  
bps  
See bits per second (bps).  
bridge (bridging)  
The appearance of a voice terminal’s extension at one or more other voice terminals.  
BRI  
The ISDN Basic Rate Interface specification.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-9  
bridged appearance  
A call appearance on a voice terminal that matches a call appearance on another voice terminal  
for the duration of a call.  
BTU  
British Thermal Unit  
buffer  
1. In hardware, a circuit or component that isolates one electrical circuit from another. Typically, a  
buffer holds data from one circuit or process until another circuit or process is ready to accept the  
data.  
2. In software, an area of memory that is used for temporary storage.  
bus  
A multiconductor electrical path used to transfer information over a common connection from any  
of several sources to any of several destinations.  
business communications terminal (BCT)  
A digital data terminal used for business applications. A BCT can function via a data module as a  
special-purpose terminal for services provided by a processor or as a terminal for data entry and  
retrieval.  
BX.25  
A version of the CCITT X.25 protocol for data communications. BX.25 adds a fourth level to the  
standard X.25 interface. This uppermost level combines levels 4, 5, and 6 of the ISO reference  
model.  
bypass tie trunks  
A 1-way, outgoing tie trunk from a tandem switch to a main switch in an ETN. Bypass tie trunks,  
provided in limited quantities, are used as a last-choice route when all trunks to another tandem  
switch are busy. Bypass tie trunks are used only if all applicable intertandem trunks are busy.  
byte  
A sequence of (usually eight) bits processed together.  
C
CACR  
Cancellation of Authorization Code Request  
cabinet  
Housing for racks, shelves, or carriers that hold electronic equipment.  
cable  
Physical connection between two pieces of equipment (for example, data terminal and modem) or  
between a piece of equipment and a termination field.  
cable connector  
A jack (female) or plug (male) on the end of a cable. A cable connector connects wires on a cable  
to specific leads on telephone or data equipment.  
CAG  
Coverage answer group  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-10  
call appearance  
1. For the attendant console, six buttons, labeled a–f, used to originate, receive, and hold calls.  
Two lights next to the button show the status of the call appearance.  
2. For the voice terminal, a button labeled with an extension and used to place outgoing calls,  
receive incoming calls, or hold calls. Two lights next to the button show the status of the call  
appearance.  
call-control capabilities  
Capabilities (Third Party Selective Hold, Third Party Reconnect, Third Party Merge) that can be  
used in either of the Third Party Call Control ASE (cluster) subsets (Call Control and Domain  
Control).  
Call Detail Recording (CDR)  
A feature that uses software and hardware to record call data (same as CDRU).  
Call Detail Recording utility (CDRU)  
Software that collects, stores, optionally filters, and outputs call-detail records.  
Call Management System (CMS)  
An application, running on an adjunct processor, that collects information from an ACD unit. CMS  
enables customers to monitor and manage telemarketing centers by generating reports on the  
status of agents, splits, trunks, trunk groups, vectors, and VDNs, and enables customers to  
partially administer the ACD feature for a communications system.  
call-reference value (CRV)  
An identifier present in ISDN messages that associates a related sequence of messages. In ASAI,  
CRVs distinguish between associations.  
call vector  
A set of up to 15 vector commands to be performed for an incoming or internal call.  
callback call  
A call that automatically returns to a voice-terminal user who activated the Automatic Callback or  
Ringback Queuing feature.  
call-waiting ringback tone  
A low-pitched tone identical to ringback tone except that the tone decreases in the last 0.2 seconds (in the  
United States). Call-waiting ringback tone notifies the attendant that the Attendant Call Waiting feature is  
activated and that the called party is aware of the waiting call. Tones in international countries may sound  
different.  
call work code  
A number, up to 16 digits, entered by ACD agents to record the occurrence of customer-defined  
events (such as account codes, social security numbers, or phone numbers) on ACD calls.  
CAMA  
Centralized Automatic Message Accounting  
carrier  
An enclosed shelf containing vertical slots that hold circuit packs.  
carried load  
The amount of traffic served by traffic-sensitive facilities during a given interval.  
CARR-POW  
Carrier Port and Power Unit for AC Powered Systems  
CAS  
Centralized Attendant Service or Call Accounting System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-11  
CCS or hundred call seconds  
A unit of call traffic. Call traffic for a facility is scanned every 100 seconds. If the facility is busy, it is  
assumed to have been busy for the entire scan interval. There are 3600 seconds per hour. The  
Roman numeral for 100 is the capital letter C. The abbreviation for call seconds is CS. Therefore,  
100 call seconds is abbreviated CCS. If a facility is busy for an entire hour, then it is said to have  
been busy for 36 CCS. See also Erlang.  
capability  
A request or indication of an operation. For example, Third Party Make Call is a request for setting  
up a call; event report is an indication that an event has occurred.  
capability group  
Set of capabilities, determined by switch administration, that can be requested by an application.  
Capability groups denote association types. For example, Call Control is a type of association that  
allows certain functions (the ones in the capability group) to be performed over this type of  
association. Also referred to as administration groups or application service elements (ASEs).  
CA-TSC  
Call-Associated Temporary Signaling Connection  
cause value  
A value is returned in response to requests or in event reports when a denial or unexpected  
condition occurs. ASAI cause values fall into two coding standards: Coding Standard 0 includes  
any cause values that are part of AT&T and CCITT ISDN specifications; Coding standard 3  
includes any other ASAI cause values. This document uses a notation for cause value where the  
coding standard for the cause is given first, then a slash, then the cause value. Example: CS0/100  
is coding standard 0, cause value 100.  
CBC  
Call-by-call or coupled bonding conductor  
CC  
Country code  
CCIS  
Common-Channel Interoffice Signaling  
CCITT  
CCITT (Comitte Consultatif International Telephonique et Telegraphique), now called International  
Telecommunications Union (ITU). See International Telecommunications Union (ITU).  
CCMS  
Control-Channel Message Set  
CCS  
See CCS or hundred call seconds.  
CCSA  
Common-Control Switching Arrangement  
CDM  
Channel-division multiplexing  
CDOS  
Customer-dialed and operator serviced  
CDR  
See Call Detail Recording (CDR).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-12  
CDRP  
Call Detail Record Poller  
CDRR  
Call Detail Recording and Reporting  
CDRU  
See Call Detail Recording utility (CDRU).  
CEM  
Channel-expansion multiplexing  
center-stage switch (CSS)  
The central interface between the processor port network and expansion port networks in a  
CSS-connected system.  
central office (CO)  
The location housing telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and  
access to toll facilities for long-distance calling.  
central office (CO) codes  
The first three digits of a 7-digit public-network telephone number in the United States.  
central office (CO) trunk  
A telecommunications channel that provides access from the system to the public network through  
the local CO.  
CEPT1  
European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Rate 1  
channel  
1. A circuit-switched call.  
2. A communications path for transmitting voice and data.  
3. In wideband, all of the time slots (contiguous or noncontiguous) necessary to support a call.  
Example: an H0-channel uses six 64-kbps time slots.  
4. A DS0 on a T1 or E1 facility not specifically associated with a logical circuit-switched call;  
analogous to a single trunk.  
channel negotiation  
The process by which the channel offered in the Channel Identification Information Element (CIIE)  
in the SETUP message is negotiated to be another channel acceptable to the switch that receives  
the SETUP message and ultimately to the switch that sent the SETUP. Negotiation is attempted  
only if the CIIE is encoded as Preferred. Channel negotiation is not attempted for wideband calls.  
CI  
Clock input  
circuit  
1. An arrangement of electrical elements through which electric current flows.  
2. A channel or transmission path between two or more points.  
circuit pack  
A card on which electrical circuits are printed, and IC chips and electrical components are  
installed. A circuit pack is installed in a switch carrier.  
CISPR  
International Special Committee on Radio Interference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-13  
Class of Restriction (COR)  
A feature that allows up to 64 classes of call-origination and call-termination restrictions for voice  
terminals, voice-terminal groups, data modules, and trunk groups. See also Class of Service  
(COS).  
Class of Service (COS)  
A feature that uses a number to specify if voice-terminal users can activate the Automatic  
Callback, Call Forwarding All Calls, Data Privacy, or Priority Calling features. See also Class of  
Restriction (COR).  
cm  
Centimeter  
CM  
Connection Manager  
CMDR  
Centralized Message Detail Recording  
CMS  
Call Management System  
CO  
See central office (CO).  
common-control switching arrangement (CCSA)  
A private telecommunications network using dedicated trunks and a shared switching center for  
interconnecting company locations.  
communications system  
The software-controlled processor complex that interprets dialing pulses, tones, and keyboard  
characters and makes the proper connections both within the system and external to the system.  
The communications system itself consists of a digital computer, software, storage device, and  
carriers with special hardware to perform the connections. A communications system provides  
voice and data communications services, including access to public and private networks, for  
telephones and data terminals on a customer’s premises. See also switch.  
confirmation tone  
A tone confirming that feature activation, deactivation, or cancellation has been accepted.  
connectivity  
The connection of disparate devices within a single system.  
console  
See attendant console.  
contiguous  
Adjacent DS0s within one T1 or E1 facility or adjacent TDM or fiber time slots. The first and last  
TDM bus, DS0, or fiber time slots are not considered contiguous (no wraparound). For an E1  
facility with a D-channel, DS0s 15 and 17 are considered contiguous.  
control cabinet  
See control carrier.  
control carrier  
A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet that contains the SPE circuit packs and, unlike an R5r control  
carrier, port circuit packs. Also called control cabinet in a single-carrier cabinet. See also  
switch-processing element (SPE).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-14  
controlled station  
A station that is monitored and controlled via a domain-control association.  
COR  
See Class of Restriction (COR).  
COS  
See Class of Service (COS).  
coverage answer group  
A group of up to eight voice terminals that ring simultaneously when a call is redirected to it by Call  
Coverage. Any one of the group can answer the call.  
coverage call  
A call that is automatically redirected from the called party’s extension to an alternate answering  
position when certain coverage criteria are met.  
coverage path  
The order in which calls are redirected to alternate answering positions.  
coverage point  
An extension or attendant group, VDN, or ACD split designated as an alternate answering position  
in a coverage path.  
covering user  
A person at a coverage point who answers a redirected call.  
CP  
Circuit pack  
CPE  
Customer-premises equipment  
CPN  
Called-party number  
CPN/BN  
Calling-party number/billing number  
CPTR  
Call-progress-tone receiver  
CRC  
Cyclical Redundancy Checking  
critical-reliability system  
A system that has the following duplicated items: control carriers, tone clocks, EI circuit packs,  
and cabling between port networks and center-stage switch in a CSS-connected system. See also  
duplicated common control, and duplication.  
CSA  
Canadian Safety Association  
CSCC  
Compact single-carrier cabinet  
CSCN  
Center-stage control network  
CSD  
Customer-service document  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-15  
CSM  
Centralized System Management  
CSS  
See center-stage switch (CSS).  
CSSO  
Customer Services Support Organization  
CSU  
Channel service unit  
CTS  
Clear to Send  
CWC  
See call work code.  
D
DAC  
1. Dial access code or Direct Agent Calling  
2. See digital-to-analog converter (DAC).  
data channel  
A communications path between two points used to transmit digital signals.  
data-communications equipment (DCE)  
The equipment (usually a modem, data module, or packet assembler/disassembler) on the  
network side of a communications link that makes the binary serial data from the source or  
transmitter compatible with the communications channel.  
data link  
The configuration of physical facilities enabling end terminals to communicate directly with each  
other.  
data module  
An interconnection device between a BRI or DCP interface of the switch and data terminal  
equipment or data communications equipment.  
data path  
The end-to-end connection used for a data communications link. A data path is the combination of  
all elements of an interprocessor communication in a DCS.  
data port  
A point of access to a computer that uses trunks or lines for transmitting or receiving data.  
data rate  
See bit rate.  
data service unit (DSU)  
A device that transmits digital data on transmission facilities.  
data terminal  
An input/output (I/O) device that has either switched or direct access to a host computer or to a  
processor interface.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-16  
data terminal equipment (DTE)  
Equipment consisting of the endpoints in a connection over a data circuit. In a connection  
between a data terminal and host, the terminal, the host, and their associated modems or data  
modules make up the DTE.  
dB  
Decibel  
dBA  
Decibels in reference to amperes.  
dBrnC  
Decibels above reference noise with C filter.  
DC  
Direct current  
DCE  
Data-communications equipment  
D-channel backup  
Type of backup used with Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS). A primary D-channel  
provides signaling for an NFAS D-channel group (two or more PRI facilities). A second D-channel,  
on a separate PRI facility of the NFAS D-channel group, is designated as backup for the  
D-channel. Failure of the primary D-channel causes automatic transfer of call-control signaling to  
the backup D-channel. The backup becomes the primary D-channel. When the failed channel  
returns to service, it becomes the backup D-channel.  
DCO  
Digital central office  
DCP  
Digital Communications Protocol  
DCS  
Distributed Communications System  
DDC  
Direct Department Calling  
DDD  
Direct Distance Dialing  
delay-dial trunk  
A trunk that allows dialing directly into a communications system (digits are received as they are  
dialed).  
denying a request  
Sending a negative acknowledgement (NAK), done by sending an FIE with a return error  
component (and a cause value). It should not be confused with the denial event report that applies  
to calls.  
designated voice terminal  
The specific voice terminal to which calls, originally directed to a certain extension, are redirected.  
Commonly used to mean the forwarded-to terminal when Call Forwarding All Calls is active.  
dial-repeating trunks  
A PBX tie trunk that is capable of handling PBX station-signaling information without attendant  
assistance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-17  
dial-repeating tie trunk  
A tie trunk that transmits called-party addressing information between two communications  
systems.  
DID  
Direct Inward Dialing  
digit conversion  
A process used to convert specific dialed numbers into other dialed numbers.  
digital  
The representation of information by discrete steps. See also analog.  
digital communications protocol (DCP)  
A proprietary protocol used to transmit both digitized voice and digitized data over the same  
communications link. A DCP link is made up of two 64-kbps information (I-) channels and one  
8-kbps signaling (S-) channel.  
digital data endpoints  
In DEFINITY ECS, devices such as the 510D terminal or the 515-type business communications  
terminal (BCT).  
digital multiplexed interface (DMI)  
An interface that provides connectivity between a communications system and a host computer or  
between two communications systems using DS1 24th-channel signaling. DMI provides 23  
64-kbps data channels and 1 common-signaling channel over a twisted-pair connection. DMI is  
offered through two capabilities: bit-oriented signaling (DMI-BOS) and message-oriented signaling  
(DMI-MOS).  
digital signal level 0 (DS0)  
A single 64-kbps voice channel. A DS0 is a single 64-kbps channel in a T1 or E1 facility and  
consists of eight bits in a T1 or E1 frame every 125 microseconds.  
digital signal level 1 (DS1)  
A single 1.544-Mbps (United States) or 2.048-Mbps (outside the United States) digital signal  
carried on a T1 transmission facility. A DS1 converter complex consists of a pair, one at each end,  
of DS1 converter circuit packs and the associated T1/E1 facilities.  
digital terminal data module (DTDM)  
An integrated or adjunct data module that shares with a digital telephone the same physical port  
for connection to a communications system. The function of a DTDM is similar to that of a PDM and  
MPDM in that it converts RS-232C signals to DCP signals.  
digital-to-analog converter (DAC)  
A device that converts data in digital form to the corresponding analog signals. See also  
analog-to-digital converter (ADC).  
digital transmission  
A mode of transmission in which information to be transmitted is first converted to digital form and  
then transmitted as a serial stream of pulses.  
digital trunk  
A circuit that carries digital voice and/or digital data in a telecommunications channel.  
DIOD  
Direct Inward and Outward Dialing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-18  
direct agent  
A feature, accessed only via ASAI, that allows a call to be placed in a split queue but routed only to  
a specific agent in that split. The call receives normal ACD call treatment (for example,  
announcements) and is measured as an ACD call while ensuring that a particular agent answers.  
Direct Extension Selection (DXS)  
A feature on an attendant console that allows an attendant direct access to voice terminals by  
pressing a group-select button and a DXS button.  
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)  
A feature that allows an incoming call from the public network (not FX or WATS) to reach a specific  
telephone without attendant assistance.  
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk  
An incoming trunk used for dialing directly from the public network into a communications system  
without help from the attendant.  
disk drive  
An electromechanical device that stores data on and retrieves data from one or more disks.  
distributed communications system (DCS)  
A network configuration linking two or more communications systems in such a way that selected  
features appear to operate as if the network were one system.  
DIVA  
Data In/Voice Answer  
DLC  
Data line circuit  
DLDM  
Data-line data module  
DMI  
Digital-multiplexed interface  
DND  
Do not disturb  
DNIS  
Dialed-Number Identification Service  
DOD  
Direct Outward Dialing  
domain  
VDNs, ACD splits, and stations. The VDN domain is used for active-notification associations. The  
ACD-split domain is for active-notification associations and domain-control associations. The  
station domain is used for the domain-control associations.  
domain-control association  
A Third Party Domain Control Request capability initiates a unique CRV/link number combination,  
which is referred to as a domain-control association.  
domain-controlled split  
A split for which Third Party Domain Control request has been accepted. A domain-controlled split  
provides an event report for logout.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-19  
domain-controlled station  
A station for which a Third_Party_Domain_Control request has been accepted. A  
domain-controlled station provides event reports for calls that are alerting, connected, or held at  
the station.  
domain-controlled station on a call  
A station that is active on a call, and which provides event reports over one or two domain-control  
associations.  
DOSS  
Delivery Operations Support System  
DOT  
Duplication Option Terminal  
DPM  
Dial Plan Manager  
DPR  
Dual-port RAM  
DS1  
Digital Signal Level 1  
DS1C  
Digital Signal Level-1 protocol C  
DS1 CONV  
Digital Signal Level-1 converter  
DSI  
Digital signal interface  
DSU  
Data service unit  
DTDM  
Digital-terminal data module  
DTE  
Data-terminal equipment  
DTGS  
Direct Trunk Group Select  
DTMF  
Dual-tone multifrequency  
DTS  
Disk-tape system  
duplicated common control  
Two processors ensuring continuous operation of a communications system. While one processor  
is online, the other functions as a backup. The backup processor goes online periodically or when  
a problem occurs.  
duplication  
The use of redundant components to improve availability. When a duplicated subsystem fails, its  
backup redundant system automatically takes over.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-20  
duplication option  
A system option that duplicates the following: control carrier containing the SPE, EI circuit packs in  
carriers, fiber-optic cabling between port networks, and center-stage switch in a CSS-connected  
system.  
DWBS  
DEFINITY Wireless Business System  
DXS  
Direct extension selection  
E
E1  
A digital transmission standard that carries traffic at 2.048 Mbps. The E1 facility is divided into 32  
channels (DS0s) of 64 kbps information. Channel 0 is reserved for framing and synchronization  
information. A D-channel occupies channel 16.  
E & M  
Ear and mouth (receive and transmit)  
EA  
Expansion archangel  
EAL  
Expansion archangel link  
ear and mouth (E & M) signaling  
Trunk supervisory signaling, used between two communications systems, whereby signaling  
information is transferred through 2-state voltage conditions (on the E and M leads) for analog  
applications and through a single bit for digital applications.  
EEBCDIC  
Extended Binary-Coded Decimal Interexchange Code  
ECC  
Error Correct Code  
ECMA  
European Computer Manufacturers Association  
EFP  
Electronic power feed  
EI  
Expansion interface  
EIA  
Electronic Industries Association  
EIA-232  
A physical interface specified by the EIA. EIA-232 transmits and receives asynchronous data at  
speeds of up to 19.2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet. EIA-232 replaces RS-232 protocol  
in some DEFINITY applications.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-21  
electronic tandem network (ETN)  
A tandem tie-trunk network that has automatic call-routing capabilities based on the number  
dialed and the most preferred route available. Each switch in the network is assigned a unique  
private network office code (RNX), and each voice terminal is assigned a unique extension.  
Electronics Industries Association (EIA)  
A trade association of the electronics industry that establishes electrical and functional standards.  
emergency transfer  
If a major system failure occurs, automatic transfer is initiated to a group of telephones capable of  
making outgoing calls. The system operates in this mode until the failure is repaired and the  
system automatically returns to normal operation. Also called power-failure transfer.  
EMI  
Electromagnetic interference  
end-to-end signaling  
The transmission of touch-tone signals generated by dialing from a voice terminal to remote  
computer equipment. These digits are sent over the trunk as DTMF digits whether the trunk  
signaling type is marked as tone or rotary and whether the originating station is tone or rotary.  
Example: a call to a voice-mail machine or automated-attendant service. A connection is first  
established over an outgoing trunk. Then additional digits are dialed to transmit information to be  
processed by the computer equipment.  
enhanced private-switched communications service (EPSCS)  
An analog private telecommunications network based on the No. 5 crossbar and 1A ESS that  
provides advanced voice and data telecommunications services to companies with many  
locations.  
EPN  
Expansion-port network  
EPROM  
Erasable programmable read-only memory  
EPSCS  
Enhanced Private Switched Communications Services  
ERL  
Echo return loss  
Erlang  
A unit of traffic intensity, or load, used to express the amount of traffic needed to keep one facility  
busy for one hour. One Erlang is equal to 36 CCS. See also CCS or hundred call seconds.  
ESF  
Extended superframe format  
ESPA  
European Standard Paging Access  
ETA  
Extended Trunk Access; also Enhanced Terminal Administration  
ETN  
Electronic tandem network  
ETSI  
European Telecommunications Standards Institute  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-22  
expansion archangel (EAA)  
A network-control microprocessor located on an expansion interface (EI) port circuit pack in an  
expansion port network. The EA provides an interface between the EPN and its controlling  
switch-processing element.  
expansion-archangel link (EAL)  
A link-access function on the D-channel (LAPD) logical link that exists between a  
switch-processing element and an expansion archangel (EA). The EAL carries control messages  
from the SPE to the EA and to port circuit packs in an expansion port network.  
expansion control cabinet  
See expansion control carrier.  
expansion control carrier  
A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet that contains extra port circuit packs and a maintenance  
interface. Also called expansion control cabinet in a single-carrier cabinet.  
expansion interface (EI)  
A port circuit pack in a port network that provides the interface between a PN’s TDM bus/ packet  
bus and a fiber-optic link. The EI carries circuit-switched data, packet-switched data, network  
control, timing control, and DS1 control. In addition, an EI in an expansion port network  
communicates with the master maintenance circuit pack to provide the EPN’s environmental and  
alarm status to the switch-processing element.  
expansion port network (EPN)  
A port network (PN) that is connected to the TDM bus and packet bus of a processor port network  
(PPN). Control is achieved by indirect connection of the EPN to the PPN via a port-network link  
(PNL). See also port network (PN).  
extension-in  
Extension-In (ExtIn) is the work state agents go into when they answer (receive) a non-ACD call. If  
the agent is in Manual-In or Auto-In and receives an extension-in call, it is recorded by CMS as an  
AUX-In call.  
extension-out  
The work state that agents go into when they place (originate) a non-ACD call.  
external measurements  
Those ACD measurements that are made by the External CMS adjunct.  
extension  
A 1- to 5-digit number by which calls are routed through a communications system or, with a  
Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) or main-satellite dialing plan, through a private network.  
external call  
A connection between a communications system user and a party on the public network or on  
another communications system in a private network.  
F
FAC  
Feature Access Code  
facility  
A telecommunications transmission pathway and associated equipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-23  
facility-associated signaling (FAS)  
Signaling for which a D-channel carries signaling only for those channels on the same physical  
interface.  
FAS  
Facility-associated signaling  
FAT  
Facility access trunk  
FAX  
Facsimile  
FCC  
Federal Communications Commission  
FEAC  
Forced Entry of Account Codes  
feature  
A specifically defined function or service provided by the system.  
feature button  
A labeled button on a telephone or attendant console used to access a specific feature.  
FEP  
Front-end processor  
FIC  
Facility interface codes  
fiber optics  
A technology using materials that transmit ultrawideband electromagnetic light-frequency ranges  
for high-capacity carrier systems.  
fixed  
A trunk allocation term. In the fixed allocation scheme, the time slots necessary to support a  
wideband call are contiguous, and the first time slot is constrained to certain starting points.  
flexible  
A trunk allocation term. In the flexible allocation scheme, the time slots of a wideband call can  
occupy noncontiguous positions within a single T1 or E1 facility.  
floating  
A trunk allocation term. In the floating allocation scheme, the time slots of a wideband call are  
contiguous, but the position of the first time slot is not fixed.  
FNPA  
Foreign Numbering-Plan Area  
foreign-exchange (FX)  
A CO other than the one providing local access to the public telephone network.  
foreign-exchange trunk  
A telecommunications channel that directly connects the system to a CO other than its local CO.  
foreign numbering-plan area code (FNPAC)  
An area code other than the local area code, that must be dialed to call outside the local  
geographical area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-24  
FRL  
Facilities Restriction Level  
FX  
Foreign exchange  
G
G3-MA  
Generic 3 Management Applications  
G3-MT  
Generic 3 Management Terminal  
G3r  
Generic 3, RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer)  
generalized route selection (GRS)  
An enhancement to Automatic Alternate Routing/Automatic Route Selection (AAR/ARS) that  
performs routing based on call attributes, such as Bearer Capability Classes (BCCs), in addition to  
the address and facilities restriction level (FRL), thus facilitating a Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) that is  
independent of the type of call being placed.  
glare  
The simultaneous seizure of a 2-way trunk by two communications systems, resulting in a standoff.  
GM  
Group manager  
GPTR  
General-purpose tone receiver  
grade of service  
The number of call attempts that fail to receive service immediately. Grade of service is also  
expressed as the quantity of all calls that are blocked or delayed.  
ground-start trunk  
A trunk on which, for outgoing calls, the system transmits a request for services to a distant  
switching system by grounding the trunk ring lead. To receive the digits of the called number, that  
system grounds the trunk tip lead. When the system detects this ground, the digits are sent.  
GRS  
Generalized Route Selection  
H
H0  
An ISDN information transfer rate for 384-kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards.  
H11  
An ISDN information transfer rate for 1536-kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-25  
H12  
An ISDN information transfer rate for 1920-kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards.  
handshaking logic  
A format used to initiate a data connection between two data module devices.  
hertz (Hz)  
A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.  
high-reliability system  
A system having the following: two control carriers, duplicate expansion interface (EI) circuit packs  
in the PPN (in R5r with CSS), and duplicate switch node clock circuit packs in the switch node (SN)  
carriers. See also duplicated common control, duplication, duplication option, and  
critical-reliability system.  
HNPA  
See home numbering-plan area code (HNPA).  
holding time  
The total length of time in minutes and seconds that a facility is used during a call.  
home numbering-plan area code (HNPA)  
The local area code. The area code does not have to be dialed to call numbers within the local  
geographical area.  
hop  
Nondirect communication between two switch communications interfaces (SCI) where the SCI  
message passes automatically without intermediate processing through one or more intermediate  
SCIs.  
host computer  
A computer, connected to a network, that processes data from data-entry devices.  
hunt group  
A group of extensions that are assigned the Station Hunting feature so that a call to a busy  
extension reroutes to an idle extension in the group. See also ACD work mode.  
Hz  
See hertz (Hz).  
I
I1  
The first information channel of DCP.  
I2  
The second information channel of DCP.  
I2 Interface  
A proprietary interface used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System for the radio-controller  
circuit packs. Each interface provides communication between the radio-controller circuit pack  
and up to two wireless fixed bases.  
I3 Interface  
A proprietary interface used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System for the cell antenna units.  
Each wireless fixed base can communicate to up to four cell antenna units.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-26  
IAS  
Inter-PBX Attendant Service  
ICC  
Intercabinet cable or intercarrier cable  
ICD  
Inbound Call Director  
ICDOS  
International Customer-Dialed Operator Service  
ICHT  
Incoming call-handling table  
ICI  
Incoming call identifier  
ICM  
Inbound Call Management  
IDDD  
International Direct Distance Dialing  
IDF  
Intermediate distribution frame  
IE  
Information element  
immediate-start tie trunk  
A trunk on which, after making a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call,  
the system waits a nominal 65 ms before sending the digits of the called number. This allows time  
for the distant system to prepare to receive digits. On an incoming call, the system has less than  
65 ms to prepare to receive the digits.  
IMT  
Intermachine trunk  
in  
Inch  
INADS  
Initialization and Administration System  
incoming gateway  
A PBX that routes an incoming call on a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services  
Protocol B to a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B.  
information exchange  
The exchange of data between users of two different systems, such as the switch and a host  
computer, over a LAN.  
Information Systems Network (ISN)  
A WAN and LAN with an open architecture combining host computers, minicomputers, word  
processors, storage devices, PCs, high-speed printers, and nonintelligent terminals into a single  
packet-switching system.  
INS  
ISDN Network Service  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-27  
inside call  
A call placed from one telephone to another within the local communications system.  
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)  
which users have access by a limited set of standard multipurpose user-network interfaces  
defined by the CCITT. Through internationally accepted standard interfaces, ISDN provides digital  
circuit-switched or packet-switched communications within the network and links to other ISDNs to  
provide national and international digital communications. See also Integrated Services Digital  
Network Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI) and Integrated Services Digital Network  
Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI).  
Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI)  
B-channels for transmitting voice or data and one 16-kbps D-channel for transmitting associated  
B-channel call control and out-of-band signaling information. ISDN-BRI also includes 48 kbps for  
transmitting framing and D-channel contention information, for a total interface speed of 192 kbps.  
ISDN-BRI serves ISDN terminals and digital terminals fitted with ISDN terminal adapters. See also  
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) andIntegrated Services Digital Network  
Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI).  
Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI)  
The interface between multiple communications systems that in North America includes 24  
of 1.544 Mbps. The most common arrangement of channels in ISDN-PRI is 23 64-kbps B-channels  
for transmitting voice and data and 1 64-kbps D-channel for transmitting associated B-channel call  
control and out-of-band signaling information. With nonfacility-associated signaling (NFAS),  
ISDN-PRI can include 24 B-channels and no D-channel. See alsoIntegrated Services Digital  
Network (ISDN) andIntegrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI).  
intercept tone  
A tone that indicates a dialing error or denial of the service requested.  
interface  
A common boundary between two systems or pieces of equipment.  
internal call  
A connection between two users within a system.  
International Telecommunications Union (ITU)  
Formerly known as International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT), ITU is  
an international organization that sets universal standards for data communications, including  
ISDN. ITU members are from telecommunications companies and organizations around the world.  
See alsoBX.25.  
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee  
See International Telecommunications Union (ITU).  
interflow  
The ability for calls to forward to other splits on the same PBX or a different PBX using the Call  
Forward All Calls feature.  
intraflow  
The ability for calls to redirect to other splits on the same PBX on a conditional or unconditional  
basis using call coverage busy, don’t answer, or all criteria.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-28  
internal measurements  
BCMS measurements that are made by the system. ACD measurements that are made external to  
the system (via External CMS) are referred to as external measurements.  
in-use lamp  
A red light on a multiappearance voice terminal that lights to show which call appearance will be  
selected when the handset is lifted or which call appearance is active when a user is off-hook.  
INWATS  
Inward Wide Area Telephone Service  
IO  
Information outlet  
ISDN  
See Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN).  
ISDN Gateway (IG)  
A feature allowing integration of the switch and a host-based telemarketing application via a link to  
a gateway adjunct. The gateway adjunct is a 3B-based product that notifies the host-based  
telemarketing application of call events.  
ISDN trunk  
A trunk administered for use with ISDN-PRI. Also called ISDN facility.  
ISDN-PRI terminal adapter  
An interface between endpoint applications and an ISDN PRI facility. ISDN-PRI terminal adapters  
are currently available from other vendors and are primarily designed for video conferencing  
applications. Accordingly, currently available terminal adapters adapt the two pairs of video codec  
data (V.35) and dialing (RS-366) ports to an ISDN PRI facility.  
IS/DTT  
Integrated Services/digital tie trunk  
ISN  
Information Systems Network  
ISO  
International Standards Organization  
ISV  
Independent software vendor  
ITP  
Installation test procedure  
ITU  
International Telecommunications Union  
IXC  
Interexchange carrier code  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-29  
K
kHz  
Kilohertz  
kbps  
Kilobits per second  
kbyte  
Kilobyte  
kg  
Kilogram  
L
LAN  
Local area network  
LAP-D  
Link Access Procedure on the D-channel  
LAPD  
Link Access Procedure data  
LATA  
Local access and transport area  
lb  
Pound  
LBO  
Line buildout  
LDN  
Listed directory number  
LDS  
Long-distance service  
LEC  
Local exchange carrier  
LED  
See light-emitting diode (LED).  
light-emitting diode (LED)  
A semiconductor device that produces light when voltage is applied. LEDs provide a visual  
indication of the operational status of hardware components, the results of maintenance tests, the  
alarm status of circuit packs, and the activation of telephone features.  
lightwave transceiver  
Hardware that provides an interface to fiber-optic cable from port circuit packs and DS1 converter  
circuit packs. Lightwave transceivers convert electrical signals to light signals and vice versa.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-30  
line  
A transmission path between a communications system or CO switching system and a voice  
terminal or other terminal.  
line appearance  
See appearance.  
line buildout  
A selectable output attenuation is generally required of DTE equipment because T1 circuits  
require the last span to lose 15–22.5 dB.  
line port  
Hardware that provides the access point to a communications system for each circuit associated  
with a telephone or data terminal.  
link  
A transmitter-receiver channel that connects two systems.  
link-access procedure on the D-channel (LAPD)  
A link-layer protocol on the ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI data-link layer (level 2). LAPD provides data  
transfer between two devices, and error and flow control on multiple logical links. LAPD is used for  
signaling and low-speed packet data (X.25 and mode 3) on the signaling (D-) channel and for  
mode-3 data communications on a bearer (B-) channel.  
LINL  
Local indirect neighbor link  
local area network (LAN)  
A networking arrangement designed for a limited geographical area. Generally, a LAN is limited in  
range to a maximum of 6.2 miles and provides high-speed carrier service with low error rates.  
Common configurations include daisy chain, star (including circuit-switched), ring, and bus.  
logical link  
The communications path between a processor and a BRI terminal.  
loop-start trunk  
A trunk on which, after establishing a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing  
call, the system waits for a signal on the loop formed by the trunk leads before sending the digits  
of the called number.  
LSU  
Local storage unit  
LWC  
Leave Word Calling  
M
MAC  
Medium access  
MADU  
Modular asynchronous data unit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-31  
main distribution frame (MDF)  
A device that mounts to the wall inside the system equipment room. The MDF provides a  
connection point from outside telephone lines to the PBX switch and to the inside telephone  
stations.  
main-satellite-tributary  
A private network configuration that can either stand alone or access an ETN. A main switch  
provides interconnection, via tie trunks, with one or more subtending switches, called satellites; all  
attendant positions for the main/satellite configuration; and access to and from the public network.  
To a user outside the complex, a main/satellite configuration appears as one switch, with one listed  
directory number (LDN). A tributary switch is connected to the main switch via tie trunks, but has  
its own attendant positions and LDN.  
maintenance  
Activities involved in keeping a telecommunications system in proper working condition: the  
detection and isolation of software and hardware faults, and automatic and manual recovery from  
these faults.  
management terminal  
The terminal that is used by the system administrator to administer the switch. The terminal may  
also be used to access the BCMS feature.  
major alarm  
An indication of a failure that has caused critical degradation of service and requires immediate  
attention. Major alarms are automatically displayed on LEDs on the attendant console and  
maintenance or alarming circuit pack, logged to the alarm log, and reported to a remote  
maintenance facility, if applicable.  
Manual-In work mode  
One of four agent work modes: the mode in which an agent is ready to process another call  
manually. See Auto-In Work mode for a contrast.  
MAP  
Maintenance action process  
MAPD  
Multiapplication platform for DEFINITY  
MA-UUI  
Message-Associated User-to-User Signaling  
Mbps  
Megabits per second  
M-Bus  
Memory bus  
Mbyte  
Megabyte  
MCC  
Multicarrier cabinet  
MCS  
Message Center Service  
MCT  
Malicious Call Trace  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-32  
MCU  
Multipoint control unit  
MDF  
Main distribution frame  
MDM  
Modular data module  
MDR  
Message detail record  
MEM  
Memory  
memory  
A device into which information can be copied and held, and from which information can later be  
obtained.  
memory shadowing link  
An operating-system condition that provides a method for memory-resident programs to be more  
quickly accessed, allowing a system to reboot faster.  
message center  
An answering service that supplies agents to and stores messages for later retrieval.  
message center agent  
A member of a message-center hunt group who takes and retrieves messages for voice-terminal  
users.  
MET  
Multibutton electronic telephone  
MF  
Multifrequency  
MFB  
Multifunction board  
MFC  
Multifrequency code  
MHz  
Megahertz  
MIM  
Management information message  
minor alarm  
An indication of a failure that could affect customer service. Minor alarms are automatically  
displayed on LEDs on the attendant console and maintenance or alarming circuit pack, sent to the  
alarm log, and reported to a remote maintenance facility, if applicable.  
MIPS  
Million instructions per second  
MIS  
Management information system  
MISCID  
Miscellaneous identification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-33  
MMCS  
Multimedia Call Server  
MMCH  
Multimedia call handling  
MMI  
Multimedia interface  
MMS  
Material Management Services  
MO  
Maintenance object  
modem  
A device that converts digital data signals to analog signals for transmission over telephone  
circuits. The analog signals are converted back to the original digital data signals by another  
modem at the other end of the circuit.  
modem pooling  
A capability that provides shared conversion resources (modems and data modules) for  
cost-effective access to analog facilities by data terminals. When needed, modem pooling inserts  
a conversion resource into the path of a data call. Modem pooling serves both outgoing and  
incoming calls.  
modular processor data module (MPDM)  
A processor data module (PDM) that can be configured to provide several kinds of interfaces  
(RS-232C, RS-449, and V.35) to customer-provided data terminal equipment (DTE). See also  
processor data module (PDM).  
modular trunk data module (MTDM)  
A trunk data module that can be configured to provide several kinds of interfaces (RS-232,  
RS-449, and V.35) to customer-provided data terminal equipment.  
modulator-demodulator  
See modem.  
monitored call  
See active-notification call.  
MOS  
Message-oriented signaling  
MPDM  
Modular processor data module  
MS  
Message server  
ms  
Millisecond  
MS/T  
Main satellite/tributary  
MSA  
Message servicing adjunct  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-34  
MSG  
Message service  
MSL  
Material stocking location  
MSM  
Modular System Management  
MSS  
Mass storage system  
MSSNET  
Mass storage/network control  
MT  
Management terminal  
MTDM  
Modular trunk data module  
MTP  
Maintenance tape processor  
MTT  
Multitasking terminal  
multiappearance voice terminal  
A terminal equipped with several call-appearance buttons for the same extension, allowing the  
user to handle more than one call on that same extension at the same time.  
Multicarrier cabinet  
A structure that holds one to five carriers. See also single-carrier cabinet.  
Multifrequency Compelled (MFC) Release 2 (R2) signaling  
A signal consisting of two frequency components, such that when a signal is transmitted from a  
switch, another signal acknowledging the transmitted signal is received by the switch. R2  
designates signaling used in the United States and in countries outside the United States.  
multiplexer  
A device used to combine a number of individual channels into a single common bit stream for  
transmission.  
multiplexing  
A process whereby a transmission facility is divided into two or more channels, either by splitting  
the frequency band into a number of narrower bands or by dividing the transmission channel into  
successive time slots. See also time-division multiplexing (TDM).  
multirate  
The new N x DS0 service (see N x DS0).  
MWL  
Message-waiting lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-35  
N
N+1  
Method of determining redundant backup requirements. Example: if four rectifier modules are  
required for a DC-powered single-carrier cabinet, a fifth rectifier module is installed for backup.  
N x DS0  
N x DS0, equivalently referred to as N x 64 kbps, is an emerging standard for wideband calls  
separate from H0, H11, and H12 ISDN channels. The emerging N x DS0 ISDN multirate circuit  
mode bearer service will provide circuit-switched calls with data-rate multiples of 64 kbps up to  
1536 kbps on a T1 facility or up to 1920 kbps on an E1 facility. In the switch, N x DS0 channels will  
range up to 1984 kbps using NFAS E1 interfaces.  
NANP  
North American Numbering Plan  
narrowband  
A circuit-switched call at a data rate up to and including 64 kbps. All nonwideband switch calls are  
considered narrowband.  
native terminal support  
A predefined terminal type exists in switch software, eliminating the need to alias the terminal (that  
is, manually map call appearances and feature buttons onto some other natively supported  
terminal type).  
NAU  
Network access unit  
NCA/TSC  
Noncall-associated/temporary-signaling connection  
NCOSS  
Network Control Operations Support Center  
NCSO  
National Customer Support Organization  
NEC  
National Engineering Center  
NEMA  
National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association  
NETCON  
Network-control circuit pack  
network  
A series of points, nodes, or stations connected by communications channels.  
network-specific facility (NSF)  
An information element in an ISDN-PRI message that specifies which public-network service is  
used. NSF applies only when Call-by-Call Service Selection is used to access a public-network  
service.  
network interface  
A common boundary between two systems in an interconnected group of systems.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-36  
NFAS  
See Nonfacility-associated signaling (NFAS).  
NI  
Network interface  
NID  
Network Inward Dialing  
NM  
Network management  
NN  
National number  
node  
A switching or control point for a network. Nodes are either tandem (they receive signals and pass  
them on) or terminal (they originate or terminate a transmission path).  
Nonfacility-associated signaling (NFAS)  
A method that allows multiple T1 and/or E1 facilities to share a single D-channel to form an  
ISDN-PRI. If D-channel backup is not used, one facility is configured with a D-channel, and the  
other facilities that share the D-channel are configured without D-channels. If D-channel backup is  
used, two facilities are configured to have D-channels (one D-channel on each facility), and the  
other facilities that share the D-channels are configured without D-channels.  
NPA  
Numbering-plan area  
NPE  
Network processing element  
NQC  
Number of queued calls  
NSE  
Night-service extension  
NSU  
Network sharing unit  
null modem cable  
Special wiring of an RS-232-C cable such that a computer can talk to another computer (or to a  
printer) without a modem.  
NXX  
Public-network office code  
O
OA  
Operator assisted  
occurrence  
See appearance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-37  
OCM  
Outbound Call Management  
offered load  
The traffic that would be generated by all the requests for service occurring within a monitored  
interval, usually one hour.  
ONS  
On-premises station  
OPS  
Off-premises station  
OPX  
Off-premises extension  
OQT  
Oldest queued time  
OSHA  
Occupational Safety and Health Act  
OSI  
Open Systems Interconnect  
OSS  
Operations Support System  
OSSI  
Operational Support System Interface  
OTDR  
Optical time-domain reflectometer  
othersplit  
The work state that indicates that an agent is currently active on another split’s call, or in ACW for  
another split.  
OTQ  
Outgoing trunk queuing  
outgoing gateway  
A PBX that routes an incoming call on a trunk administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B  
to a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B.  
P
PACCON  
Packet control  
packet  
A group of bits (including a message element, which is the data, and a control information element  
(IE), which is the header) used in packet switching and transmitted as a discrete unit. In each  
packet, the message element and control IE are arranged in a specified format. See also packet  
bus and packet switching.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-38  
packet bus  
A wide-bandwidth bus that transmits packets.  
packet switching  
A data-transmission technique whereby user information is segmented and routed in discrete data  
envelopes called packets, each with its own appended control information, for routing,  
sequencing, and error checking. Packet switching allows a channel to be occupied only during  
the transmission of a packet. On completion of the transmission, the channel is made available for  
the transfer of other packets. See also BX.25and packet.  
PAD  
Packet assembly/disassembly  
paging trunk  
A telecommunications channel used to access an amplifier for loudspeaker paging.  
party/extension active on call  
A party is on the call if he or she is actually connected to the call (in active talk or in held state). An  
originator of a call is always a party on the call. Alerting parties, busy parties, and tones are not  
parties on the call.  
PBX  
Private branch exchange  
PC  
See personal computer (PC).  
PCM  
See pulse-code modulation (PCM).  
PCOL  
Personal central-office line  
PCOLG  
Personal central-office line group  
PCS  
Permanent switched calls  
PDM  
See processor data module (PDM).  
PDS  
Premises Distribution System  
PE  
Processing element  
PEC  
Price element code  
PEI  
Processor element interchange  
personal computer (PC)  
A personally controllable microcomputer.  
PGATE  
Packet gateway  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-39  
PGN  
Partitioned group number  
PI  
Processor interface  
PIB  
Processor interface board  
pickup group  
A group of individuals authorized to answer any call directed to an extension within the group.  
PIDB  
Product image database  
PKTINT  
Packet interface  
PL  
Private line  
PLS  
Premises Lightwave System  
PMS  
Property Management System  
PN  
Port network  
PNA  
Private network access  
POE  
Processor occupancy evaluation  
POP  
Point of presence  
port  
A data- or voice-transmission access point on a device that is used for communicating with other  
devices.  
port carrier  
A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet or a single-carrier cabinet containing port circuit packs, power  
units, and service circuits. Also called a port cabinet in a single-carrier cabinet.  
port network (PN)  
A cabinet containing a TDM bus and packet bus to which the following components are  
connected: port circuit packs, one or two tone-clock circuit packs, a maintenance circuit pack,  
service circuit packs, and (optionally) up to four expansion interface (EI) circuit packs in DEFINITY  
ECS. Each PN is controlled either locally or remotely by a switch processing element (SPE). See  
also expansion port network (EPN) and processor port network (PPN).  
port-network connectivity  
The interconnection of port networks (PNs), regardless of whether the configuration uses direct or  
switched connectivity.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-40  
PPM  
1. Parts per million  
2. Periodic pulse metering  
PPN  
See processor port network (PPN).  
PRI  
See Primary Rate Interface (PRI).  
primary extension  
The main extension associated with the physical voice or data terminal.  
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)  
A standard ISDN frame format that specifies the protocol used between two or more  
communications systems. PRI runs at 1.544 Mbps and, as used in North America, provides 23  
64-kbps B-channels (voice or data) and one 64-kbps D-channel (signaling). The D-channel is the  
24th channel of the interface and contains multiplexed signaling information for the other 23  
channels.  
PRI endpoint (PE)  
The wideband switching capability introduces PRI endpoints on switch line-side interfaces. A PRI  
endpoint consists of one or more contiguous B-channels on a line-side T1 or E1 ISDN PRI facility  
and has an extension. Endpoint applications have call-control capabilities over PRI endpoints.  
principal  
A terminal that has its primary extension bridged on one or more other terminals.  
principal (user)  
A person to whom a telephone is assigned and who has message-center coverage.  
private network  
A network used exclusively for the telecommunications needs of a particular customer.  
private network office code (RNX)  
The first three digits of a 7-digit private network number.  
PROCR  
Processor  
processor carrier  
See control carrier.  
processor data module (PDM)  
A device that provides an RS-232C DCE interface for connecting to data terminals, applications  
processors (APs), and host computers, and provides a DCP interface for connection to a  
communications system. See also modular processor data module (MPDM).  
processor port network (PPN)  
A port network controlled by a switch-processing element that is directly connected to that PN’s  
TDM bus and LAN bus. See also port network (PN).  
processor port network (PPN) control carrier  
A carrier containing the maintenance circuit pack, tone/clock circuit pack, and SPE circuit packs  
for a processor port network (PPN) and, optionally, port circuit packs.  
Property Management System (PMS)  
A stand-alone computer used by lodging and health-services organizations for services such as  
reservations, housekeeping, and billing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-41  
protocol  
A set of conventions or rules governing the format and timing of message exchanges to control  
data movement and correction of errors.  
PSC  
Premises service consultant  
PSDN  
Packet-switch public data network  
PT  
Personal terminal  
PTC  
Positive temperature coefficient  
PTT  
Postal Telephone and Telegraph  
public network  
The network that can be openly accessed by all customers for local and long-distance calling.  
pulse-code modulation (PCM)  
An extension of pulse-amplitude modulation (PAM) in which carrier-signal pulses modulated by an  
analog signal, such as speech, are quantized and encoded to a digital, usually binary, format.  
Q
QPPCN  
Quality Protection Plan Change Notice  
quadrant  
A group of six contiguous DS0s in fixed locations on an ISDN-PRI facility. Note that this term  
comes from T1 terminology (one-fourth of a T1), but there are five quadrants on an E1 ISDN-PRI  
facility (30B + D).  
queue  
An ordered sequence of calls waiting to be processed.  
queuing  
The process of holding calls in order of their arrival to await connection to an attendant, to an  
answering group, or to an idle trunk. Calls are automatically connected in first-in, first-out  
sequence.  
R
RAM  
See random-access memory (RAM).  
random-access memory (RAM)  
A storage arrangement whereby information can be retrieved at a speed independent of the  
location of the stored information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-42  
RBS  
Robbed-bit signaling  
RC  
Radio controller  
RCL  
Restricted call list  
read-only memory (ROM)  
A storage arrangement primarily for information-retrieval applications.  
recall dial tone  
Tones signalling that the system has completed a function (such as holding a call) and is ready to  
accept dialing.  
redirection criteria  
Information administered for each voice terminal’s coverage path that determines when an  
incoming call is redirected to coverage.  
Redirection on No Answer  
An optional feature that redirects an unanswered ringing ACD call after an administered number of  
rings. The call is then redirected back to the agent.  
remote home numbering-plan area code (RHNPA)  
A foreign numbering-plan area code that is treated as a home area code by the Automatic Route  
Selection (ARS) feature. Calls can be allowed or denied based on the area code and the dialed  
CO code rather than just the area code. If the call is allowed, the ARS pattern used for the call is  
determined by these six digits.  
Remote Operations Service Element (ROSE)  
A CCITT and ISO standard that defines a notation and services that support interactions between  
the various entities that make up a distributed application.  
REN  
Ringer equivalency number  
reorder tone  
A tone to signal that at least one of the facilities, such as a trunk or a digit transmitter, needed for  
the call was not available.  
report scheduler  
Software that is used in conjunction with the system printer to schedule the days of the week and  
RFP  
Request for proposal  
RHNPA  
See remote home numbering-plan area code (RHNPA).  
RINL  
Remote indirect neighbor link  
RISC  
Reduced-instruction-set computer  
RLT  
Release-link trunk  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-43  
RMATS  
Remote Maintenance, Administration, and Traffic System  
RNX  
Route-number index (private network office code)  
ROM  
See read-only memory (ROM).  
RPN  
Routing-plan number  
RS-232C  
A physical interface specified by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA). RS-232C transmits  
and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19.2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50  
feet.  
RS-449  
Recommended Standard 449  
RSC  
Regional Support Center  
ROSE  
See Remote Operations Service Element (ROSE).  
S
S1  
The first logical signalling channel of DCP. The channel is used to provide signaling information for  
DCP’s I1 channel.  
S2  
The second logical signaling channel of DCP. The channel is used to provide signaling information  
for DCP’s I2 channel.  
SABM  
Set Asynchronous Balance Mode  
SAC  
Send All Calls  
SAKI  
See sanity and control interface (SAKI).  
sanity and control interface (SAKI)  
A custom VLSI microchip located on each port circuit pack. The SAKI provides address  
recognition, buffering, and synchronization between the angel and the five control time slots that  
make up the control channel. The SAKI also scans and collects status information for the angel on  
its port circuit pack and, when polled, transmits this information to the archangel.  
SAT  
System access terminal  
SCC  
1. See single-carrier cabinet.  
2. Serial communications controller  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-44  
SCD  
Switch-control driver  
SCI  
Switch communications interface  
SCO  
System control office  
SCOTCH  
Switch Conferencing for TDM Bus in Concentration Highway  
SCSI  
See small computer system interface (SCSI).  
SDDN  
Software-Defined Data Network  
SDI  
Switched Digital International  
SDLC  
Synchronous data-link control  
SDN  
Software-defined network  
SFRL  
Single-frequency return loss  
SID  
Station-identification number  
simplex system  
A system that has no redundant hardware.  
simulated bridged appearance  
The same as a temporary bridged appearance; allows the terminal user (usually the principal) to  
bridge onto a call that had been answered by another party on his or her behalf.  
single-carrier cabinet  
A combined cabinet and carrier unit that contains one carrier. See also Multicarrier cabinet.  
single-line voice terminal  
A voice terminal served by a single-line tip and ring circuit (models 500, 2500, 7101A, 7103A).  
SIT  
Special-information tones  
small computer system interface (SCSI)  
An ANSI bus standard that provides a high-level command interface between host computers and  
peripheral devices.  
SMDR  
Station Message Detail Recording  
SN  
Switch Node  
SNA  
Systems Network Architecture  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-45  
SNC  
Switch Node Clock  
SNI  
Switch Node Interface  
SNMP  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
software  
A set of computer programs that perform one or more tasks.  
SPE  
Switch Processing Element  
SPID  
Service Profile Identifier  
split  
See ACD work mode.  
split condition  
A condition whereby a caller is temporarily separated from a connection with an attendant. A split  
condition automatically occurs when the attendant, active on a call, presses the start button.  
split number  
The split’s identity to the switch and BCMS.  
split report  
A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured splits.  
split (agent) status report  
A report that provides real-time status and measurement data for internally measured agents and  
the split to which they are assigned.  
SSI  
Standard serial interface  
SSM  
Single-site management  
SSV  
Station service  
ST3  
Stratum 3 clock board  
staffed  
Indicates that an agent position is logged in. A staffed agent functions in one of four work modes:  
Auto-In, Manual-In, ACW, or AUX-Work.  
STARLAN  
Star-Based Local Area Network  
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)  
An obsolete term now called CDR — a switch feature that uses software and hardware to record  
call data. See Call Detail Recording (CDR).  
standard serial interface (SSI)  
A communications protocol developed for use with 500-type business communications terminals  
(BCTs) and 400-series printers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-46  
status lamp  
A green light that shows the status of a call appearance or a feature button by the state of the light  
(lit, flashing, fluttering, broken flutter, or unlit).  
stroke counts  
A method used by ACD agents to record up to nine customer-defined events per call when CMS is  
active.  
SVN  
Security-violation notification  
switch  
Any kind of telephone switching system. See also communications system.  
switchhook  
The buttons located under the receiver on a voice terminal.  
switch-node (SN) carrier  
A carrier containing a single switch node, power units, and, optionally, one or two DS1 converter  
circuit packs. An SN carrier is located in a center-stage switch.  
switch-node (SN) clock  
The circuit pack in an SN carrier that provides clock and maintenance alarm functions and  
environmental monitors.  
switch-node interface (SNI)  
The basic building block of a switch node. An SNI circuit pack controls the routing of circuit,  
packet, and control messages.  
switch-node link (SNL)  
The hardware that provides a bridge between two or more switch nodes. The SNL consists of the  
two SNI circuit packs residing on the switch nodes and the hardware connecting the SNIs. This  
hardware can include lightwave transceivers that convert the SNI’s electrical signals to light  
signals, the copper wire that connects the SNIs to the lightwave transceivers, a full-duplex  
fiber-optic cable, DS1 converter circuit cards and DS1 facilities if a company does not have rights  
to lay cable, and appropriate connectors.  
switch-processing element (SPE)  
A complex of circuit packs (processor, memory, disk controller, and bus-interface cards) mounted  
in a PPN control carrier. The SPE serves as the control element for that PPN and, optionally, for one  
or more EPNs.  
SXS  
Step-by-step  
synchronous data transmission  
A method of sending data in which discrete signal elements are sent at a fixed and continuous rate  
and specified times. See also association.  
SYSAM  
System Access and Administration  
system administrator  
The person who maintains overall customer responsibility for system administration. Generally, all  
administration functions are performed from the Management Terminal. The switch requires a  
special login, referred to as the system administrator login, to gain access to  
system-administration capabilities.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-47  
system printer  
An optional printer that may be used to print scheduled reports via the report scheduler.  
system report  
A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured splits.  
system-status report  
A report that provides real-time status information for internally measured splits.  
system manager  
A person responsible for specifying and administering features and services for a system.  
system reload  
A process that allows stored data to be written from a tape into the system memory (normally after  
a power outage).  
T
T1  
A digital transmission standard that in North America carries traffic at the DS1 rate of 1.544 Mbps.  
A T1 facility is divided into 24 channels (DS0s) of 64 kbps. These 24 channels, with an overall  
digital rate of 1.536 Mbps, and an 8-kbps framing and synchronization channel make up the  
1.544-Mbps transmission. When a D-channel is present, it occupies channel 24. T1 facilities are  
also used in Japan and some Middle-Eastern countries.  
TAAS  
Trunk Answer from Any Station  
TABS  
Telemetry asynchronous block serial  
TAC  
Trunk-access code  
tandem switch  
A switch within an electronic tandem network (ETN) that provides the logic to determine the best  
route for a network call, possibly modifies the digits outpulsed, and allows or denies certain calls  
to certain users.  
tandem through  
The switched connection of an incoming trunk to an outgoing trunk without human intervention.  
tandem tie-trunk network (TTTN)  
A private network that interconnects several customer switching systems.  
TC  
Technical consultant  
TCM  
Traveling class mark  
TDM  
See time-division multiplexing (TDM).  
TDR  
Time-of-day routing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
TEG  
Terminating extension group  
terminal  
A device that sends and receives data within a system. See also administration terminal.  
tie trunk  
A telecommunications channel that directly connects two private switching systems.  
time-division multiplex (TDM) bus  
A bus that is time-shared regularly by preallocating short time slots to each transmitter. In a PBX,  
all port circuits are connected to the TDM bus, permitting any port to send a signal to any other  
port.  
time-division multiplexing (TDM)  
Multiplexing that divides a transmission channel into successive time slots. See also multiplexing.  
time interval  
The period of time, either one hour or one-half hour, that BCMS measurements are collected for a  
report.  
time slice  
See time interval.  
time slot  
64 kbps of digital information structured as eight bits every 125 microseconds. In the switch, a  
time slot refers to either a DS0 on a T1 or E1 facility or a 64-kbps unit on the TDM bus or fiber  
connection between port networks.  
time slot sequence integrity  
The situation whereby the N octets of a wideband call that are transmitted in one T1 or E1 frame  
arrive at the output in the same order that they were introduced.  
to control  
An application can invoke Third Party Call Control capabilities using either an adjunct-control or  
domain-control association.  
to monitor  
An application can receive event reports on an active-notification, adjunct-control, or  
domain-control association.  
TOD  
Time of day  
tone ringer  
A device with a speaker, used in electronic voice terminals to alert the user.  
TOP  
Task-oriented protocol  
trunk  
A dedicated telecommunications channel between two communications systems or COs.  
trunk allocation  
The manner in which trunks are selected to form wideband channels.  
trunk-data module  
A device that connects off-premises private-line trunk facilities and DEFINITY ECS. The trunk-data  
module converts between the RS-232C and the DCP, and can connect to DDD modems as the  
DCP member of a modem pool.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-49  
trunk group  
Telecommunications channels assigned as a group for certain functions that can be used  
interchangeably between two communications systems or COs.  
TSC  
Technical Service Center  
TTI  
Terminal translation initialization  
TTR  
Touch-tone receiver  
TTT  
Terminating trunk transmission  
TTTN  
See tandem tie-trunk network (TTTN).  
TTY  
Teletypewriter  
U
UAP  
Usage-allocation plan  
UART  
Universal asynchronous transmitter  
UCD  
Uniform call distribution  
UCL  
Unrestricted call list  
UDP  
See Uniform Dial Plan (UDP).  
UL  
Underwriter Laboratories  
UM  
User manager  
Uniform Dial Plan (UDP)  
A feature that allows a unique 4- or 5-digit number assignment for each terminal in a multiswitch  
configuration such as a DCS or main-satellite-tributary system.  
UNMA  
Unified Network Management Architecture  
UNP  
Uniform numbering plan  
UPS  
Uninterruptible power supply  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-50  
USOP  
User service-order profile  
UUCP  
UNIX-to-UNIX Communications Protocol  
UUI  
User-to-user information  
V
VAR  
Value-added reseller  
VDN  
See vector directory number (VDN).  
vector directory number (VDN)  
An extension that provides access to the Vectoring feature on the switch. Vectoring allows a  
customer to specify the treatment of incoming calls based on the dialed number.  
vector-controlled split  
A hunt group or ACD split administered with the vector field enabled. Access to such a split is  
possible only by dialing a VDN extension.  
VIS  
Voice Information System  
VLSI  
Very-large-scale integration  
VM  
Voltmeter  
VNI  
Virtual nodepoint identifier  
voice terminal  
A single-line or multiappearance telephone.  
W
WATS  
See Wide Area Telecommunications Service (WATS).  
WCC  
World-Class Core  
WCR  
World-Class Routing  
WCTD  
World-Class Tone Detection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-51  
WFB  
Wireless fixed base  
Wide Area Telecommunications Service (WATS)  
A service in the United States that allows calls to certain areas for a flat-rate charge based on  
expected usage.  
wideband  
A circuit-switched call at a data rate greater than 64 kbps. A circuit-switched call on a single T1 or  
E1 facility with a bandwidth between 128 and 1536 (T1) or 1984 (E1) kbps in multiples of 64 kbps.  
H0, H11, H12, and N x DS0 calls are wideband.  
wideband access endpoint  
Access endpoints, extended with wideband switching to include wideband access endpoints. A  
wideband access endpoint consists of one or more contiguous DS0s on a line-side T1 or E1 facility  
and has an extension. The Administered Connections feature provides call control for calls  
originating from wideband access endpoints.  
wink-start tie trunk  
A trunk with which, after making a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call,  
the system waits for a momentary signal (wink) before sending the digits of the called number.  
Similarly, on an incoming call, the system sends the wink signal when ready to receive digits.  
work mode  
One of four states (Auto-In, Manual-In, ACW, AUX-Work) that an ACD agent can be in. Upon  
logging in, an agent enters AUX-Work mode. To become available to receive ACD calls, the agent  
enters Auto-In or Manual-In mode. To do work associated with a completed ACD call, an agent  
enters ACW mode.  
work state  
An ACD agent may be a member of up to three different splits. Each ACD agent continuously  
exhibits a work state for every split of which it is a member. Valid work states are Avail, Unstaffed,  
AUX-Work, ACW, ACD (answering an ACD call), ExtIn, ExtOut, and OtherSpl. An agent’s work  
state for a particular split may change for a variety of reasons (example: when a call is answered or  
abandoned, or the agent changes work modes). The BCMS feature monitors work states and uses  
this information to provide BCMS reports.  
write operation  
The process of putting information onto a storage medium, such as a hard disk.  
WSA  
Waiting session accept  
WSS  
Wireless Subscriber System  
Z
ZCS  
Zero Code Suppression  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Glossary and Abbreviations  
GL-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
Index  
IN-1  
circuit packs  
Index  
expansion control cabinet, 3-14  
sorted by code, 6-3  
collocated port networks  
single-carrier, 3-22  
Numerics  
communication between equipment rooms, 3-2  
connect new EPN to existing EPN and PPN  
standard reliability, 6-26  
connect new EPN to existing PPN  
critical reliability, 6-31  
300A single-mode fiber transceiver, 3-27, 3-33  
9823-type fiber-optic transceiver, 3-27  
high reliability, 6-28  
A
standard reliability, 6-23, 6-27  
Access Security Gateway, C-1  
Access Security Gateway Feature, xvi  
adding  
network, 6-50, 6-53, 6-60  
TDM/LAN, 6-90, 6-104, 6-118, 6-140  
6-116  
circuit packs, 6-2  
control carrier, 6-80  
disk drive, 1-9  
MCC port carriers, 6-128  
port carriers, 6-128  
switch node carrier, 6-94, 6-108  
address plugs  
TDM/LAN, for critical-reliability PPN, 6-117  
control cabinet, remove existing  
single-carrier, 3-15  
single-carrier, 3-16  
adding, 6-80  
alarm origination  
ICC connections, 6-91  
disable procedure, 4-8  
announcement  
Control-LAN circuit pack, 6-42  
critical-reliability  
rerecording, 3-53  
ASG, C-1  
fiber-optic connections through center stage  
switch, 6-105, 6-120  
TDM/LAN connections for EPN, 6-139  
TDM/LAN connections for PPN, 6-137  
B
D
blank carrier panel, 6-134  
bracket attachments for fiber pass-thru kit, 6-17  
date, set procedure, 4-13  
table of English names, 1-19, 2-18, 4-14,  
C
5-38, 5-69, 5-108  
daylight savings rules, 1-18, 2-16, 4-12, 5-37,  
DCS Interface, 6-42  
disk drive, adding, 1-9  
distributed communications system, 6-42  
connections to-EI/SNI Cables, 3-46  
remoted cabinets, 3-45  
remoted port networks, 3-27  
DS1 Converter  
cabinet  
fastening together, 3-50  
stabilizing for earthquake, 3-49  
cabinet clip, 3-51  
cable connections  
intercabinet, single-carrier, 3-20  
cable disconnect label, 6-17  
cable labels, 3-12  
cabling  
"Y" cable, 6-146  
local port networks, single-carrier, 3-45  
public network, single-carrier, 3-46  
center stage switch  
fiber-optic connections, 3-40, 6-105, 6-120  
CFY1 Current Limiter (CURL), 3-20  
Channel Service Unit  
cabling, 6-146  
quad cable, 6-146  
DS1 CONV-remoted port networks  
single-carrier, 3-23  
cabling to DS1 Converter, 6-146  
Smart Jacks, 6-146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Issue 1  
April 2000  
Index  
figures, (continued)  
locations of grounding jumpers (small  
cabinet), 6-134  
E
TDM/LAN connections for critical-reliability  
earthquake front plate, 3-50  
earthquake protection cabinet clip, 3-51  
electromagnetic shielding, 3-50  
English day names  
TDM/LAN connections for critical-reliability  
PPN, 6-117, 6-137  
TDM/LAN connections for high-reliability  
table of, 1-19, 2-18, 4-14, 5-38, 5-69, 5-108  
TDM/LAN connections for standard-reliability  
English month names  
table of, 1-20, 2-18, 4-14, 5-39, 5-70, 5-109  
EPN  
TDM/LAN connections for standard-reliability  
TDM/LAN connections, 6-103, 6-116  
TDM/LAN connections for  
critical-reliability, 6-139  
TDM/LAN connections for  
TDM/LAN connections for standard-reliability  
R5r PPN, 6-84  
high-reliability, 6-138  
TDM/LAN connections for  
standard-reliability, 6-138  
G
EPN cabinet installation, 6-22  
EPN1 fiber optic connections, 3-24  
EPN2 fiber optic connections, 3-25, 3-26  
expansion control cabinet  
G2 (MCC) Universal Module to R5si+m EPN, 5-1  
ground plate, 3-49  
circuit pack locations, 3-14  
ground strap, single-carrier, 3-47  
grounding jumpers  
locations, 6-85, 6-88, 6-98, 6-101, 6-112,  
locations (small cabinet), 6-134  
F
fiber  
single-mode, 3-27, 3-33  
Fiber Link Administration form, A-8 to A-19  
administration commands, A-8  
instructions  
basic fiber link administration, A-10  
DS1 converter boards, A-17, A-18, A-19  
DS1C converter boards, A-12, A-16  
duplicated fiber link administration, A-11  
PNC duplication, 6-37, A-5, A-9  
simplex PNC, 6-37, A-5, A-9  
fiber optic cable pass-thru kit, 6-8  
fiber optic connections, 3-24, 3-26  
center stage switch, 3-43  
TDM/LAN connections for EPN, 6-138  
TDM/LAN connections for R5r PPN, 6-89  
I
ICC connections for R7r control carrier, 6-91  
ICC connections for switch node carrier, 6-99,  
through center stage switch, 3-41  
fiber pass-thru kit bracket attachments, 6-17  
fiber pass-thru tool, 6-14  
ICSU, 6-142  
integrated channel service unit, 6-142  
integration process  
fiber-remoted port networks  
connecting  
single-carrier, 3-22, 3-27  
ITS components, 6-49, 6-59  
ITS to the network, 6-50, 6-53, 6-60  
inter-cabinet cable, see ICC, 6-91  
Internet Telephony Server  
connecting components, 6-49, 6-59  
network services, changing, 6-71  
ISDN Gateway, 3-5  
ISDN interface links  
Re-installing, B-12  
isolator, 3-4  
figures, 6-89  
blank carrier panel, 6-134  
through center stage switch, 6-105, 6-120  
ICC connections for switch node  
carrier, 6-99, 6-113  
location of grounding jumpers, 6-85, 6-88,  
6-101, 6-115  
locations of grounding jumpers, 6-98, 6-112,  
6-135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Index  
pass-thru kit, 6-8  
pass-thru tool, 6-14  
PEC codes, xvii  
pin-field blocks  
J
J58890H-1 port cabinet, 3-21  
port cabinets  
J58890AH Control Carrier, 6-23  
J58890H-1, 3-21  
single-carrier, 3-15  
L
adding, 6-128  
port circuits  
retranslate, single-carrier, 3-52  
port networks  
local port network, 3-45  
location  
grounding jumpers, 6-85, 6-88, 6-98, 6-101,  
collocated, single-carrier, 3-22  
6-112, 6-115, 6-135  
DS1 CONV-remoted, single-carrier, 3-23  
fiber-remoted, single-carrier, 3-22  
power and grounding  
grounding jumpers (small cabinet), 6-134  
single-carrier, 3-4  
power down AUDIX, procedure, 3-56, 4-19,  
6-141  
M
power up  
main distribution frame (MDF)  
relabel, 3-48  
maintenance, preventative, 3-12, 4-6  
mass storage system (MSS), B-5  
MCC G2 Universal Module to R5si+m EPN, 5-1  
memory  
AUDIX procedure, 3-56, 4-19, 6-141  
power-failure stations, 3-4  
power down procedure, B-10  
TDM/LAN connections, 6-117  
TDM/LAN connections for  
critical-reliability, 6-137  
TDM/LAN connections for  
standard-reliability, 6-136  
preventive maintenance, 3-12, 4-6  
protection  
verify addition, 1-17  
month names  
table of English, 1-20, 2-18, 4-14, 5-39, 5-70,  
5-109  
electromagnetic, 3-50  
public network, 3-46  
N
network  
configuration  
changing network services, 6-71  
ITS  
relabel wall field, 3-48  
relocation of port circuit packs  
single-carrier, 3-3  
connecting, 6-50, 6-53, 6-60  
Network Controller Interface Assembly, 1-12,  
2-11  
required tools, 3-10, 4-3  
rerecord announcements, 3-53  
retranslate port circuits  
single-carrier, 3-52  
new EPN cabinet, 6-22  
RF shielding, 3-50  
O
optical drive, 1-1, 2-1  
screws, thread-forming, 3-50  
setting date and time, procedure, 4-13  
shielding, electromagnetic, 3-50  
single-mode fiber, 3-27, 3-33  
software upgrade  
P
parts  
earthquake front plate, 3-50  
thread-forming screws, 3-50  
process, 1-1, 2-1, 4-1  
standard reliability, 4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8.2  
Upgrades and Additions for R8r 555-233-115  
Index  
stabilizing cabinets  
for earthquakes, 3-49  
standard reliability  
software upgrade, 4-7  
standard-reliability  
thread-forming screws, 3-50  
time, set procedure, 4-13  
TN1656 Tape Drive circuit pack, B-3  
TN1657 Disk Drive  
TDM/LAN connections for EPN, 6-138  
TDM/LAN connections for PPN, 6-136  
TDM/LAN connections for R5r PPN, 6-84  
switch node carrier  
TN2211 Optical Drive circuit pack, B-3  
TN2400, 1-12, 2-11  
TN574 DS1 converter circuit packs, A-12, A-16  
TN754 digital line circuit packs, A-12  
TN1654 DS1 converter circuit packs, A-16,  
A-17, A-18, A-19  
adding, 6-94, 6-108  
ICC connections, 6-99, 6-113  
Switch Node Carrier in the PPN, 6-27, 6-28, 6-31  
system  
TN794, 1-12, 2-11  
access ports, single-carrier, 3-47  
tools, required, 3-10, 4-3  
300A single-mode type, 3-27, 3-33  
9823-type, 3-27  
single-mode, 3-27, 3-33  
T
enable procedure, 1-20, 2-19, 3-53, 4-16,  
5-41, 5-72, 5-111, 6-37, 6-40  
tables  
TDM/LAN connections, 6-90  
task list  
G2 (MCC) to DEFINITY ECS Release 5si+m  
EPN, 5-10  
G3si with TN790 to R5r, 3-6  
software-only upgrade process, 1-4, 2-5, 4-4  
TDM/LAN bus terminators  
single-cabinet, 3-18  
TDM/LAN cable connections, 6-140  
TDM/LAN connection table, 6-90  
TDM/LAN connections, 6-104, 6-118  
TDM/LAN connections for critical-reliability  
EPN, 6-139  
TDM/LAN connections for critical-reliability  
PPN, 6-137  
UN332C circuit pack, 2-1  
upgrade paths, xvii  
single-carrier with TN790 to R5r, 3-1  
software only, 1-1, 2-1, 4-1  
upgrades  
MCC G2 Universal Module to R5si+m  
EPN, 5-1  
TDM/LAN connections for critical-reliability R7r  
EPN, 6-103, 6-116  
PPN, 6-117  
TDM/LAN connections for high-reliability  
EPN, 6-138  
verify system, 1-17  
TDM/LAN connections for R5r PPN, 6-89  
TDM/LAN connections for standard-reliability  
EPN, 6-138  
TDM/LAN connections for standard-reliability  
PPN, 6-136  
TDM/LAN connections for standard-reliability  
R5r PPN, 6-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
We’d like your opinion.  
Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this document. Your comments can be of great value  
in helping us improve our documentation.  
DEFINITY® ECS Release 8.2 Upgrades and Additions for R8r  
555-233-115, 1, April 2000, Comcode 108678335  
1. Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas:  
Excellent  
Good  
Fair  
Poor  
Ease of Finding  
Information  
Clarity  
Completeness  
Accuracy  
Organization  
Appearance  
Examples  
Illustrations  
Overall Satisfaction  
2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document:  
Improve the overview/introduction  
Improve the table of contents  
Improve the organization  
Add more figures  
Make it more concise  
Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials  
Add more troubleshooting information  
Make it less technical  
Add more examples  
Add more/better quick reference aids  
Improve the index  
Add more detail  
Please add details about your concern.__________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________  
3. What did you like most about this document?___________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________  
4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.____________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________  
If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:  
Name:_________________________________________Telephone Number: (  
)
Company/Organization______________________________________Date:___________________  
Address:_________________________________________________________________________  
When you have completed this form, please fax to (303) 538-1741. Thank you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

LG Electronics Clothes Dryer DLEX800V User Manual
LG Electronics Microwave Oven LSRM2010ST User Manual
LG Electronics Refrigerator LFXS24663S User Manual
Lindy Switch CPU Switch Duo User Manual
Lindy TV Receiver 32898 User Manual
Makita Cordless Saw LC1230 User Manual
Maretron Cable Box MBB100 User Manual
Martin Audio Speaker System LE1500 User Manual
Maytag Washer W10280467C User Manual
Memorex Cordless Telephone MPH6929 User Manual